BOOKSELLER....  NORTHAMPTON", 

Keeps  constantly  for  sale^ 
Classical,  Medical,  Historical  and  Miscellaneous 
OOKS,  and  Stationary  in  great  variety. 


REESE    LIBRARY 

OF  THE 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA. 

Received- sZ^^I^XU/      iSS^e^ 


S^^^^kjOjl^ 


v> 


Accessions  No.'^^.'^f//...       Shelf  No. ---.,. 

mi 


'^^  d^ 


1  "^"-^ 


■JJlAS!^^-- 


1/ 


'^ 


JJJJ_-iJ-^xTXJ_:-4X  1    JL    K^ 


or 


ll^mi 


».^^4II^ 


f'AKEN  CHIEFLY  FROM  THE 


GRAMMAR 


OF 


CASPAR  FREDERICK  IIACHENBERG. 


iRTFORD  : 
PUBLISHED  BY  SAMUEL  G.  GOODRICH, 


ROBERTS  k  BURR,  PRINTERS. 


1820. 


DISTRICT  OF  COJVjYECTICUT  : 

Jr~~^  JOE  it  remembered,  that  on  the  twenty-eighth  day  of 
J]  L.  o.  ,|  September,  in  the  thirty-ninth  year  of  the  Independence 
IL==iiiJ  of  the  United  States  of  America,  Chauncey  Allen  Good- 
rich^ of  the  said  District.,  hath  deposited  in  this  Office  the  Title  of  a 
Book,  the  right  whereof  he  claims  as  Author,  m  the  words  following,  to 
wit :  *•  Elements  of  Greek  Grammar,  taken  chiefly  from  the  Grammar 
of  Caspar  Frederick  Hachenberg — Adopted  for  use  in  Yale  College, 
New- Haven  ,''  in  conformity  to  the  Act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States,  entitled.  An  Act  for  the  encouragement  of  learning,  by  securing 
the  Copies  of  Maps,  Charts  and  Books,  to  the  Authors  and  Proprietors 
of  ?uch  Copies,  durine:  the  times  therein  mentioned. 

HENRY  W.  EDWARDS, 
Clerk  of  the  District  o/*  Connecticut. 


ADVERTISEMENT. 

THE  materials  of  this  work,  as  stated  in  the  Title 
page,  were  derived  chiefly  from  the  Grammar  of  Hachen- 
herg.  Numerous  additions,  however,  have  been  made  from 
other  sources  ;  and  the  plan  new  modelled  in  conformity 
with  the  existing  mode  of  instruction  in  this  country. 
The  list  of  Anomalous  Verhs  is  from  Valpy  :  the  ob- 
servations on  Dialects,  from  the  Glocester  Greek  Gram- 
mar. 

In  issuing  a  second  Edition,  the  Author  has  chiefly  to 
regret,  that  a  severe  and  long  protracted  illness  has  lim- 
ited his  attention  to  the  retrenchment  of  redundances 
and  the  correction  of  errors,  in  a  work  originally  com- 
piled in  great  haste.  The  materials,  particularly,  which 
were  designed  to  enrich  the  Syntax,  he  is  compelled  to 
reserve  for  a  future  edition. 

A  few  errors  of  the  press  have  unavoidably  occurred, 
from  the  publication  of  the  work  at  a  distance  from  the 
Author,  and  beyond  the  reach  of  his  inspection. 

December  10,  1819. 


TABLE  OF  CONTENTS. 


PAGE. 

Letters. 1 

Syllables. 5 

Article.       -----     9 
Noun. 9 

First  Declension  of  Nouns.  -  10 
Second  Declension  of  Nouns.  12 
Third  Declension  of  Nouns.  -  14 
General  Rules  of  Contraction.  18 
First  Forna  of  Contracts.  -  19 
.  Second  Form  of  Contracts.  -  20 
Third  Forno  of  Contracts.  -  21 
Fourth  and  Fifth  Fornas  of  Con- 
tracts  22 

Irregular  Nouns.  -         -        25 

Patronynaics.  -         -        -     27 

Diminutives — Verbals.         -         28 
Adjectives  of  three  termi- 
nations.    -        30 
of  two  termina- 

nations.         -     35 

of  one  termination.  38 

Comparison  of  Adjectives.     -     39 

Numerals.  -        -         -         42 

Pronouns.       -     -     -     -     45 

Verbs. 50 

Active  Voice.       -        -        -       58 
R^eduplication   and  Augment.       63 
Formation  of  Tenses  in  the  Ac- 
tive Voice.         -         -         -      68 
Passive  Voice.     -        -         -         74 
Formation  of  Tenses  in  the  Pas- 
sive Voice.      -         -         -         80 
Middle  Voice.        -         -         -     84 
Formation  of  Tenses  in  the  Mid- 
dle Voice.  -         -         -    89 
Deponent    Verbs — Contract 
Verbs.        -        -        -        -    91 


PAGE. 
1st  Declension  of  ContractVerbs.  92 
2d  Declension  of  ContractVerbs.  94 
3d  Declension  of  ContractVerbs.  97' 
Verbs  m^i.  -  -  -  lOO 
Irregular  and  Defective  Verbs 

in  ///.----  123 
Anomalous  Verbs.  -  -  133 
Impersonal  Verbs.  -  -  143 
Adverbs.  -  -  -  -  1144 
Prepositions.  -  -  149 
Conjunctions.  -  -  152 
Syntax — Agreement..  -  153 
Article.  -  -  -  -  159 
Government.  -  -  i62 
Government  of  Substantives.  162 
Government  of  Adjectives.  -  164 
Government  of  Verbs-Genitive.  169 
Dative.  174 
Accusative.  177 
TwoAccus.  177 
GovernmentoflmpersonalVerbs.  1 79 
Construction  of  the  Infinitive.  180 
Participles.  -  -  -  102 
Construction  of  Circumstances.  184 
Case  Absolute.  -         -         188 

Government  of  Adverbs.  -  189 
Conjunctions.  -  -  -  193 
Prepositions.  -  -  -  195 
Prosody.  -       -       -    <208 

Dialects.      -       -       -         2i§ 
Appendix,  No.  I.  Digamma.  250 
No.  II.    Subscript 

Iota.    -       -      255 
No.   III.   Middle- 
ton's  Theory  of 
the  Article.    -    256 


Figure. 
A  a 

Tyr 

AS 

Ee 

H»7 

It 

K« 

a;i 

Nv 
0  0 

P   p/O 

2CC<7S 

Tt7 

X;c 

Ho 


^^ifoii^ 

\hi^ 

ORTHOGltAPHr: 

^^00^^ — 

THE  ALPHABET. 

E  GREEK  LETTERS  ARE  TWENTY-FOUR. 

Name.              Power. 

a?^ 

alpha 

a 

(3yjta 

beta 

b 

fyafii^a 

gamma 

g  hard 

SeTita 

delta 

d 

e^^iXov 

epsllon 

e  short 

^rira 

zeta 

z 

yjra 

eta 

e  lona 

6r,ra 

theta 

th 

LLYta 

iota 

i 

xanna 

kappa 

k 

^/xfjiSSa 

lambda 

1 

(IV 

mu 

m 

vv 

nu 

n 

l^ 

xi 

X 

ofiLxpcnf 

omicron 

o  short 

TtL 

pi 

P 

po 

rho 

r 

aty^ia 

sigma 

s 

rav 

tau 

t 

in^/Xo^ 

upsTlon 

u 

<^6 

phi 

ph 

'V/ 

cm 

ch  aspirated 

'4^1 

psi 

ps 

Qfieya 

omega 

o  lony 

2 

-  Letters, 

SIXTEEN  letters,  viz.  ot.s^i,  o.  v,  /3,  y,  ^,  x,  A,  /ct,  y,  ?r,  ^,  (t,  r, 
were  introduced  from  Phenicia  into  Greece,  by  Cadmus, 
fifteen  hundred  years  before  Christ.  Their  form  was  ori- 
ginally that  of  the  Phenician  characters,  and  was  gradually 
changed  to  the  present.*  Eight  were  afterwards  added,  viz. 
5?5  6;,  <p,  Xi  ^5  C'  l>  "^j  i^  ^^^  fi^^h  or  the  sixth  century  before 
Christ.  These,  being  merely  substitutes  for  existing  letters, 
came  slowly  into  use.  They  were  first  employed  by  the 
Ionics  ;  and  afterwards  by  the  Attics,  though  not  in  public 
records  till  403  A.  C.  Hence  the  new  alphabet  of  twenty- 
four  letters  was  called  l^v/>ta  ypot/u^ittctToc ;  and  the  old  alphabet 
of  sixteen  letters,  Arrtx-u  ypuf^fA^ru^  which  continued  in  use 
am.ong  the  iEolics. 

Greek  w^as  originally  written  in  capitals,  without  spaces 
between  the  words  ;  as,  ENAPXHHNOAoroSKAIOAOroSHN 
nPOSTONGEON.      Ev    cc^XV   ^^    ^  Aoyo$,    xctt   o  Aoyo<i  m  Trpog  rov 

©fOV. 

The  smaller  characters  were  formed  from  the  larger,  be- 
tween the  seventh  and  ninth  centuries,  for  convenience  in 
writing. 

The  lines  of  Manuscripts  were  called  o-rtxotj  and  the  con- 
tents often  estimated  by  their  number.!  Thus,  ypecTrrov  ev 
c7ixoi<;  (nj,  end  of  the  Epistle  to  the  Philippians,  denotes  that 
the  manuscript  had  208  crnxot  or  lines. 

To  the  letters  may  be  added  the  rough  hreoihr 
inff  [']  or  EngUsh  H  ;  as,  'Ofiyjpog^  Homeros  ;  ^e^c^^ 
hexo. 

1.  The  aspirate^  or  English  H,  was  originally  a  letter 
among  the  Greeks.  In  the  old  inscriptions,  HEKATON  is 
written  for  ex.ojrov  ;  and  nH  for  <p  :  KH  for  x^  &c-  ^t  was  af- 
t'erwards  divided  into  two  parts,  !'H.  The  former  retain- 
ing tlie  original  sound,  was  called  the  rough  breathing.  The 
latter  was  called  the  smooth  breathing ;  and  denotes  merely 
the  absence  of  the  rough.  These  characters,  H,  were 
gradually  rounded  into  their  present  form,  [']  rough  breath- 
ing, [']  smooth  breathing. 

*Vide  Shuckford's  Connexions,  vol.  i.  p.  256. 
-r  Vide  Mai^hV  M5chae]is,  vol.  ii.  p.  526. 


2.  When  V  or  p  begin  a  word,  they  have  always  the  Fough 
breathing  ;  as  it^ap,  'Vyirap,  In  the  middle  of  a  word,  if  ^  be 
doubled,  the  first  has  the  smooth,  and  the  second  the  rough 
breathing ;  as  ccphv. 

3.  The  Attics  frequently  use  the  rough  breathing  when 
others  use  the  smooth  ;  as  u><vetv,  <i^/$,  «^>}y. 

Letters  are  divided  into  Vowels  and  Consonants. 
The  vowels  are  seven  :  two  long,  jy,  o ;  two 
short,  f,  o  ;  three  doubtful,  a,  t,  v. 

1.  Before  the  invention  of  ??  and  6>,  t  and  o  were  used  for 
the  long  as  well  as  short  sounds  of  E  and  o  ;  and  o  was 
sometimes  put  for  a. 

2.  The  doubtful  vowels  are  short  in  some  words  ;  as,  cc 
in  TxTTi^  ;  long  in  others  ;  as,  in  Xcco^  ;  and   in  some  others 
either  long  or  short,  at  the  will  of  the  writer  ;  as,  in  A^jjs. 

The  diphthongs  are  twelve  ;  six  proper,  viz. 
at,  av  eij  ev^  oty  ov  ;  six  improper,  viz.  qc,  yIj  6),  yjVy 

1.  Diphthongs  always  end  with  i  or  y  ;  hence  these  vow 
els  are  axWcd  postpositive,  and  the  other  vowels  prepositive, 

2.  The  point  under  the  u.  n  *;,  is  called  the  subscrif.t 
[ota,*  and  w:is  originally  written  on  the  right  of  the  letters  ; 
as,  HOAOI  (06^61,:)  tiiis  is  still  done  after  capitals  ;  as  A/0I12S 

3.  The  diphthong  vt  never  occurs  except  before  a  vowel  , 
as  uioi. 

Consonants  are  divided  into  Mntes,  Liquids 
and  Double  Consonants. 
There  are  nine  Mutes. 


bn  fco  t>: 

o  o  c 

O         U         C 


Smooth,  7t,  x^  r. 
Middle,  /?,  y,  S, 
Rough,      ^,    X,    a 


See  Appeodix.  No.  2. 


4  Lttiers. 

The  rough  mutes  are  formed  by  adding  the  rough  breath- 
ing to  the  smooth  mutes  ;  <p,  ph  ;  ;ti,  kh  ;  $Ah,  The  mid- 
dle have  a  slight  roughness  added  to  the  smooth. 

Hence  these  letters,  as  they  stand  perpendicularly,  are  very 
often  interchanged,  by  a  change  of  breathing  ;  as,  c-x^xih^ 
for  (rK£><i^eq  ;    ?^ic<po^  for  ^iKrTrai  ;   t>xTA>  into  oy^eoq. 
Letters  thus  interchanged  are  called  Cognate, 
5r,  /3,  ^,  are  cognate,  and  formed  by  the  lips. 
»,  y,  Xi  by  the  palate. 

Tj  }j  e,  by  the  tongue. 

There  are  four  Liquids,  X,  f^,  v,  p. 

Liquids  do  not  precede  a  mute  in  the  same  syllable. 
They  are  sometimes  called  immutables,  because  they  rare- 
ly change.     To  the  Liquids,  er  has  sometimes  been  added. 

There  are  three  Double  Consonants.  ^,  ^j  4^' 
^  represents*  xg,  yg,  ;^g. 

4/  Ttg^  ^g,  ^g. 

Hence,  when  these  letters  are  thus  joined,  the  double  let- 
ter is  substituted. 

1.  This  maybe  particularly  remarked  in  declension  and 
conjugation.  A^cc\)/t  for  A^aiict^  from  Afoij3$  ;  Af|^  for  Myo-o), 
from  A5y<y  ;  TrM'^eo  for  TrXgicc-co^  from  TTXexa  ;  ccXn-^^Af  foT  ccMKpca) . 
from  ccxsttpd}, 

2.  Zeta  was  used  for  ^g,  with  a  sound,  probably,  resem- 
.bl^ng  c-  or  0-C-.  Among  the  ^Eolics,  who  never  used  the 
double  consonants,  c-J"  was  put  for  ^,  transposing  the  letters., 
because  (5"  never  immediately  precedes  c-.j 

r,  before  x^  y^  %,  ^5  has  the  sound  of  ng  ;  as. 
a)/y6?wog,  anggelos. 

The  letters  v^  p,  cr,  ^^  ^^  are  called  final  conso- 
nants,  because  words  not  derived  from  foreign 
languages  end  in  no  others. 

*  It  cannot  be  loo  strongly  impressed  on  the  mind  of  the  learner,  that 
and  f  are  mere  reprcsentadvcs  ofthe  leiter?  against  Ihcm,  and  may  al- 
tys  be  resolved  into  them. 
-  Vide  Rule  IV.  p.  5. 


Syllables, 

Except   fji,    ^Ky   and  t^x,  supposed  to  be  derived  from  eg 
and  a^t- 


SYLLABLES. 

General  Rules  in  the  Formation  ofSyllaHes, 
L  When  mutes  come  together  the  smooth  must  he  united 
with  smooth,  middle  with  middle,  and  rough  with  rough  ; 
hence  if  one  is  determined,  the  other  is  made  to  correspond  ; 
as,  irvsp6m  for  ervTrd^v  ;  AeAf;^^5  for  >^s>.£k$£  ;  l^^ot^og,  from  tTrrcc. 
Exception  1.  A  rough  mute  cannot  be  doubled  ;  but  the 
iirst  is  changed  into  its  cognate  smooth  one.  ^aTr^^t  for 
'Zot<p<Pca  ;   Buicxoi  for  Bi^xX^^  '   ^1760^  for  rtC&o^. 

2.  The  preposition  sk  ma}-  be  folloued  by  a  letter  of  any 
kind  ;  as,  fx/3«AAa;,  £x.$Xf4^i<;. 

IL  Two  successive  syllables,  in  the  same  word,  do  not  be- 
gin with  an  aspirate  ;  lest  they  should  occasion  too  great  ;• 
roughness  of  language.  To  avoid  this,  the  iirst  commonly 
loses  the  aspirate  ;  as,  ix^  for  ex^  »  c/^ftTexe^  for  otf-i/pex^  '? 
s^oeuxet  for  peptVKA  j  :rs<pxyr'X  for  ^i(p6t,yy.it  ;  r^SvKcc  for  0£$vjcx  : 
rt$ijf^.t  for  6i6ijM't  J  Kex^^oc  f^r  x^X^^-^  5  "^^'PtioJ*  f<^i*  ^p^X^'^y  from 
%'|  ;    ery^jjv  for  e^vdiiv   from  ^vc^. 

Sometimes  the  second.     TruSiin  [ov  7r£t&>:3i.     rJivt  for  tM: 
To  this  rule  there  are  some  exceptions  ;  s\ich  as  $BT6fii:. 
.AX^£t^  oi%f<r^«6/,  oiLOpfX^^efi- 

III.  When  the  rough  breathing  and  a  smooth  mute  come 
together,  they  unite  and  form  a  rough  one  ;  as,  'rrcK,v6£-^i<i  from 
^djvr'  and  i'^iq  ;  Kud^i  for  ^t^r'^^-g  ;  f^.s$vi^{v  fur  f^iT^  vfttv  j  ^x  ^l**' 
for  hkI^o)  ;  £(p6vifJL£^oq .  from  e-x-Tx  and  T^f^^epx  ;  pt,v^'  y.ro  for  vvy.rt^ 

ra  ;     ^ay-UTicv  for  Td  'iijmtiov, 

IV.  The  letters  r,  J^,  ^,  ^.  do  not  immediately  precede  c. 
To  avoid  this  concurrence,  the  first  letter  is  commonly  drop- 
ped,  and  the  preceding  short  vowel  lengthened  ;  as,  «t5-«i»  for 
eco'Ta,  from  xS^f  j  xwo"^  for  cvtvrz-u^  from  (vtvra  ;  t^Wa'^u  for 
ttA^j^t-a;, from  ;rA};^itf  ;  ofyi(,  for  op/P^,   Gen.  opvi$oc  ;  up7ixccif  for 

<c/J7rc«^o*&>,  from  apTTx^ej, 

The  same  is  generally  true  of  i»  before  c  3  as,  r-j-p^f/s     for 

rf^^fv^,  Gen.  rvfpdevTo^  3   J/^i^^  for  <5'i^6V^,  Gen.   Moyro^  i  'Opr9}(noc, 

from  the  Latin  Hortensius  ;  Ik^^ct/   for.  'ocovreci,  from    ixorrei  ; 

^TTucra  for  g-ttevOj-o;^  from  6*;r«v^a;.     Thc}^  aic,  ho^vp.rer*  somf- 

•mes  joined  j  a?  in  ry^/y?.  fAf-^/yj. 


V  is  commonly  retained  in  ev  in  composition  ;  ai9,  gyc'xj;??^^  ; 
but  I  is  frequently  inserted,  as  in  e^ncKexxu. 

V.  N.   is  changed—- 

1.  Into   y,  before  k,  y,  %,  |  ;  as  in  eyx^^P^^   7r£<pccyKcc, 

2.  into  /ic,  before  the  cognates  tt,  /3,  ^,  and  the  letters  |n. 
and  -v/^  ;   as  in  sf^Tts^os  ,  e/nfixtvcj,  (3-vu.^vr,(i^  ef^f^svof,  o^uf^i^v^f^oi, 

3.  Into  A,'  ^,  c,  before  those  letters  respectively  ;  as  in 

].  The  preposition  «v  is  generally  unchanged  before  x,  /  and  ^  ;  as, 
2.  V  frequently  remains  in  the  old  writers  as,  ctv^eAoc.. 

VI.  Before  the  letter  ft — 

1.  /3,  ^,  ^,  -i^,  are  changed  into  /m<;  as,  XzXuf^i^^ui  for  XiXet7r(JMi\ 
'^cTviJLiA.ui  for  rervTrf^stt, 

2.  X  and  ;^^,  into  y  j  as,  h^oyiA.oe,t  for  h^Kf^it  ^  >is>^£yi^ui  for 

Except  rtA//»,  etv^o;, 

VII.  A  letter  is  sometimes  inserted  between  two  other  let- 
ters, to  prevent  an  unpleasant  concurrence  of  sounds  ;  par- 
ticularly when  fA.  precedes  A,  or  ^,  the  letter  /3  is  often  insert- 
ed ;  as  fjLfcvifjL^^iet^  from  /tc£ff"fl$  and  rjfjut^ec  ;  f^ef/^fi^^ijKet  fov  fJctfJieX^Ku. 

When y  precedes^,  the  letter  J" is  frequently  inserted  ;  as, 
oi^^^oc,  for  «v£foc.  From  the  same  attention  to  harmony,  we 
find  ctfA,^^oroq  for  ufi^oro^,  &c* 

From  a  regard  to  sound,  r  in  the  preposition  kgctu  is  fre- 
jjuently  changed  into  ^r  and  »,  before  <p  and  x  ;  ^^s?  y-ocKx^vo-a^i 
for  y^aroixevcrctt ;  and  into  /3,  y,  <^,  tt,  A,  /it,  v,  ^ ,  before  those  letters 
respectively  :  as,  tcccpfcov  for  Kxrocp&cv,  &c. 

N.  B.    The  preceding  rules  are  very  important  for  the  resolu- 
ion  of  anomalies^  in  the  inflections  of  nouns  and  verbs. 

VIIL  The  letter  v  is  annexed  to  datives  plural  in  z,  and  to 
verbs  ending  in  f  or  /,  when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vow? 

1.  ny~o7-i  takes  y  after  it ;  sikot-iv  uv^^e^  ;  also  7irctvrct7rcco-i  and 
siome  others. 

2.  The  Poets  sometimes  add  y  when  the  next  word  beginJi 
with  a  consonant ;  as,  o-r^j^gc-nv  A<«o-<o/$ . 


**  To  avoid  a  concurrence  of  vowel? 


SyllahUs,  7 

On  tht  Change,  Increase,  and  Retrenchment  of  Syllables. 

1 .  Metathesis  is  the  transposition  of  letters  and  syllables  ; 
:as,  Kot^Ts^oi  for  K^ocre^oq -,  cc-zre^etcicc  for  ei-srei^icria.  This  often 
extends  to  the  breathings  ;  as,  Ki6aiy  (orx^rm]  Qoaam  for  rAtp^^^^yv, 
from  retx,vq. 

2.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  one  or  more  letters  to  a 
word  ;  as,  esiKocrt  for  nx^Tt  ;  Tsficiiev  for  fietiov. 

3.  Epenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  one  or  more  letters  withia 
a  word  ;  as,  ^r^v/ivi  for  yrcXvi, 

4.  Paragoge  is  the  annexing  of  one  letter  or  more  to  a 
word  ;  as,  Xoyoia-i  for  Xoyoiq. 

5.  Apheresis  is  the  cutting  off  of  letters  from  the  begin- 
ning of  a  word  ;  as,  otc^o^jj  for  otcrffa^r?;. 

6.  Syncope  is  taking  from  the  middle  of  a  word  ;  as,^;^^«»y 

for  JjAt/tfev. 

7.  Apocope  is  taking  from  the  end  of  a  word  ^  as,  ^«*x^y 

••r  ^ctK^vav. 

8.  Apostrophe  (')  cuts  off  tt^  f,  h  a,  from  the  end  of  a  word, 
when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel ;  as,  ruvr^  c^yovhr 

Tecvra  e?<£yev, 

1.  ^«§/ and  TTgo,  with  datives  in />  are  not  affected  by  apostrophe. 
The  apostrophe  is  not  always  U!'ed  where  it  niight  be,  especially  in 
prose. 

2.  Long  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  oflen  removed  by  apostrophe 
amontc  the  Poets  ;  'as,  cy'aS^x  /'or  «>«  ci/x  ;  ^nKcfx*  iyu  (or /2>ih'./uoit  iyoo. 

3.  Tiie  first  vowel  of  the  succeedinij  word  is  sonaetimes  omitted  ;  as, 
V}^5t6<  for  w  etyttBi. 

4.  Sometimes  the  two  words  are  drawn  together  ;  as,  iyuS'^  for  ryoo  oiSa  ^ 
Tcif/.A  for  Tat  iy.it  j  Kd:m  for  aam-yri  ^  Tuv^svcfe  for  to  evSevJ^g ;  katol  for  KottHToi,  j 

iCU    for   KXt    it;    KU.K  ior    X'AJ  iK  ;    pfJ^^Cog    for  Xat<   OTCOJ ,    yUCr^iV    for    fXH   iyriv 

9.  Tmesis  separates  the  parts  of  compound  words,  by  an 
intervening  word  ;  as,  xccra  yxtuv  SKot^^v-^e,  for  yutccv  KuTeicuAw^s. 

10.  Dieresis  (••)  separates  two  vowels  which  might  form  a 
diphthong  ;  as,  zra^  for  -ssrcciq. 

11.  Syncresis  unites  two  vowels  into  a  diphthong;  as, 
r5/;^ei  for  reixs'i' 

12.  Crasis  is  a  contraction  with  a  change  of  one  or  more 
■?f  the  vowels  :  as,  Ksea^  for  Kspxog  ;  ^xT(;^,i:z  for  /Siftz/Psff-j, 


a  Etymology. 

13.  Dyastole  is  a  comma  used  to  separate  words,  which 
might  be  mistaken  for  parts  of  a  single  word  ;  'o,  r^,  and  he  : 
W,  when. 

There  are  four  Points  or  Stops. 
The  comma ^  (,) 

The  note  of  interrogation  (;) 
The  colon  or  point  at  top  (•) 
The  period  or  full  stop       (.) 


frOOO^C 


ETYMOLOGY. 


THE  Parts  of  Speech  in  Greek  are  niiiej  viz. 
Article,  Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Parti- 
ciple, Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunction. 

Interjections  are  included  among  Adverbs. 

There  are  three  Numbers ;  the  Singular, 
^vhich  denotes  one;  the  Plural,  which  denotes 
more  than  one :  and  the  Dual,  which  denotes 
two  or  a  pair. 

The  dual  is  not  found  in  the  New  Testament,  nor  in  the 
•Eolic  dialect.  It  was  used  chiefly  by  the  Attic  and  Ionic 
writers,  and  not  even  by  them  in  the  earlier  periods. 

The  Genders  are  three  ;  Masculine,  Feminine 
and  Neuter. 

The  Cases  are  five ;  Nominative,  Genitive. 
Dative,  Accusative  and  Vocative, 


Jrticle — Kouit 
ARTICLE. 

The  Article  is  a  word  prefixed  t^^^Mtfpltoflt^" 
purpose  of  designation  or  distinctionTOTf^  ai^po- 
Ttog^  (he  man.    It  corresponds,  (though  not  exact- 
ly J  to  the  English   definite  article ;  and  is  thus 
declined.'* 


Sing. 

N.    0,     'jy,    TO 

D.  Tcf),  Tjj,  ru, 

A.     T0¥>  TJJV     To. 


Dual. 

N.   A.  T<y,  r»,  ra* 

G.D.  ro/V,  T(*<V,  TO/V. 


Plural. 

N.   eiy  xt,  rcc, 
G.  rwy.  rav.  rav, 
D.  Toiiy  Tui^,  roii, 

A,     T«f,    Tcti  .,  Ttt. 


1 .  The  Article  has  no  vocative  ;  its  place  is  supplied  by 
the  adverb  u. 

2.  When  ^£  is  annexed  to  the  article,  it  has  the  force  of  a 
demonstrative  pronoun,  as  oak,  vh^  ro^f,  this,  that. 

3.  The  article  was  origi^iailj  ra^,  ry^  re  ;  hence  the  to/, 
of  the  Dorics  and  Tonics  ;  and  r  in  oblique  cases  and  in  the 
neuter. 


NOUN. 

There  are  three  declensions  of  Greek  nouns. 
The  first  has  four  terminations,  a,  yi^  ag,  77$. 
The  second  has  two,  og,  ov^  which,  among  the 
Attics,  become  cjg,  ov. 

The  third  has  nine,  a,  /,  i;,  cj,  r,  p,  cr,  ^,  4^. 

General  Rules  of  Declension. 

1.  The  nominative,  accusative  and  vocative 
of  the  dual,  and  of  neuters,  are  alike  ;and  in  the 
plural  of  neuters,  end  in  a. 

*  Let  the  young  student  decline  each  gender  of  the  Article  by  itself. 
The  Feminine  \  will  give  him  (with  a  sliglit  variation)  the  terminations 
of  the  first  Declension  of  Nouns.     Tlie  Masculine  'o,  and  the   Neater 

•  -rive  the  terminations  of  the  secoad  Declension, 


10 


First  Declension, 


2.  The  dative  singular  ends  always  in  t.* 

3.  The  genitive  plural  ends  in  ov. 

4.  The  vocative  is  always  like  the  nominative, 
in  the  plural,  and  usually  in  the  singular. 

The  dative  plural   seems    originallyto  have  ended  in  /,  in 
all  the  declensions  ;  and  the  genitive  plural  usually  inetyy,  or 

FIRST  DECLENSION. 

Nouns  of  the  first  declension  have  four  termi- 
nations, a,  >7,  feminine  ;  ag,  >?$,  masculine. 

The  terminations  ccg,  j}$ ,  are   thought  to   have  been  deri- 
ved from  X  and  ;?,  by  adding  $. 


Nouns  in  yj^ 

and 

a,  are  thus  declined : 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

V  ri^'Tj, 

N.    u(  rtu-cct, 

G. 

rm  rtjuc-nii 

N. 

A.    V.   TU  riJbL-X, 

G.    T*»V   TifJL-m- 

D. 

rvi  Ttl^  Ti^ 

D.  r^<$  rtf/^'Uti, 

A. 

T3JV  rifJL-yiv^ 

G. 

D.     TOCIV  Ttf^-CtlV, 

A.   reci    rif4.-uii 

V. 

a  TtM'H' 

1   V.   6>   rtfjL-xt. 

Sin^. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

rj  Atyc*-«, 

N.     ^i  f^T'Obi, 

G. 

ri,i  fi.HT-7)i  , 

N. 

A.  V.   rcC  fJLHT'Xy 

G.    rm  f/^ar-avy 

D. 

T>J  fttfT-JJ, 

D.    Tccig  ^5<.r-«<5, 

A. 

rjjy  ^sr-«y, 

G. 

D.  ratv  f^cHT'Xiv, 

A.   rug  itty5*-ccf , 

V. 

a  fJLHT-a, 

V.    eo  fJL>i<r-(tt. 

Nouns  ending  in  Sa,  Oa,  pa,  a  pure,  t  and  d  con- 
tracted, have  the  genitive  in  ag,  and  the  dative 
in  ot ;  I  as, 

*  In  the  first  and  secoad  declensions,  the  Iota  is  subscript. 

■\  A  vowel  is  called  pure^  when  it  is  preceded  hy  another  vowel  witi 
which  it  does  not  form  a  diphthong  ;  as  the  atin  <pihtct. 

■^  The  ancient  Latins  followed  this  method  of  making  the  genitive  ii 
«c  :  Thus,  Gen.  Sing,  terras^  escas^  for  terra',  esccf.  Paterfamilias  co'i- 
tinues  in  use. 


First  Declension. 


11 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

t}  (piXtx, 

N. 

OCt    ^tXlCtty 

G. 

rv)€,  ^<  A/665, 

N.  A.  V.  Tci  (pt?^tlc) 

G. 

rm  ^M/6>y, 

D. 

T>j   <piXtu^ 

D. 

rflC/5  (ptXiutq, 

A. 

rrjV  ^i><ictiy 

G.  D.  Tciiv  ^iXtxiv. 

A. 

rUq  ^t?ilCtqy 

V. 

a   ^ihioc. 

V. 

M  ^iXtxu 

Nouns  in  og  are  thus  declined 

I 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

•  Totf^l-Uq^ 

N. 

Ot  TUf^i'Xly 

G 

ra  ru/^i-H) 

N.  A.  V.  r&f  recjLU'U, 

G. 

Tat  rUfJLl'f^^y 

D. 

7  0)  ruH-i-cCf 

D. 

roi<i  Tcci^^l-eii'i 

A. 

Tov  rxf^i-ctVy 

G.  D,    Totv  ruj^-uiv. 

A. 

TS$    TU/^t-Oi^y 

V. 

a  Tuf^i-et, 

V. 

CJ  7et,u,(-ect. 

Some  nouns  in  cc^ ,  especially  proper  names,  make  the  gen- 
itive in  «>  after  the  Doric  form  ;  as,  Trotyrcii,  G.  TruTru  ;  BufjLxq., 
G.  Q>afiM, 

Some  have  both  «  and  «  ;  as,  Af;^t;r«§,  Af;^^t^T«.  and  A^x^^* 

Nouns  ending  in  Yiq  are  thus  declined  : 


Sing. 

N.  0  nXeav  yi^, 

G.    T^TfAo/V-y, 

D.  roj  T£Xa)V-7)r 
A.  Tov  rtXm  jjv, 
V.  0)  reXav-i}. 


Dual. 

N.,A.  V.  rare>^m-etf 
G.  D.  To/y  riXm'CCiv, 


Plural. 

N.  ei  itXaV'Oti, 

G.   Tav  T£Aft,y-a;y, 

D.  roi^  TiXav-ut^y 
A.  mi  rsXav-ctq, 
V.  6f  TiXm-ui, 


Nouns  in  c-tjj^  make  the  vocative  in  jj  or  «.  All  nouns  in 
tj:5,  poetical  nouns  in  9n;$,  national  denominations  in  r^<i.  and 
compounds  of  yroXa^  ftfr^J,  and  r^i^a^  make  the  vocative  in 
«;  as,    ycvveaTTr.q^  V.  xv^a>7rot.     Also  some  proper  names;    as, 

Some  proper  names  in  97$  have  the  genitive  in  v  :  aSjlTo^aj^, 
G.  ricJj?*     A^»;$;  G.  A^>}. 

CONTRACTIONS. 

Nouns  of  this  declension,  which  have  two  vowels  in  their 
termination,  are  contracted,  if  the  former  one  is  a  short  vow- 
el, or  u  used  as  a  short  vowel.     These  end  in  £ot$,  cjj^,  ect,  £??j 


li 


Second  Declension, 


RULE. 

Drop  the  former  of  the  two  vowels  ;  as,  f^^eccc^  /w,v^  ;  e/;eo6j 
spa  ;  cccrAojj,  cc7r?i^  ;  y«Af;;,  yoc>^rj  ;  A^eAAfj^s,  AwfAA^s. 

But  e;t,  if  not  preceded  by  ^  or  a  vowel,  is  changed  into 
^  ;  as,  yscc,  yri  ;  ^Epf4.£e£s,  'Epf^ri. 

After  the  nominative  has  been  thus  contracted,  it  is  regu- 
larly declined,  according  to  the  examples  already  given. 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

The  second  declension  has  two  terminations  og 
and  ov  ;  which  are  lengthened  by  the  Attics  into 
wg  and  ov. 

By  contraction,  d«s,  oov  ;  and  505,  jov,  become  «$,and«v. 


Sing. 

Dual.              1 

Plural. 

N.  0  A«7-«5, 

i 

N.    oj  A«7-oi, 

G.   T»Aoy-s, 

N.  A.  V.  r&;Ady-ft/,  ; 

G.  ta;v  Xoy^i 

D.  ta;  Aoy-oj, 

i 

D.    ro^5  Aoy-oi$, 

A.    Toy  Aay-tfv, 

G.  D.  Td/v  Aoy-e/v.    | 

A.  7ii$  Aoy-»?, 

V.    M  A(jy-f. 

1 

V.   <yAoy-oi. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N.    ra  |yA-«v, 

N.    T«|t;A-fl6, 

G.   rsi|t/A-«, 

N.  A.  V.  TO)  |t;A-fi;, 

G.    rm  |«^A-<yv, 

D.     Tay  |f A  to, 

D.    Te/$  |fA-o/$j 

A.    Ta  |t;A  ov, 

G.  D.  To/v  |t;A-o/y. 

A.    r^  |vA'«e, 

V.    «  |t/A-ov. 

V.    6,^vX-ct, 

Nouns  in  ov^  Sv^  and  qv^  are  neuter :  those  in 
o^j  «$5  and  og,  are  generally  masculine,  sometimes 
feminine  or  common. 

1.  Many  nouns  in  oq  are  feminine  ;  some  from  a  refer- 
ence to  a  noun  of  that  gender,  understood  ;  as,  t^yifM^^  a  de- 
sert, i.  e.  ff  »j,cto5  r^,  desert  land. 

2.  Some  substantives  in  c$  are  common  ;  as,  '0,  \  uv^paTro^, 

3.  Nouns  in  &>$  are  masculine,  except  names  of  cities  and 
islands,  which  are  feminine  ;  together  with  these  three,  ieaq, 
aurora  ;  y^^A&'s,  a  brother's  wife  ;  ««Aiy$,  a  threshins;  floor : 
xpa?.  a  debt,  is  neuter. 


Second  Declension — ^ttic  Form* 


18 


ATTIC  FORM. 

This  is  made  by  lengthening  the  last  vowel  or  diphthong  in- 
to <w,  and  subscribing  <  ;  as,  A«y<»«  for  Xctyai  ;  A«y<w  for  A^ya  ; 
Aflcyfit;  for  Xccyot, 

If  d  long  precede  •5 ,  it  is  changed  into  f  ;  as,  hs6i<i  for  >^^ ; 
and  «v<wyfa)»  for  otvayxto^t^ 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


Sing. 
6)  M'Ofg, 


Sing. 
N.  TO  scv6fye'av, 
G.  ra  etva/ye-o), 
D.  ru)  ecyMys-ajy 
A.  TO  ecyuye-av, 
V.  M  ecv6fyi'6fv. 


Dual. 

N.   A.   V.   Ta    M'O/y 

G.  D.  TCtV  Af-toV. 

Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  Tof  ccvayt'Of, 
G.  D.roty  etvays-m. 


Phiral. 

N.  01  ?^i'Cfj^ 

G.    ToiV  Af-fllVj 

D.  ro<5  Af-4u$j 
A.  Ty$  A£-ft;$j 
V.  a;  Af-fiD, 

Plural. 

N.  7cc  uvojys'e), 
G.  r^yv  <JtVA;yi-tt/v, 
D.  ro/5  flfVAjyfto?, 
.A.  r«  fl6yA>ye-iy, 
V,  a;  ctfVft;ye-&'. 


1 .  The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative  ;  and  hence  nouns 
in  og,  of  the  common  form,  often  have  the  vocative  like  th^» 
nominative,  after  the  Attic  form  ;  as  <I)<Ao5  a  MmXots^  II.  ^.  180. 

2.  The  Attics  often  reject  v  in  the  accusative  of  this  de- 
clension, and  almost  always  in  the  following  words  :  u^c^u 
A3r»-oA?uy?,  I<y$,  Kf«$,  ?MyMi,  and  Tvv^upecoq.  Sometimes  in  the. 
nominative  ;  as,ro  uytipAf  for  otyzpav ;  in  the  accusative  plural, 
T«$  <iA<y  for  <iA<y5.  The  Attics  frequently  decline  nouns  of 
the  third  declension,  according  to  this  Form;  as,  yeA^v, 
(Eurip.  Ion.  1191.)  for  yfAA/T^ft  from  ya^ys. 

CONTRACTIONS. 

The  terminations  cv^  and  ow  are  contracted  from  0^5,  ooi ; 

RULES. 

1.  If  the  two  last  vowels  are  short,  change  them  into  dv;  as, 

00-1  eov,  otJSv  :  but  «  makes  j?  ;  as,  uhx<pihi^  ethx^pii^. 

2.  If  not,  omit  th*3  former  one  ;  as,  «^7f»,  orU  ;  ot%»,co-1?.  : 

>3: 


14 


Third  Declension, 


Sing.^ 

N.  oTJ-eov  ^v, 
G.  orJ-eH,  », 
D.  ocrl'icp-^  y, 
A.  oa-]'eov,  «j>, 
V.  oc-J-eovy  «v, 

Sing.^ 

N.  0  vcoi    «$, 
G.  r8v-d«   «j 
D.  TO)  y-do;  9, 
A.  Toy  y-ooy^  ay, 
V.  at  y-df  J ». 


Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  dO-7-e«,  &;, 
G.  D.  oTJ'eoiv,  otv. 

Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  r^  v-ofi),  J, 
G.  D.  Totv  y-oo^v,  o/v. 


Plural. 

N.  oTJ-eec,  «, 

G.    0  3-7-f6»yi  6)^Vj 

D.  oTJ-eoiiy  o/$j 
A,  o(r]-eeCy  uj 

V.   9T]-lcCi   U. 

Plural. 

N.  o'i  y-eo/,  o7j 
G.  Ta>v  y-ocifv  o/Vj 
D.  ro/$  y-03/5,  015, 
A.  r«$  y-o»$,  «5, 
V.  A)  y-oo/,  o7. 


So  its  Compounds  evHo^,  ecvoc^,  &c.  Also,  poog,  ;i^voo5,  ^rAooSj 
;^foo$,  with  their  compounds.*  Some  contracts  in  »$  take  the 
form  of  the  third  declension  ;  as,  ysg,  G.  yoo$,  D.  yoi*. 

itjois  and  diminutives  in  w$  are  thus  declined. 


Sing. 

Sing.  ^ 

N.  Ifja-'Si, 

N.  A/oy-iJs, 

G.  i^o-J, 

G.   A/«y-y, 

D.  Ijjo-», 

D.   Aiov-u, 

A.  Ijjc-ay, 

A.   A«>v-wy, 

V.  I«o-«. 

V.   A/oy-v. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 


The  terminations  of  this  Declension  are  nine, 

viz.  a,  65  u,  o,  1^5  p5  c,  ^5  -x^. 


Sing. 

.N.  0  r/7cfcy, 
G.  rii  Ttluvo^i 
D.  TAi  rtlecvt, 
A,  Toy  rtlcaety 
V.  6)  T/7«y. 


Dual. 

N,  A.  Y i  ra  ri1<AUi 
G.  D,  ro/y  T<7«yo/y. 


Plural. 

N.  oJ  rtluveij 
G.  r6>v  ttlotim^ 

D.    TOt^TtlcCG-ti 
A.    Tii5  Tt]ciCVXif 

V.  a>  T<7«yf$. 


*  The  Cofppounds  of  voo?  and  p»c?  are  not  contracted  in  the  nomina- 
tive and  accusative,  and  but  seldom  in  the  genitive  plural ;  as,  st/vose, 

xatx/^'^o*,  not  8wvci,  Ksthtpjia.    G.  ifvMiv,  seldom  syvXv. 


Sing. 

N.  To  (rafMt,^ 

A.  TO  C*^|«,«, 


Third  Declension. 

Dual. 
N.  A.V.  ra  TAfi^ctle, 
G.  D.  TOIV  TafMtjoiv, 


15 


Plural. 
N.  Tflc  o-af^oclecj 
G,  rejv  Q-MfA^m. 
D.  TO/ 5  trafjLxo'i. 
A.  Tflt  frufjLai]x^ 

V.  «l  T6)fA.u]ot, 


Gender. 

I.  Nouns  ending  in  £«$,  <«v,  i;v,  t;$-fo5,  <yi'-oyTo$,  ^j^-^yvTo?,  are 
masculine  ;  as,  o  ^x<rt^vg,  &c. 

The  following  are  Masculine,  with  few  exceptions. 
Those  ending  in  etp,  np^  a*^,  vp,  w,  6>$,  «$,  -v^,  tfC5-«vTo$,  m-uu^, 

II.  Nouns  ending  in  c»5-«^o$,  -ns-rnToi,  ctts,  a',  and  /$  verbal, 
are  always  feminine  ;  as,  17  ?iscf4.Tocs,  &c. 

The  following  are  Feminine,  with  few  exceptions. 
Those   ending  in  «/§,  ets,  /v,  /5»  M,  "«)  ,^?}  t-^,  (G.  vo$,  vJo5,  f^^O 
dyy-ovo^. 

Some  are  common  ;  as,  0,57  y^iTA^y,  &c. 

III.  Nouns  ending  in  u,  t,  v,  o^-eoi,  up-upa^  op'9poiy  ui-urcii 
and  etdg,  are  neuter  ;  as,  to  <rapcxy  &c. 

Genitive. 

The  Genitive  Singular  ends  in  0$ ;  as,  n^trxv,  tt^xvoi ;  ca>i^x. 
crft>|tto6T-tf$ ;  Ae*jM,^«$,  A«|u,^<««5^-05 ;  opng,  opvj-oi .  If  the  last  sylla- 
ble of  the  Nominative  contains  a  long  vowel,  it  is  usually 
changed  into  a  short  one  in  the  genitive,  and  i  and  v  into  e  ; 

as,  xo/fcjjv,  5ro/^5v-o$  ;  <«TTy,  etCTi-oi, 

It  is  probable  that  all  nouns  of  this  declension  ended  ori- 
ginally in  $  ;  and  that  the  genitive  was  formed  by  the  inser- 
tion of  0  before  5,  as  is  still  the  case  with  a  large  class  of 
them  ;  as, 

o(^/^,  o<pt'og  ;   iLtvg,  M-^-o-q  ; 
Aoot&s  ,  {Adu,-^)   Afiu^'Os  , 
^J?;*^!,  ycnip'JK-o-q  ; 
KVKXa-^,  tcvKXeo-ss-'O-g  ; 


1 B  Third  Declensmi, 

1.  ^Terminations  in  J$,  t5,  ^5,  vj,  ^$,  dropped  the  first  let- 
ter ;t  as,  5Asr/5  for  fA33-/J5-/^os  ;  x^pii  for  ;k^«^/r$-/T05 ;  ^^y?  for 
(par^'iOToq  ;  y^tffs  for  yJ'cftTj  ^  JJ^^T^j  J  o^y/5  for  opvt&i-idoS  ;  ecva^fov 
uvuKTS  5  uvotKrog  ;  jLtxprvg  for  f^ccpTvp^-upog. 

Sometimes  the  preceding  vowel  was  lengthened  ;J  as,  ^01/5 
for  ?roc$-o^o5  ;   Kten  for  xr^vs-evos. 

2.  Sometimes  the  last  letter  was  dropped  ;  as,  vfxr«^  for 
yexrap^'otpog '^  piv  foT  ptvg,  pms .  In  this  case,  the  preceding 
vowel  was  commonly  lengthened  ;  as,  Trotfttiv  for  ^rotf^H-em  ; 
>itpLvi^v  for  A/ftVfvs-fvof  ;  cc^afv  for  cc^ovg-cvoi  ;  ecTTyjp  for   uTTepg-Bpog. 

3.  Sometimes  both  letters  were  dropped  ;  as,  o-A>^i»  for 
<r&>^fltT5-cftros  ;  fCfA<  for  /tis^irg-trog  ;  y^cAsft  for  y<55Aofc|,  from 
y<»A<e»Tf . 

The  accusative  singular  of  nouns  not  neuter,  is  formed 
from  the  genitive,  by  changing  og  into  u  ;  as,  nruv^  riretvog, 
A.  rnxv-ct. 

Exception  1.  Nouns  in  ig,  \\  vg,  »vg,  and  oug,  whose  geni- 
tive is  in  og  pure,  change  $  of  the  nominative,  into  v  ;  as,  o^^s, 
oipm ,   A.   e(p/y  ;   ^orpv^-vog,  jiorpvv 'y   votvg  ^    vecog,  vuvv  j   (ioug,  fioeg, 

To  these  add,  >^ecug,  A«>$.     Accus.  A^«v,  xZv, 

The  poets  often  violate  this  rule  ;  as,  (iorpvu  for  ^orpw  ; 

vvcc  for  vavv, 

2.  Many  nounsIT  in  ^g  and  vg,  whose  genitive  is  not  in  og 
pure,  have  both  cc  and  v ;  as,  Kopvg^  teapv^og,  KopvSu  or  xe^yv  ; 
KXsig,  icXti^og,  KXei^x  or  xAe/v. 

;)^/fl6pi$  has  ^tcfiiToc,  and  ;^flft/i/v. 

To  these  add  compounds  of  Trovg  ;   as,  a^Kv^r^vg,  atcvro^cc  or 


*  These  changes  are  given  as  probable^  rather  than  certain^ 
i-  By  rule  iv.  page  5. 
J  Vide  rule  iv.  page  5. 
ll  Except  A/c,  A/c?,  Ace.  A/st,  Jupiter. 

IF  Those  whose  last  syllable  has  no  accent ;  when  it  is  accented,   the 
Hcctisative  is  a  only  ;  as,  TrarpUj-rxi-ptJ^A, 


Third  Declension,  17 

Vocative. 
The  vocative  is,  for  the  most  part,  like  the  nominative  ; 
as,  rtrccv,  V.  T/Tfl6v. 

But  the  short  vowel  of  the  genitive,  from  the  long  vowel 
of  the  nominative,  remains  in  the  vocative  ;  as, 
Norn.  Gen.  '  Voc. 

yrump,  TTotrepoi,  Trocrep. 

'^EKTap,  ^EKTopo^,  'Ektop, 

So  likewise  <ra/Tep^  AttoAAw  and   Uaret^ov,  whose  genitives 
have  a  long  vowel. 

Nouns,  (except  those  in  3j5  and  05,). whose  genitive  is  in  «§ 
pure,  drop  $  of  the  nominative,  to  form  the  vocative  ;  as, 


Nom. 

Gen. 

Voc. 

jSoccMfV?, 

-eci, 

j3«o-iA£t/. 

ficv^, 

/3o<J?, 

Qov. 

/^orpvi, 

^OTpVC?, 

(ioTpv, 

}fovi, 

V6fi5, 

vcv. 

So,    TTecig, 

TTCCthi, 

TTcCt. 

«Af.$, 

xMi^oi, 

icXti  or  KMii . 

otvet^  has  for  its  vocative,  otvu, ;   ywj?,  yvmi  ;   Tbf^,  tthv  ;  ooa^.. 

Certain  nouns  in  i/$  and  «$,  especially  proper  names, 
which  were  originally  adjectives  or  participles,  have  the  vo- 
cative like  the  nominative  neuter  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  Ata^^ 

A/fltv,  V.  Aiecv.      S//^05/$,  S/jttafy,  V.  Sz/^fP. 

In  proper  names,  the  poets  often  reject  the  v  ;  as,  Aiec  for 
A*Jv  ;   ©o«for©o«y. 

Nouns  in  a^,  and  m,  ««$,  have  the  vocative  in  01  ;  as,  eclS&iS: 
V.  xi^ot  ;  jj;^j6;,  V.  ij^oi. 

Dative  Plural, 

The  dative  plural  is  formed  from  the  dative  singular,  by 
changing  the  last  syllable  into  ci  5  as,  caf/k^-t/,  truf/^t-fri  ;  rsi^s-i, 
Tiix^i-ci  ;  0A«y-<,  (^A«y-a-|)  (^Ao|/  ;  Apoc^-t^  (Apa/2-c-/)  Apoi-^t, 
\U  precede  the  last  syllable,  it  is  dropped  ;*  as,  T/r<tv-/,  riret,- 
Ti ;  9r««y-r/,  -xet-Ti  ;  and  if  5  or  0  precede  the  v,  they  are  chang- 
ed into  their  corresponding  diphthongs  si  and  « ;  as,  ^^scV'Tt, 


♦B>  Ruleiv.  p.  5.  3* 


1 8  Third  Declensions-Contractions, 

Nouns  ending  in  c,  preceded  by  a  diphthong,  annex  i  to 

the  nominative  ;    as,  /3if$,  /2acr/ ;  ^oc<riX$vg,  ^uTtXiva-t  ;  vccv$,  volvo-i. 

Syncopated  nouns  in;;^*  have  the  dative  in*5-<;  as,  Trotriip, 

Tru-Tpusrt  ;    So,  cttrTTjp,  et(rrpe60-t  ;  ctp7}v,  c&pvos  ,  upvoc^i  ;  'f//$,  't;/o60-<, 

;k^e5<r/  i«  from  the  obsolete  ;^f  c« ,  and  f^otprvTi  from  f^ccpTv<5* 

CONTRACTIONS. 

Many  nouns  of  this  declension  are  contracted. 

1 .  Two  vowels  are  contracted  into  a  single  vowel  or  diph- 
thong ;   as,  retx,ecc,  rsixv  >   '»"f/;tf««  j  rei^cHi. 

2.  By  dropping  a  consonant,  two  vowels  are  brought  to- 
gether, which  are  afterwards  contracted  ;  as,  xepecru,  Kgpoict^ 

3.  A  vowel  is  sometimes  dropped  entirely  ;  as,  TrscrTip, 

Some  nouns  are  contracted  in  all  the  cases,  and  some  in  a 
part  only. 

In  the  oblique  cases,  there  is  no  contraction,  unless  the 
former  vowel  is  short,  or  a  doubtful  vowel  used  as  short. 

It  should  be  remembered  by  the  learner,  that 
The  short  vowels  are,  f,  o. 

Which  have  their  corresponding  long  ones,  j;,   &'. 

And  their  corresponding  diphthongs,  f<,  ov. 

The  following  are  the  rules  of  contraction  for  this  declen- 
-^ion,  and  likewise  for  all  contracted  Verbs. 

1 .  When  a  short  vowel  is  doubled,  it  is  changed  into  its 
corresponding  diphthong  ;  but  ee  of  the  dual  commonly  be- 
.*omes  ',;;  as,  ^cccn?,sei,  ^cc^iXiK;  ;   Aiirooq,  Ar^r^^, 

In  verbs,  t  £^i?^£,  i(pixu  ;  ^rjMofAsv,  ^if?Mf^ev. 

In  the  dual,  AiitioG-dsne,  AnfJLoa-Qevri, 

The  dual  sometimes  follows  the  rule.     c-»f  Aff,  (ry.eXii. 

2.  When  both  the  short  vowels  meet,  they  are  contracted 
iito  8\  as,  r£/;^ffo5,  TiiXH<i  ;   /3of5, /Sss. 

In  verbs,  <t>tMof^v,  ^tX8f44v  ;  ^tjXoere,  ^;jAm. 

3.  A  short  vowel  before  ec  is  changed  into  its  correst 
ponding  long  one,|  and  a  is  dropped  ;  as,  f«/»,  ^p  ;  Aj^Toet,  Ajjt^  ; 

*  F.xcept  yanrrhPf  ya.<r<T»f>^t, 

t  An  example  in  verbs  is  given,  for  the  use  of  the  student  when  ht 

aches  Contract  Verbs. 

:  Or  as  in  oac  case,  into  its  corrcspending  diphthong  ;^as,  «A»eRt?  a^mth 


Third  Declension — First  Form  of  Contracts*       19 


But  SC6  pure  becomes  «  ;  as  ;k^^?e«,  X9^^' 

4.  A  short  vowel  before  t  forms  a  diphthong  with  it  ;  as, 

5.  i  before  a  long  vowel   or   diphthong   is  dropped  ;  as, 

In  verbs,  <pi>^u^  <pkXa, 

6.  *o  before  a  long  vowel  is  (with  the  vowel)  contracted  in- 
to J  ;  as,  ^v>s6eo>i  ^jjAJ  ;   JSjAo>?Tf,  d'yjXare. 

0  before  a  diphthong  unites  with   the  second  vowel  of  the 
diphthong  ;  as,  ^ijXo97,  JjjAoI  ;  ^jyAoe/,  ^;jA<jI  ;  Jj;Ao»i,  ^jjAa?  ;  S7j?^oov, 

But  in  the  termination  oetv,  i  being  rejected,  it  is  contract- 
ed into  a;  as,  ^r^>^itv,  J'jyA^y. 

7.  When  At  precedes  o,  «  or  a;  the  contraction  is  into<y; 
when  otherwise,  into  «  ;  as,  /So^^o-^,  fioao-t  ;  ff-««s,  a-os  ;  TtfMof>t»ev 

In   diphthongs,/   is  subscribed;  as,   riftctet,   fif^^  ]  ftl^f^^^ 

8.  Neuters  in  (j^  pure  and  ^a$,  reject  t  in  the  oblique  cases, 
to  produce  a  concurrence  of  vowels  ;  as, 

KSpuTcc,      lupotot^      Kepct* 
KepUTOfv,     Kspuav,  Kepav. 

9.  If  the  former  vowel  be  long,  or  i  or  y,  strike  out  the 
other  ;  as, 

(iorpvei,   QorpZf.       rtf^jjsv,  rif^m. 

First  Form  of  Contracts. 
Two  terminations  ;  o$  neuter ;  vig  feminine^  ex» 
c^pt  names  of  men  . 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

^^^<9?p-W, 

N.A  V. 

N. 

ut  rpii}p-esq,  et^f 

G. 

rj75  rpttjp'io^^  85, 

Tec  rpiijp-ee,  ^, 

G. 

rm  rfiiy)p-eav^  aVf 

D. 

TTi  rpiijp'gi^  et. 

D. 

recti  rpmp-eTi, 

A. 

rm  TptTjo-eeCi  tj, 

G.  D. 

^/ 

Tots  TPl>!p'£CCq,  £<5  , 

V. 

arptiip-eq^ 

rxivrptyjp'£6lv,oiv. 

V. 

6)  rpiinp-eeg.  £/f. 

*Thr3  rule  applies  only  to  vferbs. 


"20     Third  Declension — Second  Form  of  Contracts. 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

TO  retx,-os. 

N.A.V. 

N, 

TCCTglX'tOti  V, 

G. 

r^iTf /%-f05j 

«, 

T6}  Tsix-eh  n-t 

G. 

rm  retx-i^v,  ui 

D. 

TO)  Tit^-ei, 

et, 

D. 

Toti  retx^eo-iy 

A. 

TO  retX'og, 

G.  D. 

A. 

Tet  reix'est,  t}, 

V. 

6)  retx-oi, 

TO/V  Tf<;k^-fO/v,e/v. 

V. 

o»  rgiX'^<*'->  V' 

Compounds  of  x^o<;  have  two  contractions ;  as. 


1st  Contraction. 

2d  Contraction 

N.     'HpcCiC?i'£7)S, 

>?«• 

G,   'HpflftxA-f£o$  fa$, 

£0i,      «5. 

D.    'HpocKX-£si  eet. 

si,     «'• 

A .    *H  fioLKX-etoc ,  itt , 

see,      1?. 

V.   -Hpax^-eig,  ^5, 

f«. 

1.  In  some  nouns  ending  in  eos ,  the  £  is  entirely  dropped;  as, 
(TSTfa^jG.  czs-eeo?  czr^s .  Sometimes  they  are  otherwise  con- 
tracted ;  as  assTiii^  o-zs-^i, 

2.  The  Attics  often  change  5*  of  the  accusative  singular 
jnto  flc ;  as,  tv(peci,tv<pu,. 

3.  Proper  names  in  jj^-fog,  and  compounds  of  £t«5,  a  year, 
often  take  the  form  of  the  first  declension,  in  the  accusative 
and  vocative  singular,  and  the  nominative  and  accusative  plu- 
ral; as, 

0/  AefMrdevocij      r«$  Asf^otrhvx^. 

Second  Form  of  Contracts. 

Two  terminations,  ig  feminine,  a  few  mascu- 
line *  and  common ;  l  neuter. 


Third  Declension — Third  Form  of  Contracts 
Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  ra  o(pe€, 
G.D.To/v  o^iotv,o<pe£fiv 


21 


Sing. 

N.  0   o^/f , 
G.  riio<p-eei,  eoeq^ 
D.  Teo  o<p-ei^  ei, 
A.  T«v  o<Ptv^ 
V.  Of  o(pi» 


Plural. 

N.  ot  o<^-ff$,  eh, 

G.  TOfi  0^£«V, 

D.  rot^  c<peTt, 
A.  tS5  o^-fac$,  f/$, 
V.  a>  o^«$,  etg. 


Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

G.  o-/yjj;r-<o5,  f^^S,  N.  A.  V,  c-<y;j^/f.           G.  c/vjjtt-i^v,  f^y, 

D.  c-«/;j5r-J/,  <5  f/,  D.  <rty9)7nrt, 

A.  r;v>jx/,  G.  D.  G-ivi}T-toiV,  Cfjv,     A.  a-<y)77r/fl6, 

V.   ^tvijTrt.  V.  o-/y);9r/fl6. 

The  terminations  eof^;,  et,  eatv,  ih,  belong  to  the  Attics,  and 
are  most  in  use  ;  the  other  to  the  Ionics. 

Third  Form  of  Contracts. 
Three  terminations,  evg^  rg,  masculine  ;  v  neii- 


ter. 

Sing. 

G.  Tit  (oeCTtX-eoi^  C^^'s) 
D.  to;  ,)3<«cr/A-f<,  f7, 
A.    Toy  /3«cr<A"«f«, 

Sing. 

N.  0  TTeXsK'vg,  I 

G.  ra  ^fAf>6-fo$,  (fas)' 
D.  TO)  TTeXiK-it^  el, 
A.  Tov  TreXsK'VV^ 

V,  6)  TTsXsX-U, 
XT  ^'°^- 

In.  To  «r7-t;, 

G.  m  ccTj-ecg,  (f^  ) 

D.  rai  ctTJ-e'i,  ilj 

A.   TO  CCt]-Vj 
V.  ^  Oi^l'V, 


Dual. 
N.  A.  V. 

T6;  ^etTiX'iiy  rj^ 

G.  D. 

To^y  j3«(riA-5o<y. 

j^  Dual. 
N.  A.  V. 

T6^  TTcAfit-ff,  ^, 

G.  D. 

To;y  TTeMK-eoiv. 


Dual. 
N.  A.  V. 

G.  D. 

To/v  «tf5-7-foiy. 


Plural. 

G.  T^y  ^XTiX'e6)?y 
D.  T©<$  liccctX-ev^t, 
A.  r«6  /3;tfr/A-fflf«,  ei$, 
V.  a  ^xa-iX-ecS)  «§. 

Plural. 

N.  ot  TTeXeK-eg^f  st^, 
G.  Tfijy  TTiXeicem, 

D.  T0i$    ^£AfJC-e5-<, 

A.  TUs  veXsK-ecci^  el^  j 
V,  a  TeXsic-eeij  eig. 

Plural. 

N.  rx  xrl-ex'.  rj, 
G.  Ta;v  <»5-/-f&;y, 
D.  TO/ 5  xrl-eTt^ 
A.  Tic  x^l-£oe>^vj^ 
V.  <y  xcrlsoc,  r. 


22    Third  Declension — 4^A  and  5th  Form  of  Contracts. 


1.  The  Attic  genitive  e^f^  is  most  in  use. 

2.  Some  nouns  in  evg  pure  are  otherwise  contracted  ;  as, 
'/^oevg.  Gen.  Aid6<»>«,  ;tJ«J$  or  ;^ou5 .    Ace.  p^oe*,  x^^' 

Some  nouns  in  t/$  make  the  genitive  in  voi  dative  t;/,  nom- 
inative and  accusative  plural  u^  ;  as,  t^^vg  e/o$,  vi,  N.  and  A.  PL 

Fourth  Form  of  Contracts. 
Two  terminations,  (og,  o,  feminine. 
Dual. 


Sing. 

G.  rJJ5  0si^-oog^  otf$, 
D.  rj)  <p£t^'oi,ot., 
A.  r«;v  (psf^'ox,  <y, 


N.  A.  V.  rot.<Piihoiy 
G.  D.  Tflt/v  pti^-cn. 


Plurai; 

N.  «i<  Ou^'ot, 
j  G.  TA>v  (p£i^-av, 
I  D.  ra/5  pei^-otg, 
I  A.  ri«5  0ei^'ovgy 
!  V.  «  <pu^-oi. 

1.  There  are  only  two  nouns  in  «?  of  this  form,  «/Jft;$  and 
«^6;;,  which  are  rarely  found  out  of  the  singular. 

2.  The  dual  and  plural  have  the   form  of  the  second  de- 
clension. 

Fifth  Form  of  Contracts. 

Two  terminations,  a$  pure,  and  pag,  neuter  gen- 
der. 

Singular. 


N.    To     KSpXg^ 

G.  TH  Kepoclog, 

tceouoi  J 

XipZ^ 

D.    TO)  K£px]ty 

>tf/j(«/, 

KipZ. 

A.    TO   Kspxg. 

V,  ^y  >cf^flt$. 

Dual. 

N.  A.  V.   r^  Kepxle, 

>t£0^£, 

KipX, 

G.  D.   TOiv  Kspxhiy, 

Plural. 

Kip^^r. 

Is.  Tei  KepecJXf 

;cf^ise<«, 

nepoi. 

G.  r<wv  KSpxiAfVf 

«gpfi*«yv, 

icepav. 

D.  TO/5  K£pcc<rt, 

A.  raft  Kspxlx, 

«£/>£««, 

XipZ. 

V.  ft>  Kspciloe., 

»f,p«eoe, 

KSpS^ 

Third  Declension—'  Contractions, 


23 


Some  nouns  are  contracted  by  the  omission  of 
a  vowel ; 

1.  In  every  case  ;  as,  xepeovy  xevov. 


EXAMPLES, 
€QlV. 
Sing. 
N.  xtv-eav,  a>v. 

fap. 

N.   eeepy  rjp, 

G.   expcg',rpoi,  &LC. 


aag. 

Sing. 

G.  A««»0$,  A^0$,  &C. 

dig. 

G.  k^ocih^i  ^ccocqy  &C. 


2.    In  part  of  the  cases ;  as,  Ovyarrjp,  ArnjtYiryjp^ 
avrjpf'^  7taryjp9  f^>7ry/p,  yoLarripJ 


EXAMPLES. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N.  6vyccl'Vpi 

jN.  6vyctispe^.  pei, 

G.  Bvyul-epo^,  p6^y 

N.A.V.  6pyu}-(p£^p£^ 

G.  $vyxl-epav,  pay^ 

D.  Bvyccl-ept^  pi, 

\  D.  evyul'pccTi, 

A,  6vyet'}'ipot,  pcci 

G.  D.  ^vyul-epoivypoiv. 

1  A.  Svyccj-epy,^,    Petti: 

V.  $vyui'Sp. 

1  V.  $vyechepes,  peS' 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N.  etv-vp. 

N.  «y-c^f5,  (J'/Jf?, 

G.  *v-f^d$,  J)e<»«5 

N.A.V.  «v-£^£,  J>f, 

G.  «v-f^<yv,  JjOtfwy, 

D.  uv-spit  i'pi. 

D.  eitv-^pe6<ri, 

A.  etV'ipoc^  ^pXi 

G.  D.   etV'spolv,  ^poiv. 

A.  «v-f^fid5,  J/J«$, 

V.  ^v-.^ 

V.    <«»-£^f$  ,  JjOf$. 

♦  otv>jp  inserts  tT,  because  v  never  immediately  precedes  p. 

t  TTATup^  fA,>irnp^  ycta-T)fp^  have  no  contraction  in  the  accusative  sinsjular, 
and  the  genitive  and  accusative  plural,  to  distinguish  them  from  ^otT/ioi, 
unrpoL^  yei7T^(t^  of  the  first  declension. 


M 


Third  Declension — Contracts. 


N, 
G. 
D- 
A. 
V. 


Sing. 

vrccl'Spi,  ft, 

wafj-epa, 

vrttl'tp. 


Duai.  Plural. 

N.  A.  V.  ^ctl-epSj  pe,    G.  TTetl-i^m^ 


G.   D.  TTOcl-SpOtVy  pOlV. 


D.  vx]-petTif 
A.  TTul-epcc^i 

V,   TTxl-SpS^f  ps^. 


Taclrip  differs  from  Ttalyjp  and  [lyjlyjpy  bj  making 
the  dative  plural  yaalyjpau 

Some  nouns  are  contracted  only  in  the  nomin- 
ative, accusative  and  vocative  plural. 


Sing. 
N.  e^ig, 
G,  e^t^oi. 


G.  K?[et^oi, 


G.  opn6ciy 


ig. 
Plural. 
N.  e^-thi,      ^ 
A.  e^'t^xi,       > 
V.  sp'ihi,       ) 


eti. 


€Lg, 

A.  KX-et^ug,    N 
V.  jtA-f<JV$,     ) 

N.  o^v'i6eq, 

A.   O^V-<^fit$, 

V.  o§v-t6eg, 


«'«. 


Sing. 

N.  v*t;5) 

G.  V«o$. 


PluraL 

\  N.  v-«»f5, 
A.  y-flca$, 
V.  v-om, 


>  ^«5. 


t)$. 

N.  /3<.7f  f«, 

N.^,7 

G./3«7fW5. 

A.  ;3.7( 

V.  ^,7 

^^, 


ng. 

N.  p-«$, 

A.  (i-oiCt, 


'  i^5'. 


N.  >t«Aar/5,  j  N.xaA«r-/JV$  , 
G.ic«Aw<^o$.   A  xflsA«r-/^«$,  )  f/5. 

I  V.  KCCXTV-t^i^^ 

Ef/^f5,  KXtihq,  o^vtee<;,  &c.  seem  to  have  been  contracted  to 
avoid  the  unpleasant  concurrence  of  the  letters  ^5,  ^$,*  which 
were  not  sufficiently  separated  by  the  intervening  short  vow- 
el. This  could  not  be  done  with  the  genitives  xAe/<5d$,  6pt0oi, 
e^t^os^  because  it  would  destroy  their  characteristic. 

*  Vide  rule  iv.  page  5. 


Irregular  Nouns,  25 

IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 
Irregular  Nouns  are  either  defective  or  redundant. 

Defective. 

Some  are  altogether  indeclinable. 

1.  Names  of  letters  ;  as,  to  otX(poc  ;  ra  dXpci, 

2.  Cardinal  numbers  from  Ttrg^li  to  '£x,et]cv, 

3.  Poetic  nouns,  which  have  lost  the  last  syllable  by  apo- 
cope J  as.  To  ^of  for  a'c^i^cc. 

4.  Proper    names   derived   from  other  languages  ;  as,  o 

Feminines  are  sometimes  declined  ;  and  those  which  have 
taken  Greek  terminations  ;  as,  o  Isckco^c^. 

Some  have  only  one  case  ;  as,  N.  ^&'$,  a  house.  V.  &>  rcev, 
friend.  Dual,  ec-ce,  eyes.  Plu.  G.  'g^^^y,  of  good  things.  V. 
£0  UoTTot,  O  Gods. 

Some  have  two  cases  ;  as,  N.  a<$,  a  lion.  A.  A/v,  or  A/vct,  N. 
(p$ote^  or  (p6otq,  cakes  ;  A.  (p^oixi. 

Some  neuters  have  the  same  word  in  three  cases  ;  as, 
N.    A.    V.    ovofc^,  <JVitt«5,  o(peXiq^  fipe'ioe,<i  r-^os -,   i£X^6)^^  Xezrcci,  &C. 

Some  have  the  Singular  only  ;  as,  yv,  uv.^^  ecA^,  ttv^. 

Some  have  only  the  plural ;  as,  names  of  festivals  and  some 
cities.    AicwTict,  Bacchanalia  ;  A^Tjvecf,  Athens. 


Redundant. 

I.  In  the  nominative, 

1.  Of  the  same  declension  ;  as, 

«7  ecvlihlo^y         TO  oivft^ajov,  an  antidote. 
0  ^vyo^^  TO  ^vyov,  a  yoke. 

0  c-'ia.hoq'i  TO  o-lot^iov^  stadium,  &:c.. 

In  the  plural  of  the  second  declension  ;  as, 
•  ^eciLt^g,  a  bond  ;   et  ho-f^t^    ra,  hrf^t. 
0  KVKXoq-i  a  circle  ;   oi  y^vK^ct ,  rx  KVKXec. 
0  A£/%vo$,  a  candle  ;  «<  xt^x^<^h  '^<«  Xvx'^ec. 
Names  of  Gods  and  Men,  being  much  in  use,  are  more  re- 
dundant than  others.     Jupiter  is  reckoned  to  have  had  ten  ; 
Zfvj,  Aei;?,  Vihv^,  Zo:§,  Z3j$,  A/?,  Z;jv,  Z<«y,  ^^y  Auv.      These,  how- 

4 


2^8  Irregular  Nouns. 

eyer,  diifer  only  in  dialect,  and  may  be  reduced  to  two,  A;^- 
and  Zjjv,  which  alone  are  declined. 

N.          G.          D.          A.  W 

At5,      }      A/d$,        Au,         Aloe,  

Zevq^      )  ZfV, 

Z35V,                Z>;vo$,         Z;js//,         Z;jVft:,  

2.  Of  different  declensions  ;  as, 

rj  (io}\>},  e  /3oA«5,     a  thrOW. 

^  ecTs-gpcty       0  sc-3s-£pciy  evening, 
4  yi»j7,  ro  y/xo$  -fo$ ,  victory, 

c  yot/5-v«y,        0  voZ^'Voog^    mind. 

II.  Redundant  in  the  oblique  cases,  while  the  nominative 
is  the  same. 


N. 

Gen. 

Gen. 

^  Ayti, 

Ay/tf$, 

Ay/^cs, 

A^is. 

c    A^K9, 

Afy, 

A^})lc^, 

A^fflS,  Mars. 

0   M'ijy^r.S, 

-xii, 

-XJj7e?, 

a  mushroom. 

0    fe^5, 

f^fi;, 

ffA>/o€, 

love,  ike. 

From  these  redundant  nouns  must  be  distinguished  those 
which,  with  different  terminations,  have  different  meanings  ; 
as,  0  <r<7«$y  grain  ;  to  o-tlev,  food. 

Some  nouns  are  peculiar  to  dialects  ;  as,  v  ?rvA>j,  a 
Comm.  r  TryAof,  Ionic. 


NOUNS  DERIVED  FROM  OTHERS  FOR. DISTINCTION  OF  SEX. 

Nouns  are  often  derived  from  other  nouns,  for  distinction 
X)f  sex. 

1.  In  the    first  declension,  the  feminine    is    formed    by 
changing  ?;$  into  ii-i$ei,B.nd  ry^  into  T/$-r<^6$,  r^ni-rfn'^cq  or  r^icc, 

Masc.  Fern. 

o  Sxt/^y-s.  a  Scythian.  37  Sxi^^/5-<<^5  a  Scythian  woman, 

•  ;r^o(^«75i$,  a  prophet.  r^  w/>o^37/./5-7/Jo5,  a  prophetess. 

o  uv^rri,  a  piper.  ^  ctvXTJlpi^'Ipiocg,  a  female  piper. 

0  -'l^uxki,  a  singer.  tj  -^f/etxlpisc,  a  female  singer. 

♦  A/?  has  become  obsolete. 


Patronymics-,  -'/ 

A  lew  are  formed  from  «?  ;  as,  rj  nxvlg,  from  o  vcocvici-,,  h 
young  man. 

2.  In  the  second  declesion,  05  is  changed  into  a  ov  r  :  nad 
somethnes  into  15-/^05  and  ecivu, 

Masc.  Fern. 

0  ^ovXoi ,  a  man  servant.  57  ^ot/A»j,  a  maid  servant. 

0  0fc$,  a  God.  17  Osot,  a  Goddess. 

Jj  ff«.vc5.  17  «iM^v'$  '^0$,  a  lamb. 

0  XvKog^  yj  >^VKecivct,    a  woll. 

In  the  third  declension,  av  is  changed  into  ec(vu  ;  »;5,  |,  -v^ 
into  Td-oi  ;  fai«,  into  f/£«,  a,  or  /c-^c  ;  t/»-,  into  v-yrx, ;  jj^.  and  ar-, 
into  5/fcfc  ;  &>$,  into  a/ii,  ai^n  or  ^5* 

0  Ac-^v,  a  lion.  57  Mdivx,  a  lioness. 

0  K^j;.',  a  Cretan.  r,  Ks^jc-r^,  a  Cretan  woman. 

0  kIa/|,  a  Cilician.  n  lOA/c-c-.-*,  a  Ciliclan  woman. 

c  f^aTiMv^y  a  king.  Yj  SxtiXhu^  a  queen. 

c  (ra]'/-^^,  -sy  (rulti^a^  a  Savicur. 

1.  Sonie  masculines  have  many  fominines;  as,  0  6?cr.  V  9fst,  i»ef^im. 
6  ^di<TiKwq^  kins:.  *i)  QsLc-iXiiA^  fidi(7iXi(r<T:i^  ^u(jtKi?^  ^^TiMwd,^  queen. 

2.  A'lc-iently  Ihe  sariie  word  na?  used  in  both  genders  i  as,  c,  '»  05Cf. 

3.  Some  ofthebc  derivatives  dilfcr  iu  signification  ;  as,  «7cti/3»,  a  friend. 
»73t/pst,  or  «7flt^/>/f^  a  concubine. 


PATRONYMICS. 

Masculine  patronymics  are  formed  from  the  primitive,  b^ 

changing  the  termination  of  its  genitive  into  cch^,  iu.h,q  and  /<^\$. 

1.  Nouns  of  the    first    declension,  and  io<i  of  the  second, 

rhange  the  genitive  ^  into   oL^y><;.  Bodsm^,  Bops-y.,  Bops-uh^^  the 

?on  of  Boreas.     *Ha;o5,  'Ha^-»,  'HAf-^cJVs. 

2.  Other  nouns  change  the  termination  of  the  genitive  into 

S^y;^   :  as,  Koovoq-li.    KpcV'/Oy^i.    A/«|,  G.  AtotK'Ci,  AiXK-tiyj?.    N^cJa'^, 
N£5-7&^-d5,  N6r7ef-<^;.5* 

3.  But  in  «//  nouns  which  have  the  penult  of  the  genifive 
long,  the  change  is  into  n/J'rs  ;  as,  Acceplv^^-iii  A^^ipl'm^*'/^,  Al^u^- 
csvlc^y  Al>i(zvl'toih:i. 


^  8  Diminutives —  Ve  rhals » 

The  Ionics  form  their  Patronymics  in  ta>v  ;  as.  K^ovim  for  H^cvths^  from 
The  Eolics,  in  ctJ'io?,     '•Yfp&Jto?  for  'TfpsLt^f. 

Feminine  patronymics  end  in  /$,  a^,  r;Uy  ivv}  or  mn. 

1.  Those  in  /$  and  u^,  are  formed  from  their  masculines,  by 
casting  off  JV?  ;  as,  Ne^-lcpi^,  daughter  of  Nestor,  from  J^les-J^pi^ 
&>.g,  son  of  Nestor.      'H'Atag  from  'H\icch<;. 

2.  Those  in  m  are  formed  by  changing  the  nominative  of 
the  primitive  into  m,     XpuT-y,^^  XpuT-^iq,     Ka^/icog,  Koc^/^m- 

3.  Those  in  /v^  are  formed  from  nominatives  of  the  se- 
»jond  declension  in  05  impure,  and  of  the  third  form  of  con- 
tracts, in  the  third  declension  ;  as,  A<^^i«>-7o5j  A^^utJivt^.     Hy^- 

4.  Those  in  ajvjj,  from  nominatives  in  tog  of  the  second,  and 
.'^yy  of  the  third  declensions  ;  as,  Ua^iog,  ly^a^ianj.     Hf7/<jyy,  Hg- 

DIMINUTIVES. 

1.  Masculine  diminutives  end  in  ixg,  «|,  /v?;?,  /Ao$,  vXog,txmi 
ir/.ci)  &^c.  ;  as,  TTcAi^zTiccc^^  a  little  father,  from  7Fcfs:rzrotq^  a  fa- 
ther, &c. 

2.  Feminine  diminutives  end  in  scg,  /?,  /y|,  vXt},  ux^rj-,  ix^r,, 
iry.y}  ;  as,  fc^nvcc,  a  little  fountain,   from  Kpy,vr,,  a  fountain,  &c. 

3.  Neuter  dimiautives  end  in  /*»,  et^i^^^  i^-v,  ^x/>y^  ^/?^/av  t^u/sy, 
«/.v;oy,  «^/oy,  ceT-zov,  <Scc.  ;  as,  5-7;y^:oy,  a  little  sparrow,  from 
rl^aC'cg^  a  sparrow,  &c. 

4.  One  primitive  has  sometimes  a  variety  of  derivatives  ; 
as,  from  x«^;;,    a  girl,  is  derived    Koei^K-r,^  y.ooa,"io't,  jcoPioy^  Ko^t- 


VERBALS 

are   general!}^   formed  by    casting  off  the  augment  of  their 
{)rimitives,  and  changing  the  termination 


*  Araplificalives  have  various  terminations.  Masculines  end  in  istc^, 
ns,  ^a^av/iif.liaving  a  great  beard,  from  Trceycv^  beard  :  In  cc  ;  diS.ctpvicg 
a  iuU  grown  lamb,  from  ^tp?,  a  lamb. 

Feminiaes  end  in  ts  ;  as  ^'xiriCi  a  great  torch,  from  tTitiV,  a  torch.  Neu- 
ters end  in  iov  ;  as^x^pjuaiSiov  a  e;reat  stone,  from  /JPf^^^,  a  stone. 


Verbals.  ^^ 

in  the  Firat  Person  of  the  Perfect  Passive, 
(^'    asye^.*^A^^,      I  from  yr/^ccf^uui. 
into  K^"^'     —y^ocf^'~y.y       > 

in  the  Second  Person  of  the  Perfect  Passiye, 
as  ooxtf^^rtx  from  ^g^oKif^Lxrai. 

in  the  Third  Person  of  the  Perfect  Passive., 
Masc. 

''T;?^,      as  x^^^^l^^  from  lax^onclcci. 
r^5,       —  TTotiflr.g       Tezs-oiifleet, 

Fern. 

/*r/c,      as  TTto-liq  from  Tnzs-giTlei.i, 

into  5^^*'    -'i^^"  \ 

K-TVo,      — C^X^(7i^<i      ) 

Neut. 


into 


i  Ttj^iov,  as  TTol'^iov    from  'xazs-o'l<j(,i. 


in  the  First  Person  of  the  Perfect  Middle, 
^  ev^y     as  Totcf'j^ ,     from  rfioiui, 

J  /ov,     —  A'>7;oj;        ?.£?.oyx, 

few  are  formed  from  other  Tenses  ;  a*-, 
Ae»»jw$,  from  the  Present  ^sv^q-co  ; 
'^<c^,i*'X'^->  fi'om  the  Perfect  nTcif 5r;j^is  ; 
^x;?,  from  the  First  Aorist  th-Ax, ; 
<pvyt}^  from  the  Second  Aorist  i^pvyfir, 

4"^ 


Adjeciivt 


ADJECTIVES. 
Adjectives  of  three  terminations. 

The  feminine  follows  the  first  declension  of 
nouns  ;  masculines  in  og,  the  second ;  all  other 
masculines,  the  third. 


og. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

N. 

K(A>^-oq, '/?,  «y, 

, 

N.  iCeiX-oi^  oLty  a, 

G. 

y.y^X'OV^  jj$,  oy, 

N.  A.  V.  x«A-^,  c«,  fi;, 

G.  KotX-m^  mj  Mv, 

D. 

KxX-ca^  7i,  OJ, 

D.  ;tfi6A-o/$jfl6/5,  0/5, 

A. 

>ti6A-(3V,  3JV,    OV, 

G.  D.  JC6fcA-0iV,  OJ/Vj  0<V, 

A.  xatA-flt;$  ,  «5,  et, 

V. 

K6i>i-S,    y}y  OV. 

V.  KU>i-of,  cii,  a. 

Adjectives  in  og  pure,  and  pog,  have  the  femi- 
nine in  a ;  as,  a^cog-a-ov.    fxax^og^  -xpa,  -xpov. 

Except  compounds  of  tt^^o^  and  adjectives  in  50$,  denoting 
matter  and  color  ',^  as,  x9^^^^h  *??  ^^  5  (poivixeo^,  jj,  ov  ;  also  the 
numeral  oyJda^. 


Sing. 
G.  f/,ccy'p-ov)  «5}  oy? 

D.   fJLU,Kp-COy    U)  OJy 

A.  fjucy-p'ov,  cftv,  ©y, 

V,   f/,»Kp'S,  £36,  OV. 


Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  f^y^y.p-U,  Uy  U 
G.D.  fA,CiKp'OlV,  CClVy  OlV^ 


Plural. 

N.  y^CCKp-Oty  Ctty   CCy 
G.  f^HTCp-OfV, 
D.   f^XKp'Olg^  uig,   Oi^y 
A.    f^ti^iCp'OV^y     U9i  flt, 

V.  f^xxp-oty   ccf,    et. 


1.  Some   adjectives   of  this   form  are   contracted   as  ; 

;^^pc-f 6$ -«$j  ;;iPvo*f»j-^,  ;^^pycr£6y  «v,  &C. 
ctcTA«o$-s$,  6ft5rAoJj-y',  6t55"Ao©v-»y,.&:c. 

2.  The  defective  adjective  c-oj^?,  or  c-J$,   contracted  from 
crxoi  or  (7605,  is  thus  declined  : 

Sing.  N.  0,  4  c^5»  (i?  «^i4)  '?'e  5-ifv. 

A.  roy,   T^y,  Td,  r^yv. 
Piur.  N.  o<,  fit/,  c-aTo/,  (o-.^,  <roi)  Tx  o-Zxy  (Tci* 

A,  rcv(iy  rxg,  o-as,  rx  c^x,  cu. 


yj^YM 


Except  when />  precedes  «5? ;  as,  etpyvpio;^ -a-ov  ;  also,  y-tpAfAiCi  and 

FCC. 


Adjectives  4 


31 


3.  These  four,  <tAAd$,  rtj^Koulo^^  rdT^vloiy  and  roiovlcg^  have 
the  neuter  in  o  ;  as,  c»aao5-jj*«. 

4.  Derivatives  and  Compounds   have  commonly  but  two 
terminations  ;  as,  <?,  ^  ct0otvujo<i,  ro  ot$xyctJov, 

6.  The  Attics  commonly  give  but  two  terminations  to  ad- 
jectives of  this  form  ;  as,  <>,  57  x(xAo$,  to  KotMv, 


Sing. 

N.  o|-v$,   Hoc,  V, 

G.  ol-EOi,   5/56$,  fO$. 

D.  6^-eiy  eiy  itoi-i  iij  el, 
A.  o|-t/y,       ficev,  t;. 

V.   o|-t/,  f/flC,      V. 


vg. 
Dual. 

N.  A.  V.  ' 
G.  D. 

o^-sctvj  eoctV)  eoiV) 


Plural. 

N.  o|-ff$,  f;$,  5/^/5  ecc, 
G.  o^-tm<i        etctfv,  eoji, 

A.  ©|-fc6$,  fls,  £<««$)    fCC. 

V^.  o|-ff$ ,  eliy  etoti,  etc. 


1.  The  Poets  often  make  the  accusative  of  the  masculine 
and  feminine  singular  in  ex  ;  as,  uhu,  T^oflu,  for  uoutc^i  Tropliv ; 
ivpexTTovlov,  for  evpv)i  ttovIgv, 

2.  Words  belonging  to  this  form,  are  sometimes  used  with 
only  two  terminations  ;  as,  0;jAt;$  iiprt},  Od.  f,  4G7. 


Sing. 

N.  (K'COV,   HTu^  OV, 

G.  Ik-ovIo^j  Sic-;j$,  ov7o5, 
D.  ix.'0vl4,  acyiyoyjt, 

A.    iK-ovlx,    HTCCV,  Of, 


idV. 
Dual. 

N.  A.V. 

eK'oiJe,  iicrxyovje, 

I         G.  D. 
sK'ovloiy,ii(rutv,ov}oiv. 


Plural. 

N  .  EK'OvltZ,  iiO-Xiy  Ovlu, 

G.  tK-ovleov,  HTMy,  ovlckiv, 
D.  eK'Hr^,  iiTxig,  iis"/, 

A.   tK'Ovlxi,  «5'flt$,   Ov7«, 


Sing. 
N.  TT'Xs  5  UTx,  ay. 
G.  5r-  c6yro5 ,06r^5,fl6yTo5. 
D.  :r-fl6VT;,  arjj,  xvTt. 
A.  7r-c4V7cc,  actftv,  ctfy. 


ac. 
Dual. 

N.  A.  V. 

Tr-avTi,  XTX,  xire, 
G.  D. 

'T-xyroCi^xrxiy'iXvroiv 


Plural. 

N.  9r-tf5vr£5,  xTXt^  xvru. 
G.  Tr-flcvTA^v,  cc5-<i;v,  <:fcvrA;v. 
D.  7r-a,Ti,  fit7"fii;$,  ctir/. 
A.  7r-£tvra$ ,  uo-aq^  xvrx. 


*  After  this  form,  the  Participles  of  the  Present,  1st  Futurej  and  2d 
Aorist  Active,  are  declined. 


32 


Adjectives. 


etg. 
Dual.  Plural. 

>>■'.  A.    V.         |N.  ;;^id/>/-£vn5,50->-^/,£vr«. 

s^'^c.  D.  xctpi'ei(rt^  evr^i^^  £i!r(. 

A.  %<»/)/-fvri«$,?cc<«$  fvr^t. 


G.    D. 


yj^' 


Sin 


N, 
G. 
D. 
A. 

V. 


N. 

G. 

N. 
0. 
D. 
A. 

V 


S  '^ruL-m^  and  >  ^ 

<  ;  >  rr-ciy  rv. 


lllg. 

7lU.~rjV7t,    TJTTTl,   rVTi* 

'^ruL'h^  and  , 

Dual. 

A.  V.  nu^-hrsr,  fj-rroi,  rvT£» 
D.  T/tt-:^vroiV,  y75*i-5t/v,  r-yroiv, 

Plurai. 


'  ^T-aroCy  8», 


isg. 
Sing.^ 

G.  7r}ise.x,-hroi  ,  tia-^rt]^  ,  avra^-. 
D.  7r>ifi:x-avr/,  ^crc-)^,  ^vr/, 
A.  '?rA«as>::-?vrc«,  «(5*<ytf£v,  «v. 
y    ^  t^Atftf^-sv  and  I 

Dual.' 

N.  A.  V.  7r>i(ZK"^vTe,  HT(rXy  Svre, 

G.  D.  ^Aipfejt-^vra/v,  ^i"C"<j6/v,  svloiv. 

Plural. 

G.  5rA£^«-«yTA'y,  HT(ra)v^  ^vrcjif, 
D.  crA5c»-»5*<  J  H^^j-aii  ^  «crj. 
A.  7r/.fl6x-«yroc$,  so-jt^,  avr^e. 
V.  ;rAflJx-«vn$  ,  ^rToii^hra* 


EXCEPTIONS. 

M<Ai<5  and  r<:«Aas«  borrow  their  feminine  from  the  obsolete 
,M.£A«<vo5  and  7fltAi«/vo5  ; 

Sing.  I  Dual. 

D,  itfA-«tv/j     «/y4j,   «v/. 
A.  lA.u^X'Utx^  aivo^v,  ocv. 


G.  D. 


Plural, 

G.  |M.eA-o6y<yy,  fic/yo/y,  s^v^iyv. 
D.  /K<£A-(at(r/.  uivc&iq^  r^c•/. 
A.  ,M.fA-£«y<*5,  c«<V5C$,  oftyflf. 


In  like  manner  rccXocc^, 


*  Ti/x)iug  has,  in  the  voi^ative  case,  ri^uifiv  and  "ttfAyiu,  whence  we  have 
rifj.h  and  TtfAV)  in  the  contracted  fcum. 
t  Contracted  from  ttka-icow  and  '^/^y-oit^  the  vocative  of  rhdncti;. 


Adjectives. 


33 


Mfycfts  is  properly  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number 
only  : 

Masc.  Femin.  Neut. 

A.  f^eyetv,  f^eyu. 

V.  fteyec,  f^eyci. 

The  feminine  gender,  with  all  the  other  cases  in  the  mas- 
culine and  neuter,   is  borrowed  from  the  obsolete  jw-fy^A-os, 

Dual. 
N.  A.  V. 

G.    D. 

f>L$yX}rO{Vi  UtVj  oiV. 


Sing. 
N.|ttfy-flC5,     aAjj,    cc* 
G.  ^fyaA-aujj;?,      ot;. 
D.  ^_5y«A-to,  >],       a;. 
A.  ^«y-«v,      «A»;v,  <x. 


Plural. 
N.  f>isyccX-ot^  uiy  ot' 
G.  iU.«yfliA-»v,  AJV,  a;v. 
D.  jM,5y<«A-o(5,  «<$,  0/5. 
A.  jMxyaA-6t;$,  <*5,  «. 
V.  .«.fy<*A-o/,    a/}     flc. 


HoAy;  is  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number  only  : 
M.  F.  N. 

N.  ;rcAy$,  To>iV, 

A.  :roAfVj  tto At/. 

V.  ^TflAi;,  ;roAf . 

The  feminine,  and  all  the  other  cases  in  the  masculine  and 
neuter,  are  borrowed  from  the  obsolete  ttoAA-cj,  ;;,  oy. 

Dual. 

N.  A.  V. 

7roAA-A>,    ec,      w, 

G.  D. 


Sing. 

N.  TTOX'V^,      A/J,     V.     . 

G.  ^flA-Aov,  A;jCj  Aof. 
D.  ^oA-Ao;,    A^,    Ao;. 
A.  TToA-t/v,      A;;Vj   i;. 
V.  TToX-v,     At;)     :/. 


Plural. 

Is  ,    TToAA-fl^,     (£/)     cc, 

G.  9roAA-ft'»)  ft/y,    a>v. 
D.  7roAA-fl<?,  <»/$,    Of?. 
A.  TTdAA-of?,  a$,    «. 
V.  ;roAA-o<j    (Jt/j    ci» 


1.  :5-oAts  is  sometimes  declined  regularly  by  the  poets,  like 
o|t/5 ;  as,  7roA-v$,  £<<«,  v,  &:c. 

2.  rioAAds,  ^oAAj;,  TToAAoy,  is  Sometimes  found  regularly  de- 
clinedin  all  the  case?. 


34 


Adjectives, 


TEPvJIINATlONS  PECULIAR  TO  PARTICIPLES. 

OV^  ovaa,  OVV^  2d  Future  Active. 

Ost  and  2d  Aorist  Passive,  and 
eigj  tiaa,  ev^  ^  2d  Conjugation  of  Verbs  in  ^/. 

ovq^  ovaa^  ov,  3d   ) 


^^5 


vaa,  vv,  4\h\^''''y^^^^'^''  ^'^  ^^^^^  i«  ^^• 


*6)$,  ocra,  (jg, 

.  Sing. 

A.  rvT-ovvlce^  ^rav,  «v. 

Dual. 

N.A.  V.    rvTr-ouvl £ ,  ifCTi 


CO 

'T. 

, 

rt 

o 

ai 

tfi 

^>    r^ 

e 

OJ 

c 

o 

'^ 

0^ 

u< 

Q 

a 

Ci 

'    rt 

:y75. 


G.  D.  ruTT-cvy'^oiv,  ti^xiv,  ^vjoiv. 
Plural. 

G.  Tt;:T-efv7<2yv,  ^y&fVf  iivlav, 
D.  ry:T-o^J-/,  bJ-rH<;^  a^-/. 
A.-Tt;;T-'Sy>7(«??  ^^v-^:*?,  ^»'7<J«. 
V.  re/?r-^fj'7£5}  ^r^/,  frv7<Jfr 

G.  ^(<^-ov7c5,  oi;5'^?,  ov7cf. 

D.  ^t^'Ovll,  ^VTVi^  cilt, 
A,  ^i^-ovl^i  ous-ccv,  Of* 
V.  h^-ovi,  gvtu,  ov» 
Dual. 
N.  A.  V.  h^-ovje,  ovs-x,  ovle. 
G.  D.  h^-ovloiv,  oVTaiv,  ov'^oiv. 
Plural. 

N.  S't^-ovlei,  'ovrcii,  o/jat. 
G.  h^-avlojv^%v'^cai^  oijcoi, 
D.  ho'-'o'jTt^  'ova-ott?,  'cVTf, 
A.  ^i^-ovloig,  oyc-^5,  ov7«. 


Perfect  Active  and  Middle. 
Perfect  Middle  Ionic. 

Sing. 

N.  rv(pQ-ii^,  tta-ot^  ev, 
\G.  rv<p$-£v]cg,  £/r;j$,  fy7fl$. 
D.  rv06-e-Pn^  si(^{l,  ev'Ji. 
A.  'rv(^0-£v1o6,  eio-ecv,  £V, 
V.  7vp&-£'g,  nTcc,  ev. 

Dual. 
N.  A.  V.  ru^d-£v]£,  sto-st,  evls. 
G.  D.  Tv(p&'evlnv,  sto-cciv,  iiiotv, 
!  Plural. 

:N.  rv00-cvl£i,  £(Txt,  tilet. 
G.  Tv.p9'ev]afV,  ets-oifV,  tvlav, 

D.   rvdyi-stCt,   SlTu!^)    £t<^t, 

[A.  rv0d-£vlotg^  £iTu^,  £ylu» 

jV.  ry^(/-fV7^5,    £lTCCt,£v'jGC. 

vg. 


Sing 

D.  ^svyv-vvlt,  vo-y]y  vvft* 
A.  ^owyvf  v7cd,  yP'tfcy.  «v» 

Dual. 
N^.  A.  V.  <^£vyv-vv]£,  vreCy  vvj:-, 

G.    D.  ^€vyv-VV']0!V,  VTXlVy  Vy]0(V 

Plural. 

N.  ^:vyv-t;y7e5,  fC-cc(,  fy7«. 
G.  <^svyy-vv]^Vf  vcroiv^  uv'im. 

D.    ^£Vyy-VITl^    VCTcti^^    VTl, 

A.  ^evyv-wlug,  vcu^,  wl^.. 
V.  ^fvyv-i/v7f$,  y^^i,  vvjoi. 


*C©ntracltd  riom  *^?)  «t-t/;«t,  ai.cf . 


Adjectives, 


Sing. 
G.  rerv^'ojo^,  vicii  ,  o]oi  , 

D.    T£7v<p-cll^    VIU,    oil. 
A.    TeTvC'-oloC^VICCV,    0(5. 

y .  TjTf .^ -<y$ ,  v;a ,  d^ . 

Dual. 
N.  A.  V.  nrvP'ole^  ttUy  ^ 
O.  D.  TeTvip-oioiv^  vixtv,  < 

Plural. 
N.  rfrt;^-oT{r$,  vtoti,  olu. 
G.  T£Tvp-oJMV^  vtav,  eiaiv, 

D.   TiTVCp-OTi^  VtCtiq^    CO-i. 
A.    T£TV<P'oloti,    VixiyolcC. 

V.  Tert^p-tfTff,  vioci^olGC. 


ug  comrSCtcu.  ^^ 

Sing.  ^ 

N. 

f5-r-C?,  6;5"i«,  &5. 

G. 

eCT-6;T0$,  ao-^js,  Jto^, 

D. 

eerz-coTt,  ccfry^^ooTt, 

A. 

iGT'u'Tot,  axruvy  ai  . 

V. 

Dual. 

oit. 

N. 

A.  V.   IcT-SfTe^  aroc^ars. 

cjoiv. 

G. 

N. 

D.  (O-T-fi/ro/v,    aa-cctv,  aToiv 

Plural. 
fC-r-fi/Tfj,  aroci,  arse. 

. 

G. 

'iG-r-OfTdfy^   fi/C&'V,  COTUV. 

D 

'(Tr-ua-i^  alrut^y  air:. 

A. 

eCT  arui,  ao-^c^^  a  ret. 

V, 

eo'T-aTe(i,  acrxt,  a  Toe. 

Adjectives  of  Uvo  Terminations. 


Sing. 


M.andF. 

N 

N.   np-rjV, 

IV. 

G.   rep — fvof. 

D.   rep £vt. 

A.    rep-£vet^ 

fV 

V.    np — fv. 

Sing. 
M.andF. 

N.  f^eyet^jfT-ap, 

G.    fCfyiJCAjjT 5^)65, 

D.  /twyaA;5T — opt. 
A.  f,i£ya.XY,r-opet^ 
V  .  «.  e  y cs  A;yT — 4  0 . 


N. 

op. 


EXAMPLES. 

r,v. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.andF. 

IS. 

N.  A.  Y.r£P'2fs, 

G.  rep — e^m. 

ev«t. 

G.  D.  r£p'£\Qiy. 

D.  rep — to'i. 

• 

A,  rtp-evdi  , 

fVOC. 

I 

V.  rep'tnq^ 

fy«. 

^)p. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.  and  F. 

N. 

N.  A.  V. 

N.  .tc£7aA>jr-o^f§, 

•^i«. 

^tyuMT-ope. 

G.  ^eyjtAJjr — ofl^yy. 

D.  fteycjAjjT oCTi, 

G.  D. 

A.  u^ya^.r'T'opcc'; 

opu. 

fjLsyctXy,r'opetv. 

rV,  f^eyct^iisr-opeq, 

OfCt 

>G 


Adjectives. 


ag 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.andF. 

N. 

M.andF. 

N. 

N.  ueiv-et^, 

ecv. 

N.  A.  V. 

N.  ccetv-avre?  ^ 

fitVTtfC. 

G.  ccetv — revTd?. 

usiv'ccvrs. 

D.  u£tv — uvrt. 

D.  uetv — uci. 

A.  tciiv-uvrcc, 

av. 

G.  D. 

A.  usiV'Xvraq, 

(styTi^. 

V.    OtStV flCV. 

ciStvetVTetv, 

ig. 

V.  ustv-scvrsi. 

«VTfl6. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.andF. 

N. 

M.and  F. 

N. 

N .  ivxctp'iq. 

/. 

N.  A.  V. 

N.  evX'^P'i'^Bi , 

ira. 

J.  £V)CCtf^ — ircq. 

svx^P'ire. 

G.  ivx^P — irav. 

D.  £vxc^f> — in. 

D.    BVXup 10-1, 

A.  ev^otp-trct&L  iv, 

/. 

G.   D. 

A.  evxoiP'irceg, 

tret. 

V,  svxctp — /. 

tVXCtp-lTolV. 

vg. 

V.  evxccp-treg. 

tru. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.andF. 

N, 

M.andF. 

N. 

:^.    CC^CCKO'Vgy 

V. 

N.  A.  V. 

N.  u^cticp'vei ,  vq, 

vcc. 

G.  u^oCKp — voq. 

u^utcp-ye. 

G.  u^ccKp — var. 

D.    U^XKp Vt, 

D.  u^ufcp—vct. 

A.  etocc)cp-vV, 

:;. 

G.  D. 

A.  u^oCKp-vei^y  vq 

Vci, 

V,    UOCCKp-V. 

U^CiKp'VotV. 

ovg.^ 

V  .  OC^^UKp'VS?  ,    1/5 

,        t'^. 

Sin^. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.and  F. 

N. 

M.andF. 

N.. 

N.  ^TT-OVq, 

ovv. 

N.  A.  V. 

N.  ^TT-oSes , 

c^«. 

G.    hTT O^Oq, 

^ITT-oh. 

G.  ^/;r — o^<!yv. 

D.  ^i7r      0^1, 

D.    ^ITT—oG-t. 

A.  oiTs^'-od^a,  &  ot/v, 

fiVV. 

G.  D. 

A.    hTT-O^U?, 

oJcJ. 

V.    ^tTTtV^  k.  OU, 

ovv. 

^TT'O^OtV, 

V.    hTT^O^eq, 

6^^. 

♦  After  the  subslantives  of  whicli  they  are  compounded.  Thus,  atvocf- 
iif,  iiv  ;  G.  'Ovlof ;  D.  -ovli  ;  A.  -ov7a,  -«v.  Contracted  compounds  of 
nouns  of  the  2d  Declension  :  thus,  2yv-«c,  «v ;  G  -«  ;  1).  -«  ;  A.  -«v  ;  V. 
-»,  «v.     In  the  same  manner,  those  of /wvof ;  as,  eT/^vt;?,  &c. 


Adjectives. 


37 


Sing. 
M.andF. 

O,  evoo^ — ov» 
D.  ev^o^—oj. 
A.  £V<^o| — av. 


og. 
Dual. 
N.  M.  F.  andN. 


N.  A.  V.  fv^(,|-a;. 
G.  D.  ev^o^-otv. 


Plural. 
M.  andF. 

G,   £v<^(j| — av. 

D.    £vJo| 0<$. 

A.    £vJo|-(9t;$, 


N. 


Sing. 
M.  and  F. 

N.  evye-ai, 

G.  ffyf a;. 

D.  evyc — (f). 
A.  evye — av. 


Sing. 
M.andF. 

G.  fltA»j^ fd$, 

D.    oc?^& £<, 

A.  etXrj6-Scc^   rjy 


N. 


N. 


cog. 
Dual. 
M.  F.  and  N. 

N.  A.  V.  ffyf-6/. 

G.  D.  ivyt'cov. 


Dual. 

M.  and  F.N 


«§.;  N.  A.  V.  at>^6'U,  r. 

ei.\ 

£$.!  G.  D.  ct?\9}6-iotv,    civ. 


Plural. 
M.andF.      N. 
N.  evye — oj. 

G.  ft/yf Mv, 

D.  evye 6«j?, 

A.  ftiyg-^g,  fi;. 

V.  fl/yf Cfj, 


Plural. 
M.andF.     N. 
N.  x^$-e£<;,  f75,  ftft,  ^. 
G.  uM^ — S6)v^       m. 
D.  ctXyjQ — eTi. 
A.  atA>?^-f«$,  £<5,  £flf,  ^. 


Sing. 
M.andF. 

N.  y£/T-a>v, 
G.  y€tr — ovo$. 
D.  y£^r — ov/. 
A.  ye^r-ovaj, 
V.  yetr — o». 


N. 


Dual.  Plural. 

M.  F.  andN.  I     M.  andF. 

N.  yf/T-oVfs, 


N.  A.  V.  yeiT'on. 
'.'  G.  D.  yf<r-oyo<v. 


G.    ySiT 0V6}}>. 

D.  yeir — aTi, 
A.  yf/r-ov(3i5, 
V.  ysir-Q]f£q^ 


N. 


*The  Compounds  of  ?^»?,  y?x«c,  sometimes  those  of  x«;a?,  after  the  3d 
Declension.    tTt'fl-gp-ft'f,  ^v  j  G.  -a7o?  j  D.  -a?/  i  A.  -av*,  <i)v. 


Adjectives, 


Comparatives  in  cdv  are  declined  like  yetloj'^ 
except  in  the  accusative  singular,  and  the  nomin- 
ative,  accusative  and  vocative  plural. 


M.        F. 

Sing. 

N.     f^Sl^'CO)!, 
D.     f>C£l^-OVt, 

A.   futl!^-oVci  f^si^'Otc  futt^-aty 
V.   ftf/^-ov. 

Dual. 
N.  A.  V.  jM-f/^-ovf. 

G.    D,  f^it^'ovoty. 


N. 


l^iltov. 


f^ei^'ov. 


Plural. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 


f4f/^-(»V«  fA,H(^'0C6  f^nt^'^s 


f^eil^'Cveg  (A.ii^-ot<i  fut^-ov^,      f^u^-cvu  f^t^-ooc  t^tit^-eo. 

fA.ei^-omg  l^si^'ocii  f^etl^'H^, 
f^ei^-ovei  f^t^'oeg  f^et^-Hg, 
Some  substantives  are  contracted  like  fjuit^-oi  ;  as,  ATPdXXm^ 
Ace,    A7roX?^&>v»,  A^oAAo'a,  A7r«AAflf, 

Adjectives  of  two  terminations  are  sometimes  declined 
with  three  by  the  Poets  ;  as,  spijf^-og,  -v,  -av.  There  are  a  few 
which  commonly  take  a  distinct  termination  in  the  feminine  ; 
e>S,  Tf^-jjy,  -iivcCy  -«v.   oKeavi-oq,  -oc,  -ov. 

Compounds  in  33$,  and  especially  those  \n  ry,^,  have  only 
one  ending  ;  as,  vs^eXijyepsTug,  kc.  In  the  JEolic  and  Doric 
dialects,  they  end  in  ret  ;  as,  n^ptMye^eroi, 


Adjectives  of  one  termination. 

These  are  usually  masculine  and  feminine  ;   very  rarely 
neuter.     They  end  in,  ;»,  ^,  e-,  |,  ■;/',  ecpc,^ 


Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

M.  aail  F. 

N. 

M.  F.  N.        1 

M.  and  F. 

N 

N.     'TToXvX^'i* 

N.    cT«jAt;^p-ve;, 

var 

Ct,    9roAi/i«j5 — vo$. 

N. 

A.  V.  7roXvu(>-i£. 

G.    froXvstp — vofv. 

1),      TTOX'UCf.ri V;. 

D  .     TTO  XvUp O-i . 

A.    'TTCAVciP — yx, 

5. 

G. 

D.     'XQXvoCp'VOlV. 

A.    7roAftf6/)-v^5, 

VJ«. 

.    -r.^Xvxor.. 

V.    9r*At;ei*-v<:5, 

Vi^. 

Comparison  of  Adjectives.  39 

Comparison  of  Adjectives. 

Comparison  is  made  in  rfjx)g,  ra7og,  or  lov^  calo;. 

I.  The  comparative  and  superlative  are  form- 
ed by  adding  Ttpog  and  ra7ogto  the  positive  ;  as, 

(.caxapj  ^axap-lepogj  f.taxo^'lalog. 
anTiSg^  auTiSa-lspog^  a7t?M(y'la^og. 

-o;  drops  $  ;  as,  uMxta^,  f^uKpo-ypoq,  t^x^po'lajoi  ;  and  if  the 
penult  is  short,  changes  «  into  a  ;*  as,  e-otpo^,  G-o^a-lspo^^  <r3(pM- 

When  the  penult  is  doubtful,  i.e.  either  loni;  or  short,  it 
may  have  o  or  *  ;   as,  tKctvoi,  iKuvorepc^,  iKctvorurcq,  or  tKccvampc^, 

-sti  is  changed  into  f$  ;    as,  ^tcpiEi^,  x<*pi(^'l^poi  %f*^/fc--7«?o$. 

-x^,  -'/j^,  and  -t;?,  add  repa  and  retjo^  to  the  neuter, 

evpvq,   evpv-'Jepoi,  evpv-lccjoi. 

ui  and  -jjv  to  the  nominative  plural  ;  a<, 

<ra)0pm^  (ra0p6)}itG--1<po^^  (r^(ppdiygO''']tt%i^ 
rep7}v,  TtpivsiT'lspo^,  rf^£yfC--7<t7«f, 

-|  turns  -t4  of  the  nominative  plural  into  Krl(po<;,'  Krlaloi  ;  as, 

The  Attics  compare  many  adjectives  by  irrepc^,  ic-rccra^  ;  uir,- 
pcq^  eiiruToi  ;  ttrrtpoq^  ic-Totrct;  ;  the  last  in  common  with  th* 
Ionics  ;  as, 

II.  Some  adjectives  have  the  comparison  in 

iidv  and  idlog  ;  as,  rj^vg^  rihtov  r.hialog. 

*  Else  four  short  rowels  would  come  together.  To  avoid  ihret^ 
Homer  sometimes  Igngt^ens  a  short  one. 


40  Comparison  of  Adjectives, 

1.  Some  adjectives  in  o$,  derived  from  substantives,  have 
the  comparison  in  tm  and  /o*?©?,  formed  from  the  original 
word  ;  as, 

xaAo^,      (from  XfisAAo5-f05,)  x«(AA/6>v,  KxX>ii(rlti. 

sX^po^y    (from  f;>^^05 -f«5 .)    ex^'^^9     f;^^/^-/©^. 

otycjpoq^    (from  oiKJog-ov.^      oi^litjV)  eixlt^l^^' 

uto-^po^y  (from  aifrxo^-soSi)  uic^icov,  eci<rx'<^loi' 

f>Lctx.fiog,    (from  /M'Jjj&os-fa^,)     ^CijKim,  fJLviKt^loq. 
So,  fJLUpo^,  (from  the  verb  fjnoo,  ob.)  ftfio^v,  f^sKrleg. 

X€pr,s    (ob,)  X^'P^^^  Xi^Pi^'^^i- 

Some  adjectives  in  a   have  a  double  comparison  ;   as, 

?.   Some  adjectives  in  t;^  are  compared  in  both  ways  ;    as, 

^^''^^''     }^pAim,  ^pccMo^, 


The  termination  /«;»,  with  the  preceding  consonant,  is 
'■iften  changed  into  (rcrm,  and  by  the  Attics  into  rrm  ;  as, 

^         C  Bpec^iav, 

^^"^^'^     l/px^^^, 

I  rAX^w,\ 

(^^xrrav,  A. 
£>.ocxvi)        fAac-c-a;v,J  «Aflc;iiio*7«5. 

\     ^  ^  ft'pcclicrlo;. 

I  KpetT^wVi  A.  J 


»f«Ty$, 


♦  For  <pi?^clipcc^  <^tx<f}ct%c. 

t  Trt;:t^»v  became  fi^pc^av  by  trani^position  of  the  breathing;  (Vide  Me- 
tathesis, pa.^e  7,)  and  thence  Sjtc^^w. 
:}:  For  iha'^icev, 

§  For  '»x/av,  from  obsolete  Vy?. 
II  For  x?:*7/r.'^,  changed  into  Jfc^ctf-^-av,  and  Wfssrcrav,  and  lengthened  into 


Comparhon  of  Acljectrccs. 


i^r/ccq,  as  from  jttcyys,  makes  regularly  /ttgy/ajv,  .uey  0T35.  By 
the  rule,  f^eytav  becomes  f^zo-Tm^  and,  changing  c-s- into  (^,  (see 
yjage  4,)  ^^(Jdyv,  which  was  lengthened  into  f^u?^Mv  ;  so,  oA/yo5, 

4.    A  letter  is  sometimes  dropped  in  comparison  ;  as, 

pcthci,  pcciarty      pocicrjo^y    )  />        .     »  '^  y    'i 

^  \  f     r,  }  lor  pciidiu'i^   pc6idt(rlG5. 

pctm         pcc^lo^^     ^  '^  ^ 

^/A(j$,  ^t>Jepo<, ,  0/>i7fit7«$)  for  0t^lipoi,  (ptMlxlo^, 

TccXxioiy      7rcc?<onlepoqy      Tti^^culcijo^^  for 

Gspcio^-)        S!petl£po<;^       Oipstlulo^,  for 

Qspito^spo^j        Gipsiolcclo^i 
^fiAt/5,         vXitm  and  xAs^v,  7rA5;o*7«$,  for 

TTdAA/wv,       ^oA/^os. 

One  is  irregular  in  the  comparitive  ; 


Comparisons  from  the  Comparative  Degree 


x<siAA<a>y, 
Aaj^a^v, 

TrpoTspoi  , 


jCfltAA/fliTfPoj. 

A^tT£^fl$. 

fjuioTspot;, 
TrpoTipcciTepoi . 


ocoTepoVj 
'r.iTepov,  Ion. 
^^eip^'Tepov. 


From  the  Super  la  live. 


X^ipJf^lo?,  X^ipi^l^'^^'^if  J   »vMog,  KV^Q-lxToq  ;    gAie;::/o-7a$,  fA/y,v<r;"5 


jpo$  ;    TTparos  ^  7rpaTtir,c^, 
From  Subsiaiitives, 


^6i^tX£Vi  ,  ^XTlXivlipoq,  ^XTiXevlocloq, 


_  ,  <pMptP,tpc<iy       <Pafp6lxlo^. 

>t0xu.^t!g,  Kpxf^clspcg,  tcpxf^Qolocloi. 
7rAi})cJt:g,  7rXijKlt<r'jepog,  ttXtjkIitJx'Jgs. 
'rclr.q^  To]tT]se!ig,       TTollTjxles, 

From  a  Pronoun. 

tCVTtg, XVTo'Jxlc 


ptyog,     piyiav^ 
Kspacg,    xep^icav. 


KViia)V, 


oC'prg,      xptav, 


piyir^cg. 

Upiiicx  ' 


From  Verbs. 

Afti",  ;.<y/<*>v,  Aa^o-'V,  Aiyr^o^. 


^fflft',  (psprcprq^ 


"  Others  fjrm  these  comr^arisons  from  ^*Mf,  r  wearoru 


4-2 


Nuimrals 


From  a  Participle., 

spp6oiA.tu^y  ippMf^gnTJepoi^  ipp^/jLtsveOTeiroi, 

From  Adverbs, 


KC&TCify 

'^ocpo^ 

xvarspa^, 
y-ciTarspog, 
upc^prepoq, 
ev^oTepo^, 

ET&fTspog, 
B^UTipoq, 

,  TTecporep^g, 

Cyreprspog,  u? 
Cdipo^,      Co 

TTporepO^,      TT 

ccvaTciloi.        TrpoTco^ 
y^rcoTo&loti. 
ec^ocprotles.                ' 

es-aralos.         Troppu, 
TrctpoTocjoi,      ez-v^/, 

From  Prepositii 
rBprecro^^  by  Syncope 

oerotroi,  Syn.  TTpoctToq, 

TTpoTMrepoi 
{  eyyvnpc^, 

07r{c']ep6g, 

7ropfaT£po<;, 

Trpafiutrspe^y 

,  Trpoe-aretlog 
tyyvTctlof)* 
ByyKnoq, 

TTOpp^fTocloi-, 

Trpaixiroiloi 

Cttccto^. 

by  Contract 

NUME 

RALS. 

The  Greeks  used  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  to  denote 
numbers,  taking  «  for  one,  /  for  ten,  and  p  for  a  hundred. 
But  their  letters  being  only  twenty-four,  they  introduced 
three  other  characters  ;  Vau,  ^    6  ;  Cophe,  ^J^  90  ;  San- 

pi,  ^>   900.     Thousands  were  denoted  by  the  same  letters 
Afith  a -stroke  under  them  ;  as,  a.,  1000. 


a,  1. 

I,   10. 

p,   100. 

a,,  1000. 

ta, 

11. 

3,  2. 

X,  20. 

<T,  200. 

(3^,  2000. 

./?, 

12. 

y,3. 

?.,  30. 

T,  300. 

y,,  3000. 

ty> 

13. 

^,4 

fi,^0. 

V,  4«0. 

8,,  4^00. 

i6, 

14. 

v,  50. 

^,  500. 

f,    5000. 

le, 

15. 

?-,  6. 

P,  60. 

Z,  600. 

5-^,   6000. 

'5-. 

16. 

<,  7. 

0,  70. 

^l^,  700. 

t^,   7000. 

^r. 

17. 

r,  8. 

7t,80. 

u,  800. 

;?,   8000. 

t)7, 

18. 

e,  9. 

4,90. 

^,  900. 

e,  9000. 

id. 

19. 

1.  When  letters  are  used  to  denote  numbers,  an  oblique 
stroke  is  drawn  over  them  ;  as,  <&',  1;  /3',  2. 

2.  The  first  letter  in  the  name  of  a  number,  was  some- 
times put  for  that  number  ;  as,  I  for  /«,  from  f^tu,  one  ;  IT, 
from  TTsyTij  five  j    D.  from   h^cuj  ten  j    H,  from  HEKATON-. 


Kumcrals* 


%^ 


•ne  hundred  ;  X,  fromXiAia^,  a  thousand  ;  M,  from  Mvpiot^  ten 
thousand. 

Letters  thus  used,  except  n,  may  be  placed  together  to  the 
amount  of  four,  to  express  numbers  ;  as,  IIII,  4  ;  AAII,  22  ; 
HH,  200 ;  AAAA,  40  ;  MMMM,  40,000.  These  letters, 
when  inclosed  within  a  n,  were  multiplied  by  live,  ^rsvre  •  as, 

IaI    50. 

3,  Each  letter  may  denote  a  number,  according  to  its 
place  in  the  alphabet;  as,  ^,  1;  /3,  2  ;  y,  3  ;  and  so  on  to 
&',24. 


Cardinal  Numbers, 

8/C, 

one. 

/yo. 

two. 

T/5«f, 

three. 

T«a-Tat/!H, 

four. 

7rn% 

five. 

N*' 

six. 

iTrlAi 

seven. 

okJo), 

eight. 

svvist. 

nine. 

S'iKit, 

ten. 

hj^iKA, 

eleven. 

SvOoSiKAt 

twelve. 

J^iKoilpili  , 

thirteen. 

•S'iKuliira-ApiS^ 

fourteen. 

^MitTTivli^ 

fifteen. 

^iiCAi'^t 

sixteen. 

^iJCU'eTrldy 

seventeen. 

(^iKsLOKlcD, 

eighteen. 

(^iKASVViX, 

nineteen. 

UKoa-i, 

twenty. 

UK07t  iU,  &C. 

twenty-one,  &c. 

rptxy-ovlsti 

thirty. 

TSS-TxfiAK'ivlit, 

forty. 

-TrtvliKovlu,, 

fifty. 

i^MKCvlit, 

sixty. 

fiJ'o/unKovla,, 

seventy. 

oy^onKOvldi^ 

eighty. 

iVViVHKOvloL, 

ninety. 

hsijov, 

a  hundred. 

S'tomoTi-ci,  .eti,  -tt 

,  two  hundred. 

;^A/-o/,        -A/,  -at 

a  thousand. 

fxupi-a^       -5t/,  -at 

ten  thousand. 

hi'jC]o/Ju}cto-/uvpi.Qi^ 

>  a  million. 

Ordinal  Numbers. 


nluplo?^ 
Tpia-KxiS^iKctlo?^ 


first. 

second. 

third. 

fourth. 

fifth. 

sixth. 

seventh. 

eighth. 

ninth. 

tenth. 

eleventh. 

twelfth. 

thirteenth. 


-3-5-ae/3f3-jt:t;crjx,a7o?,  fou  r  teenth 

7rivl?}tcU(f?Kxlog,  fifteenth. 

t^K:it<^iiC3t.h;,  sixteenth. 

ecr7aMt3t/cr?;c3t7cf,  seventeenth. 

OKlux.u.tS'iKiihc,  eighteenth. 

ivvixKoLiS-cKxlcct  nineteenth. 

UKCTlcg,  twentieth. 
UKo/Ioc,  Tpufiloc^Scc.  twenty-first,  Sec. 

rpictx.oa-lQc,  thirtieth, 
Tgy3-5t/S3tX5cr7of, 

«J«X05-75?, 

iVVtViDCOTlii  , 
«Cjt72<7-7c?, 


;)^eAtoTlagy 


fortieth. 

fiftieth. 

sixtieth. 

seventieth. 

eightieth. 

nintieth. 

a  hundredth. 

two  hundredth. 

a  thousandth. 

ten  thousandth. 

>  a  laillionlh. 


44 


JSumtrats* 


All  the  CKruiaal  numbers,  from  rsc-rxfisf,  four,  to  'skscjcv,  a 
hundred,  are  undeclined  :  all  above  a  hundred  are  declined  ; 
as,  ^tocyiac-i'oi,  -xij  -u,  two  hundred. 

All  ordinal  numbers  are  adjectives  of  three  endings,  and 
regularly  declined,  like  x^A-a?,  -;f ,  -av,  or  i«|i-a5)  -*&»  -«v. 


Examples  of  the  Declension  of  etg,  one  ;  hvo,  two  ; 
rpag,  three  ;  tsaaapecy  four. 


G. 
D. 
A. 


Sing. 
M.    F.     N. 

h'og^  uuxg^ivogj 
ivLy    iita^  ivL. 

Dual 


'  M.        R        N. 
fiyjSeigj  UYj^suta^  ^yjSev^  &c. 


Plur. 


^;  1^.0  and  5i^,t    g;^^^^^ 

|-v*  y  bvoiv  and  Svslv, 


D.  Svat^ 
'    A. 


Plur. 

M.  k  F.     N. 
N.  rpetg,  rpa, 
G.  tptovj 
D.  rpcat^ 
A.  Tpftg,  rpia. 


Plur. 

M.     F.     and  N. 
N.  recaapegj  rsaaapa. 
G.  reaaapcjVj 
1).  Tscrcrapa't. 
A.  reaaofOLg^  reaaapa. 

1 .  Ovc'eis  and  ft»^«5  are  sometimes  resolved  into  their  coriip©- 
nent  parts,  for  the  sake  of  greater  strength  ;  as,  a^'  '"i^^'  Vy«; 

*f>ihn;^^Sivxg;  jumS'tvic^  ju-nSivu.;^  f/.>iSiTi^  <i;c.  sometimes  occur. — From 
« c,  one,  is  formed  'srfpsf,  /Ae  o//ier  (of  two ;)  and  iVom  i^Sn;,  ,uiiJ'^5j 
aJ'irrfios^  fx,»^iripo;^  neither  (of  two,)  by  rejecting  c  as  well  as  /. 

t  ouo  is  .^iometiaies  an  indeclinable  ;  Od. ''-.  515 ;  lb.  v,  407. 


Pronouns. 


4o 


.^v  5r<jy?raT£    m^pcoTrm  K^xrti&svrei,  having    been  overpowered   by 
not  one  of  those  who  then  lived.     Xen.  Hel.  V.  41. 

2.  Instead  of  J'wd  and  ^votv,  Homer  often  uses  htot,  ^oicv<;^ 
^oioi^y  derived  from  hoio<;. 

3.  Whe'n  two  numbers  are  united,  the  least  is  commonly 
placed  first  with  koli  between  them  ;  as,  -prare  xuthx-u  ;  if  the 
larger  precede,  the  icoti  is  omitted  ;  as,  hKXTn^Ti,  When 
three  numbers  are  united,  the  largest  are  placed  first,  with 
TCui  between  them  ;    as,  nat;  Ikoctov  kou  eiKo(ri  Kut  tfcru 

Oktu  and  fvvft*  are  rarely  or  never  thus  united  with  other 
numbers,  as  in  Latin  duodeviginti  is  18,  so  in  Greek,  (using 
a  participle  of  the  verb  ho)  s^aTtXtvTi  ^voiv  ^eoyru,  reo^upocKcvrec 
BTicc,  he  reigned  38  years. 

4.  In  expressinj?:  a  mixed  number  whose  fractional  part  was 
1-2  (as  6  1-2)  an  ordinal,  next  greater  than  the  whole  number, 
was  prefixed  in  the  singular  to  the  coin,  weight,  &,c.  with  yj/iii 
between  them;  as,  i&^cf^v  i}fAnoc?Mvrov,  6  1-2  talents;  rpirov 
rjf^i^pccxf^v,  2  1-2  drachmae.  When  the  cardinal  number 
was  prefixed  in  the  plural,  the  sense  was  different  ;  as,  t^/cc 
^f^rcc^MVTot,  three  half  talents,  or  a  talent  and  a  half. 


PRONOUNS. 


Pronouns  are  divided  into — 

1.  Personal. 
eyco,  I ; 
GVj  thou  ; 
oi;,*  of  him. 

2.  Possessive. 
6'fiog^rijov^  my; 
GogyCe^aovj  thy  ; 
og,  or  i-og^  >7,  ov^  his ; 


z'.  i'rfp-og,  a,  ov^  our,  of 

ys  two  ; 
o^oirsp'Og^  a,   ovj   your, 

0/  i/cu  two  ; 
V/Ucvfp-og,  a,  ov^  our  ; 
■t».:^f7fcp-o^j  a,  Qv^  your  ; 
G^-og,ri,ov^         Ithei 
a(p8l6p'0gj  a,  ov^   } 


eir. 


*  In  prose  this  pronoun  is  commonly  used  by  the  Attic  writers  in  a 
reciprocal  sense. 


4G 


-^roJiGum. 


3.  Relative. 

0^5  yij,  6,  who  ; 
avl-oq^ri^  o?  he,  she,  it. 

4.  Demonstrative. 

£)tHV'Oq^  Yl^  Oj  that ; 
ovlog^  'avlyij  ^oirto^  this. 

5.  Reciprocal. 
FuavloVy  of  myself ; 


asavlov^  of  thyself; 
eavlov^  of  himself ; 
a?.Xyi?udv^  of  one  another. 

6.  Indefmite. 

^^6$,  rf,  any ; 
Setva^  some  one. 


Sing. 
iN.  eyoy 
G.  s/jjov  or  fiov^ 
D.  f^t  or  itioc, 
A.  e^  or  iis. 

Sing. 
N.  av^ 
G.  aovy 
D.  (yo(, 
A.  (Te, 

G.  01'. 
D.  6ij 

A.i. 

Sing.^ 

N.  6g,  V,  ^, 
.  oy,  97$.  01^5 


Dual. 


N.  A. 


V6)t,  VQ, 


A. 


6v,  »?»',  0. 


G.  D.  VMV,  vov. 

Dual. 

N.  A.  cr^t,  04*^^, 
G.  D.  a^Mv,  o^v. 

Dual. 
N.  A.  a<prx,  a^Sf 
G,  D.  ff^oiv,  a<piv. 
Dual. 
N.  A.  o,  'a,  o, 
G.  D.  6iv,  'div,  6iv, 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 


Plur. 

'riuag. 
Plur. 


Plur. 

N.  a^etg, 
G.  a^iiVj 
D.  a^udij 
A.  <3pag^ 

N.  6u  m.  ''a, 

Vj.  C/r,  OJ/,  6>?/. 

D.  otc,  "^atc,  otg, 
A.  ovg,  'ag,  ^oc> 


♦  Tf«  is  sometimes  an  ioterrogative. 


Pronouns. 


47 


avloc,  and  sxeTvog  are  declined  like  6$,  r^  6» 


ovlog^  'avlyj,  tovt'o,  is  compounded  of  the  article 
6  and  avlog.  It  is  declined,  and  prefixes  r,  like 
the  article  ;  thus  : 


Shig. 

N.  ovlog, 

'ar7>;, 

rovro, 

G.  rovloVf 

rai;7>7$, 

rovlavy 

D.  roi'76), 

raD7p, 

rovlcoy 

A.  rovrov^ 

Dual. 

rODTO. 

N.  A.  Tov7(j, 

Tar7a, 

rovlof 

G.  D.  rovloLv^ 

ravlaivy 
Plural. 

rovloiv^ 

N.  6ij7o£, 

'avlaiy 

ravla^ 

G.  rovloVf 

ravluvy 

roi'jcjr, 

D.  TotTotg, 

ravlaigj 

rovlotg, 

A.  rovlovgf 

ravlag. 

ravla. 

1.  In  the  same  manner  are  declined  rojarog,  T»?A<x«r«$,  and 

2.  In  the  Attic  writers,  the  demonstratives  ovrog  and  fxf/w5 
often   assume  t,  to  indicate  more  forcibly  ;   as,  ovroa-t^  ttvlvji^ 

•  G.  Tovjav'h  rotvjr.Ti^  &,c.     u  and  o  are  dropped  before  the  ^;  as, 
Tdurt  for  rovro'i'j  Bxeivi  for  eKstvoi, 

From   the    Personal  Pronouns  and  avlog  are 
compounded"^  euavlovy  aeavlov^  mvlov. 

*  Homer  never  uses  these  reciprocals,  but  f.-ws  ttvlov^  a-i  a^'Jlcr^  and 
i  Aulcv  or  aty7»y,  &c. 

They  have  no  nominative,  because  a  reciprocity  c/f  action  is  exerted 
on  the  as:ent;. 

aulov  IS  often  found  by  Crasis  for  Iscvlov^  and  ^xi'lcu  for  cr«^y7«;'.  It  m 
used  by  ihc  Attics  in  the  three  Persons. 


Pronouns. 


N. 


Sing. 


G.  iavla,  iavlrig,  savin, 
D.  iavla,  iavlf,,  iavla, 
A.  iavlov,  iavl'/iv,  iavlo. 
Plural. 

N.  ^ ^ 

G.  iavluv^  iavluVf  iavluv, 
D.  iavlocgy  iavlacg^  savloig^ 
A.  eavlsg^  tavlag^  iavla 


Plural. 


D.  aTJkYfk'Oig^  -atg,  -otg, 
A.  a/l/l>7/l-»g,     -ag,   -a. 


In  like  manner  are  declined  ef^^ecvrn  and  a-ectura,  in  the  szn- 
gular  Number  only. 


Sing. 

N.  rtg,  rt, 
G.     rn^og, 

D.  TiVLy 

A.  r^z^a,  rt. 


Dual. 
N.  A.  nve, 
G.  D.  tiVQiv. 


Plur. 

G.       riVQVf 
D.       TtCTt, 

A.  tLvag,  Hiva^^ 


1.  The  Attics  use  m  for  t/v,>5,  rw  for  nvi^  and  tav  for  rtvu. 

2.  r/$,  as  an  interrogative,  has  the  responsive  o<rTi(i ;  as, 
r/5  rii"/6  £7rom<re  ;  Who  did  this  ?  «y»  of<5.«  >7f5,  i  know  not  who. 

3.  Anciently,  there  was  another  interrogative  pronoun, 
viz.  9rd55  ^J?,  ^«j  inhere  ?  or  m  what  place  ?  and  its  responsive, 
o7ro5,  95r;j,  otto,  there,  or  zn  that  place.  They  are  now  used  as 
adverbs,  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  only.  From 
them  are  formed,  in  the  comparative,  Trorcp-ec;,  -u,  -ov, 
which  one  (of  two'?)  and  its  responsive  oTroUrtQc,  From 
them  also  are  derived  many  adjectives  and  adverbs  now  in 
use.j 


*  o>- and  T/;  are  often  joined,  and  signify  whoever;   thus,  oa-lt^j'^ri;, 

t  Among  the  pronouns   are  ranked  the  gentile   adjectives,   derived 
from  ^x'r?<^ov.  the  soilj  and  a  substantive   pronoun  ;  viz.  V-^&Tat^-c? -», -ci/^ 


Pronouns.  4*^ 

Sing. 
N.  6,     Ti^     'to,  Setva,'*    or  Secg* 
G.  Ttf,  T>7g,  w,  htivcLjOQj  or  &£i^oc. 
D.  TO,   'Tyj,  TO,  fetrart,  or  5ttr(. 
A.  rov,  rYiv^i:o^  heiva. 

^f/y«  is  sometimes  undeclined.    Aris.  Thes.  62:^. 


of  our  country  or  people  ;   vfA.i^cL'Tr.aq^  .>»,  -sv,  of  your  counlnj  or  people  ; 
^rctTjt^-ofj  ->>,  -cv,  of  what  country  or  people- 

From  the  neuter  of  the  article,  relative  o?,  interrogative  ;rfl?,  and  its 
responsive  orog^  are  derived  otlier  adjectives  much  in  use  ;   as, 

Article.  Relative. 

ra,  the,  .0,  'which. 

Tology  of  the  kind,  _  olcg,  of  rn'hich  kind, 

Too-o^^  of  the  number.  oc-o^,  of  which  number, 

r>)?itKO(i^  of  the  size.  r?^i>co^,  of  which  size. 

Interrogative.  Responsive. 

^ro,  what,  oxo,  that, 

'^ou^y  of  what  kind,  oTroios^of  that  kind. 

vro(rcg,  of  what  number,  ottocg^,  of  that  number, 

^v^iy^o^,  of  what  size.  o7njXtice(;y  of  that  size. 

From  these  and  ovrcs  are  derived  to/mto?,  Totxurn^  to;«tc,  of  this  hind; 
TCO-8T0?,  of  this  number;  T-ffKinaTag^  of  this  size, 

*  As  to  ^uvA^  which  grammarians  have  considered  as  an  indc/jnite  pro- 
noun, it  is  not  to  be  found  without  the  article  before  it ;  as,  o  Sitc^  which 
is  a  contraction  of  o  J*  ug^  this  or  that  one  ;  cu  $<-  £fc,  make  ««^fi/?,  no  ont. 


G. 

D. 

A. 

And  thus, 

Tov  oe  evogy 

TO)    ^c    £P/, 

Tov  0£  evcc. 

contr. 

m  hlvoi  ; 

rat  ^etvi  ; 

Tdv  ^eivcc. 

Indeed,  o Suvit,  is  in  use,  for  ^  <^6  sv*  j  but  then  the  accusative  ha'is  gov- 
erned by  >/i>w  understood.  Moor. 


50  Verbid. 

VERBS. 

Verbs  are  Active,  Neuter,  Deponent. 

Active  Verbs  may  be  divided  into  Transitive  and  Intran- 
sitive. An  Active-transitive  verb  denotes  an  action  which 
passes  from  the  agent  on  to  some  object  ;  as,  rvTrra  rov  luctv- 
yjjy,  I  beat  John.  An  Active-intransitive  verb  denotes  an  ac- 
tion which  has  no  eft'ect  on  any  thing  beyond  the  agent  him- 
self;  as,  "iTTTTofi  rpsxsi.  the  horse  runs.  What  are  commonly 
called  Neuter  verbs  are  really  intransitive s,  because  the  ef- 
fect is  confined  within  the  object.  Those  only,  which  de- 
note a  mere  state  of  existence  without  action,  as,  to  be,  &c. 
are  properly  Neuter  ;  though  the  name  is  more  commonly 
applied  to  all  intransitive  verbs. 

Active  transitive  verbs  have  three  voices  : 

The  Active,  which  denotes  an  action  that  passes  from  an 
agent  on  to  an  object  ;  as,  rvsrlc^  rov  eiv$papr^v,  I  beat  the 
man. 

The  Middle,  which  denotes  reflected  action,  or  what  an 
agent  does  to  himself,  or  in  his  own  concerns  ;  as,  rvzrlofuti, 
1  beat  myself  ;  uov(roiT6ott  v^op,  to  draw  water  for  oneself 

The  Passive,  which  denotes  the  receiving  of  an  action  from 
some  agent  ;  as,  rvzyjofjuti,  I  am  beaten,  (sc.  c;^«  tivq^,,  by 
aome  one.) 

Neuter  verbs  have  generally  the  form  of  the  Active, 
though  tenses  are  often  taken  from  the  middle,  or  passive, 
with  one  uniform  intransitive  signification  ;  as,  &nfryji),  6vy,^of^oct, 
to  die. 

Deponent  verbs  have  the  form  of  the  middle,  with  some- 
tenses  taken  from  the  passive,  and  a  neuter  or  active  meanings 
as,  hxi^dsei,io  receive  ;  yivofMi,  to  be^ 

Deponent  verbs  are,  probably,  in  most  instances,  the  midr 
die  voice  of  obsolete  active  verbs.  As  the  action  which  they 
denote  terminates  within  the  agent,  they  are  intransitive  ; 
and  are  commonly  rendered  into  Latin  and  English  by  Neu- 
ter verbs. 


Verbs.  51 

On  the  Middle  Voice. 

There  are  many  words  in  every  language,  which  denote 
peculiarly  what  we  do  to  ourselves,  or  for  ourselves  Such 
in  English  are  the  words,  to  receive,  accept,  hire  ;  to  sit,  which 
is,  to  seat  oneself ;  to  lie,  which  is,  to  lay  oneself  do'wn  ;  to 
rise,  which  is,  to  raise  oneself  \ip.  Such  words  have,  in  Eng- 
lish, no  peculiar  form,  and  do  not,  therefore,  demand  a  sepa- 
rate discussion.  But  in  Greek,  they  diflfer  inform,  as  well 
as  in  meaning.  These  are  called  Middle  verbs,  or  are  said 
to  he  in  the  middle  voice, 

Mi'T&otv,  in  the  active,  signilies  to  let  ;  f^iT^oofJutt,  in  the  mid- 
dle, signifies,  to  procure  that  another  let  to  oneself ;  i.  e.  to 
hire  ;  and  in  this  instance  the  English  verb  to  hire,  has  no 
less  the  middle  signification  than  the  Greek  f4.i(r6oof^:ci. 

Kvxiv^ttv  Tjjv  cipccfouv  is,  to  roll  the  ball  ;  in  the  middle,  rj  c^x- 
tpec>cv><iv^elut,  the  bail  rolls  itself,  or  simply,  the  ball  rolls  ;    in 
the  passive,  r^  a-cpui^ct  KvXuhlui,  i\\Q,  ball  is  rolled. 
The  Middle  Voice  denotes, 

1.  Operation  on  ourselves,  external  ;  as,  (pvXotrjefrQut,  to 
guard  oneself,  or  beware — Collectanea,  Graeca  Minora,  page 
60  ;*  rpxTreo-dxi,  to  turn  oneself,  page  36  ;  fA.if>LiKrdui ^  to  make 
oneself  like,  63  ;  'TrupotG-Kevcct^eo-Qcii,  to  prepare  oneself,  ^Q  ; 
vpoKetTccK>^tvs<r6xf,  to  seat  oneself  above,  40  ;  <pxtvicrdut,  to  show 
oneself,  to  appear,  68  ;  xaaruo-Soti.  to  wash  oneself,  to  bathe. 
Isrlavcth  active,  is,  to  set  up  ;  W'Joc^Qui,  to  set  up  oneself,  or  to 
stand  ;  sTnicx^s^eTSxt,  to  seat  oneself,  13. 

2.  Operation  on  ourselves,  internal ;  as,  (po^eUcStii,  to  make 
oneself  afraid,  to  fear;  from  (^otefo^,  to  terrify,  37.  xvzs-eiT- 
6a.(,  to  afflict  oneself,  to  mourn  ;  from  xvzrga,  to  afflict,  10^ 
12,  43.  sni^ta  is  to  persuade  ;  Tssiko-Qsct,  to  persuade  oneself, 
to  beheve,  to  trust,  to  obe}^ 

3.  Operation  oi-Amixed  natitre;  as,  aTrc^icdocf,  to  restrain  one- 
self, to  abstain,  71.  (tzs-uXXitr]cT&c&i,  to  take  themselves  over, 
to  revolt,  58.  iva>x^l,r6cct ,  to  feast  themselves,  55.  Kot/^icG-eat,  to 
cause  themselves  to  sleep,  to  sleep  ;  from  xo/^ica;,  to  cause  to 
sleep,    16,  107.     ^fcftTAfxottfv&v,   bindinj^  themselves    about, 


♦For  the  sake  of  the  younger  student,  examples  are  taken  from  the 
Collectanea  G rosea  Minora,  second  American  edition  ;  a  book  in  the 
hands  of  every    one. 


^^  Vefbs, 

17.  e7raiLQfxf^7}V^  I  bound  myself  by  an  oath,  35.  Mu^u<s-$ai 
'riyjyih  to  give  oneself  to  learn  an  art,  to  learn  an  art. 

II.  The  middle  denotes  what  we  do  for  ourselves,  xveiv 
rnoi  is,  to  release  any  one  ;  but  when  Chryses  is  said  to  come, 
Avc-tfw-fvo?  rjjv  ^vyci'l^cc,  it  is  for  the  gratification  of  his  parental 
feelings. 

TToXifA^ov  Toir^cr^ii  is,  to  make  war  ;  TToXi/utov  TroivG-oce-Soct,  to  make 
war  in  self  defence. 

Af|«^t5v,.$,  choosing  for  yourself,  12,  31  ;  ovc&iy^T^v,  I  should  make 
gain  to  myself,  32  ;  upv^T-x/nsvoi,  drawing  for  oneself,  38  ; 
etico^of^ilTdxi^  to  build  for  oneself,  41  ;  uiieltr^oti,  to  ask  for  one- 
self, 66  ;  rtf^ec}p7jo-cicr0cii,  to  avenge  oneself,  6  ;  K^i^pcvofMv  Kccnt- 
;»fAo/7rcfc,  I  have  left  myself  an  heir,  29  ;  xeut^g^v,  to  bear  or 
take  ;  K6y.i^£T0ui,  to  take  to  oneself,  to  receive,  kc. 

To  this  class  may  be  referred  many  verbs  of  washing, 
dressing,  &c.  A  woman  puts  on,  or  looses  her  girdle,  the 
verb  is  middle  :  she  puts  the  girdle  on  to  another,  the  active 
is  used.  A  man  washes  his  own  hands,  the  middle  is  used  : 
his  servant  washes  them,  the  active. 

III.  The  middle  is  used  to  express  what  we  do  within  or 
among  ourselves  ;  as,  KccTTjpidf^Tjo-co ,  you  was  counting  up  with 
yourself,  43  ;  TrotsHa-Sat,  to  make  between  them,  12  ;  evsifjLavloy 
they  divided  between  themselves  ^  XQyi(ra>[A.ttcc^  let  us  have  a 
reckoning  between  ourselves,  43. 

Verbs  of  contending,  disputing,  fighting,  &c.  have  gener- 
ally a  reference  to  both  parties,  and  are  therefore  put  in  the 
middle  ;  as,  fnu^e'^^'^ui,  pugnare  inter  se.  When  the  active  of 
these  verbs  is  used,  the  reference  is  to  one  of  the  parties  ; 
as,  TToAf^f/v,  to  make  an  attack. 

Instances  where  the  action  terminates  rvithin  oneself.  o<JVd, 
I  know  to  myself,  or  am  conscious.  Trtzs-ovOcc,  I  sufier.  ukU' 
cdy^oiti  I  shall  hear.    u-zosXeifXpc^  I  am  perishing. 

In  most  instances  where  the  action  terminates  entirely 
within  oneself,  the  sense  of  the  middle  differs  very  little  from 
that  of  the  active,  oia^os.  differs  very  little  from  etar,x,o:.  Hence, 
in  these  cases,  one  of  the  tenses  is  commonly  dropped,  oi^cc 
is  commonly  used  ;  gihix,u^   rarely  ;  but  n^ViMiv  or  r^^n^i  is  al- 


yerbs.  53 

ways  used,  and  not  the  pluperfect  middle.*^  In  the  same 
manner,  Tre-zs-ovBa  is  commonly  used,  Trs-ss-adifxa^  rarely,  ccxr^Kaa 
more  than  T^KHy^-A,  ocjcu^oyJsci  more  than  oiKH^rn), 

IV.  The  middle  is  used  to  denote  that  which  we  cause  t© 
be  done  for  us  ;  as,  Ks:pscT$(zt,  to  get  onself  shaved.  £yyoc<psr$ut, 
to  get  onself  enrolled,  xpiiroa  is,  to  lend  ;  xp^^e^^^^^^  to  pro- 
cure something  to  be  lent  to  oneself,  to  borrow,  to  use. 

The  active  has  sometimes  the  signification  of  the  middle, 
the  reciprocals  E^ttceWov,  csecvlov,  Lc.  being  understood  ;  as^ 
4t]uvx(,  (supp.  tfJLocuJov  )  to  present  myself,  55. 

The  passive  has  sometimes  the  signification  of  the  middle, 
especially  in  the  aorists  ;  as,  (py,yu,i.  to  appear  ;  sxpv^Tj,  he  hid 
himself,  8,  16;  aAActys/;;;,  you  change  yourself,  52;  sKoif^ti&vrav, 
they  slept,  72.  In  such  instances,  the  person  indicated  by 
the  nominative  case,  is  likewise  the  cause  of  the  action  ;  so 
that  he  is  at  once  the  agent  and  the  person  acted  upon,  or, 
in  other  words,  he  acts  on  himself.  £<pxv>},  was  showed,  i.  e. 
by  himself.  aAAetyer/rj,  you  were  changed,  i.  e.  by  yourself, 
or,  you  changed  yourself.  exa/ft;;^;j5-«v,  were  made  to  sleep 
by  themselves,  i   e.  they  went  to  sleep,  or  slept. 

The  passive  has  likewise  sometimes  the  significjition  of 
the  active,  and  the  active  that  of  the  passive  ;  especially  in 
the  perfect  and  aorists,  among  the  Attics  ;  as,  ecc^aKei,  had 
bjen  taken  ;  yipctrh^^  you  loved  ;  ^Tfss-o'jytt^va^,  he  who  made. 


It  may  be  aslied,  whether  the  peculiar  meaning  of  every 
middle  verb  can  be  pointed  out,  on  th  ?  principles  here  stated  ? 
It  is  frankly  answered.  No.     Nor  ought  this  to  be  expected. 

I.  The  original  signification  of  many  worda  has  been  en- 
tirely lost  in  the  flux  of  language.  In  middle  verbs  derived 
from  such  words,  we  cannot  expect  to  trace  their  meaning. 
Every  one,  who  has  engaged,  to  any  extent,  in  the  inquiry, 
must  have  remarked,  that  as  he  approached  nearer  to  the 
original  meaning  of  the  verb,  the  reciprocal  sense  of  the 
middle  voice  became  more  apparent. 


♦  Nothins;  v/as  niorerommoa  with  the  Greeks,  than  to  unite,  in  tlw 
way,  tenses  from  different  verbs,  or  different  parts  of  the  same  verb,  t« 
icako  L*n  a  verbj  in  ufc. 

■6* 


54  yerbs. 

2.  It  would  be  surprising,  if,  in  the  constant  fluctuations 
of  language,  no  middle  verb  had  lost  its  peculiar  sense. ^  A 
change  of  this  kind  takes  place  in  every  language.  How 
DQany  are  the  verbs,  both  in  English  and  Latin,  which  are 
either  active  or  neuter  ?  Yet  this  is  no  reason  for  denying 
the  distinction  between  active  and  neuter  verbs.  Nor  should 
the  anonialies  of  the  middle  voice  be  a  reason  for  rejecting 
its  peculiar  meaning.  They  are  not,  perhaps,  more  nume- 
rous than  can  be  found  in  the  Latin  or  English  verb  ;  and 
would  be  still  fewer,  could  we  ascertain  the  original  signifi- 
cation of  the  words. 

3Iooch. 

The  moods  are  five  ;  bidiccUive^  imperative,  op- 
tative, subjunctive,  and  infinitive. 

The  indicative  declares,  or  asks  questions  ,  as,  ivzrrcjj  I 
strike,     rn  szromTs-^  who  did  it  ? 

The  imperative  commands,  exhorts,  and  entreats ;  as, 
ypx'Ps,  write  ;  ^o?  yu>i,  grant  me. 

The  optative  is  sa^d  to  express  a  wish  or  desire.  It  seems 
tD  be  nearly  superiluous,  for  a  wish  maybe  conveyed  by 
other  moods  besides  the  optative  ;  and  the  optative  is  often 
used  to  convey  the  meaning  of  the  subjunctive,  or  potential. 

The  subjunctive  represents  a  thing  under  a  condition,  sup- 
position, &c.  and  is  preceded  by  a  conjunction,  expressed 
or  understood,  and  attended  by  another  verb  ;  as,  ov  yctp 
U7S-£(rlsi>iS  0  &so(;  tqV  y/ov  avlns:?  rov  KOtrjUGV,  hoc  KpivTi  rov  KOTfMV.^  For 
Ood  sent  not  his  Son  into  the  world,  to  condemn  the  world. 

The  infinitive  simply  expresses  the  signitication  of  the 
rerb  without  limitation  to  person  or  number  ;  as,  ypsiPsiv,  to 
write. 

Tenses. 

There  are  nine  tenses  ;  the  present,  imperfect, 
ilie  first  and  second  aorists,  and  first  and  second 


♦The  later  Greek  writers,  such  as  Plutarch,  Elian,  Herodianus,  Heli- 
odorus,  fcc.  sometimes  depart  from  the  ancient  use  of  the  middle  verb, 
^n  established  by  the  oldest  and  best  writers,  Kiukr, 


futures,   the  perfect,  pluperfect,   and  the  paulo- 
post  future,  which  belongs  only  to  the  passive. 

The  indicative,  optative,  and  infinitive  moods,  have  all  the 
tejises.  The  subjunctive  and  imperative  want  the  futures  ; 
though  the  subjunctive  seems  to  have,  sometimes,  a  first  fu- 
ture ;  as,  KepS'TjdijTCJvlccty  1  Pet.  iii.  1.  tcccv&yiTcafA^i ^  1  Cor. 
xiii.  3. 

It  has  been  thought  by  some,  that  what  is  called  the  first 
aorist  subjunctive,  is  really  the  first  future.  What  seems  to 
favour  this  opinion  is,  that  this  tense  is  formed  from  the  first 
future  indicative,  and  not  the  first  aorist,  wnen  those  tenses 
differ  in  characteristic.  Thus,  0?>7u  in  the  subjunctive  is 
formed,  not  from  ehy-cc,  but  from  6-i)Ta,  first  future  ;  ^o)Tcj,  sub- 
junctive, from   ^eora^  first  future,  and  not  e^aKo.^  first  aorist. 

The  second  aorist  subjunctive  is  thouglit  likewise  to  be 
more  properly  called  the  second  future. 

On  the  Sigf  lift  cat  ion  of  the  Tenses, 

Time  is  naturally  divided  into  past,  present,  and  future.*  An 
action  performed  in  either  of  these  periods,  may  be  repre- 
sented as  taking  place  definitely  or  indefinitely.  Definitely, 
as,  ypci(^a,  I  am  writing  ;  indefinitely,  yfct(pa,  I  write  ;  tfiioi. 
Tpiyji^  animals  run.  Definitely,  as,  ytypcc^u.^  I  have  been 
writing  ;  indefinitely,  £ypu.'>j^cc^  I  wrote.  Definitely,  as, 
TBTv^of^xi,  I  shall  be  immediately  beaten  ;  rr^-t^^y,  I  shall  beat. 
An  action  may  likewise  be  represented  as  complete  or  in- 
complete, Foxpej,  I  write,  or  am  writing,  denotes  that  the  ac- 
tion is  performing,  and  therefore  not  completed.  But  the 
moment  the  writing  is  finished,  I  ma^^  say  ysypocpa,  I  have  been 
writing  ;  which  denotes,  1st,  t'lat  the  action  is  completed  and 
for  this  reason  the  tense  is  called  the  perfect ;  2cl,  that  the 
action  is  past,  and  hence  the  tense  is  called  the  preter-perfeci- 
and  3d,  that  the  action  is  just  nozv,  or  very  lately  compliited. 
In  this  last  circumstance  lies  the  difference  between  this 
tense  and  the  aorists.  typ^i-^^y.,  I  wrote,  expresses  an  action 
completed  in  past  time,  indifrJie,  ysypupoc,  I  have  beeu 
writing  expresses  an  action  completed  in  past  time,  definite,  oy 
past  time  intimately  connected  with  the  present.     The  nJa^ 


perfect,  eysyf^a/psiv^  I  had  written,  expresses  an  action  com- 
pleted  in  past  time,  prior  to  another  past  time. 

An  action  performed  in  past  time  may  likewise  be  repre- 
sented as  incomplete,  or  imperfect.  eypu<pov^  I  was  writing, 
expresses  an  action  continued  for  a  time,  but  not  brought  to  a 
complete  close.  It  has  been  called,  not  improperly,  the  pre- 
sent anterior,  as  expressing  an  action presefit  to  a  past  time. 

It  remains  to  state  more  particularly,  under  each  of  the 
tenses,  their  several  uses. 

The  present  tense  is  used  to  express  an  action  in  present 
time,  definitely  or  indefinitely;  as,  yp^c^a,  I  am  writing,  or, 
I  write.  It  is  likewise  used  to  express  general  truths  ;  as, 
^^oc  rpfX^iy  animals  run. 

The  present  is  often  used  in  narration  for  the  past  ;  the 
reader  being  transported  back,  in  imagination,  to  the  scene  ; 
as,  'EvpiTy^st  ov]oi  Trpuloi  rov  oc^eX(pov  ro)t  ihov  Xtf-tma,  Kyj  Myzi  civla^ 
He  ^Tstjindeih  his  own  brother  Simon,  and  saith  unto  him — . 

The  imperfect  \s>  used  to  express  an  action  in  past  time,  as 
continued,  but  not  completed  ;  as,  eypcc(poy,  I  was  writing.  The 
Greeks  gave  it  the  name  of  TrapailxltKo^,  extended,  and  describ- 
iid  it  as  "  the  extended  and  incomplete  part  of  the  past."  t^-uk; 
azrlcc,  a  boy  was  roasting  :  tcvofv  Kpatq  <pepMV  Tsrolc^^a^  ^i emotive j  a 
dog  bearing  meat  was  passing  a  river. 

It  is  often  necessary  to  render  the  imperfect  and  aorists  into 
English,  by  the  same  word  ;  as,  ««/M.f/Co^£vo5  ^£  Trjv  ^sviav  o  ccfrliKOi^ 
£/$  cctIv  TdV  up^potiov  ey^Of^f^fy,  y.M  siq  ccvopoq  evzs-opH  7rccpe?ict,u.<^civBV 
eiy^ov,  "  The  city  mouse,  returning  the  hospitality,  carried  the 
country  mouse  to  the  city,  and  received  him  at  the  honse  of 
a  rich  man."  Here  the  imperfects  eKo,'A.((^sv  and  Traps ^ccu.^uv£v, 
are  rendered  by  the  indefinites  carried  and  received,  and  differ 
from  the  aorists  only  by  denoting  the  coniinuance  of  the 
action. 

The  imperfect  is  used,  from  its  expressing  the  continuance 
of  an  action,  to  denote  that  which  is  customary  ;  as,  <5  iV5ro;io- 

;^e>$  Tov  i77-Z!rov   ilpiQi  KUt  fx?£V/^t  Traa-ccg   r^inspac^,    The  grOOm  kept 

rubbing  the  horse  every  day. 

Tlie  perfect  is  used  to  denote  an  action  as  completed  in  past 
time,  definite  ;  as,  yiyt>oi/pA,  I  have  been  writing.  It  has  a 
close  connection  with  the  present,  and  it  is  iiiis  which'makes 
it  'definitev 


Verbs.  57 

The  perfect  is  sometimes  used  to  express  past  and  present 
.line  united;  as,  xAi;^<  /M.£f,  Apyvpolo'^'  o<;  Xpvcrrjv  ufA/piQsQn^ai,, 
(fear  me,  God  of  the  silver  how,  who  hast  been  arid  art 
■he  guardian  of  Chryses.  ovy.  oi^sc,  I  know  not,  a7id  have  not 
■  nown.     Clarke  calls  the  tense  thus  used,  the  perfect  present. 

The  pluperfect  is  used  to  express  an  action  as  completed  in 
past  time,  prior  to  another  past  time  ;  as,  eyey-pxipsiv,  I  had 
uritten. 

The  pluperfect  is  supposed  to  convey,  sometimes,  the  idea 
of  time  passing  swiftly  ;  as,  x-iro^e^r.xei,  he  was  gone  speedily. 

When  the  peifect  is  used  to  denote  ^rese?^^  time,  the  plu- 
perfect has  the  s<^nse  of  the  imperfect ;  as,  h^oty.cc^  I  am 
afraid  ;  e^e^otHstv,  I  was  afraid. 

The  aorists  are  used  to  express  an  action  as  completed  in 
past  iimeyindejiriite  ;  as,  sypa-^cc,  I  wrote.  They  are,  how- 
ever, sometimes  used  to  denote,  indeterminately,  what  is 
commonly  or  airways  true  ;  as,  ru^  t^wv  <puv^a>v  a-vvrjSetoc^  «Xtyoi 
Xpo^'^i  ^^fAt/ff-f,  A  short  time  commonly  dissolves  ihe  connections 
of  the  wicked.  2v  ei  o  yic^  /«.«  o  ccytc^'/^joi,  ev  'a>  evhyczo-sc,  Thou 
artmyhcloved  Son,  in  whom  I  am  alzi:ays  woli  pleased,  or, 
in  whom  I  was,  am,  and  alwa^ys  shall  be  well  pleased. 

The  aorists  are  commonly  the  tenses  of  narration. 

The  futures  are  used  to  express  that  vvhich  shall  he  ;  as, 
ypui^a;,  I  shall  write. 

No  difference  in  sense  can  he  discovered  hetween  the  first 
and  second  aorists  ;  and  indeed  few  verbs  have  both  tenses  in 
use.     The  same  is  true  of  the  two  futures. 

The  signification  of  the  tenses,  in  thflkindicative  mood,  has 
been  given.  The  observations  apply,  generally,  to  the  re- 
maining moods,  and  to  the  participles.  In  many  instances, 
however,  in  Greek,  as  in  English,  the  tenses  in  the  other 
moods  swerve  fronji  their  proper  signification,  and  the  time 
is  to  be  determined  by  the  nature  and  drift  of ,  the  sentence. 
The  present  of  the  imperative,  as,  ypxi^e,  denotes  write,  be 
writing  ;  or  refers  to  the  commencement  of  the  action,  begin 
writing,  Tb.e  anrist,  ypcc\ov,  dencies  indcfmitel^s  '^nVe  at 
any  lime.  The  perfect  enjoins  a  thing  to  be  done  prior  to  a 
specified  time  ;  as,  ysypu^e,  have  ihls  written,  before  my  re- 
ture. 


58  Verbs, — Active   Voice, 

Characteristics. 

The  Characteristic  is  the  letter  which  imme- 
diately precedes  o,  or  o^iac  of  the  present  tense. 
In  7t7,  %7,  uv,  the  former  letter  is  the  characteristic. 
The  letter  before  cd  in  the  future,  and  a  in  the 
perfect,  is  also  the  characteristic  of  each  of  those 
tenses  respectively. 

The  characteristic  of  any  tense  is  the  letter  next  preceding 
the  termination  ;  or  it  is  the  last  letter  which  suffers  no  varia- 
tion in  a  tense. 

CONJUGATION- 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present,  I  strike. 

S.  rvnlidf  rvnletg,  tvnleu 
D.     *      rvnltlov,  tvTtlslov.'f 
P.  rv7i]Gi.tBV9  rvnlele^  rv7tIovai.X 

Imperfect,  /  rvas  sirilmiy. 

S.  srvnlov,  ervTtlsgj  etimle. 

D.  erimhlov,  srvnlelyjv. 

P.  erimmieVf  etvnlelc,  srvnlov. 


♦Tenses  whose  first  person  plural  end «»  in  juiv^  have  no  first  pt^rsou 
duf'.l.  These  are,  ail  tenses  ol'  the  active,  the  aorists  of  the  passive, 
and  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  of  the  middle  voices. 

t  In  all  the  voicef:,  the  third  person  dual  is  like  the  second^  in  those 
tenses  of  the  indicative,  v/hichhave  not  the  augncient  ;  and  in  the  suh- 
junctive.     In  those  which  have  the  augment,  and  in  the  optative,  it  ends 

in  «v. 

X  In  the  active  voic^,  the  third  person  plural  ends  in  o-t^  in  those  tenses 
i>f  the  indicative,  which  have  not  the  augment ;  and  iii  the  subjunctive. 
In  those  which  have  the  augment,  and  in  the  intperatiye,  it  ends  ia  av. 
In  the  optjitiye,  in  ^v. 


Verbs* — Active  Voice.  59 

First  Future,  /  shall  strike. 

S.  rin//(j,  ru^'fig,  TV^^H.^ 
D.  nv^sloVi  tv^elov. 

P.  rv^o^Vy  rv4^e]ef  rvylovau 

First  Aorist,  I  struck. 

S.  srv^a,  ervyloig,  fti;-^? . 

D.  erv^^alov,  etv^PalriVy 

Perfect,  J  have  struck. 

S.  relv<pa,  Telvcpag,  relv((>E, 

D.  relv(paloVj  relv(palov. 

P.  relv^uevy  "tslvcpaley  relu^paGc 

Pluperfect,  I  had  struck. 

S.  etelv^Eiv,  erslvrpcLg^  e^telv^ei. 

D.  erelvipeilQVy  Erelv^etjrjv. 

P.  erelvipccusv,  erslvcpetle,  erelv^Ecaar. 

Second  Aorist,  I  struck. 
S.  erimovy  ervnegy   ervTte. 
D.  etimelov,  erimelyiv. 

V.  ervTtojxeVy  ervTZcl^y  ervrtov. 

Second  Future,  I  shall  strike. 

S.  rvrtQy  rvTteigy  rvnei. 

D.  ^vTtcirovy  rvTtelrov. 

P.  rvTiSuEV,  rvTCEitey  rvniau 

IMPCRATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  Strike. 

S.  rvrtlSf  rvnltlo. 

D.  rvnlsloVf  tvnlElcdv, 

p.  TVTtJElEyTVTtlEloaav. 


*  This  teniae,  in  liquid  verijs   and  in    tho    Attic   aad  Doric  Dialects^ 
is  the  eamewitli  the  second  future. 


GO  Verbs, — Active  Voice. 

First  Aorist J  Strike. 

P.  "tv^oLle,  rD\^a7tocrar. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  Have  struck. 


s. 

D. 
P. 

Second  Aorist,  Strike, 

S. 

rv7t£.  rvTtalu, 

D. 

rvTttlGv,  rvTteldv. 

P. 

tvTtslef  rvTteloaav. 

OPTATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  /  mai/  be  strikiny, 

S.  rvTtloiiit,  tvTcloigf  rvTtloL, 

D.  rvTiloilov,  tvnloiJyjv. 

P.  tv7t]oiiiSP9  tvTtloiJe,  rvnlotev- 

First  Future,  /  may  strike. 
D.  rtv^OiloVf  rvyl^Oijyiv. 

First  Aorist,  I  may  have  struck. 

S.  rv^Latui,  "tv-^acg,  rv^ai, 
D.  rvxl^ailovy  "rvi^tlriv. 

P.  rv^atuev,  7ri;\i/at7f,  rv^atev, 

^olic  First  Aorist,*  /  may  have  struck. 

S.  rv^l^eta,  "tv^l'stag,  rvibBte. 

D.  rvi^staloVf  tvi^sialy^v. 

P.  rv^^uaixev,  rv^l^£ialSf  ii'v^etav. 

*  The.  if.olic  forni  of  this  tense  is  freguenUy  used,  particularly  by  thr 
'.  lies,. 


Verbs. — Active  Voice.  01 

Perfect  arid  Pluperfect,  I  may  have  been  striking. 

S.  telv(pOL[iL9  relvfpotgy  relvcpot. 

D.  relv(poLlov,  relvf^oilyiv, 

P.  telv^oi^Vy  rtlv^otley  relv^oiev. 

Second  Aorist,  /  may  have  struck. 

S.  rVTtOlULf  tVTtOtgy  TVTtOt. 

D.  rvTtoilov,  tvnoClriv. 

P.  rvTtoLiiev,  rvnoile,  rvnotev. 

Second  Future,  /  may  strike. 
S.  rvnoifiij  rvTtotgy  rvnol. 
D.  rvTtoiroVy  rvmlry^v. 

P.  rvTtoltieVy  rvTtoite,  rvTXoiev. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  1  should  strike. 
S.  rvnlid,  rvnlYig,  rimlip. 

D.  rvnlyiloVf  rvnlyjlov. 

P.  rimlcd^tev,  rvnlyjle,  rvnluat. 

First  Aorist,  /  should  have  struck. 

S.  tvy^df  tvylnpg^  rv^. 

D.  rv^loVf  tV}lo{Jov. 

P.  nn^Ld^ev^  Tv^ls,  tv^l^ac. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  I  should  have  been  strikiny. 

S.  relv^Oy  relv^Yig,  relv^, 
D.  relv^yjloVy  tclv^lov. 

P.  relv^o^ev,  relv^ley  relv^oai. 

Second  Aorist,  /  should  have  struck. 

S.  rvTUdy  Tvnrig^  T-v7tYi* 
D.  rvTtrilov^  rvTtypov. 

P.   rVTtCd^lSV,  rVTtYjlSf  Ti;7t6XT6.* 

*  In  the  English  eypression  of  the  tenses,  much  precision  is  not  to  be 
expected.  Their  use  and  signification  depend  on  the  conjunctions  and 
particles,  to  which  they  are  joined. 

7 


62  Verbs* — Active  Voice. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  rvntecVf  to  strike.^ 
First  Future,  rv^l^6LV,  to  be  going  to  strike. 
First  Aorist,  rtv^ai^  to  have  struck. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,   tslv^svah  to   have   been 

striking;. 
Second  Aorist,  rvjteiv,  to  have  struck. 
Second  Future,  rvrcelv,  to  be  going  to  strike, 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  Striking. 
N.  inmluv,  rvTilovaa,  tvrtlov. 
G.  rvnloplogy  rvTtlovayjc,  timlovlog,  &c. 

First  Future,  Going  to  strike. 

G.  rv^l^vlogf  rv^'ovayjg,  tv-ii^ovlog. 
First  Aorist,  Having  struck. 

G.  tv^avlog^  tv^aOYig^  ^v^avlog. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  TI7?o  has  been  striking. 

N.  "telv^agy  relvipvlay  ti:lv^og. 
G.  rslvtpolog^  relv^vtagy  relv(polog. 

Second  Aorist,  Having  struck, 

N.  rvTdJv,  rvTWvaa,  rvnov. 
G.  tvTtoi'log,  rvnova^/jgy  tVTtovlog. 

Second  Future,  Going  to  strike. 

S.  rVTtQVy  '^VTtHCfa^  rvTtbv. 

G.  rvnisi^logf  rvnSayjg,  rvnSvlog. 

*  The  termination  2/y  was  originally  fiiMsvit^ ;  ^s,  rwrJ-M,  Tajr/J-i^ivotf, 
which  was  retained  by  the  Ionics.  The  Dorics  shortened  it  into  «^.8v  ; 
a«,  rv^li'fy.iy ;  h,y  droppiflj  ^,  it  became  rv^h-n^  which  was  contracted 

info  t:'jp-7:-/v. 


Verbs. — Reduplication  and  Augments. 


G3 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVE 
VOICE. 


Indie. 

Imp. 

Optat. 

Subj. 

Infin. 

Part. 

Present 

TVTrl-CO         ) 

TVTrl-^ 

TVTrl-OtfAl 

rvTvl-oo 

TW^7-S/V 

tut/J-w, 

Imperfect 

let  Future 

rvi-co 

Tv\>-Gl(J.t 

Tf^-g/V 

TV-^-m 

1st  Aorist 

irv-^-n 

iTV-^-OV 

^u^-ctif/.t 

Ty^-w 

Tt/^-at/ 

rv-t-^^ 

Perfect 
P'u}>erfect 

rilv<p.2 

<Tilv<^.OtfJ.t 

Tilv^.oo 

rilu^  evM'Tilv^.ag 

2d  Aorist 

irUTT^CV 

rVTT-S 

tUTr-UfX  I 

TVTT-a 

Tvr.itv     :<TV7r-aiv 

2d  Future 

rvTT-Z 

TUTT-Olf^l 

rUTT-UV 

rvTT-^y 

On  the  Reduplication  and  A  ugments. 

Verbs  are  increased  in  the  beginning  by  redu- 
plication and  augment.*" 

Reduplication* 
Three  tenses,  the  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  pau- 
lo-post  future,  have  the  reduplication,  which  is 
retained  through  all  the  moods;  as,  Te-Ti;4)a,  te- 
rv^Sy  te'Tv^oi^L,  te-rv^y  &c. 

Rule  I.  If  the  verb  begins  with  a  consonant, 
prefix  it,  with  e  for  the  reduplication  ;  as, 

*  There  is  a  marked  distinction  between  the  increase  of  the  perfect, 
and  that  of  the  imperfect  and  aoriets.  The  first  is  found  in  ali  the  moods, 
and  even  in  the  participle  ;  the  other,  onlj  in  the  indicative.  The  in- 
crease of  the  perfect  is  generally  formed  by  prefixing  the  first  letter  of 
the  verb  witli  2 :  it  has  hence  been  called  the  reduplication.  The  name 
is  not  entirely  accurate;  for  this  increase  is  not  always  a  reduplication. 
It  is,  however,  used  here  for  want  of  a  better;  and  by  the  redvplicaiiGn 
is  meruit  the  increase  oi^  prefix  of  the  perfect.  II  has  been  thought  ad- 
vantageous to  treat  of  this  increase  separatefy  from  the  augments ^sy\\2i' 
%\c  and  temporal,  both  because  it  is  distinguished  from  them  by  its  fixed 
nature,  continuing  throu,?h  all  the  moods, ^though  it  is  sometimes  the 
same  with  them  m  form  ;)  and  likewise,  because  the  chief  difficulty  with 
the  young  student  is  to  determine,  not  the  increase  or  prefix  of  the  im- 
perfect and  aoristj  but  of  the  perfect. 


64  Verbs. — Reduplication  and  Augmentii. 

Exception  I.  When  the  first  letter  is  a  rough  mute,  change 
it  into  its  cognate  smooth  one  ;*  as,  ^va^  re-Svicot,  for  CsSvtcoc  ; 
^oQsof,  7re-(p6^}jKx,  for  (pe^o^ijKoc.  But  p  changes  places  with  e, 
in  the  reduplication  ;   as,  fecj;  epfevtccc,  for  fefevj&oi. 

2,  When  the  verb  begins  with  a  double  consonant,  two  sin- 
gle ones,  of  which  the  second  is  not  a  liquid,  or  yv,  prefix  on- 
ly £  ;t  as,  ^6CC!)i  s^^y-ct;  -^-asAA^;,  e'^aX'Kci]  z^viputvci)^  e^ytpocyKcx.)  yvoupit^u^ 
syvAfpixoc',    a-lsXXa^   iO-lotXy^oc  5  also    ypy^ycDpea,  eypijyotpijKet, 

3.  A  few  verbs  beginning  with  two  mutes  prefix  the  first  ; 

as,  ySluou.oe.1,  KSKlijf^ui  ;    ttIoco^  7riZ!r']a)K»  ',    'Trlvj^'^'a^    TriZTiTjJCct,      This 

happens  because  the  verbs  were  contracted  from  Kelocof/^ut, 
^.  The  following  prefix  the  first  letter,  or  not. 

/3flt»Af^&>,  ^iQovXzvyccc^  or  e^ovXi'Jx.oc. 

(i?itzx£va},  ^sQXocicsVitot^  Or  iQ^oLy^BVyca, 

yXv<pcOy  ytyXv^PoL^  or   eyXv^oc, 

y>^6f1i^tit^  y£y>iCjltx,oc,  or  eyXuliicoL, 

Kpv-sr]6f,  >c£Kpv(poi,  or  SKpVipU. 

Rule  II.  If  the  verb  begins  with  'a  vowel  or 
diphthong,  a  and  e  are  changed  into>7,  and  o  into 
cjj  according  to  the  rules  for  the  temporal  aug- 
ment; as,  a&j,  j^pra;  oveiSi^o,  QveiSixa;  "atpeco,  ^Yipy^xa. 

Augments. 
There  are  two  augments  ;  the  syllahicX  when 
the  verb  begins  with  a  consonant ;  the  temporal^ 
when  it  begins  with  the  vowels  a,  e,   o,  or  the 
diphthongs  au,  at,  oi. 


*  For  the  reason  of  this  change,  gee  Rule  ii.  page  5. 

t  The  first  letter  of  the  verb  is  dropped,  in  these  instances,  to  avoid 
an  unpleasant  sound  ;  such  as,  -^s-latAK^t,  yiy\c»}fMct, 

X  The  syllabic  is  so  called  because  it  adds  a  syllable  to  the  word  ;  the 
temporal,  because  it  increases  the  tirm  or  quantity  of  the  syllable. 


\^^^^y  THE      ";^^ 
Verbs.— AugmeiS^  JyJ  J  Y  ^H  S^^  " 


Four  tenseSj  the  imperfect,  p^^^^fec^'iMt^V 
aorists,  receive  the  augment,  Avhic!^*lH)lon^%al^'^^ 
to  the  indicative  mood  * 

The  syllabic  augment  is  e  prefixed  to  the  aug- 
mented tenses  ;  as,  rvusluy  e-tvo^lov,  e-rv^a,  s-rvutov, 

p  in  the  beginning  of  a  word  is  doubled  ;  as, 
The  Poets,  however,  do  not  always  double  />  ;  as,  spiz^ov. 

The  temporal  augment  lengthens  a  and  e  into 
>7,  and  0  into  o  ;  as, 

a,     a5cj,       yj^ov,  au,     ai'^ax'a),  y;v^avov. 

€9     e?.6vdo,  yi?^vOov.       0,      opvaaco,  cjpvaaov. 
at,    aipcd,       ^por.f  0L9     OLXi^idj     qxl^ov^X 

The  remaining  vowels  and  diphthongs  admit  no  augment ; 

as,  t}ccc(!^a^  iKct^Oi, 

Exception  1.     Compounds  of  o/vej,   oima^^  ota^,  omit   the 
augment  ;    as,  otfil^^,  <5;y;^ov  ;  oivo^sco,  otvo^Eov  ;§  oivo-sroXsc^,  oiwurc- 

Four  beginning  with  a  ;    a^,  otia^  eir,6i(rTa\  cf.r,^i^QiMcti,    Also, 

The  augment  seems  to  be  omitted,  in  these  instances,  to 
avoid  an  unpleasant  succession  of  long  vowels. 

2.  Many  verbs  beginning  with  e  are  augmented  by  length- 
ening £  into  £1  ]   as,  £&i^w,  e/^/^ov. 


*  A  few  instances  nvay  be  found,  in  which  the  augment  i?  continued 
through  all  the  moods  ;  as,  etviu^'/Buvett^  for  nvot^Quvat, 

t  Here  <*  U  lengthened  into  *>,  and  t  subscribed, 
if  Here  ois  lengthened  into  *,  and  t  subscribed. 
5  mc;^iov  is  used. 
11  These  six  sometimes  admit  the  augments 

7* 


*  '^  Verbs,  — Augm  eiits. 


£CC&}, 

fA«a>, 

spzsrco. 

K^i 

iXa^ 

SpVCtl, 

Bet^^, 

ezrcf^LOti, 

etrli^zaj 

£&M, 

e^o),'^ 

WllOiCO. 

eXia-c&f, 

epyci^of4.sit, 

^X'^y 

fAxf^y, 

spea, 

1^, 

Om^c^, 

£p-2!r(^(i}, 

ea,  t  to  go. 

tXy^vu, 

ep-srvt^a. 

3.  Verbs  in  eo  augment  the  second  vowel,  o,  into  a  ;  as, 
icplx^a^  eajploil^cv.     Sometimes  however  ;  is  inserted,  etopra^oy, 

Hulejor  the  Pluperfect. 

When  the  perfect  begins  with  a  vowel,  the 
pluperfect  receives  no  additional  augment ;  as, 
pecdf  sppepxay  sppevKStv^  not  yjppevxsiv. 

But  b}^  exception  3,  eo^i^x  makes  £c<,><7reiv;   sopya,  ec^fpysivy 

Exceptions  by  the  Attic  Dialect, 

1.  The  syllabic  f  is  changed  into  «;  ;   as,  ^^^y^xa^  '^m.£XMv, 

2.  The  diphthongs  et  and  eu  are  augmented  ;  as,  suetl^co, 
r.KCi(^cv;  st^i^KSiv,  Sync,  sihtv,  Att.  rthiv. 

3.  The  temporal  is  resolved  in  ea  ;   as,  uXo&j,  suMjKa,  for 

4.  In  some  verbs,  the  syllabic  augment  is  prefixed  to  the 
temporal  ;   as,  uv^uvm^  yjvaccvov^  sJ^v^avov,  eiKco^  oiy^ccy  eoiKa* 

This  prelix  is  made  to  tenses  beginning  with  j;,  o,  ^,  si,  ot. 
■  \nd  a, 

"6.  In  verbs  beginning  with  a.  short,  e,  or  o,  the  two  first 
letters  of  the  present  are  prefixed  to  the  perfect  ;J  as,  cckUm, 
5JK0X,  my-'-i^iCQct,. 

When  the  perfect,  thus  augmented,  has  more  than  three 
^syllables,  the  third  is  shortened  ;  as,  <»-?if;^o;,  7iXsi<pci^  uX-'^Xi^pct, 


*i'Tira>  retains  the  augment  in  all  the  moeds. 

t  In  ihe  perfect  middle  is  uu^  pluperfect  am,  Atfic  yuv, 

t  A    "  sometimes  to  the  second  Aori^t ;    as.  ciyv^  ^^-yov ;  Att.  c^ynycv : 

l)y:vI;:i.^thesis,  «>it>cv. 


Verbs* — Augments*  Ql 

But  ccyetp&^,  spalocu^  and  epsi^^,  retain  the  long  syllable  ;  as, 
e^ytiyepy-'X,  eP?:pMi7jK6t. 

The  pluperfect  of  the  Attic  form  admits  of  a  temporal  aug- 
ment J  as,  ccX'V?^y-ec,  JjA-?jAs»f/v.      Except  e^7]?^v$etv, 

6.  The  reduplications  Ag  and  f^e  are  changed  into  ei ;  as, 
Ajj^a;,  M>T,(pa,^  A.  fiA^^as  ;  f/.eipof4.xi,  £tf*>ccpf^^( , 

Exceptions  by  the  Ionic  Dialect. 

1.  The  second  aorist  and  other  tenses  have  a  reduplication, 
like  the  perfect,  which  continues  through  all  the  moods  ;  as, 
sKotfJuav  ;  lonic,  Kexoc.tiov^  Kexccf^te^  &C. 

2.  The  augment  and  reduplication  are  entirely  omitted  ^ 
as,  exux^c-oc,  Kot>^7oc  ;  thhySlo^  htcjo.  In  the  pluperfect,  one  is 
sometimes  omitied,  and  the  other  retained  ;  as,  hS^UKeicxv,  for 

3.  After  the  augment  is  removed  from  the  aorists,  the  two 
first  letters  of  the  present  are  sometimes  prefixed  ;  as,  cciom  ; 
2d  Aor.  Tipov  ;    I.  apov,  up-xpav. 


COMPOUND  VERBS. 

I.  Verbs  compounded  with  a  preposition,  take 
the  reduplication  and  augment  between  the  pre- 
position and  the  verb  ;  as,  7tpoaS£()?iyjxay  TtpoaeSa?.- 
^w,  from  7tpo(76a/l/l6). 

1 .  gj6  in  composition  becomes  f|  before  a  vowel ;  as,  tKcuX- 
Xco^e^B^oi>X>.cy. 

2.  f»  and  c-ov,  which  lose  v  before  a  consonant,  resume  it 
before  a  vowel  ;  as,  f^.ttsv^y,  tnfJLivcv. 

Exception  1,  Compound  verbs  of  the  same  signification 
with  their  simples,  and  tliose  whose  simples  are  not  in  use, 
take  the  reduplication  and  augment  in  the  beginning  ;  as, 
etf^tsvvvf^t,  Tsf^iEWVf/^r.v;  y.uGe^ofA.cit^  iKet6i(!^cfA.'o\  af^ir^rpisa}^  r,f^(Pia-Qn^ 

ls6v,  from  cti^<pi  and  <r?7fl£w,  obsolete.   To  these  ^ddccf^zrsxoj^xi, 

and  uy.TTt^xofA.xi*    ' 


G8    Verbs. — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Active  Voice, 

2.  Some  verbs  have  the  augment  and  reduplication  in  the 
beginning  or  middle  ;  as,  u)fl4o>iEa,  -^HiQoXsoy,  or  (tvliQoXeov,  so 
iyyvuco,  cc0ti]/^(. 

3.  Some  in  the  beginning  and  middle  ;  as,  evox^ea,  i]y6}X><sov^ 
Tiva^y^TiKoc ;  «vfi/7ft>-has  it  in  the  beginning,  middle,  or  both. 

RULE. 

Prepositions  in  composition  lose  their  final 
vowel,  if  the  simple  verb  begins  with  a  vowel ; 
as,  e-cScx^,  for  exsiej(p ;  except  ts'^pt  and  tspo,  and 
sometimes  au(pL, 

1.  If  the  simple  begins  with  an  aspirate,  the  preceding 
-mooth  mute  of  the  preposition  is  changed  into  its  cognate 
rough  one  ;  as,  oc<pst,tp£af,  from  uthto  and  uipea."^ 

2.  ^  in  the  beginning  of  the  simple  is  doubled,  after  ^ 
vowel;  as,  ^lotpfea,  from  ^ic<,?indfs6>. 

II.  Verbs  compounded  with  other  parts  of 
speech,  take  the  augment  and  reduplication  in 
the  beginning ;  as,  <pi?.o(jo^£coy  £q)t/{oao^sov^  ne^iTj)' 

When  ^vg  and  ev  precede  a  mutable  vowel  or  diphthong, 
the  augment  and  reduplication  are  between  the  particle 
and  verb  ;  as,  ^vTupKriea,  ^u^ijpKrlecv,  When  they  precede  an 
immutable  vowel,  or  consonant,  the  augment  and  reduplica- 
tion are  in  the  beginning  ;  as,  ^vTJv^ea),  e^oG-lv^sov  ;  ^va-oTsce, 

FORMATION    OF    THE    TENSES  IN  THE    ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Imperfect. 
The  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  present,  by 
changing  o  into  oi;,  and  prefixing  the  augment ; 

as,  'tvTtjUj  elvnlov  ;  Qvo^  eOvov. 


•■  Vide  rule  iii.  page  5. 


Verbs, — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Active  Voice,  G9 

Firsl  Future, 
The  first  future  is  formed  by  inserting  a  before 
6)  of  the  present,  dropping  r,  5,  Q^  a,  ^,*  if  they 
precede  ;  Rs^runroj  (rvn-Gid)  tvypa;  ypa^o^  (yp^^- 

In  liquidX  verbs  a  is  not  inserted;  the  penult  of 
the  present  is  merely  shortened  ;  as,  tpatvcoj  (pavu. 

The  long  penult  of  the  present  is  shortened  by  dropping 
the  latter  of  two  vowels  or  consonants  ;    as, 

-\2  T    ^^      f    ,  ~  ?  dropping  A. 

It  is  probable,  from  analogy,  that  the  liquid  verbs  once 
formed  their  first  future  regularly,  in  cu,  like  the  others  ; 
and  that  the  «•  was  afterwards  dropped  to  avoid  the  harsh 
sound  of  the  liquids  when  joined  with  o-.  What  renders  this 
more  proble  is,  that  the  ^Eolics,  who  delighted  in  harsh 
sounds,  used  the  ^  ;  as,  rex^a,  rfAa;,  iEol.  tjAs-^. 

1.  Most  verbs  in  g-to/  and  <^co  have  |(a»  in  the  future  :  as  if 
from  yof. 

TrpccTca,    TTpu^a^   as  from  Trpuyof. 
6pvTTCii,      opv^eo^  cpvyoj. 

Thirteen  in  t^ca  have  either  (ra  or  ^u  ;  viz.  upsrct^ca,  ctjt^a;, 
Mu^a,  vvclct^o)^  epcTs-ccl^M^pcepf^spt^a,  Qa^a,  fyyvu?,t^»y  jiovKo^^io^cj, 

K?ixi^M,  and  some  others,  have  yl^y;  as,  xAa^a),  tcXxy^u,  as 
from  y.X(Ayya, 

2.  Polys}  llables  in  tla  often  drop  r  of  the  first  future,  and 
circumflex  the  last  syllable  ;  as,  vo/^^^o;,  vof«./o-a;,  voy.iiw. 

*  By  Rule  iv.  p.  5. 

tThe  learner  should  recollect  that  4  andf  are  merely  substituted  for 

^c,  /5?j  <pi  and  «?,  >?,  x'^' 

t  Liquid  Verbs  are  those  which  have  the  liquids  a,  (jl.  y,  p.  in  their 
terminatioD. 


70    Verbs. — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Active  Voice, 

This  belong's  properly  lo  the  Attics ;  who  likewise  remove  o-  from  fu- 
tures in  cto-o)^  «!?•* and  os-o,  contracting  the  termination;  as,  »5tA«a,  ;tAA.5craj 
A«  xstAw  :    o/uocro) ;  o/mZ. 

3.  Four  verbs,  which  had  lost  the  rough  breathing  in  the 
present,"^  resume  it  in  the  future. 

f;^<y,  from  £%&>,      has  s^a, 
rv^u)^  ^v(pa)^     has  ^v-^ct), 

Tp£(p6}^         $p£(pat',    has  ^ps-^a. 
rpexo),         6psX^,    has  &psla. 

Verbs  in  acj,  fo,  and  oo,  lengthen  the  short 
vowel  before  era)  of  the  future. 

a  and  e  into  ri.     tcuoiOj  tifir^ao  ;  ^tXfcOj  ^ikriaQ. 
0  into  Q.     Syj2.ou^  (S^/Ujcro. 

Exception  1.     ocj   retains  o  in  primitives,  which  are  few  ; 

as,  upo^y  ccpcTco, 

2.  otco  retains  ct  after  f,  /,  and  A  or  p  pure  ;  as, 

Also,  oLitpiLc/AAi^-Ao-ouctt  \  and  verbs  from  which  other  verbs  in  avv-jm  or 
dt!r«.a9  are  formed  ;    as,  Trslxoi^f  S'pxa). 

3.  Words  of  two  syllables  in  aa,  which  do  not  pass  into 
-}^f^)  retain  «. 

xA06^,  xAflfcc^j;,  because  it  is  never  KA5?^-^ 

c73-ec£&,  cr-STccTa,  never  csrrtfJLl, 

Likewise,  ^^^v^;,  ^^<565-a;,' though  <p&vi{jLt  is  used. 

1.  The  following  have  either  »  or  ct.  ctf>u.ofxAt.^  etxottoo^  etvutec^  afcto}^ 
iXuct^^  KVdice^  tcps/uao),  fj-y/CAW^  /lAOipsiOjueit^  TTsXetce^  Truvuao^  Trupitco^  Tripcteo, 

2.  A  few  in  «a  liave  i(ru> ;  as,  rsAgft),  TtKio-ee ,  and  some,  ^^^aor  i^u  ;    as, 

ttiViO}^    aJ\'i)TCO  or  ettVi7U:. 

3.  Some  dissyllables  in  i<'>  form  their  futures  in  ft^^-a ;  as,  wAsa,  ^Ast/o-a; 
also^A/ft)  makes  iiAv<roo^  and  ahxice^  ii?.a.'j<r6o  ;  from  obsolete  presents  inst'ft) 
and  oLva\ 


*  Because  two  syllables  do  net  begin  successively  with  an  aspirate, 
-ce  rule  ii.  page  5. 

r  'i'he  same  with  TrijA^ie, 


J     Verbs, — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Active  Voice.  71 

First   Aorisl. 
The  first  aorist  is  formed  from  the  first  future, 
by  changing  u  into  a,  and  prefixing  the  augment  ; 

aSj  rv^l/cJy  £Tv\l>a. 

The  penult  of  this  tense  is  usually  long.  Hence,  in  li- 
quid verbs,  the  short  penult  of  the  first  future  is  lengthened; 
ec  into  J2,  i  into  ft  ;  as,  'v//66AAa?,  -^xXa,  e-^tjXoe,  ;*  cleXa^  etrleiXa, 
vsf^a,  astf4,(z. 

1.  The  following  aorists  do  not  retain  the  characteristic  of 
the  future  :  e/arac,  vsveyicot,  z^ux-ol,  sBrjKx,  r^jcoc.  The  two  first 
take  it  from  the  present  :  the  remainder  from  the  perfect, 
and  are  rarely  found  out  of  the  indicative. 

2.  Some  verbs  drop  the  c- ;  as, 

y^scff,  K£icif,  eK£i<7x,  iyceiu*  \  Z''^^  ex.^vj'u,    i  e^svoc  and 


Perfect. 
The  perfect  is  formed  from  the  first  future,  by 
prefixing  the  reduplication,  and  changing '\/^a)  into 
^a  ;  ^cj  into  ya  ;  cj  and  a.j  into  xa  ;    and  /tao   into 
^lYixa  ;    as,  Tfa/^cj,  rervcpa  :  ts^cj^  reie^r^xa. 

1.  Words  of  two  syllables  in  Xoo,  v<»>,  po)-  change  t  into  «,  be- 
fore x^  of  the  perfect  ;  as,   o-JexS,  £a-]o(,x-y.x,  t£v»,  rslx-y^Uy  ^tts- 

2.  Words  of  two  syllables  in  stvof,  tv6j,  vm,  drop  v  before 
x.ec  ;  as,  retvo},  Tfytw,  r£]oe.Kx. ;  y-ptvio,  y.pt\£,  xey-piKoi  ;  6vV6j,  6vy£,  hQvksh* 
Lxcept  «?f /V(y,  »/gv6/,  SicluyKU,  ;  TrAt^viy,  9rAt^v<y,  Tn'^Xvyy^.a;,, 

3.  Some  suffer  syncope  ;  as, 

So,  h^si^jKec,  h^Lt'^y.x,         I   rs]ef^yjKoi,  rslf^r^Xot. 
K£KUf>ttiy.oc,  y^cKf^ijKei,       I  (leQccX'Ky-oe.y  (ie^Mf^cc. 

4.  In  many  verbs  of  two  syllables,  the  Attics  change  e  into 

•   ;    as,  (r]p£!p6f,  £tJoo(Poc, 


*  The  Attics  retain  at ;  as,  i^ax^. 


72    Verbs, — Formation  oj  tin  J  L,i^t^i, tike  Active  Voice, 

5.  The  clH\racteri8lic  of  the  perfect  is  properly  x.cc  annex- 
ed to  the  present  ;  as,  Xvot^  M?^vKot,.  Bui  for  ease  in  pronun- 
ciation, /3x,  TTHy  are  changed  into  the  eorrespondin*^  rou<!;h 
mute  (p  ;  K  l)eini:;  little  else  than  a  breathing  ;  as,  rpt^u,  rel- 

yK  Kit,  and  x^^  i''^^^  X  >  ^'^^  Afy*',  XiMy-KX,  X^Mx^  i  ^rAfxiw, 
TFtzrXex'itet^  TreTur^^eXu. 

»  before  k  becomes  y  ;*  i»7«y»*  for  eKJecvKx, 

6.  The  perfect  in  m-^kx  is  derived  from  a  verb  in  io,  form- 
<'d  ironi  the  future  in  jic*  ;  as,  r^^^i^,  rf/tcta;,  rfltf^nKccy 

Pluperfect 

The  pliipcrfoct  is  formed  from  the  perfect  by 
chan<5*mg  a  into  eiv^  and  i)refjxing  the  augment, 
if  the  |)erfect  begins  with  a  consonant ;  as^rtJi'^, 
ilelvcpinr. 

When  the  j^erfect  begins  with  a  vowel,  no 
augment  is  [)refixed  ;  as,  eoj^a/lxa,  e\j/a/lxt6i'. 

Second  Aorist. 

The  second  aorist  is  formed  from  the  present 
by  changing  o  into  ov  and  prefixing  the  aug- 
ment ;  as,  /Uycj,  eT^c-yov. 

The  penult  df  this  tense  is  in  many  cases  shortened. 

1.  In  conaonants^  by  droping;  t,  and  the  latter  of  two  liquids  j 

'.'.   In  voiveh^  by  chan*j;in^ »?,  <y,  ai,  and  xv  into  u  ;   as,  a>}j8a;, 

^ij^.ov  ;t    and  dropping  the  first   vowel  of  tt,  and  cv,  as,  mittco, 

\iiFov  ;  ^ft;v«''  cv^tT*"*     ^^'**^  before  a  liquid,  ei  is  changed  into 

,  in  dissyllables  ;  as,  CTrupa^  ea-TrxPov  ;    into  s  in  polysyllables  ; 

.  s,  uys^pcj    syipov. 

lndiss;yll.ibles,  c  before  or  after  a  liquid,   is  changed  into 

u  ;  as,  7cXi>tu>i  f7rA;<Koy.| 

•  Sec  rulo  V.  page  6. 
f^K)\99M  has  sometimes  iHst^a. 


Virhs.^—Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Active  Voice.    7S 
Verbs  in  £«<«,  and  euj  change  these  terminations  into  ov ;  as, 

^VKCCAf,   EfJLVMV* 

Verbs  in  a-o-u  and  ^6;,  whose  future  is  in  ^<w,  have  their  second 

aorist  in  yav  ;  as,  isr^dyoi  from  'Jt^tcrcroi  ;  also  zor^vyt^  and  £>//!/- 
v«v  from  o-fAvxu,  and  -^vy^u.  Verbs  in  ^a/,  whose  future  is  in 
rruy  have  their  second  aorist  in  Jdv ;  as,  t<pp»^oy.  Of  the  latter 
very  few  have  this  tense. 

1.  The  penult  of  this  tense  is  necessarily  long,  in  dis- 
syllables, which  take  the  temporal  augment  ;  as,  uyoif,  »jyov. 
So  also  where  the  penult  is  long  by  position  ;  as,  6uXzrM^ 
iGotXTFoi,  But  in  many  of  these,  a  transposition  takes  place, 
to  f)reserve  the  analogy  :  thus,  TrtpOco  makes,  in  poetry,  #9r- 
fu^v ;  h^Kco^  ehotKov.  A  resolution  or  reduplication  produces 
the  same  effect  :   thus,  >jj\)v  is  made  ic«^ov,  j»yov,  uyetydv. 

2.  In  /3A<«7r7A>,  Ku^vsrlat,  and  KpvTrlai  the  characteristic  n-  is 
changed  into  its  cognate  /3  ;    as,  tQxcc^ov,  &ic. 

TT  is  changed  into  the  cognate  ^    in  the  following   words  : 

«v  ;    usrlcif^  f^<pov  ;   pi'^lct'y  tipi^oi  ;   ^pva-lcj,  t^pv(pQV  ;    ^;;zr<w,    eloe/pov  ; 

3.  The  following  have  no  second  aorists  :  Polysyllables 
in  ^a;  and  (tc-a*  ;  Verbs  in  ao*  and  «(V  after  a  vowel  ;  Verbs, 
in  o»  ;  Polysyllables  in  «t/<w,  cua^,  •t;A>,*  v<w,  vtu  ;  and  many 
others. 

Second  Future. 

The  second  future  is  formed  from  the  second 
aorist,  by  changing  ov  into  o  circumflexed,  and 
casting  off'  the  augment ;  as,  elvtsov^  nvjiui. 


*  «'cfl«y  is  poetic. 

8 


74  Verbs. — Passive  Foiee, 


PASSIVE  VOICE, 

INDICATIVE  JIOOD. 

Present,  I  am  struck, 

S.  tvxslofiai^   rvzslip*  tvxjflelai, 

D.  'tvzslo^Qovy  rvtisleadcrv^  rv^leadov* 

P.  rvzslofieday  rvtsleadey  tvxslovJat* 

Imperfect,  /  was  in  the  situatioiij  or  custom^  of 
being  struck. 
S.  6rvxslo(iyjVf  ervcslov,  etvtislelo. 
D.  ervtslofj^OoVf  ervtslaGdov^  erv^lsodriv. 
P.  ervtsloiieda,  erircsleadej  erircslovlo. 

Perfect,  /  have  been  struck. 

S.  nelviifjuiiy  reJin/^ai,  relvzslat. 

D.  relvfiiiedov,  rslv^dovt  relv^dov. 

P.  relv^tfiEda^  relv^de,  relvizfcsvoL  etac.'f 


*  The  regular  formation  of  this  person  was  originally  in  to-at  :  thus, 
tvoT'C/uaLt^  scA/,  «7a/.  The  lonians,  who  delighted  in  a  concourse  of 
vowels,  dropped  the  o-,  and  made  it  TVfo/Iisn,  The  Attics,  on  the  con- 
trary, who  loved  contractions,  shortened  it  into  ti/^7j>.  This  form  was 
found  the  most  convenient ;  hence  it  was  adopted  in  the  common  lan- 
guage of  Greece. 

The  Attic  contraction  was  sometimes  «/,  which  distinguished  the  ia- 
dicative  from  the  yuhjunctive  mood. 

Some  verhs  retain  the  original  form  ;  thus,  <^!i.yofA.cit  makes  ^Ayio-dit, 
Thus  also  is  formed  the  passive  of  verbs  in  f^t  :  la-loL/ustti  /V/a-^ot/ ;  t/9s- 

The  same  observation  applies  to  the  other  tenses  :  thus,  in  the  im- 
perfectj  5Tt/'t!r7«<ro  became  27u'©'7€o,  and  was   afterwards  contracted  into 

ilu-tiflzu, 

t  The  third  person  plural  is  formed  from  the  third  person  singular,  by 
inserting  v  before  Tdii\  as>  Kotpnctt^  Kucpivrsu.  But  when  a  consonant 
comes  before  Tat,  trie  insertion  of  v  would  produce  a  most  inharmonious 
sound.  Henceap*jriphrasis  is  formed  by  the  addition  of  the  verhs/^^  to 
the  perfect  participle :  thus,  tilufA.fxmi  ua-t^  for  ^ih^^Ui.    So  pluperfect, 


Verbs. — Passive  Voice.  lo 

Pluperfect,  /  had  been  struck. 

S.  si^elvf/uriV^  etelv^loj  etelircslo. 

D.  erelvufxsdoVf  erelv^dov^  erelv^pdyjv. 

P.  £relv[i^ie6a,  etelv^de,  ^relvfiuevoL  yjaav. 

Paulo-post  Future,  /  mn  on  the  point  of  beim/ 
struck. 

D.  relv^iiedov,  r€lv^l^ea^ov^  relv^Eodov* 
P.  relvyl^of-ieday  relv^/eode,  relv^ovlai. 

First  Aorist,  I  was  struck. 

S.  etvtpdriv,  erv^drig^  etv^Oyi. 
D.  stv^dyjlov^  erv^dyjlyiv. 

P.  £tv(p6Yj(/.ev,  6rv(pd'/jley  etvcpdyjaav. 

First  Future,  I  shall  be  struck. 

S.  tvcpdyiaofjtai^  tv(^dyjaY}^  rv^Oyiai^lai. 

D.  rv^dyjaoueOov,  rv^driaeadov^  rixpOyjaeaOov. 

P.   tv^dyiaoi.i€day  rv^drcyeadsy  rvcl)d7^aovlai. 

Second  Aorist,  /  7vas  struck. 

S.  ervay/Vj  etvzsyig^  stvtSyj. 

D.  ervxSYilov^  ervxiSrPyjr^ 

P.  etvzsyjiievj  etvvirfle^  srvziyjaav. 

Second  Future,  /  shall  be  struck. 

D.  rvt^yjaofiEdov^  rvzjuyjasadovj  i:vxSYia8oQov. 
P,  tv^y>ao[X£da^  rvtSriOeGde^  in)v^y;<yovlau 


Verbs. — Passive  Voice. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  Be  struck. 

P*  rvcsleadey  rvrslsadoaav* 

Perfect,  Have  been  struck. 

P.  relvtpdej  telv^duaav. 

First  Aoristj  Be  struck. 

P.  ii'v^drjlsj  tv(pdyiluaav. 

Second  Aorist,  Be  struck. 

S.  rvTtT^di^X  rvTC/ila. 

D.  tvTtYfiov^  rimyjluv. 

P.  tvTt'/jlsy  rvnyjloaav. 

OPTATIVE    MOOB. 

Present,  /  may  be  struck. 

S.  tvnloi^yjVy  tvTtloiOj  rvnlotlo. 

D.  rvnloifiedoVj  tvnloiodov.yvTtloiC^dyjv. 

P,  rimloLfisOa^  rv7tloiad£j  tvnlotvlo. 


♦The  regular  formation  of  this  person  was  in  «3-o.  The  Ionics,  by 
<3ropping  <r,  made  it  tu^7£5  ;  and  the  Attics,  by  contraction,  Tvrxrja^ 
which  became  the  comnaon  form.     See  Note,  page  74. 

+  For  rvph^i^  two  successive  syllables  of  which  would  begin  with  an 
aspirate.     Rule  ii.  page  &. 

X  When  the  characteristic  of  the  verb  is  6,  as  in  'tth^od^  the  termination 
6/  is  changed  into  ti  ;  as,  '^ti^di  for  TruSuQt^  according  to  rule  ii.  page  b. 


Verbs. — Passive  Voice.  7  7 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  /  may  have  been  struck. 

S.  telviJ,fZ6Vog  etyiVy^  enqgy  ec^. 

D.  relvixf.i6Pu  etyflovj  ety^ly^v. 

P,  rejvft[jiEV0L  €iYj[i8v,  ecyflsi  eiyicfav. 

Paulo-post  Future,  I  may  be  on  the  point  of  beiny 
struck. 

S.  rerv^oLuyiVj  telv^oio^  tsIv^IolIo. 

D.  rcclv^imOov^  telv^otaQov^  telv^oKsQyiv, 

P.  relv^LueOa^  telv^oLode^  telv^ivlo. 

First  Aorist,  /  may  have  been  struck, 

S.  rv^d^iriV^  Tv^deirigj  tv^Qslyj. 

D.  rv<pd6Lyjlov,  rv^dsLTilyjv, 

P.  tv^detyjijiEVf  rv^der/jlef  tv^Oer/jCav. 

First  Future,  /  may  soon  be  struck. 
S.  rv<pdyjaoi[iyjv^  Tv^drjooio,  rv<p6ri(yotJO. 
D.  rvtpdyjaoijiedovi  tvipdyjaoLGdov,  rv^6y;aotadyii\ 
P.  rv^Qr^aoif.L8daj  rv^6y;aoiod£f  rv<p6y;GOivlo. 

Second  Aorist,  I  may  have  been  struck. 

S.  rvmiYiVy  rvnetyjgy  rvneiyi. 

P.  rvTieiYiiL^Vj  rvTtSLYile,  rvTteiYiaav. 

Second  Future,  I  may  be  stmck  hereafter. 

S.  rv7tyjaoi[iyiv^  tuTtr^aoto,  rvnyjaoilo. 

D.  rvTtriaoL^edov^  rvytyjaoiadov^  tvnaoLCiQriV. 

P  rvTtriCoiuedaf  rv7iyjaotod8,  tvTtyjaoivlo. 

♦  By  circumljocutioa ;  i.  e.  the  participle  passive  and  the  verb  nut  in 
this  mood. 

Verbs  contract,  and  others  in  a  pure,  having  a  vowel  before  ,«2i/  in  the 
perfect  indicative,  have  a  simple  form  for  this  tense  in  the  optative  and 
tubjuQclive  moods.     S«e  formation  of  the  perfect  passive. 

Optative  Perfect. 

8* 


78  Verbs. — Passive  Voice 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


Psesent,  /  should  be  struck. 

S.  tvTtlidiiat,  "twilrii^  timlYilau 

D.  rvnlaiiedov,  rvnlyiadov,  Tvnlyjodov. 

P.  ^rvnlo^ieda,  ^irnlyiode^  ^rvnluvlat. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  I  might  have  been  struck. 

S.  rtlviifievogt   ^>       rigf       ri. 
D.  relviifisvo  yflovj    ypov. 

P.  relviiizevoL     cduev,  yfley     (ocT^ 

First  Aorist,  /  should  have  been  struck, 

S.  nv^doy  "tv^Qrig^  rv(p6Yi. 

X).  rv^dnroVf  rv^Oiitov. 

P.  rvpdo^Vf  rv^drts,  tv^Qoai. 

Second  Aorist,  I shotdd  have  been  struck. 

S.  tVTlQy  tXrJti^gj  tVTlYi. 

D.  tunnrov^  rynntov. 

P,  tvTtQiievj  rv7tf{r€}  rvTtMc^ 


*  The  regular  form  of  this  persen  was  rruTrlitCAt^  which  was  made  bj? 
the  Ionics,  TVTrlmt^  and  by  the  Attics,  tv^7«,  now  in  common  use.  See 
Note,  page  74. 

+  Verbs  cofttract.  and  other*  in  «  pure,  of  the  third  conjugation,  with 
a  vowel  before  f^ttt  in  the  perfect  indicative,  have  the  following  form. 
See  formation  of  the  perfect  passive. 

rilt/tx-cc/xoLt,        -«,t        -}iJeti, 
-fiD/Ag^flt,       -of^Ss,    -ml  At. 


t  Verbs  contract  in  e»  hare  aoftener  than  »  in  this  tense  ;  e,  %. 
.«!r0g.  3ee  Contract  Verbs. 


Verbs — Passive  Voice.  79 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect,  rvnleadaty  to  be  struck. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,   relixpdaty  to   have   been 

struck. 
Paulo-post  Future,  reJm^ecrOai,   to  be  on  the  point 

of  beiny  struck. 
First  Aorist,  rv(pdr,vat,  to  have  been  struck. 
First  Future,  rv^dyiaeadai^  to  be  going  to  be  struck. 
Second  Aorist,  rxmnvoLt^  to  have  been  struck. 
Second  Future,  rvnyiaeadatf  to  be  going  to  be  struck. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  and  Imperfect,  Being  struck. 
N.  rv7tlo[ievog^  rimlofievy^,  rvnloiievov. 
G.  rvnlofievoVf  rv7tIoi.i£vyig,  rvnlofievov,  &c. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  Having  been  struck. 

N.  relv^fiEvogj  relvfzuevyjy  relv^y,evov. 
G.  relvfiuevovy  relvuftevyigj  relvixfjievov. 

Paulo-post  Future,  Being  on  the  point  of  being 
struck. 

N.  Helv^^vog^  telv^^vYiy  relv^ofievov. 
G,  telv^/Ofievov,  telvylofievyjg,  relv^oi^vov. 

First  Aorist,  Having  been  struck. 

N.  irv^dsigy  tv<pddaay  rv^dev. 

G.  rv(p^6vlog,  rixp^eayyjg,  rv^dsvlog. 

First  Future,  Going  to  be  struck. 

N.  rv<pdT^o[i€vog,  tv^dyjaoi.iev?j,  Tv<pdyj(yo[i£vov. 
G.  rv^OyiaouepoVf  i:v^dr^aoiuvyig^  tvfpdyjaofievov. 


80   Verbs, — Formation  of  the  Tenses  z?i  the  Passive  Voice, 

Second  Aorist,  Having  been  struck. 

N.  rvTZcig,  Tvytelaa^  rvTtev. 

G.  rvTtevlog^  'tvnsiayjgf  rvitevlog. 

Second  Future,  Gouh)  to  he  struck. 

N.  tv7tyj(yofievog  tvytr^aofievyj,  tVTtyjaoiisvov. 
G.  rvTtyjaousvov,  tvTty^aoixevyiCy  tvnrfiouevov. 


SYNOPSLS  OF  THE  MOODS  AXD  TENSES  IN  THE  PASSIVE 
VOICE. 


Indie.         Imp.       Optat. 


Subj. 


Infin, 


Part. 


PreS.   TVTrl-OUitt  )  l  n        \            n              ^     !             T 

imp.  iTUTT Jo u}iv  y\  ' 

Perf.  Tilv-y.uat  >  i     »     Telu-uuivog  \  rilv-juuivcg 

rlu.  I  {Iflvy.fxav    ^  ^        unv              \      cc 

Pau.'  rdu-^-ojucti  r{lv4''Ci/A»y  \ 

IstA.'  s%^Si)V  rv<p-BifjL  n-uoBii)iv       ]  to<^B'Z 

lstF.JTU4)9-»!rO/^fltf  l^TU<pbn<f''ClUHV 

2dF.'  'rvTnia-^cfj.a.i  1  I  tuttht-oi/ia.}))!  ) 


rs]v-(pBai.l        WiJv-juyiv&g 
TVTT.iivstt        Wwr-iii 


FORMATION    OP  THE   TENSES  IN  THE    PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Present. 

The  present  is  formed  from  the  present  active 
by  changing  q  into  oiiac ;  as,  txmla,  rvnlofxai. 

i  and  0  are  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  etf^tcci  for  oioi^sct  ;  x^'Jxt 
for  A«57«<. 

Imperfect. 

The  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  present,  by 
changing  aat  into  ir/^Vj  and  prefixing  the  augment ; 
as,  rvTilofiai,  erimlour^v. 

e  and  d  are  sometimes  omitted  .;  as?,  g^y?*  for  ey^^slo  .;  ojy-jyy 

for  O09y.T)V, 


Verbs, — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Passive  Voice,  01 

Perfect. 
The  perfect  is  formed  from  the  perfect  aclivCj 
by  changing  the  last  syllable  into  /uat ;  as,  rersf^' 

The  following  slight  changes    are  made    for   the   sake   of 
harmony. 

1.  When  the  last  syllable   is  preceded  by  a  vowel,  ft  is 
doubled  ;   as,  rerv'<pec,  rervf^tf^toit, 

2.  When  it  is  preceded  by  y,  that  letter  is  changed  into  ft ; 

as,  m<p«Ly-'KU^  7ri<pccf^-fjt,ut, 

3.  ^sc  of  the  active  is  changed  into  yuMt  ;  as,  AcAf-;t<«,  >^Xi- 
y^Lott, 

4.  Verbs  which  have  «•  in  the  first  future  active,  retain  the 

r  before  fA.a.t  ;  as,  rr>^r,^ci)^  ttA^jCa;,  7rfxA>;-xa,  7re'7r>^-f^f4x6i  ;  but  in 
verbs  in  a  pure,  if  the  penult  of  the  future  be  long,  a-  is  omit- 
ted   ;     as,   TToitM,  TTCir.Crco,   TeTToiyi-f^LAt.'^ 

The  following  however,  with  a  long  penult,  retain  the  o-, 

0tK60Ct)y   yVodJ,    6 puV&> ,   Kt>^iVOi,   TTSV&f,   'XXKkl,   TTTCCIAf ,  f CCl A) ,   CBW,    %04>. 

5.  From  verbs  in  vcj,  the  Attics  frequently  form  the  per- 
lect  in  o-f>utt ;  as,  fnxnof,  f^/K^txCfAoti. 

6.  Dissyllables  that  have  rpe  in  the  penult  of  the  perfect 
active,  change  e  into  <e,  in  the  perfect  passive  ;  as,  rpsTrui  rel- 

fCCf^l^CUt. 

7.  iSome  verbs  which  have  ev  in  the  penult   of  the  perfect 
active,  reject  the  «  ;  as, 

•JTiCpiV^cc,  TFi^vyfAMi,     fTEd'gvKU,  (recv/^cct. 

On  the  Second  and  Third  Persons  of  the  Perfect, 
The  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  perfect  pas- 
sive are  formed  from  the  perfect  active,  by  changing  a.  into 
rat  and  rxt  ;  as, 

rvzr]u,  rslv^cc,  relvf^f^^t,  rtlvcp-ctti,  relv(p-rut, 
which  become  relv^ui,    rilvTrJcn, 

by  placing  the  double  consonant  ^  for  ^c,  and  changiog  the 
rough  mute  ^  into  its  cognate  smooth  one.t 

♦  Also,  ttpou),  and  otvow,  whose  pcDgalt  is  skort. 
See  rult  i.  page  5, 


5^2  Ferbs. — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Passive  Voice, 


Xiy»'i  XiXe^-u^  XiXtyfA^i^  >^iX€X-<ro!,i ^  AeAe;^^-rtft/. 
AfAe|flf/,    XeXiKJoti, 

Verbs  whose  perfect  active  ends  in  xu,  drop  the 
as,  >,VQ)i  XeXv'Kcc^  >isXvM.su^  XeXv-fTcn  XtXV'Tut,  (putva^  7ri(pa,y' 
y,isf>^  7r£<pc&fA.uxtt^  Tttc^At-TM^^  7re:pxv-re6i.  But  when  the  hrst 
person  is  in  <r^«/,  the  third  is  in  c]eci -,  as,  ^tAjj^a*,  mTs-Xij-xcc, 
9re7xrXv<^f^sct ,  ttb^M^oci,  7r£zrXr,(r]ut, 

The  first  person  dual  and  phiral  are  formed  from  the  first 
person  singukr,  by  changing  i^cct  into  f^eBov^f^sBa  ;  as,  relvf4>f^i^ 
Te'lvf^'f>C£6o9  rijvfjL'iJLdeA. 

The  second  and  third  persons  dual  are  formed  from  the 
third  person  singular,  by  changing  roci  into  ^ov,  and  the  pre- 
ceding smooth  mute  into  its  cognate  rough  one  ;t  as,  r{}v7r- 
Tcti^  rilvcp'Oov  ;  XiXsK-reci,  x^sMZ'^o^*  If  "^^i  is  preceded  by  a 
Towel,  er  is  inserted  before  Bov  ;  as,  XeXvroa^  XeXv-a-dov, 

The  second  person  plural  is  formed  from  the  second  per- 
son dual,  by  changing  6«v  into  Be  ;  as,  r/Jvp&cv,  re]v(p$e.      XeXex' 

The  third  person  plural  is  formed  by  inserting  y  before 
rut^  of  the  third  person  singular;  BSy  Xsxvruty  x^Xv-yrea. 
But  if  a  consonant  precede  the  rat/,  the  participle  with  the 
rerb  eia-t  is  used  ;    as,  relv-ssr-reci,  rilofjLitrm  tttri. 

The  perfect  of  the  imperative  is  formed  from  that  of  the 
indicative,  by  changing  ott  into  «  ;  as,  reh'^^at,  rijv^o  ;  and 
TAi  into  Bco,  with  the  preceding  smooth  mute  into  its  cognate 
rough  one  ;t  as,  relvus-'Tctt,  rilv<p-Qea. 

When  U.XI  of  the  perfect  indicative  is  preceded  by  a  vow- 
el, it  is  changed  into  ftj;v,  to  form  the  perfect  optative  ;  and 
if  the  preceding  vowel  be  -^  or  &;,  /  is  subscribed  ;  if  not,  it  is 
annexed  ;  as,  7re0iX7juxi,  tt^^.A'/^.m-jjv.  h^nXa)fAcii,  h^r.-XuitA^yDt.  J'e- 
^cfA^ut,  hooi^r.v.  But  vvheniM.;*^  is  preceded  by  a  consonant,  or 
a  diphthong  which  has  v  in  it,  the  perfect  participle  is  used 
with  5<ijy  ;    as.  XeXsyf^c^t,  XsXeyf^evoi;  sa^v. 

The  perfect  of  the  subjunctive  is  formed  from  that  of  the 
indicative,  by  changim»:  (jlch  preceded  by  a  vowel  into  a(.tui  ; 
as,  scrJdfJLui^  Icrla^A,  When  t^^^t  is  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
or  a  dipl  thong  contamin[^  v,  the  perfect  participle  with  the 
verb  a  is  used  ;  as,  XiXiyfJLsvo^  <y,  5^$,  y^. 


i 


*In  ^h^  perfect  active,  v   before  a-  was  chanp^ed  into  y\  it  is  here  re- 
stored; 
i  The  smooth  mute  is  roue^hened  before  9,  bj  rule  i.  pa^e  ^. 


y^rbs, Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Passive  Voice.  83 

The  perfect  of  the  infinitive  is  formed  from  the  second 
person  plural  of  the  indicative  perfect,  by  chang;ing  z  into  ut ; 

as,  re^v<p6e^  rs]v<pQ'at. 

Pluperfect. 
The  pluperfect  is   formed  from  the  perfect  by 
changing  (xai  into  (xyjVj  and  prefixing  the  augment, 
when  the  perfect  begins  with  a  consonant;  as^relvfi- 

The  second  and  third  persons  of  the  pluperfect  are  form- 
ed from  those  of  the  perfect,  by  changing  ui  into  o,  and  uTt 
into  v,c-xi. 


2d  Sing, 
Perf.           TertG-octy 

3d  Sing.  . 

3d  Plur. 

Pluperf.    fTfTic-o, 
Perf.          AcAf|c6/, 
Pluperf.    eM^^o, 

ererivTa. 
AfAfVftfvo/  £10-1, 

Pou/O'post  Future. 

The  paulo-post  future  is  formed  from  the  se- 
cond person  singular  of  the  perfect  passive,  by 
changing  at  into  of.iaL ;  as, 

relvfifiai,  rslv^^-acj  TfJii^'-of^ou. 

First    A  oris t. 

The  first  aorist  is  formed  from  the  third  per- 
son singular  of  the  perfect,  by  changing  rat  into 
Oyjv^  and  iheprecedins;  smooth  mute  it:to  its  cog- 
nate rough  one  f  droj  ping  tlie  first  letter,  if  it  is 
a  consonant  ;  as,  relvn'^at,  eTV(pOr;v. 

Exception  1.  Those  verbs  which  change  e  into  ec  in  the 
perfect  passive,  in  this  tense  resume  the  the  e  ;  as,  ecrlpoAi^ucit, 

2.  Those  which  drop  y  in  the  perfects,  have  it  restored  in 
this  tense  by  the  Poets  ;  as,  g^A/v^^v  for  etcxidt^v, 

♦  For  the  reason  of  this  change,  see  rule  i.  page  5. 


84  Verbs. -^-Middle  Voice. 

3.    tfJCiHiO'hi^  from  f^£in»f}jeci, 


>,     .  ..  n  c  assume  <r. 

fC-A;^3jy,  o-£<rM(r]ett,         dropS,  <r. 

fvps$i]v,  evpiflxiy       ^ 

'     >,  ^''^ '     '      4  chanffe  tj  into  f . 

jFir^/  Future. 

The  first  future  is  formed  from  the  third  person 
singular  of  the  tirst  aorist,  by  adding  (7o/^at  and 
casting  off  the  augment ;  as,  elv<pdyij  rvcpdyjao[iaL. 

Second  Aorist. 

The  second  aorist  is  formed  from  the  second 
aorist  active,  by  changing  oi^  into  riv  ;  as,  elvnovj 

BlvTtYlV. 

Second  Future. 
The  second  future  is  formed  from  the  second 
aorist,  by  changing  j^r  into  yjao^aij  and  rejecting 
the  augment ;  as,  etim-yivy  rvn-rjao^aL. 

MIDDLE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  /  strike  myself. 

S.  rvTtlofiai^  tvytl^iy  rvnl el  at. 

D.  rvnloi^iedoVf  rimhaOoVf  tvnlsadov. 

P.  tvTtlo^ueda^  tvrtleadsy  tcmlovlau 

Imperfect,  /  was  striking  myself. 

S.  sTvnloiiriV,  etunloVj  erimlelo, 

D.  etvTtloueOov^  etvnjeadov,  etunJeadyjv, 

P.  ervnloi^eda,  etvTtleaOSf  etimlovJo. 


Verbs. — Middle  Voice. 

Perfect,  /  ha^e  been  striking  myself. 

S.  relvna^  reluTtag,  relvne. 

D.  relvTtalovy  relvnalor. 

P.  telvTtafisvj  relvTtalEy  reluTtaac. 

Pluperfectj  /  had  struck  myself. 

S.  ErelvTtecVf  erelimeiqy  erelvrtei. 
D.  ErslvTtsdop,  erelvTteilyjv. 

P.  erelvTtecfisVf  erelvTtsLlSf  stelvrteiaav. 

First  Future,  /  shall  strike  myself. 

S.  Tu^o^uat,  tv^y  rv^tlai. 

D.  rv^loixedoVf  rv4^ea6oVj  rv4fea6ov. 

P.  rv^oueda,  rv^l^£a^8,  rv^ovlac 

First  Aorist,  /  struck  myself. 

S.  srv^oLi-iyiv,  £rv4'u,  ervyi/alo. 

D.  erv^l^af-tsdoVf  £rv\i^axjdov^  etir^adyiv, 

P.  erv^aueda^  fTinj/aafe,  erv^avlo. 

Second  Aorist,  /  struck  myself 

S.  ervno^yiv^  ervTUi^  ervTtero. 

D.  €rv7to[xedov,  erimeadov^  sTimeadyiv. 

P.  erimo[t6da,  ervTteade,  ervnovro. 

Second  Future,  /  shall  strike  myself. 

S.  rvTrov/iai^  rvTiri,  rimeLrat. 

D.  rvTXovftedov,  riutEiaQov^  rv7ici<y6ov. 

P.  rv7tovf.teda,  n^vnuade^  rimovvlai. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  Strike  thyself 

S.  rimlov^  rvnleado., 

D.  rvnleadov,  rvnleadov. 

P.  tvTtleode^  txmleoQoaav. 


86  Verbs. — Middle  Voice. 

First  Aorist,  Strike  thyself, 

D.  nv^aadov^  rv^aad^v, 

P.  tv^aade^  rvi^aadoaav. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  Have  struck  thyself. 

S.  r slime ^  relvnelo. 

D.  telvnelov^  relvnelov. 

P.  rtelxmels^  telvnsloaav. 

Second  Aorist,  Strike  thyself. 

S.  rVTtOVj   tV7t£GdQ. 

D.  tvTteadovy  rvTteadov. 

P.  rvTteade^  tvTtsadQaav. 

OPTATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  I  may  be  striking  myself. 

S.  7^V7tloifiy]Vy  tvnloto,  tvTcloClo. 

D.  tvTtloiiisdoVy  rvTtloiadov  tvnloLodyiP. 

P.  rvnloifieda,  tvTtloiade^  rimlotvlo. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  /  may  have  been  striking  \ 
myself. 

S.  telvTtOiiitf  melvmiq^  telvTtot. 

D.  relvTtoiloVf  telvTtotlyjv. 

P.  ifelvTtOLfieVj  telvTtoLlSf  tslvTtocev. 

First  Future,  /  may  hereafter  strike  myself 

S.  ^ir^oi^'^v^  tir^oio,  tv^oilo, 

D.  tvil^iixeOov,  tV'\l>oi(ydoVj  rv<l^0La6yiv. 

P.  rv^'Oiueda^  tv^oiade,  tv4oLvlo. 

First  Aorist,  /  may  have  struck  myself 

S.  tvypaii^yjv,  tv^pato^  'tv^l'ailo. 

D,  tv4^ai[iedov9  ^v4^at(ydov,  rv-^aioOy^v. 

P.  rv^ai^eday  tv^^atadsy  rv^^atvlo. 


Verbs.— Middle  Foiee.  B7 

Second  Future,  /  may  hereafter  strike  myself. 

S.  rvTtoliuyjv,  nvnoloy  tvTtolto. 

D.  rvTtoifiedov,  rimolaOoVy  tv7tol(y6yiv. 

P.  rvTtoifisOa^  rvTtoioOe^  rvnoiplo. 

Second  Aorist,  I  may  have  struck  myself 

S.  rvTtOiixyjv,  rvTtaiOy  rvnoito. 

D.  tvTtOiizsdw,  rimotadoi^,  rvnoLodyjj^ 

P.  rirTtoiueOa,  rimotode^  rvnoLvlo. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  /  should  strike  myself 

S.  rv7iJij(iaL,  rvnlri^  rimlyjlau 

D.  rvnliduedoVf  rimlrtodoi',  rvnlyjoOov. 

P.  TVTtlci^edaf  rvnlriGOe^  rvTilovlat. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  I  should  hare  been  slnkiufi 
myself 

S.  rtlvTtco^  rslvTtTig^  rslvny:. 
D.  relvTtyjlovy  relimr^.ov. 

P.  r6lv7toi.i6Vf  rslvTtyjlef  reliutoai. 

First  Aorist,  /  shoidd  have  struck  myself 

D.  rv4ij}[Z£doVj  rv'd/'/i^ydoVj  rv^odov. 
P.  rv^Queda^  rv^rioOej  rv^vlac. 

Second  Aorist,  I  should  have  struck  myself 

S.  rvTtidfiaif  rvTiYif  rvnrilau 

D.  TVTdd^edov,  rvnyjadov,  rvrtyjaOor. 

P.  'tvito/.teOa,  rvTty^aOey  tvTtovlai, 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present   and  Imperfect,   rvnleadac,   to  strike 
oneself 


88 


Verbs. — Middle  Voice, 


Perfect  and   Pluperfect,   nelimsvaij  to  have  been 

striking  oneself. 
First  Aorist,  rv^aadat,  to  have  struck  oneself. 
Second  Aorist,  rvrceadai^  to  have  struck  oneself. 
First  Future  J /tv^l'sodai,  to  be  going  to  strike  oneself. 
Second  Fu'uxe^rvTtdaQat^  to  be  going  to  strike  one- 
self 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  and  Imperfect, '7ri;7t7of^6wg,  striking  oneself 
Perfect  and  PJuperfect,  TeJ^Ttog,  having  been  strik- 
ing oneself. 
First  Aorist,  ^v^^a^evoc,  having  struck  oneself 
Second  Aorist,  rvTZouevog  having  struck  oneself. 
First    Future,    rv^o^ievog,    being   about  to  strike 

oneself 
Second  Future,  ifvTtov^svog^  being  about  to  strike 
oneself. 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  MIDDLE 
VOICE. 


Indie.         Imp.      Optat.        Subj. 


Infivi, 


Part. 


Present 

Impcr. 

Perfect 

I^luperf. 

1st  Aorist 

IstFut 


irvTrl-ojun] 


^2d  AovihUTVTT-ofA'rtv 
f^d  Fut.    nv7r~<jZfJt.At 


TVTrl-OIfJlitV 

rilvTr-Qifxt 


TVTT-ucrSctt 


TVT/J-OfJliVOS 
TU-vjL-O/MSVO? 


Indie. 
1st  Flit.  c-2ir;p-iit^cti 


Liquid  Verbs. 
Optat.  Infin.  Part. 

c-TTep'ot^m         o-^ep'SKT&fiit       c-sj-ep'9f^evc§^ 


Verbs, — Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Middle  Voice*   39 


FORMATION    OF   THE    TENSES  IN  THE    MIDDLE  VOICE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
The  present  and  imperfect  are  the  same  as  in 
the  passive. 

First  Future. 
The  first  future  is  formed  from  the  f  rst  future 
active,  by  changing  u  into  o^(xl\  as,  Tf^o,  tv^f-iat^ 
but  in  liquid  verbs^  into  nf-iaL]^  as^  ar^Acj,  ore'Xkiijiai. 

Second  Future. 

The  second  future  is  formed  from  the  second 
future  active,  by  changing  6  into  b^aat ;  as,  rv%Qf 
rvmizat. 

Uivd},  ^t(ia;,(pccya,  and  5<Jft/,  have  the  seconc]  future  in  ef^t.'\ 
But  these  are  thought  to  be  the  present  used  lor  the  future. 
To  these  add  the  poetic  futures  fiscf^xi  and  veofMi^  by  contrac- 
tion veZf^xt. 

First  Aorist. 

The  first  aorist  is  formed  from  the  first  aorist 
active,  by  adding  ftyjv  ;  as,  ervi^,  cxv^aii^^v. 

Verbs  in  eo  pure    have  this    tense    often  syncopated  ;  as, 

£Vl>otf^v  for  sopJi(rcif4.yjVj  cjvx^r^v  for  avK^cct^v, 

Second  Aorist. 

The  second  aorist  is  formed  from  the  second 
aorist  active,  by  changing  ov  into  ottyjv ;  as,  GrvTtoPj 


*  Also  those  verbs  from  which  o-  has  been  dropped  by  the  Attics ;  as, 
Declined  thus  :  ipcy-cfAsti^  -STct/,  ejut, 

9* 


90  Verbs ^-^Formation  of  the  Tenses  in  the  Middle  Voice* 

Perfect. 

The  perfect  is,  generally,  the  same  with  the 
perfect  active,  except  in  the  characteristic,  which 
it  borrows  from  the  second  aorist  ;  as,  telv(pa,  re- 

IvTta,  7tt<p8VXGi9  7t£(p£Vya. 

hi^co  makes  hhiycot.-  for  ^t^ot^oc,  to  avoid  the  too  frequent  re- 
currence of  the  ^  ;  >^cLyxoL\a  makes  hi>g^y•)cu. 

Change  in  the  vowel  preceding  the  characteristic  : 

1.  f,  in  the  penult  of  the  perfect  active,  is  changed  into  0  ; 
and  ii  into  oi  ;  as , 

2.  Dissyllables  in  A<5y,  v^,  and  f>u^  change  ot  of  the  perfect 
active  into  0  ;  as, 

c-7fAAft),  i^loiX^sc,  i^loXcA, 

3.  Oil  in  the  present,  is  changed  into  ?? ;  as, 

4.  Verbs  in  eta  and  ea  cast  off  jj»  and  ty.  from  the  perfect 
active,  to  form  the  perfect  middle  ;  as, 

Other  verbs  in  eo  pure,  and  some  in  a  impure,  drop  »  only; 

as,  Af6;,  XsXvKot,  XtXvoc, 
opa^    a  pica.  ^     copcc. 

The  following  are  irregular,  ^^aao*,  rf^jjAcd  ;  GaTrroo^  re$rj7rcc  ; 
'A^tfi)^  KS>c}\.rjyet ;  e^of^  siaOa,  j  fA^if^va^  f^csf^ovx  ;  /SctAAA',  /Se/SoAct  ;  p^o-c-Uy 
sipaycc  ;   O'TTsv^a,  sT'^H^ct  j  ccy.iico,  tjkocc. 

These  changes  nremade,  even  if  they  affect  the  augment  ; 

as,  fA^r^;,  oAcT^,  not  ^jAtt^. 

Many  verbs  in  a  pure  want   this  tense,    especially  those 
which  have  otv,  sv,  or  ou,  Tf>recetling  a  ;  also  pollysyllables  in  oa^  m 
^eo,  or  (ra-a}i  with  many  others  :  but  opv^^rw  makes  apvyoL  and  opM'  ' 

pvyei. 

Pluperfect. 

The  phiperfect  is  formed  from  the  perfect  by 
changing  a  into  uv^  and  prefixing  the  augment, 
when  the  word  begins  with  a  consonant;  as,  r^- 
7iuta,  etelvTtetv. 


Verbs — Deponent  and  Contract. 


91 


DEPONENT  VERBS. 


Deponent  verbs  have  the  middle  form,  except 
in  the  perfect,  phiperfect,  and  paulo-post  future, 
which  are  taken  from  the  passive,  and  sometimes 
the  first  and  second  aorists. 


SYNOPSIS. 


Indie. 

Imper. 

Opt. 

Subj. 

Infin. 

Part. 

Pre?ent 
Imperfect 

S-ix-fi'j 

'St/UHV 

-U\UAt 

-'tvBcit 

'Q/uivce 

Perfect 
Pluperfect 

^iS'cyfXSLL     ) 

SiSi->o 

-y/uivos 

^yfxin;^ 

'X^^» 

-y^ivos 

Paulo  p.  F. 

J'-M^-i^xt 

-Ol/UHV 

'iirQoLt 

'Ofxivag 

1st  A  or.  iM. 

iSi^St/UMV 

Si^.At 

-ttlfJltlV 

.UfXAt 

-AO-Qul 

-ClfAiVOC 

1st  Fut.  M. 

Ji'^-0/A3Lt 

•oijuhv 

'ia-Sxi 

-o^uivig 

1st  Aor.  P. 

tS^iX^av 

i^iXB-itli 

.mv 

-w 

-hxt 

•UQ 

1st  Fut.  P. 

(^i^Qixr-c/UAi 

.Oi,UHV 

-i^Sxt 

-G/uivc; 

A  few  of  these  verbs  have  a   2d  Aorist  Middle  ;    as,   7rvv6ctvofAo(ij 
irvQcjUiiv.  i 


CONTRACT  VERBS. 

Verbs  in  oo,  aj,  and  oo,  are  contracted  in  the 
present  and  imperfect  tenses.* 

Verbs  in  ao  contract  guj,  ao,  aov^  into  d  ;  as, 
ttfxaid^  ttfiG)  ;  rcfiaoi-iePj  rtf^Qfisv  ;  rt^aovac,  n^at  ; 
— otherwise  into  a  ;  as,  ^t^ae^  raid  : — t  is  sub- 
scribed ;  as,  nuaeLg  tif.ia(;  ;  rifiaoLUir  tljiquc. 

Verbs  in  eo  contract  ee  into  d^  and  eo  into  5 ; 
as,  (pi?,pe^  ^L?^i  ;  (pcTiEOfievj  <pLXb[.t£v — Before  a  long 
vowel  or  diphthong,  e  is  dropped  ;  as,  c^afco,  ^c- 


♦See  rules  of  contraction,  page  18, 


9^  Ferbs — Contract. 

Verbs  in  oo,  contract  o  before  a  long  vowel  in- 
to cj ;  as,   ;^pi;G'06)5  %pi^(T6  : — before  a  short  vowel 
or  01^5  into  «•;  as,  j^^pvaoele^  ;Kpi;cra7e ;  %pi;(Toa(7i,  ;^pi^cr-  J 
6ai : — otherwise  into  ot ;   as,   x^P^aost^  ;Kprcr0i;.     In  1 
the  infinitive  oetv^  is  contracted  into  ovv  ;  as,  %pi^cr- 
oft^,  ^pvaovv. 

1.  Diss}'liables  in  a^,  from  which  the  Attics  have  exclu- 
ded ;,  are  not  contracted  ;  such  as,  kXxco  for  scXoitc^  ;  xa«y  for 

2.  Dissyllables  msa  are  rarely  contracted,  in  the  first  per- 
son singular,  or  in  the  first  and  third  persons  plural  of  the 
indicative  ;  or  in  the  optative  and  subjunctive  moods,  or  the 
participle  ;  as,  Teh^a^  TrXgofJi^v^  ^Xsovtri,  TrXsoi^^  "TtrXsTp^^  vrXscov.  In 
the  imperative  and  infinitive,  they  are  generally  contracted, 
but  not  always. 

3.  In  the  optative  mood,  active  voice,  the  Attics  use  turn 
for  oiuLi,  which  becomes  &;3jv  in  verbs  from  uu  -^  as,  o/jsujjv  for 
opccoifjLi ;  TfAo/jjv  for  riXeotfJLi.  In  some  verbs  in  Aa^  they  change 
oc  into  j; ;  as,  ^>:5  for  (^«5  ;  ^/^/.^iv  for  ^t-^cA-i. 


First   Declension. 


ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Tty.cca}. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

% 

Present  Tense. 

s. 

rifJL'OCCe}  J 

a  ;          'ueii,    -xq  ; 

-««, 

-«  : 

D. 

-cfc£r6V,  'urov  ; 

-flJfTdV, 

'clrov 

F. 

'Uoy.iy, 

-Juev  ;    -acre,  -^rf  ; 
Imperfect  Tense. 

-flftijC-i, 

'UTl. 

S. 

ertf^'uov, 

-uv  \        -ecsq,           -uq  ; 

-«£, 

'»    .* 

D. 

'CicTov^       -arov  ; 

-««sr}jj> 

'UTjjV 

P, 

'CiOI^SVj 

,  -^ftfv  ;   -«eTf  J        -tffTf  ; 

-cc«y, 

-WV' 

D. 
P. 


Verbs — Contract, 


IxMPERATIVE  MOOD.  /•*  ^  T  V  ^  ^ 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tenslk^  ^  o^     .- 

~  V^    /^  4.JK  i««*  -.  '^.  ^ 


OPTATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 
S.   rifJL'dctfJit,  -$/«.<  ;      'cMi<;  -^$  ;  -act,  -y  : 

P.         -ecotf^sv,  '^f^sv  ;    -ecoiTs,       -qtre  ;  -^ifto/fcv,         -^ev. 

SBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.   rty.'X6},   '^  ;  -UYfii  -xi  ;  -«>i,  •«  : 

D.  '      -ecKTov,       -oiroy  ;  -a>7T(jy,  -«tov  : 

P.    'OLUfJLei^  -off^sv  ;        -ACJjrf,        -are  ;  -ccuo-iy  'UTt, 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Masc.  Fern. 

^ing.    N.  Ttf^-etav,       -CUV  ;        -xoVTcc,     -u'^ot,  \ 


Neut. 

-<5C<3v,      -«;»  : 


PASSIVE  AND  MIDDLE  VOICE. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

S.   rif^-uaf4,xi,        -afjLOLi  \           -ceri,           -x  ;  -oi£rxt,    -uTeti  : 

D.         -ocof^hv,      -cofjLt&o))  ;        -dtgc*^'»v,     -ccT&oV  5  -icfc-^oy,    -uG-dcvl 

P.        -xofJLiQx,     'CuiU^oc  ;        -sftfc^f,      -c60"^e  ;  -flcovrcd/,   -ft^vTac/. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

S,  irtf>L'Xof^?iv,      -af^m  ;           -i«flt/         -a/  ;  -aero,      -aro  : 

D,         'otoftsdoVy   'con-c^ov  •        -a£<r^oy,    -ac^ov  3  -^f^^Jjy,  -ucr$7]v  : 

P.         'XOfte$ec,  -uf>is$s'j          'Cis<r$ey     -a«"^i«  ;  -c^cpro,   -»vro. 


94  Verbs. — Contract* 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect  Tense 


OPTATIVE  MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

D.  'cto>)fAt$6V,    -utisCav  ;  -cc^jc-^ov,    -u'^^oV',    -cct}<r0ov,    -u^6oV  : 

P.  'Cit(i)tC£&U^     'Ci)f/.£^X  ;  'OCY/O-et^  -uCrh-j      -XCJVTUt,     •UVTCtl. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

G.  -fitO|6tfVa,   -a^iVii  ;     -Ci<ifA.£\7^C^  'a(jL£n%-j     'CCOt^iVH)      -^fA.£y>5. 

Second  Declension. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 


S.   ^/A-ew,        -ft 

D. 

p.       -fa^£v,      -s^fv  ; 


^/^eia;. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

-f£.'$          -5/$  ; 

-ff/, 

'£]  : 

-ssTov,       -£irov  ; 

-fCTfiV, 

'fira^ 

;     -ffTf ,        -fTrf  ; 

-£yr/, 

-«r/. 

Verbs — Contract.  95 

Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  ((ptX-ecv,       -av  ;  -ff?,         sU  ;  -«,  -«  : 

P.   -fo/ttfv,         -»|ttfv  ;       -f£7e,      -f<re  ;  -fov,  -«». 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  (pi^-esy         -ii  ;  -sera,  -{Ira  : 

. OPTATATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 
S.  (ptX'£oif>ct,    'olfii  J  -eoi^j     'oii  ^  -sot,         -c7  : 

p,  -eotjitsv,    'Oif^ev  ;         -eo/Xf  ;    -oiTg,         -eoiev,       -ohv, 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  <p/A-£6;,        -v ;         -£>^$,        -ijg  ;  -£»?,  -^  : 

P.  "EUfUV,      -UfJLi)l  i     -eJjn ,  -^T£  J  -SMTt,         'U(ri, 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 
Masc-  Fern.  Neut. 

Sing.  N.  ^iX'£ct)V^       -Jv  ;  -foyCdj,      -oZ<^o(,  -,      -sov,        -ouv  : 

PASSIVE  AMD  MIDDLE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

S.  0vX-£6f^cct,     'if^tcit  ;        -f>5,       -J  ;  -serai y      -sliTut: 

D.  (piX'Soi^Lsdov,   -Sf^sSov  ;      -seo-6ov,  -elc-^ov  ;    -es<!'6ov,    -elo-^ov: 


96  Verbs — Contract. 


Imperfect  Tense. 

s. 

l^PiX'eofJiVi'i^ 

-8tt;jv ;     -f «,        -«; 

•BBTOf 

-eiTo: 

D. 

'£Of^e$ov, 

-^f^e^ov  ;  -£eT$ov,  -it(!-6ov; 

-eetr^DV, 

-eto-$tjy 

P. 

-'SOfA.e&cCi 

-if^idcc  ;    -es<rd£,    -fTc^s; 

'S0V70, 

-«yro. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 


OPTATIVE    MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

D.  -£oif^£Oov^  -oifA^sBov  ;        -£of(rdov,  'Oi<r$ov  ;  ■£oio-&i]Vy  'oi(r$m' 

P.  -£otf^(^cc,    'olf^eOoc  ;        -foi&'^f,    -o7<r^ff  ;    '£oi^ro,   -otvTo, 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

D.  -£au.i6dVy  'oifA.£6ov',    •  £vj-9ov,     ->JcJov;     -fjjcr^ov,      -^«r^ov: 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense* 


PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Sing.  N*  (PiX-£ef^£Vo<;y 'Hvlbvo^  ;  -fd^M-fyjj,  -s^ttfy;?  ;  -sof^evovy  -S//.£V6V  : 

G.         sof^eva,  '^f^£vii  ;  -fOittfv;;;,  -»,«tev3y$;  -eof^fva,    -8^£y«,  &C, 


Verbs — Contract. 

Third  Declension. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 


97 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

.1      •  -AflC. 


s. 

^r,>i'cafj 

-a  ;           -df<5,           -«<$  ; 

-o«, 

-«<  : 

D. 

-OSTdV,           -aT<jy 

j 

-OCTOV, 

-KTaV 

P. 

-OCfUV, 

Imperfect  Tense. 

J 

-o«o*/, 

-«V». 

S. 

eS^X-oov, 

-»yj           -Of  5,        -»$; 

-6f, 

-«: 

D. 

-ofTdtf,    -aiTdv; 

-OfTJjV 

,  -«r«v : 

P. 

'OOfA^ti, 

-«/t4fy;      -ofTf,     -»Tf; 

'ooy, 

•8V. 

8. 
D. 
P. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

-ofTov,     -«Tov  ;  -ogr<yv,         -^TAtv: 


OPTATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

D.  "Ooiiov,     -oirov  ;       -ootr7]V -oittjv 

P.  'Cotf^sV)        'Otf^ev  ;        -oo^rj,      -o^rf  ;  -oo/fv    -olev, 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  ^j?A-«4»,     -»  ;  'oyii,      'oig;         -oTi,  -01 : 

D.  -ojjr«y,    -ft/Tov,        -otttov,  -©rav  : 

P.  -oafis)t^  -af/.£v  ;     -oj^tj,     -an  ;         -oojcrt^     -asrt. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 


PARTICIPLE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Masc.  Fem.  Neut. 

Sing.  N.    ^;?A-o&;v,    -£v;  -oao-ec,     -H<rx;  -oov,        -«v: 

G.         -ooyTdj, -«i>rfl$j      -oi^c*«j5,     -icrj^;         -oO!»To$, -svTd?,  &;c. 
10 


^8  P^erbs — Contract. 

PASSIVE  AND  MIDDLE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

S.   &7iX-oofA.ott^        •^f^eii  J  -6|7,         'ot  ;         'oeTxi,        -drut  : 

D.         'ooftcS-ov,    -^f^sB-ov  ;      'oecrB-ov ,-HO-S-ov  ;  -oec^ov,      -ho-S-ov  : 
P.  -oofisBuf    '^f^eS-ct  ;       -OfC^-f,  -^<r3f  ;     -flovT<«/,       -avTcd*. 

Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  £0ij>i-oof^7}v,      -«/6C3j)»  ;        -OS,  -«  ;  -fltrej  -»to  : 

D.  'OOf^eBov,  -tif^eS-ov  ;     -ofcSav,    -»cr^ov;  -ofO-^v,  -»cr5?;v  : 

P.  'OOf^eS-oCy'^f^Bx  5      -oeo-Bs)    -^cBe  ;  -oovro,  -ayro. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  ^ijA-oa^         -»  ;  -oecr0ct),  -«o-^iy: 

D.  '0SC-&6V,  -^(r$ov  ;     -«fO-^^y,        -«^^6;v: 

OPTATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

S.  d'nX'Ooif^YiV,     -o7,tc9}V  ;  -doio^        -cTo  ;        -oo/to,      -o/Td: 

D.  'OoifjLi^oV',  -6ty.e6ov  J       -oe/o-^ov,  -a<o-^ov  ;  -ooKr^tjv^  -oi(r6nv: 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

D.  -oUfJLB^ov^  '0)jiA.e9oyi    -oJjr^ov,    -ac&ov]      ovcrBoVf      -^^Bovl 

P.  'OAJf^e^oc,   -Z^i^a)    -oTiO-ky     -airk  ;    'cmren,     -mroci,, 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect  Tense. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Sing.  N.  ^v,X-oof^tvoq,  -^i^evog  ;  -oo^svt),  -Sf^v^i  ;  -oof^evoy,  -8/^£Vov  : 

G.         -oof-^syif)  -s/^evn  ;  -«eftfV3;$,  -«/M.fv;;5;  -oof^vHy    -s^gyS,  &C. 


Verhs —  Contract. 


V»»       VJH        <J\ 


1  ^"^  ^^  ^^ 

PASSIVE  AND  MIDDLE. 

^S    fK    '30 

-hJ      ^     v^    vT 

fu  5-  s.  ^ 
?  ?  ? 

III 

?^  'S  ?^ 

CO 

w 
> 

C     ^{     «t*     o 
«      «     « 

O 

<! 

H 

;?; 
o 

a 

X 

o 

^9' 3 'a 

O    §    S   § 

«Ph 

O 

(/3 


.    2?J»S  '» 


^     «         ^        » 


.  «a  ?9  «a    *^  •*  '* 


§  «  «    '^  " 


*9 


^   s-  gt 


'^    S    5    5 

a    ?    7    p 
'-H    :f.  ^  ^ 


5-  *<  < 


St 

a, 
B 


100  Verbs  in  fjLt, 

Some  contracts  are  found  in  more  conjugations  than  one  ; 


as 


a  or  f. 

yT^pota,      >iO)<pctco^      ^vpeca,      trvXcteo^      ettovacj, 
yijpe^f,        Xea^iCJ^      ^vpst^^        c-t^Afo;,       ottovsa. 

£  or  0. 


a  or  0. 

(itccca, 

^iou,      &C. 

a 

or  e  or  o. 

xvv!^-X6f)      -ea,      -oa,  &C. 

Baryton   or  Circumflex. 

tH^-OfJLOU 

or  'sciLtoct 

iXyc-b) 

or    'SCO, 

(ioC-JC'6> 

-SCO, 

eTTlf^^sX-OfAMl 

-eo/4,ut. 

yrj9-6t 

-ea 

KVXlV^'Ctt 

'ica 

ypA(p-a 

-£A) 

xv-at 

-tea. 

^I^OCCK-Of 

-estJ 

^vp'Oftect 

-soptcci. 

^oK-a 

-iU 

piTTJ-M 

-eta* 

ei^-co 

-gu 

rpvx-6> 

-g(a. 

uX'U 

'ia* 

VERBS   IN  \ll. 

Verbs  in  ^i  are  formed  from  verbs  in  ao,  ^0,00, 
and  iJ6)  : 

I.  By  changing  6)  into  yn ;  and  lengthening  the 
penult  in  the  singular.* 

II.  By  prefixing  the  reduplication. 

The  reduplication  is  proper  or  improper. 


*  In  (he  secood  Aorist,  the  penult  of  the  dual  and  plural  is   lengthen- 
ed, in  all  verbs,  but  TiQ^f^i^  'nt^t,  ^iSatf/.t, 


Verbs  in  f<.t,  101 

Proper,  when  the  first  consonant  of  the  present 
tense  is  repeated  with  l  ;  as,  Soo,  8t§wf^t.  If  the 
first  consonant  is  a  rough  mute,  it  is  changed  in- 
to its  cognate  smooth  one  ;*  as,  6eo,  h^Syi^l. 

Improper,  when  a  rough  i  only  is  prefixed, 
which  happens  to  verbs  beginning  with  (t7,  7t7,  or 
a  vowel ;  as,  alao.  lolyjfii. 

Thus,  from  clacj  is  formed  lalyi^t. 
from  0ao,  rtOyjut. 

from  S0Q9  ^tSidfii. 

from  SeixvvQf  Setxvvfzc. 

Verbs  in  ^c  have  but  three  tenses  of  that  form, 
the  present,  imperfect,  and  second  aorist.  They 
take  the  other  tenses  from  verbs  in  o,  from  which 
they  are  derived. 

Many  want  the  reduplication,  particularly  all 
verbs  in  v^t  ;  which  want,  likewise,  the  second 
aoristt  and  the  optative  and  subjunctive  moods. 

1.  The  Poets  and  Colics  change  many  contract  verbs  in- 
to verbs  in  f*.i,  but  without  the  reduplication  ;  as, 

ytK0C6f,         yly,y^f/.t. 

cpxctf,         opyif^t. 
Sometimes  they    repeat  the    initial  letters  ;    as,    aXoccd^ 

In  the  Ionic  and  Bceotic  dialects,  the  reduplication  is  made 
by  e  ;   as,  eT%(jLt^  TeBvfAt, 

2.  To  the  common  reduplication,  «,  is  sometimes  added; 
as,  TT^^-za,  TFif^TsrXKy^i, 

The  reduplication  is  sometimes  in  the  middle  ;  as,  onu^ 


*  By  rule  ii.  page  5. 

t  Dissyllables  in  vf^t  have  a  second  aorist,  but  it  is  the  same  with  the 
Imperfect. 

10* 


102  Verbs  in  f/.i, 

3.  Barytons  sometimes  become    verbs  in  i^t<  ;  as,   ^pi6mi  j 
from  ^H^oj,     But  in  such  instances,  the  verb  in  fjn  seems  to  be  ^ 
formed    from   a   contract  verb  derived    from  the  Baryton  : 
thus,  l^ptBrjf^t  is  from  ^ptSeco,  derived  from  (ipida. 

FORMATION    OF  THE    TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVE  VOICE. 

Imperfect. 

The  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  present,  by 
changing  ^ii  into  v  ;  prefixing  the  augment,  ex- 
cept when  the  verb  begins  with  6 ;  as,  tcdyjiih  eti- 
6yjv  ;  lalyjut  IgIyiv, 

Second  A  ovist. 
The  second  aorist  is  formed  from  the  imper- 
fect, by  casting  off  the  reduplication,  and  taking 
the  augment  ;  as,  ettdyjv^  eOyjv  ;  urlyjVt  ealyjv. 

First  Future. 
The  first  future  has  sometimes  a  reduplication  ; 
as,  rtOj^cTo). 

FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES  IN  THE  PASSIVE  VOICE. 

Present. 

The  present  is  formed  from  the  present  active, 
by  changing  1^6  into  /^a^^and  shortening  the  penult: 

as,  lalrj.v^  lalauat  ;  rLdyji.ay  Ttde^ac. 

The  following  do  not  shorten  the   penult,     ectji^oct,  ukocx^i- 

last,  however,  sometimes  shortens  the  penult. 

Imperfect. 

The  imperfect  is  formed  from  the  present,  by 
changing  pux'  into  uriv^  and  prefixing  the  aug- 
ment, except  when  the  verb  begins  with  l\  as,  r^- 


Verbs  in  f^i — First  Conjugation,  103 

Perfect, 

The  long  penult  of  the  perfect  active  is  short- 
ened in  the  passive  ;  as,  &6cjxa,  hho^L\  ec^iac  and 
redeLiiac  are  exceptions. 

FORMATION  OF   THE  TENSES   IN  THE   MIDI>LE  VOICE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

The  present  and  imperfect  are  the  same  with 
those  of  the  passive. 

Second  Aorist. 

The  second  aorist  is  formed  from  the  imper- 
fect by  casting  off  the  reduplication  :  as,  eridefiyiVj 


FIRST  COKJUGATIOK. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

'lal-yjiiiy  yjgj  yiOl  \  arov,  atov  j  afiev^  ate^  dac* 

Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

lal-riV,  yjg,  >7  [  atov^  ar/jv  \  auev.  ar^,  aaouv. 

Attic  Imperfect,  after  the  Contract  forms, 
more  in  use.* 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 


♦  Throughout  the  singular  number,  and  ia  the  3d  person  plural. 


104  Verbs  in  fjn — First  Conjugation, 

Perf.  ealyixay    PIup.   etalyjzsiv,      1st    A.  ealyjaa. 
or  ialaxa*  or  kdlaxeiv. 

Second  Aorist* 
Sing.  Dual  Plural. 

1st  F.  alyjao. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Attic  Present,  after  the  Contract  forms,  more 
in  use. 


Sing 

• 

Dual. 

Plural. 

ujl-ae. 

aero, 

1  a^tov^ 

aetQVj  \ 

1  oiste,     asrcycfav 

(X, 

drcj. 

1  droPy 

drovj 

1  dtBy     drc^aav. 

I%rf,  and  Pluperf.  ialyixe.     1st  Aor.  alnaov. 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

olyi'diy  tTg),  1  tovy  tQVf  I  re,  tQGav. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

lalai'Yiv^  yjg^  yj  j  Tilov,  yfl'/iv  \  yj^ev,  yfls,  yjaav  &  ev. 

Perf.  and  Pliip.  ialrixoifiL.     1st  Aor,  Glyiaaif.a. 


*  The  third    person  plural  is  often*syncopated  ;  as,  fcCstv  for  sC«<ratr ; 

i^iV  for  sSscrotv  ;   i^litv  for  isrlna-etv, 

t  And€^7jtfl-ctv.     Horn.  I.    M.   55. 

:]:  The  Colics  retain  the  Jong  vowel  in  this  tense  ;  as,  W7«S/,  t;6»7/,  jT/- 
Joe^t,  And  frona  both  forms  Bt  is  often  cast  away  •  hence  '^7;/  ?nd  V7i«, 
T/6»,  (J'fey>'tri/,  &c.  in  the  second  person 


Verbs  in  fjLt — First  Conjugation, 


105^ 


>k 


Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

alai'YiVj  Yi^i  71  I  ypjovj  yflyjp,  \  yjfi^v^  ypSf  yjcav  &  sv- 

1st  Fut.  GlyjaoifiL. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

lal'Q,  d$,*  a,  I  arov,  drov^  \  dfiev^  drsj  oat. 
Perf.  and  Pliip.  eGlrjxo).     1st  Aor.  (77>7(T(j. 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.         ^        Plural. 

ol'dy  Tig,  ^  I  ntoVf  rlroVf  \  uusv,  nre^  ijai. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  lalavat-  Perf.  and  Plup.  ialyixs- 
[im..  First  Aor.  alyicrac  Second  Aor.  olnvau 
•First  Fut.  clTiaeLv. 

PARTICIPLES. 

„  Present  and  Imperf.  lal-ag^  dcra,  «r.  Perfect  anij 
piup.  ialyixog.  1st  A.  alyjaag.  2d  A.  a7-ag,  acra, 
\ir,  1st  Fut.  gT/jGov. 

bYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVE 
VOICE. 


1      Indie 

Imp. 

Optat. 

Subj. 

Infin. 

Part. 

Present      'i^h/ut 
Imper.      j  Wlnv 

\ 

'ta-lctSl 

{(rletlHV 

Is-lZ 

i<rlctVAt 

W7*c 

Perfect    ;  y%icx 
Pluperf.     «/r»x«/v 

\ 

i<rlnH.i 

WlnKOt/Ui 

'  (O-lniCCO 

iT}hK?VAt 

io-lmces 

1st  Aorisl  i<J-ho-(t 

a-l»(rov 

a-lna-etiui 

1  (rlna-Z 

o-ho-oJ 

0-1)1(7  AC 

2d  Aorist,  s(7-7>»v 

(j-lhdt 

(rJoLtnv 

'  <rlZ 

(rhvctt 

a-l^c 

i  St  Fut.    \o-%<roo 

a-lna-otfxi 

i 

alho-uv 

o-lno-m 

♦  It  PB  sometimes  written  with  an  w  ;  as, 

%,  V  I  ^^<>^  S'"^'  I  — V'^^ — 


lOS  Verbs  in  fjn — First  Conjugation, 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

"**  Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

lala-fiaif  aai^lai  \  [ledovj  adoVf  adov  |  fieday  aOe,  vlat* 
Ik 

Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

lola-[iY}Vy  (To,t  7o  I  i-tedovy  adov,  odyjv  |  /.leOa,  aQe,  vJo. 
Perf.  ialaf/ai.     PI  up.    ialafiyjv.    1st  A.  Ealadyji'* 
1st  Fut,  aladyjaoiiai.    Paulo-post  F.  ealaaofiat. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect 
Sing.  *         Dual.  Plural. 

hla-aojX  o'06)  I  cOov,  adov  \  crfe,  aOcdaav. 
Perf.  and  Plup.  IcrJoco.    IstAor.  alaOyfJi, 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

hylai'fiyjVj  o,  To,  |  iieOov,  aOov,  adr^v  \  ^i^Oa,  (T0£,  vlo, 
Perf.  and  Piup.    ialatf^iYiv.      1st  Aor.  alaOeiyjv. 
1st  Fut.  oladrjooifiyjv.     Paulo-p.  F.  i(ylouyoi[x,yjp. 


♦  The  Ionics  take  away  the  o-  in  the  second   person,  and  the  Attics 

contract  the  syllables  ;  as,         ^ 

T>  A       ^  Ion.    'iTlsteti,  riQioLl. 

Present,    ^  ^^^   ^^^^^      ^^g^^ 

T  r.    .       Hon.    W7ato,     «t;6?o,  t^iS'cc, 

Imperfect,     J  ^^^^   -^^^^^^      ^^^g^^    ^^^-^^ 

t  See  preceding  Note. 

if  The  Ionics  take  away  the  o- ;  and  the  Attics  contract  the  syllable?  : 
a;«,  'io-luOj  %olk);  riQiOy  Ti9«  ;  itSoo,  StSa, 


Verbs  in  f^ — First  Conjugation* 


107 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

^d'Qiiaif  fi9  nlat  \  ufieOov,  r,a6ov,  rjadov  \  DfieOaj  rssQe, 
or  as  some  think,  [ovlai^ 

sal-ofiaLy  a,  dJat,  &c. 

1st  Aor.   alaSu. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imperf,  lalaadai.  Terf.  and  Pluperf. 
ialdadau  1st  A.  aladripaL.  1st  F.  GladyjoeadaL. 
Paulo-post  F.  iolaxjEodaL. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres  and  Imperf.  lolauerog.  Perf.  and  Plu- 
perf.  bcrJa^vog.  1st  A.  aladeig,  1st  F.  olaQYiao^B- 
vos>    Paulo-post  F.  ialaao^cevog. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  PASSIVE 
VOICE. 


Indie. 


Present 
Imperfect 
Perfect 
Pluperfect 
Paulo-p.  F. 
1st  Aorist 


hrlst/unv 
l&late-ojuett 


1st  Future     (rletSna-Ofxstl 


Imper.      Opt. 


\crlct<TO 


Subj.  i    Infin. 


'da-lZ/uett'talaLTSxi 
WlZfAeLtiTlctu-Sctt 


Part. 


la-lx/usvos 
'.trlcKrofxivog 


*  It  is  sometimes  written  with  an  w  ;  as, 


108  Verbs  ui  f^i — First  Conjugation, 

MIDDLE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

P'^^^«".t^"^|as  in  the  Passive. 
Impeiiect,    j 

1st  A  or.  ealyjaai^yiVy  ealyjaQ^  &ic. 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

eGla-iiyjv^  Co,  ro  \  [ledov,  adoVf  aSyiv  \  [leOa^  aSe  vlo> 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  Aor.  olriaaif  alyjaaodu,  &c. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ala-60f  060  I  adoVf  adov  \  ade^  cdcdaoLV. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  Aor.  Glyjaat^iyjVf  Glyjaaio,  &c. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  «  Plural. 

alac-iiYiVj  0,  ro  |  iiedcn^,  odov,  aOyjv  \  iieda,  oOe,  vlo. 

SUBjriS'CTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  A.  ay/jGG)[iat,  GlyjGyjy  &c. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

aJ-o^at,  a,  drat  |  ofiedov,  dGdov^  aGdov  \  OfieOa,  dade^ 


Verbs  in  ut — Second  Conjugation, 


109 


INFINITIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  A  or,  alyjaaadai.  2d  Aor.  alaadai. 
1st  Fut.  alriaeadai. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 

1st  Aor.  alrjGaiievog.     2d  Aor.  alaiievog. 
1st  Fut.  Glyjaofievog. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  MIDDLE 
VOICE. 

Indie.         Imp.     Optat.    |    Subj.         Infin.     |       Part. 


Present 
Iroper. 
2d  Aori?t 
1st  Fut. 
IstAonst 


'nrlot/usLt 

ffli;0-o/U(.ett 
ta-lne-oL/unv 


<r]iitroU  \  (/lua-ctifAhV    <rlM<ra^/ucu 


'tO'loLO-QsLt 
9lx<r&At 

yho-cta-bxt 


'talst/uivoc 

(rho-o/uivcc 


SECOJ^D  CONJUGATION. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

rtd-y][iLj  >7g,  yiai  \  srov^  stov  \  e^Vj  bUb,  elct. 

Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural, 


♦  iirt^iTuf  is  sometimes  syncopated  ;  as^^T/Q^v. 

11 


no  Verhs  in  fjLt — Second  Conjugation, 


Attic  Imperfect,  after  the  Contract  forms,  more 
ill  use.* 

Sing.  Ducil.  Plural. 

fT'tO-eor,  Si^,  £€$5  Htc,  B£,  el  I I end'Sov^Sv* 

Perf.  redyjxa.     Plup.  eredyjxELV.  ,  1st  A.  £dy]xa. 

Second  Aorist.t 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ed-yiPj  ed'yjgy  ed-yj  |  elov,  elyjv  j  £[i£Vf  elsy  eaav. 

1st  Fut.  Qr,aQ. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.      <  Plural. 

Attic  Present,  after  the  Contract  forms,  more  in 

use. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 


tS-BBy  I  BSto,^e£roVy 
elf  I  Bito^Welrov, 


££roV,\\£Bt£y 

£lr(dv,\\£ir£9 


£eriiaa/v. 

£LtiJGaV, 


Perf.  and  Plup.  t£dy]X£. 


Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 


*  See  'Note,  page  103. 

t  See  first  Note,  page  104. 

:j:  For  TiSsQ/,  by  reason  of  the  preceding  S.     See  Rule  ii.  page  5. 

^  All  verbs  in  /"/,  from  primifives  in  «w,  are  irregular  in  this  tense,  re- 
taining the  short  vowel,  and    substituting  c  for  the   syllable  6t ;  as,  s?, 


Verbs  in  fJn-^Second  Conjugation,  111 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

^iSet'YiVj  y^gj  yj  \  yjlov^  yflyjv  \  y;[ievj  rile,  yjoav^  and  ev. 

Perf.  and  PIiip.  rEdrjxoiixi. 


Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual  Plural. 

Q€L'yjv^  yjgj  yj  \  yjloVj  yflYjv  \  ri^iev^  yfle^  yjaavy  and  ev. 
Is  Fut.  dyjaoiiit. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

nd'Of  Yig,  Yi  1  ntov,  nrov  \  ufxev^  nte,  oau 

Perf.  and  Plup.  redyjxco. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imperf.  ridevat. 
Perf.   and  Pluperf.  reOyjxevat, 
2d  Aor.  delvai.^     1st  Fut.  Brfleiv. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperf.  Tr^O-f  t$,  elaa,  ev. 
Perf.  and  Pluperf.  teOyjxcdg. 
Second  Aorist,  d-eig,  etcra,  ev^ 
First  Future,  driGcdv. 


*  V^erbs  from  primitives  in  mo  change  the  short  vowel  into   a  diph- 
thong in  this  tense. 


112 


Verbs  in  fAi — Second  Conjugation. 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVE 
VOICE. 


Pres. 
Imper. 
Perf. 
Plup. 

1st  Ao.leOijKet 
2d  Ao.  f^jjy 
1st  F.    \6>}(rAf 


Indie.    I  Imp.         Opt 


^55 


Subj. 


Infin.     I  Part. 


redijfcsvoii 


rt&£ig 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 


Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

nde-ixaif  crat,*7at  |  fiedov,  adov,  odov  \  fieday  afe,  viae. 

Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

etSe'iiYiv,  GO*  "to  I  (J-sdov^  adov,  adriv  \  [isda,  (T^g,  vh. 
Perf.  reOsiiiai.    Plup.  etedeijiriv. 
1st  Aor.  eteSyjv     1st  Fut.  redyjaoiiaL. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  redeKyoiiau 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

tiQe-aoif  oBcd  \  odov,  adcyv  \  ade^  adoaav. 
Perf.  and  Plup.  teOem.  1st  Aor.  redrflc 


*  See  firet  Note,  page  106. 
t  See  last  Note,  page  106. 


Ferbs  in  fju — Second  Conjugation,  1 13 


OPTATIVE. 


Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Du.il.  Plural. 

tLdei-u'/iv,  o,  tOy  I  i^eOoVy  aOov,  adyjv  \  f-isOaf  oQe,  vto. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 

red-eif^yjv,  do,  slro  \  eL[isdoVf  eiadov^    ecadirv  \  euieOa 

[e'Lodsy  elvro. 
1st  Aor.  redfir.v.     IsiFut.  reOyjaoi^tyiv* 
Paulo-post  Fut.  teQuiaoiur^v. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

reO-uuat,  vj,  nrat  \  cdiieOovy  rladov,  r^aOov  \  o^eda,  naQsy 

First  Aorist,  tedo^  're%,  &:c. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  mOFoBai. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect  tsOdaOai. 
1st  Aor.  teOraui.     1st  Fut.  red/iaeaOac. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  reQecCEadau 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  rSenev-oq^  yjy  ov. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  redetuevog. 
1st  Aor.  redstg.     1st  Fut.  redyiaoiievog. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  redeicouevog. 
11* 


114 


Verbs  in  fit — Tliird  Conjugation, 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  xMOODS   AND   TENSES  IN  THE  PASSIVE 
VOICE. 


Indie.    I  Imp.   f    Opt.        Subj.  ,  Infin.    j  Part 


Pres 
Imp  erf. 
Perfect 
Piup. 
Paulo. 
1st  Ao. 
1st  Put 


T£$ei(ro 
r£&9)Tt 


rt6£tf^rjV 

T£Q£ir,V 


r£$ai!^uifr£$£'i(r$a.t 
r£&cS        r£&rvc&t 


rt6£fA,£Vog 

red£i^syog 

Te&eto-oy.£vog 
r£&£i<i 
r£67]  7g  <y-$ui.  r£$ii(rof^gvo^ 


MIDDLE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  Aor.  sdyixafiyjv.     1st  Fut.  dyjaoi.iaL* 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

sSe-^yiVf  aoy^ro  \  [xedov,  adov,  aOyjv  \  [isOay  ode^  vlo. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Oe-ao,  f  crOo  ]  adov,  adov  |  ads,  adoaav. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 


*  Ion.  «9f3,  Aft.  69» 
t  Ion.  Bio^  Att.  Sa, 


Verbs  in  f^t — Third  Conjugation, 


115 


Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Qei'lLYlVi  0,  ro  |  ^i^dov,   oOoVy  adyjv  \  ueda,  oOe,  vlo. 
1st  Future,  Qr^aoi^n^. 


SUBJUNCTIVE, 


Present  and  Imperfect  like  the  Passive. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

[pvtai. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
2d  Aor.  deaOai.     l^tFut.  6/iaeadai. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
2d  Aor.  Oe^ev-og,  y;,  ov.     1st  Fut.  Oyjao^vog. 


SYNOPSIS  OF  TP 

1       Indie. 

[E  MOO 
Imp. 

DS   AN] 
VOICE 

Opt. 

[)  TENSES 

Subj. 

IN  THE  MIDDLE 

Iiifin.      1    Part. 

Pres. 
Imperf. 
1st  Ao. 
2d  Ao. 
IstFut, 

sri&£f^r,v  y 

THIRD  COmUGATION. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 


116 


Ferbs  in  fju — Third  Conjugation, 


Imperfect 
Sing.  Dual  Plural. 


Attic  Imperfect,  after  the  Contract  forms,   more 
in  use.* 

Sing.                             Dual. 
^hih-oov^  iVf  osg,  8g,  08,S  \ | 

Perf.  &5t>);^a,     Pliip.  eSeScdxetv. 


Plural. 
1st  Aor.  sScdxa. 


Second  Aorist.t 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

eS'OVf  £§-6)$,  eS'Cd  I  otov^  ot/jv  \  oi.isv,  ote,  oaav. 
First  Fut.  Smq. 


IMPERATIVE. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Pres.  and  Imperf.  |  8180-61,  to  \  rovy^tov  \  ^e,  tocav. 

Attic  Present,  after  the   Contract  forms,   more 
in  use. 


StS'OS 

6, 


Sing. 
oet(o,\ 


Plural. 


iftQ. 


oste. 


ostQrsav, 


Dual. 

\0£r0V,    1   OStQV, 

j  irovf  I    Sruv, 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  SsScdxs. 

Sing,  Dual.         Plural. 

Second  Aor.  |  So-g,t  tto,  |  tov^  tcdv  \  te,  t(^aav. 


♦  See  Note,  page  103. 

t  See  first  Note,  page  104. 

iftTo?  is  irregular  for  cToQ/.     This  verb  is  itself  irregular  throughout,  in 
this  tenge,  using  o  for  a. 


Verbs  in  fit, — Third   Conjugation,  117 


OPTATIVE. 


Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Perf.  and  Plup.  Sehuxoi^t.       ^  e  frtl  fit  i  ^ 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural, 

f^.Oi'yjVy  yjg^  yj  \  yjrov,  yjtyiv  \  y;fieVf  "/ite^  yjcyav  &  er. 

1st  Fut.  Suaoifjii. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural 

Perfect  and  Pluperf.  SeSoxu. 

Second   Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

S'COf  oigj  9  I  orovy  orov  |  ofisv^  ortef  Mu 

t 

INFINITIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  hthovau 
Perfect  and  Pluperf  hhoxp.vai. 
2d  Aor.  Sfivau*     1st  Fut.  hc^eiv. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  hi^-nc^  Sera,  ov. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  &5G}%)g. 
Second  Aorist,  5-»g,  9cra,  ov. 
First  Future,  hoa^jv. 


*  h^ufAt  only  has  a  diphthong  in  this  tense. 


118 


Verbs  in  fxi — Third  Conjugation, 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVI 
VOICE. 


Present 
Imperfect 
Perfect 
Pluperfect 
1st  Aorist 
2d  Aorist 
1st  Future 


Indie,      jimper. 


MdKA 


(Tec 


Opt. 


Subj, 


SiJ'aiKai) 


Infin. 


iovveit 


Part. 


PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

SiSo-fiaiy  aatf^  T'at  |  (ledoVf  odovy  aSov  \  ^eda^  crfc,  vlat 

Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ehiho'^Ylv^  ooy^  ro  \  fiedov^  oOovy  adyjv  \  fieOa,  oOcf  vlo 

Perf.  ^sSouac.     Plnperf.  eSeSofiriV. 
1st  Aor.  eSoOyjv.     1st  Fiit.  Sodyjaoiiai. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  SsSoaoiiai. 

IMPEATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect* 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

StSo-crojt  060  I  adoVf  adov  |  cde^  aOoaav. 
Perf.  and  Plup.  8eSoao.      1st  Aor.  Sodriri. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

StSoc'^yjv,  0,  to  I  litedovy  aOoVy  oQyiv  \  fieday  cde,  vlo. 


♦  See  first  Note  page  106. 
t  See  last  Note,  page  106. 


J^erbs  m  y.i. — Third  Conjugation. 


iiy 


Perfect  and  Pluperfect, 
Sing.  Dnal.  Plural. 

SsS'OLfiviVj  oloj  otro  I  oifiedovj  oiaOoVf  oladyjv  \  oifieOa. 

[oujOej  oivlo. 
First  Aor.  Sodstnv.     First  Fut.  hodnaoL^Yiv. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  hehoaoL^Yiv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect. 
Sing  Dual.  Plural. 

M'O^uaif  o,  QTat  I  uuedovj  oaOov,  oadov  \  of^eOa,  oaOsy 

Perfect  and  Pluperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural, 

[covlat* 
First  Aorist,  So^cj. 


INFINITIVE. 


Present  and  Imperfect,  SlSog^c. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  SeSoa^i. 
1st  Aor.  So^^vai.     1st  Fut.  So.^yjaea^L, 
Paulo-post  Fut.  SeSoaea^i. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  StSoiiev-ogy  yj,  ov. 
Perfect  and  Pluperfect,  8eSou£Pog. 
1st  Aor.  So^eig.      1st  Fut.  So^aouEvog. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  S^Soao^evog* 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN   THE  PASSIVE 
VOICE. 

Indie.   I  Imp.   1     Opt.     [     Subj.        Infin.         Part. 


Pres. 
Imp. 
Perf. 

Pinp. 

PdU. 


l3t  Ao.  ?/oS«y         J^a(«T/ 

Ist  Fa-MNrojU^ti  ^ 


(fiS'sfAivoe 


Iff 


i:zKj  y  eras  in  fill — j.mra  conjugation* 

MIDDLE  VOICE. 


Present  and    ) 
Imperfect,      j^^^ 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

in  the  Passive. 


First  Aorist,  sSoxafiyjVj  sSqxOj  &c. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

eSo'fiyjVf  ao,*  to  \  [ledov^  adov^  odyjv  |  fteOa,  crfc,  vlo. 
First  Flit.  Soaoixat. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 

Second  Aorist. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

hoi-iiYiv,  o,  to  I  [isOov,  adovy  adriv  j  ^da^  ade,  vlo. 
First  Fut.  h(jy(50iiiYiv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

2-5]uat,  6,  orat  j  Q[i6doVf  uadov,  oadov  \  Q^Sa,  oxjOf^ 


•  h.n.  iS'oo,     Att.  iS^a. 
t  Ion  tToo.     Att.  «r». 


Ve7^bs  m  fjn — Fourth  Conjugation,  If  I 

INFINITIVE. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
2d  Aor.  hoadai.     1st  Fut.  hi^eaQau 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
2d  Aor.  Souevog.     1st  Fut.  SuOouevog. 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  MIDDLE 
VOICE. 


J 


Indie. 


Imp.      Opt.       Subj. 


Pies. 
Imp. 
2d  Ao.    £^of<*]v 

1st    F.      !   ^(nfO'dfA.Otl 

1  St  Ao.  I  e^aKotf^v 


Infin. 


Part. 


FOURTH  COKJUGATIOK. 
ACTIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plur. 

^evyv'VfiLj  vg^  vat  \  vrov^  vtov  |  v^ev^  vre,  xxTu 

Imperfect. 

Sin<r.  Dual.  Plural. 

e(£vyv-vi^^  vg^  v  |  vrov^  vrriV  \  v^iev^  vre^  vaav. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 
Sing.  D  -al.  Plural, 

^evyvv'dij  ro  |  rov,  rov  \  re,  roaav, 

12 


122  Verbs  in  yj — Fourth  Conjugation. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present,  ^ivyvvvctt, 

PARTICIPLE, 

Present,  ^svywq,  Zc-u,  w, 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN  THE  ACTIVE 
VOICE. 

Indie.  Imp.         Infin.  Part. 

fmp3'     1  ?{evyZ'  \     I  ^'"''''^'   I  ^^"^^'^^'  I  ^'''''''' 

PASSIVE  VOICE. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Imperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

s^evyW'ijLyiVy  co^  no  \  [isdov^  aQov^  adriv  \  [leOay  gOs,  vlo. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

^evyvv-ao^  add  |  odovf  adov  |  crfc,  oOcjaav. 

INFINITIVE. 
Present  ^evyvv<r6cct, 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  ^evyvvf^ivci. 


Irregular  Verbs  in  fjn.  12i3 

SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  MOODS  AND  TENSES  IN   THE  PASSIVE 
VOICE. 


Present, 
Imperf. 


Indie.  Imp.  Infin.  Part. 


(^evyvvra 


^euyWT&xi 


^evyvvfievcq 


Irregular  or  Defective  Verbs  in  (.a 

may  be  divided  into  Three  Classes,   each   con- 
taining three  verbs. 

I.  From  €u  are  derived  eii^t,  to  be  ;  ec^i^  and  iyi- 
[II,  to  go. 

II.  From  8o  are  derived  lyj[iif  to  send  ;  yjuat,  to 
sit ;  8Li.tai,  to  clothe  oneself. 

III.  layifiLj  to  know  ;  <?)>7/w(,  to  say  ;  xeiixai^  \o   lie 
down. 

CLASS  I. 
1.  eiiii,  to  be, 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ei[ii9  fc$,  or  St,  edit  \  ealov,  ealov  |  eai^evy  eals,  etai. 

Imperfect 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

37^5  >7$>57r>?^?  Att.j  j  yjrovyr^tyjv  \  yj^isv.yjre^r.aav. 

Pluperfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

yjuriV,  yjao,  yjro  |  yjfiedov,  riodov,  yjadyjv  \  r.^ie^a,  yjaOe, 

[yjvIo. 


3  24  Irregular  Verbs  in  f^t. 

Future. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ea'Of.iah'(i,  elaLj(B^ai)  \  ofieOov^  eodov,  saOov  |  ofisda^ 

[eodey  ovlat, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

ladi,  eadiy  or  ecroj  ecrJcj  |  ealov^  sgIqv  |  eals^ealoaav. 

OPTATIVE. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

G^yjVf  ft>y$,  etyj  j  eiyjloVy  siyjlyjv  \  eiyifievy  eiyjlef  etyiCav^ 

Future. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

raoL'^yiVy  eaoi'O^  egol-Io  |  ^edovy  adov^  adyjv  |  iisda^  aOsy 

[v7o. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Sing.  Dual.       f         Plural, 

Present,  o),  rig^  ri  \  yjtov,  yjrov  fotieVf  or^ ,  Ml. 

Future. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

[ovlat. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present,  sivau       Future  eaeadau 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  qv^  acra,  ov.     Future,  eaoiievog, 
2.  Eci^Ly  to  go. 


Irregular  Verbs  in  fA,u  125 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

^iliif  eig  or  ei,  etCi  \  trov,  trov  \  mv,  cre^  etaty  or  kJc. 

Imperfect. 
£tVf  e6g,  €t  I  iTov,  Ltriv  \  ixLev  utSy  taav. 

Pluperfect. 
aX'SLVj  etg,  el  \  eutov^  etryiv  \  eiuev^  eutSj  eix^av* 

Second  Aorist. 
ioVf  tegy  t£  I  isrov.  leryjv  \  uofieVf  tetSf  lov, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present, 
i^t,,  or  ei  tro  |  trov,  vt(Siv  \  tue^  I'toaav. 

Second  Aorist. 

OPTATIVE. 

Second  Aorist. 
toiiu,  torg,  tot,  |  LoutoVy  Lotryiv  \  tot^eVf  voute^  lolsv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Second  Aorist. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  gti^at  or  cvac.  2(1  Aor.  iiiVf  t«cra,  ioi\ 

Middle  Voice, — indicative  mood. 
Perfect. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural, 

fia,  Etac,  et8  \  eiarov^  eiwvov  \  eiauevy  ecats^  eiMu 
12* 


^2o  Irregular  Verbs  in  (^i, 

Phiperfect.*^ 

I  *  or  Yiuevy  rfte^  riaav, 

1st  A  or.  euyaiiyjv.  1st  Fut.  aaafiar. 

3.   lyjui^  to  go. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plur. 

iyj[iij  tyjgy  tyjat  \  isrov^  isrov  |  loi^evy  terte^  mat. 

Imperfect. 

I      •      I  — —  leaav. 

OITATIVE. 

Present. 

I^IYI     I  I 


INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  iBvai.  Present,  tetg,  uevi^og. 

Middle  Voice. — indicative  mood. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

le-fiat,  aaiy  tat  \  [leOoVf  adovy  odov  \  /ueOa,  afc,  viae. 

Imperfect. 
le-firtV,  aoy  to  I  fiedoVf  adov,  odyjv  \  fieOay  ads,  vro. 

IMPERATIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  tJeao,  ceadQ.  Present,  i^^ev^-og^  97,  or. 

CLASS  II. 
1.  "lyyut,  to  send,  has  scarcely  any  irregularities, 
but  it  is  declined  like  rtdrjut.     It  will  be  sufficient 
to  give  the  first  person  of  each  tense. 

♦  Imperfect,  among  the  Attics. 


Irregular  Verbs  in  (m.  12? 

Active  Voice — indicative  mood. 

Present,  Irniu         Imperfect,    hnv. 

Perfect,    kxa.        Pluperfect,  kx^v. 

1st  Aor.  iQ;ca.     2d  Aor.  liV.     1st  Fut.  ^cro, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  hOt.        Perf.  and  Pliip.  uxc, 
1st  Aor.  rixov.  2d  Aor.  eg, 

OPTATIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  leiYiv.     Perf  and  PI  up.  iixoLut. 
2d  Aor.  iir^v.  1st  Fut.  i]crotf^^  ' 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  h,        Perf.  and  PI  up.  hkq. 
2d  Aor.  V. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  Uvai.     Perf.  and  Plup.  kxevai, 
2d  Aor.  iivat.  1st  Fut.  ^^aai^. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  leig.     Perf.  and  Plup.  iixog. 
2d  Aor.  kg.         1st  Fut.  ?;(TLjr. 

Passive  Voice, — indicatiae  mood. 

Present,  huac.  Imperfect,   ^a>?v. 

Perfect,  kltat.  Pluperfect,  kurjp. 

1st  Aor.  iOrv^  (kdviv)      1st  Fut.  eOriao^iau 
Paulo-post  Fut.  kaoiiau 

imperative. 

Pres    and  Imp.  Uco^   (h.)   Perf.  and   Plu.   k<yo. 
1st  Aor.  eOnlL. 


128  Irregular   Verbs  in  f^i. 

OPTATIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  htiiyjv.     Perf.    and    Plup.    iiiiyiv. 
1st  Aor.  edELyjv.       1st  Fut.  idyjGOi^yjv. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  iiaoi^yiv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  and   Imp.  udfiai.       Perf.  and   Plup.    coLiat. 
1st  Aor.  idu. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  Uadai.     Perf.  and  Plup.   kadai. 
1st  Aor.  idyjvat.     1st  Fut.  idyjaeadau 
Paulo-post  Fut.  iiGeadai. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  and  Imp.  le[ievog.     Perf  and  Plup.  k[j.8Vog. 
1st  i\or.  tdeig,     1st  F.  idyjgoiievog. 
Paulo-post  Fut.  8Lao[i£vog. 

Middle  Voice — indicative  mood. 

Present  and  Imperfect,  like  the  Passive. 
1st  Aor.  rixafiYiv.     2d  A.  ii[iriV.     1st  F.  riCro,aai 

IMPERATIVE. 

2d  Aor.  fc-co,  ("s.) 

OPTATIVE. 

2d  Aor.  £tf^>7i/.     1st  Fut.  ^aoi^nv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

2cl  Aor.  Vf^at. 

INFINITIVE. 

2d  Aor.  taQai.     1st  Fut.  {\asadai. 


i 


Irregular  Verbs  in  jbLi,  129 

PARTICIPLES. 

2d  Aor.   ifievog.     1st  Fut.  icofisvog, 
2.  'H//OU,  to  sit. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

Yiiiaty  riOaLy  J^rat  |  /jf^e^r,  io^op,  Ip^v  \  (i^3a,  ?]cr3e, 

Imperfect. 
Yiiir^v,  {jcTo,  JjTo  I  Yil^dovy  ^y;adoVj  ^cQyiv  \  'yjfiEQa^  'r,aQe, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

INFINITIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  ^rja^L.  Pres.  'yjixev-og,  >7,  or. 

S.  iiiiai,  to  put  on. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  and  Perfect. 

ii(iai9  i^yoLtj  hratj I  — kvT'ai. 

&  icalat  I 

Pluperfect. 


BLflYlV^  €t(TOj  &  iCGO 

eiloj  icalOf  halo  &  iolo 


I  biVtO 


First  Aorist. 


SL(Ta[j.yjVy  iaaafiyjVj 


130  Irregular  Verbs  in  fit. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present  and  Perfect,  itfisvog. 
First  Aorist,  iaoaueveg. 

CLASS   III. 
1.  K£L[iai9  to  lie  down. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing.  Dual.  Plural. 

xei-iiouy  aaif  lai  \  fxe^ov^  a'^v^  a'^ov  \  /ue^a,  cr^f,  vlau 

Imperfect. 
£)C£L'fiyjVj  aoy  TO  I  [xe^ov,  a^Vf  a^yjv  |  fie3a,  cr^^,  vlo. 

First  Future. 
x£Ky'0[iaiy  %  etat  | | 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 
9ceL(yoj  xeuy^  \  xeiO^v^  xsta^cdv  \  k  eca^s,  xeta^aav, 

OPTATIVE 

Present 
X60i-[iyjVy  Oj'to  \ I  —  — 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present. 

First  Aorist. 
xsKJCdi^ai^  —   I I 

INPINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE* 

Pres.  x6lo^l..  Pres.    xciiiev-oc,,  rj^  ov. 


Irregular  Verbs  itifu.  131 

2.  hrjfit,  to  know. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Du.il.  Plural 


or  rov^  i:ov 


or  (j,ei^ 


Imperfect. 
bd-r^Vj  Yig^  yj  \  arjVf  aTr^v  |  a^ev^  ate,  aaav  &  av. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

Sing.                      Dual.  Plural. 

4(T-a0t  &L  Ol,  alio  I  alov  &  lop,  alcov  ale  &  7^,  alucfav, 

&;  7u  I                    &?tji'.  7c*xTai  &  7ui^. 

NFINITIVE  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  Loavau  Prcs.  tca-g^Ga-v* 

Middle  Voice^ — iNf)iCATivE    mood. 

Present. 

Sing  Dual.  Plural. 

tcra-^at,  cat,  rat  |  /u^S^r,  a3or,  a^v  I  /i/f^,  a^f ,  ^'7at. 

Imperfect. 
iCa-fiyjVj  aoy  ro  |  fie^Vf  a^v^  o^v  \  ff^Sa,  a^e,  vlo. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  LGo/j^t.  Pres.  taane-vog,  yjy  ov. 

3.  ^yjui^  to  say. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 
Sing.  Dual.  Plural, 

^//f,  (^rig,  (pyjCi  \  ^atov^  (parov  \  ^[tev^  cpare^  ^acri.* 

*  B  ;:■'  present  and  imperfect  tenses  the  P  is    frequently  dropped  by 
Homer,  and  Attic  writers  ;  thus,  tj/xi  t^c^  ti<ri^  «v,«?,  «. 


132  Irregular  Verbs  in  /i*/. 

Imperfect. 
£(p-yjVy  yjg^  yj  |  atoVf  atyjv  \  a[i£P,  ats^  aaa/p. 

First  Future. 
^Yja-Q^  ft$,  86  }  STOP 9  erov  I  0[i€Vf  etSy  ovai. 

First  Aorist. 

Second  Aorist. 
s^'yjVj  Yig^  yj  \  yjrov,  yjrr.v  \  yj[A£Vf  Yite^  r^aav. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 


Sing. 

Uri  ATlVKt 

Present. 
Dual. 

Plural. 

^L'YIV,  yji,  )? 

)7To^,   yjryjv 

IJ.EV9  re  and  ev 

First  Aorist. 
^yiG-atfiLj  aig,  at  \  avtovy  aurriv  \  ai[^i€v,  aite,  atsv. 

SUBJUNCTIVE, 

Present. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present^  (pavau  1st  Fut.  ^astv. 

IstAor.  ^aai.  2d   Aor.  ^yjvau 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  <^a$,  <^aoa,  ^i'. 

1st  Fut.  ^>7a(ji^,     1st  Aor,  ^yjooLg. 


Irregular  Verbs*  13*^ 

Passive    Voice, 

INDICATIVE.  IMPERATIVE. 

Perfect,  Tte^arat.  Tiecpao^u. 

INriNITlVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Perfect,  TtecpM^i.  7te^cr^ev-og,  >;,  ov. 

Middle  Voice— INDICATIVE  mood. 

Second  Aorist. 

Sing.  Dual.  Pinral. 

€(pa-UYiv^aojlo  \  a[iedoVyaadov,(xxj6yjv  \  aii£OajaaOe,vlo, 

IMPERATIVE. 

Present. 

INFINITIVE. 

Present,  <paG^L.  2(1  Aor.  <paa^i, 

PARTICIPLE. 

Present,  ^iiev-og,  97,  ov. 


GENERAL    LIST    OF     IRREGULAR    OR    ANOMALOUS    VERBS. 

There  are  few  Verbs  in  the  Greek  language,  which  can 
be  regularly  conjugated  in  all  their  Moods  and  Tenses. 
Some  of  these  deficiencies  may  be  traced  to  the  principle  of 
harmony  :  of  others,  vain  is  the  attempt  to  investigate  the 
causes.  Defective  terms  are  supplied  either  from  obso- 
lete forms  of  the  same  Verbs,  or  from  some  other  Verbs  in 
use.*  To  assist  the  learner  in  tracing  these  tenses  to  their 
respective  Themes  or  Roots,  the  following  list  has  been  com- 
piled. It  consists  of  analogies,  as  far  as  they  can  be  appUed 
to  any  species  of  Verbs  ;  but  in  general  it  contains  the  par* 
ticular  formation  of  each  tense  in  common  use. 

Of  the  following  Verbs,  those  which  are  used  only  in  the 
Present   and  Imperfect,  will  be  found  in  the   first  column  5 


♦  Such  is  the  ca^e  in  some  Lntin  Verbs.  Thus  ferio  is  used  only  in 
the  tenses  formed  from  the  Present,  and  borrows  the  Perfect  and  Supine, 
and  Die  tenses  formed  from  them,  from  percuHo. 

13 


134 


Irregular  Verbs. 


the  next  will  contain  the  obsolete   Roots,  followed  by  the 
Tenses,  which  are  formed  from  them. 


etAft^A',  9}Mv<rcc,  '^>jvufMV    &     i)Xexfir,y  by  SynCOpe. 

tfcAg»<i;,  efcAf|cCjM,J?y. 

flcAf|f<y,  «Ae|>7<rto. 

etA^ft',  ocA/cta;,  jyAlxac. 

u>ioMy  ocAa/C-o;,  ciXujTouMi,  <ii><a>'^c6i  v^^iOfKoc,  ri>.afjLcti» 

ufA^upTeeo juu.it prytTCD,  u/i<.xpT9}<rofA,ctt,  TifUtorr^Tot^  fjf^otp- 
rrjKoc,  rifA.ce.pTyif^ui  ^  r^f^^ccprov. 
Poet.   rifj£poroy. 


uyxycif^  Tiyxyov,  y,yuyof^r,y^ 


/    uoeay     xoyjTco  rjOTiKX,  rjOoy^  f«Jtfc.| 


ctAg|a;, 

i^Aiv^fft; 
«6A<c*;c4', 

utA,upTuva 


ciifjC*iXi(r/M 


'   avdyyfw,  imp.     j;v<yyovV,  uiaytjccif. 

avayf}fjny        Imper.  ctyodyy^Qi  and  uvcoz^i. 

up£A>,  upstrcoi  upecouxt,  yipe^u^  Vjpscraf^Tiv ,  rjpsG-Oi^v, 


'^vatyx, 

UpSTKOi}^ 


*  ct>»,  to  irert.V,  conjugated  with  the  Djgamma,  F^t^a,  forms  sFat|«, 
feF«t;v^at,  sFat^/Cv.  But  as  the  Digamma  is  seldom  expressed  in  writing, 
1!h  words  will  be  «£«§*,  «*;)(;.*,  5£t)^ov. 

t  This  seems  to  be  put  for  €F«tJk.  That  wcTa  had  the  Digamma  ap" 
pears  trom  iCxJ^ij  Odyss,  XVI.  28. 


Irregular   Verbs. 


135 


I  (iiQiiCLsct,    Qe^ocu,   2d    F.    ^uf^cci. 

I  ^iQxco,  Part   Pres.  ^i^av. 

.  i3;^jj/u./,  2d  A.  f^rv,Part.  Pres.  P;«rt^. 

|3A;;jtu,  f/3A3j»7   2d  A.  Opt.  M.  /3A£io. 

^XcCTJiOfy  toAaC'7»5f7"6/,  iZ?\ctcrlnK<ty  ibAflcr/ox. 

i  j3oa>.  l2t>fT£jy  (ieQii;KcCy 

/ZovXeM,  (iovX9]TofM.i,  fie^ovXvf^uct,  e^ov>^,6r,v. 

C  spotty  /3/>6xr<y.  ^ 

^^  l^pof^ty  i^pm. 

^i^p^TK<.,     \^^Q^^Q^^  ^tQpu>hna. 


yu(A,iMy 


ytyoLfJUiifJLet'  y  cyxftiiBijv, 


ysyccfuijKU, 


\  ynpc^»>> 

yvpUG-Afy    eyrpuG-Xy  yeyt}pXK'(, 

\  ynpr^f^. 

h\t\  Pr.  yrpxvxiy  Part,  yrptt^* 

yin&! , 

ytviio-i/xui,    eyevzo-xu-Kv,    yeyer^fud: 
£yBvou.y,v,  ytyovx. 

(y^V/iC'/^v. 

yetvi-Jf 

(yetfxy^r.v. 

yxu. 

yeyxx. 

yvou. 

yvMTof,  yvuFcfAxi,  eyvuxu.  cyvA>c'/^xt^ 
yvAfs-&r,G-ofA.Xi* 

fyvtyr^jrv, 

yvftifti, 

eyjiov. 

axiio^  ^xy^fra^  cxviCof^xi^  ^io'x^y.x,  e^xr^v^  dit\u. 


.    *  The   ancient  Greeks   and  old  Attics  wrote  ytyvcf-isit  ar.J  ytyvoca-Kui  : 
itheraore  modern  writers  softened  those  words  into  yivoy.nt  and  yivu<rKo. 


136 


Irregular   Verbs. 


to  divide.  ^  ^s^cct/^ui, 

^iiK  S  hihfA.t,       Imper.  hth&i,  eht^iTot, 

h^:^ccxcc,     ) 

h^pcila^        ^  ^pvifjn,  s^pm. 

^octO'afA.on^  £^oxTot>{A.y,v  y  Syn.   £^oetf^'A^. 
avvrjTofA.ttty  f^vv9io'eein.'>tv,  ^f^Wjjiittfei,  £$'vyii$n9. 

^vToj^  ^u^ofA.cci'i  h^vy^^  h^vcTf^Ut. 

£^VV. 


h^:^ccxc^,     ) 

h^pci^a,         I  , 

Po.Ax,r..,  (.  ""'"' 
d£do>ci}Ka,      J  ' 


*'*  f  £hu^  e^jjxflt,  f^£r^3jv,  £^7;^ct, 

siTMy  f  ffJfo;,  £t^r,crui  £l^Woty  f/^»jxa,  Plup.  TihiV. 

et^ov,  t^ov,  ^  £i^93f>L^,  Pr.  Opt.  £ihtt}v.  Inf.  £iS'svut. 

£tpa^  {    £p£6f,  £pv^rofA.9Cly    etpijKOt^    £lp7jfA.Ul')   £lpi]6i}V,    pYthfTOfAUt^ 

SpotJLOtly  \   £tp£6)y  £tp7}0-of^X(. 

£fpa),  £f>p£a^  eppy^^i^-,    iippvjo-x. 

£pudcicivej,         ipv6£M,  £pv$v}<ra>. 


*  The  origin  of  this  verb  is  saoj.     Hence  three  forms  are  derived  ;  the 
Boeotic,  «AJt»;  the  ^olic,  sActya;  and  the  Doric,  skavvw, 

i  In  this  tense  <r  is   frequently  dropped  and  the  Contract   fojDQ   i? 
adopted  :   thus,  ^v^j,  «a??j  <a?.     E^^-a;  comes  from  sv^a. 


Irregular  Verbs. 


iXivQoi^ 


£>i=uTfli^xt,  vjXsvTot,^  5jAi/^«y,  Syn.  ;jA^<5Vj  Peri, 
see  last  page. 

f^x(,  euO£&i]V,   evpe&'/jfrof^^t^  eupov,  eCpof^.v, 
^yj^'^^'i  o'X^'^^M^^y  s^x^/y-x,  i'^X/^f^cci-i  etr^s^KVi 

2d  A.  Imper.  o-xei' 


H. 


Hc6C5"x«y,  rj^acaj  r^^rjCii;,  Tjcr.Coc^ti^rtKOt. 


^OpVVCe), 


0. 

h?^£a,  e£X/iTa^    £$£X7)roC,   T£9£>0JKCC. 

O^OiUy  t'.Qvr.KU..,   TtC'VCtX^  TsSv-lKnC   &-   TihilX. 

^V«,  f^aevOV,    2d    F.    M.    $0CV6fJLX,i, 

rc9vi;K3J^    T£9vr.^6i,  r£6y7i^oti,at, 

r£$vr,<A.i,    Pres.  Imper.  tj^^^;,    Opt.  reCvan^v^  InUu. 
T-evuitect^     Particip.     nhx^y    2d     Aoi 

£dVi}V, 


6cp£U',  ^OpTjTCJ^   id^pOVf 


'Idpv'ioi^ 

\aovx^ 

l^pV'JL'/,. 

i^CiVMy 

tSvva, 

iSva, 

t9VTU^  l9vTA. 

^^HiOj^tl'-k 

lf,of/.xt,  i^xfioiVi  'y.Atst;,  ix«tt>;v« 
13* 

138 


Irregular  Verbs, 


[  'iXyif^i , 


x,spuv 

xepocvvvf^i 

xipviJM-i 


f  xepsca, 

C  iCpXOf, 


>CXpKCCtp<'\ 


Kipoonvu^ 
xexep^xx.^, 

XlXOiVOf, 


iXetOi,  Pr.    M.    Ixoif^ai. 
K. 


xepoiG-M^  £K£potTct,  stii ficco'ociiiijv ,  x£OccT0r,a-ou,xt. 

Xpoi(r6f,XSXpXKX,   XEKpxpCXt,     eXpOC&iiV     XpX^ijiTC- 

f^xt. 

xsplijerui^  x£ poy.TOf^xi ^  ixsp^ij<rx,  xixspotjxa. 


xXay'^6), 
xsxXuyXoc^ 

xXxlOi^ 

xXxva-a, 
xskXxvxx, 

kXvci}, 
''.opsyyva, 

X6pinVf>(.t, 

y^psfA.ocnsoci)^ 
•rtpi^^yyvfjLt^ 

xrev6)^ 
ayJTuxu^ 

y.vXiv^co, 


xXr^76f,       Perf.  M.  xexXTjysc. 


xXxteof^  xXxiy^Tco* 

xXvf4,i,  Imper.  xXvdi  &  xexXvdi. 

*  xope(»),  xopecr&f    sxnoerx^    ex6pi(raiu,7}v,  xexcp-^xu,  xexo- 

I  pyjfJLXl'  6X0D£T&yiv. 

'  xpefA.xcO'j  xpef^x<ra,  exp^f^uru^   expeptxcrxf^m ^    expet^MO->r 

xDeptt}/LLt ,  xpepcxf^xt . 

r  xTJjjM./,  sxTy,v,    2d  A.   M.  txTuitA.yjV,    Inf.  XTcLO-dxtf 
f  Part.   xrxf^ivoS' 

I  xjuXi&f,  xvXi^ca, 

'  xvXiVGea^  KvXi)i07)a-6). 


Ax*//<ci)iM^ 


S  ^^'X^i 


ii^xh  i^scx^v,  Perf.  M.  Xskoyx'^' 


Irre$[ular   Verbs. 


K 


AfA;4,M.eyflc. 

Imp.     fAjj^dV,    A>;5-a;,    XtjG-of^coci ,    MXWfA.xt^ 


/tuAfO/, 
IJuXXiOiy 


M. 
l^u.$i}croiLc»t ,  £f^ct6930'x[j(.i!y,  f^s^t»6yjKU,  £/:4,»B-oy. 

|t4i5C;i:i>j<«<'<di,  2d  F.  f<.a{;^jot;ft«/. 

f4iXr,caf,     efJLeXy,c-ot[^r,y^   ii4.£U£Xkkcc,  fJL£f4,s Xr^fji^^t 

&  fj(.£fA.^XrfA.o(,i^  £fMXri$i}V,  fjiAfAjv,  ftsiLcyiXx, 
f^£XXt)Tu^  £M.£XXr)Toc. 

fUfJLl^6fJLSCly   ff^t^BliVj    "iJd    A.     i^.     f/krf- 

yjjy,  f*.iyvjTciJUtt, 

f^Vt)(r0,  fjLiWOM^i,      £(^yncroC,      £fAyfj'7Xf4,>ii,    f^fd.' 

vtjf^aty  £fiLyvi<r6nv,  fA.i7iTdyi(rofMlt: 


H-opyof,         f^p^M,  £fMp^xy.ijv. 


f^£f^vy.x. 

i 

)  y^vKctcjj 

y.VK7}<rat, 

tf^VKCVy 

s 

) 

N 

Nfl6/6i, 

yccMy 

IJXTcliCSCi^  £VXTCC    fVCOVCCIMiV ,  evoCT^,v. 

o^ec^ecj, 

o. 

^ 

PcrfM. 

ado. 

>  »^f^, 

O^f  C-a;  &  0^7)TCJ,  u^sccc. 

ot^octvM, 

i 

>  of^fo;, 

0lOViT6J.     UOY^roL     UO    Y.&L. 

>   Ot£COy 

otijToy^eci   Ctjvjfjuct    eur^T^v, 

tt^oy^cit 

olX-K-^ofAMt.    a;;^J?«flC,  ^X^^f^^y 

%<\k  oj^oyr.v 

tt'^ay^ce, , 

*  This  verb  is  chieily  used  as  an  Ijjjpersonal. 


140 


Irregular   Verbs, 


oWVM . 


>  e>ilT9£6f,        cjXltr6i)Tot  aXtT^tjKci.  c^XlTddt  6>?itG-67iV. 


0f^9»y 


cXscra,  aXe<:-cc^  oiXiKX   <>.i:T$yjv   atXev^   <yA«ft^y, 

co'^'ppxoiciAaiy       oo-^psuy       oc-^pifTofAXt.  as-(ppofJLriV, 

c<pXu  f  e^3<A5A»,      «^ffAjj?rA»,     <w^g<A«?»flC,     atpitXov    &      ft^^fAtfV, 

iTK0C)l6if,         J 


}  OVie*^ 


e(pXeti,        «<pX7)^6t  MpXtiKcc, 


Tfr.Safj 


YlATXtOy 


pvetcf,        \ 


TTipV 
7r£pViJ,U.l 

'x-iTTfiec 

TTpl 

TTrjY 


rXyifjLt.    \  TfXcca 


n. 

iT£tc-Gu,ett,     Boeot.     for     TniG-ofioci ,     tTTOcQKCrff!  ^ 
£7r/>i.0ov, 

7rev06fy  Perf.  M.  TTeTTov^et  &  'xsTToTBet, 

yreptccJ*      Syn.    yrpxaf^    Trpoto-af^   TreTrpXKu^    7r£7rpu,U'^fy 
:ir£Tpx(r6fA/ict)  eTrpxB^it,  7rpx^y}(r6fA^i, 

TTsTTTu^        TTc-^&i,  e7r£'4^a,  7r£7r=.U.,tOCl,  £K£(p6'y. 

TZiTxra^   £'X£rxToL^    TreTTertftXflt    &    '7T£7e'ray.a.^ 

7r£7rrxTfA.xi\  £7r£7rrx7&^, 
^y^l^y,  fTTj^l^,  £7rTn^u,f^yp) ,   TrsTsrr.Xx^  £7raz^rv, 
£'7rxyYj\^  wxyYirou-ziy  7fr£7rriyx. 

TTCOTCO         7r£7rUi('X^        TTcTrmtLXl       &       ttbtoumi, 

£7ro&r^v 

PreS.  M.   TTtOl^tOCt^  TriTof^Xl^  STTiOV,   2(3  F .  M. 

Imp.  TrtBi. 


£7r£a'x,    £7re(rxu7]v,    sTre^ov,    2d    ]P,    M.    tts- 

C^fA,Xt» 


*  Ilepitci',  to  pass  Irrto  another  country  ;  -mpv-ia)^  &c.  to  pass  for  the 
purpose  of  selling  ;  'Troistucti^  in  the  Middle  Voice,  to  buy  a  person,  or 
t^iJD^,  brought  from  another  country. 


irregular  verbs. 


^Tccpvvftect,     ^Tcilpci,        iTTTacpov, 

^vy6otioiJLui,    Tsvio),  7revc-of4.xti  ^e?rv(rfMi,  e7rv0A^tiV,  ^v6^fMt, 


peof, 

pofyvv^fy 
pavvvf^tj 


ipya. 


1  hy^y 


P. 


Att.  tp^a^,  fpl^j,  Perf.  M.  upyoc^ 

pvr,(ra>y  pvr^rofiect^  iopvfix,ec  epovi^v, 
p>}lo^,  epDV^oCi  epc7!^uf4,i^v ,  tppnyecin  epfayu^  tp- 
pstyrjv,  pocyvo-o/Axt* 

pUTAfy  eppOfO-X,   eppUKU,  ipptttptXi^  (pp6tdi}V, 


CxPlflfd;,  1st  A.    iO-K7J?iX^  €CKXyiy.u. 

TK^yj/Ut^         Pr.  Inf.    O-K^f^vett. 

Sk  S'ccv       '   i  o-Kt^xo),       s<rKc^xTUi  eo-xe^acG-itotti  e<rx6^ecv6rjy» 

^tpiG-o)  ^  Tsprira),  ^^pnirofJLXt^  irepSG-x, 


X^TfV^A/, 


'LnpiG-KM^         ^epeoj^ 

"ZTopevyVM,     i 

^ropyvf^i,     y 

^TPMVyVM^      f 

>  9poa, 

Z^TpMVyVjKl,    y       ' 


TiTgy.TKXi       ) 


S-opiG-ofy  e^opea-eCy  £?-op£0-ccf^r^v. 

S'pevG-a)^  e^pofTcc,  (9pMTccu>r^yy  erpapcect. 

See  £X(^' 
T. 


rf^ryu),      rf^yj^a'  rsrfMjicx,  T£rf/j)}/^xi  ^  erpttjBry,  erpcotyov, 


*  rit/.va)  and  tauvu  a're  both  found  ;  the  fornoer  derived  from  rs^.a;  the 
latter,  from  rufxu^     Hence  the  2d  Aorist  is  either  sTeuo?  or  sT-ti«9v. 


rtrpxciy         }  rpocuij  rpriTuiy  erpr^rcc,  rerpinfAM.iy  erpt^6rjv. 

rtrprif/.ty       ^  rtrpcctvM,  1st  A.  ertrpTjvoc. 

rirpoiCKMy        rpouiy  r^wcrw,    rptnTof^uiy    eTpuiCcc,  rerpuijuLtU^  erpu- 
BujVy  rpui^TiTajLLxu 

^P^^^i  )   ^pSf^M,  e^petfJLOy,   2d   F.    M.    ^pXfMfJLXty   h^p6f^0S., 

irpuyovy       \  ^'^y*^*  (pctr/e>y.u,ty  2d  F.   (pjcyouH-^t,  tpctyov. 

C  rv^euy  rvxrio-uiy  trvy;riToL^  nrv^rKse,. 

'Fvy^ttyi^^     /  TBv^uiy  Tsv^oftat^    TfTgt;%<c,     TfTt/yftaj/,      rsTv^cf^At, 


^Ct^Ki^y 


^£pU)y 


0CCVUiy 


iVtyKCi/y 


tiiicuiy 

(pOpiOiy 

\,0P9^fA.ty 

I    0&Oti>iy 


fri<pVKC6y       ) 


oto'iOy  otToptXty  ot^&vv^  oio-$7ifroiiuii, 

1st  A.  ^yg^-yflC,  T^vsyKccpcrvy  Jjvfp/^j^y,  5jy£y»dv, 

T^VSyiCOpLT])!. 

1st  A.  9^£txMy  o/jvetxc^pcYiv^  svfjvsyptcc; ,  r9ex^*i^' 
Per.   (vrv^X^' 

^oPT^TMy   e^oOfjToty    7re(poprpoce.ty    Syn.    ^/^fo, 
Opta-cdy   &LC, 

Imper.  A.   2,  ^P5«. 

<p0scT(^y  (pSYjG-oputi ,  £<p$x^Xy  e<p6ciKce>, 

(p6i-G-uiy  (pStcOfuLecf y  e^iiG-cAy  e^p&tKUy  t^Qipia^i. 

£<pVV, 


♦  9veu  tignijies  to  produce  i   4>y/-</j  in  //w  Middle  sensc^   to  suffer  oneself 
to  be  produced,  or  to  be  born.  * 


Impersonal  Verbs,  143 

X. 

Xt^F^,  I  X^^?^"^^       Xo^'P^^^i    eX'^ipV^cc,  KS^itprjKety    rceX't'Fni^^h 

Ki^XQKct^      J  Ke^cipr^G-ouxt* 

^^''*'>  \         A  , 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

The  following  are  the  Impersonal  Verbs  most  in  use. 

1 .  0{  the  Active  form  : 

AftjKSt,  x-xdr^Ket^    TTpocrr.y.et,    it    beCOmes.   ,  Imperf.   ccvijite,  K^f^^Ki, 
7rpoTr,y.£.      Partic.  ccvyiko))^  r.ct6r,Koi^    TpoG'ijKov, 

Aorr/^h  it  is  useful.     A/>jj/>?,  it  is  deti?! mined. 

A fl>;c-)t£<,  it  pleases.     Imperf.  7}p£crx.i,  Fiit.  tcperet. 

A/3JC5/,  it  sufficeth.     Imperf.     zpKei,  Fut.  upKscet, 

As/,  it  is  necessary.    Imperf.  £<}"£<.  Fut.  ^etio-et.    1st  Aor.  ef^e^j^-f. 

Optat.   ^eot.     Subj.  ^rp,     Infin.  i'etv.   Partic.    ^eo*,  it    bein^- 

necessary. 
^ici<pepsi,  there  is  a  difference.    Imperf.  ^u^psps,    Fut.  hoto-et. 
A<9)5f/,  it  seems.     Imperf.    eooKst.    Fut.    ^o'^et.     1st  Aor.  £^<j|£. 

Partic.  Jo|:«v,  it  appearing. 
Eyx^f^^iy  it  is   permitted.     Imperf.  enz&fpst.  Fut.  eyx^^P^'^^i- 

Partic.   lyy^up"^'), 
E.T]t  ;  fVf<r/<  orgy/  f  6|£<r7<  ;  TrapsG-t,  or  Tr^c^oft,  it  is  permitted.  Im- 

perl.    »;y.     Imperat.   e^scrjca.     Iniiii.  i'^etvect.  Partic.   r©    f|<,y, 

cyev  it  being  permitted, 
t.v7jfjispu^  it  is  well  becommg.  Ex^ty  it  is  becoming. 

i^etTciXcciiL^civet,  it  happens.     2d  x\or.    xxrsXu^e. 

\  ^ciriTetyst ,  it  is  necessary.     Partic.  ro  xflcrfrr^ryov,  necessity. 


144  Adverbs, 

MfTf6-7/,  or  f^srac,  it  is  the  part  of.     Mers^jt  fjuv  rarii,  I   am  a 

partaker  of  this.     Partic.  i^srov, 
MfAf/,  it  is  the  care  of.     Imperf,  ef^e>^e.  Fut.  fieXr^cei,  Perf.  ft€- 

y.^?iYlKe   or  f44f^t}?i£.     Imperat.    fA^iXera.     Pass.  f^^Xsrcct.  Perf. 

fJL.£f4.SX7iT0tl, 

MeTccf^sXei,  it  repenteth.      Fut.  f^eruf^eXTiTet. 
Cxpet^t,  it  ought.    Imperf.  or  2d  Aor.  AJ^fAf. 
npeTTst,  it  becomes.    Imperf.  eTrpe're.     Particip.  TrsiTrov, 
Xvf^^^^-tvet,   it  happens.  Perf.   o-vf^Qe^y^Ke,     Fut.   trvu.^ro'u^   and 
trvfjL^r.Q-tTcci*    2d  Aor.    crvve^7}y      Partic.     crvf^^utvov,    ct;^^g^jj«(!>5, 

:Lvfjup€pth  it  conduces.    Imperf.    crvv£(pepe.    Fut.  o-umo-n.     Par- 
tic. (TVfAjpepcv. 

*T5r<»^;^e/,  it  happens,  it  is    necessary,    Imperf,    yTrjjp;^^^.      1st 
Aor.  vTTiipj^e,     Fut.  iJTTocp^it.  Partic.  tJTrupx^v. 
C)/>e/,itis  wont.      Imperf.  £^<A£<. 
X/j*;,   it  ought.     Imperf.  bxpV^  or  xPv^*   }st  Aor.  exp^^^*    Fut. 

XPV^^^'     Ii^f*  XPV^^'''     Poet.  pi^P/'v. 
Hence  the   Compounds,   u'^oxp^i  and  uTroxp^i  ^^XP'^'f  ^»'''^XP^> 

it  is  sufficient.     Imperf.  ccTrsxpt],  kc, 

II.      Of  the  Passive  and  Middle  form  : 
'Af^cteruverctt,  there   is  sin  committed.     Af^sXeiTui,  it  is  not 

regarded. 
'RtQiutToti^  life  is  ended. 

Aehicrcci,  it  is  decided.     Eyvtoc-7ct/  it  is  known. 
Etfucprui,  it  is  decreed.     EpvriTon,  it  is  said. 
EvJ'f;^if7«<,  it  happens.     Eo/xf,  it  becomes. 
ETTepxsrui,  it  occurs.     Hx^c/fic/,  itis  heard. 
AfygT<«/,  it  is  said.     A£/;riT«<,  it  remains. 
NojM-<^«Ta5/,  it  is  established. 
n^^r^A^r^i,  it  is  decreed. 


ON  ADVERBS. 

Adverbs  may  be  considered  in  respect  lo  their  meaning 
derivation  and  comparison.  As  to  their  meaning,  they  may  b( 
©onveniently  distributed  into  the  following  classes. 

I.     Those  of  Place,  which  sigmf3% 

1.     Rest  in  a  place,  and  answer  the   question  th  where 


Adverbs.  H6 

The  greater  part  of  these  end  in  ^/,  n,  «,  «;,  0/  ;  as,  uypcGiy 
in  the  field  ;  uyx^*^  tyyv&i,  near  ;  ojA^io^/,  elsewhere  ;  uvroh^ 
there  ;  A^'iiyr.a-t,  at  Athens  ;  fJL-r^otfLH,  cvouf^a,  no  where  5  o9r«, 
oTDj,  where  ;  Ts-avrax^i  -sruvretx^,  ts-uvtxxoi,  every  where  ;  fv- 
^e/,  evTCi,  eco)  within  ;  t|<a;,  without;  ;;ifit/t«/,  on  the  ground, 
&c. 

2.  Motion  /rom  a  place,  answering  the  question  TsroSev, 
'Oi'hence  ?  These  end  in  ^fv,  and  rarely  in  h  ;  as,  6,y^o^fv,  from 
the  field  ;  ttyx<ih^,  eyy^^Ssv,  from  near  ;  u^^Cev,  from  some 
other  place  ;  ccvroda,  thence  ;  oOev,  whence  ;  eG-u6a,  from 
within  ;  tlaGev^  from  withoui. 

3.  Motion  to  a  place,  answering  the  question  vs^ot^  whither? 
Those  end  commonly  in  ^e,  cr,-,  (^£.  and  are  often  fovmed  by  an- 
nexing these  terminations  to  the  accusatives  of  nouns.*  uy 
povh,  ec-  poT£.  to  the  field  ;  aAAtp^c^f ,  ir£pafG-e,  to  aiiother  place  ; 
<tv7oTi,  to  the  same  place  ;  oocaJ'e,  «<«dV6^'£,  home  ;  u?^oc^£-.  to  the 
sea,  ;  x<^i-^°^^h  to  -he  ground. 

To  adverbs  ending  in  of,  f<$  is  sometimes  prefixed  by  the 
Poets.  f'$  u^ci^ee,  to  the  sea.  Hom. 

4.  Motion  throvgh  a  place,  answering  the  question  -nrr.,  by 
xvhat  way  ?  These  arc  mostly  datives  of  the  feminine  gender, 
agreeing  with  l^w*,  understood  ;  as,  cfcAA>;,  by  another  way  ;  tv 
6etu ,  by  a  straight  way  ;  o-^yi^epxv,  r<iv,  hy  any  way. 

Some  of  the  preceding  signify  both  rest  in  a  place  and 
motion  to  a  place  ;  as,  ah^  here,  and  hither  ;  e^a,  within  a 
place,  and  into  a  place.  These  four  are  adverbs  of  time  and 
place  :    uf^uc,  «/«,«,  oft«Tg,  d.as^ev. 

II.  Alverbs  of  Time,  which  include, 

1.  Those  which  denote  some  particular  time,  past,  pres- 
ent, future,  or  indefinite  ;  as,  vw,  now  j  %^£$,  yesterday  ;  ecv 
p/ov,  to-morrow  ;  u'ei.  always  ;  At/jr^,  lately. 

2.  Continuance  of  time,  which  is  commonly  expressed  hy 
some  noun  in  the  accusative  ;  as,  ^cAvv  rje  ;^/;avov,  for  a  long 
time. 

3.  Vicissitude  or  repetition  of  time  ;  as,  ^9>.>.y^Kt^^  often  ; 
«y^'$,  again  ;  «^^|,  once  ;  /3<$,  twice  ;  rp;$,  thrice,  &c. 

III.  Adverbs  of  Quantity,  which  comprise, 

*  V  of  the  accusative  is  dropped  br^fore  «",  hy  rule  iv.  ppic^e  5.  etypio-i 
for  nypoycTi.  When  ^i  beinq;  a.-mcxe*.^-  foiV  \vs  5-,  the  o-^h  changed  into  f, 
from  the  similarity  of  sound  ,  a?,   ASwvit^*  for  a^avsta-h ;  Gvpct^i  for  Gt/- 

14 


HS  Mverbs. 

1.  Those  of  quantity  ;  as,  <iA/$, />c«va;$,  enough  ;  (iu^isif'^f 
deep  ;  evpea^,  broad  ;  f^Koag  by  far  ;  ttoAv,  much,  greatly,  &c. 

2.  Intensitives.  uyuv,  xncv,  (a^xol^  (r(po^px,  zrccw^  very  much. 
c»*r«vA»5,  iT^vfiM^  greatly. 

Diminutives,  o-^e^ov,  uo-et,  f4.cyav,  ii,f4,iKpov,  /M.<x^«,  almost,  fwy/5 
fM^iii,  hardly. 

IV.  Adverbs  of  Quality,  which  end 

in  <y$.  Ts-pccofg,  mildly  ;  yec)cer,$6f^y  maliciously, 
ia  X,  and  >},  being  properly  datives  of  the  first  declension. 
^toc,  by  force  ;  Tsrocppijo-iu^  freely  ;  /J/a,  sepa- 
rately ;  xotv'v^,  commonly  ;  ^ip^ri,  doubly  ;  '>i, 
which  way,  whence,  in  what  manner,  where- 
fore ;  whose  ordinary  correlatives  are  ruvrp, 
(referring  to  eJcu,)  this  way,  that  way,  thus,&c. 
without  iota  subscript  J  f/>i»j,  rarely. 
aofflt,  for  uapta,  out  of  season  ;  wtuifJLuri^  without 
blood. 

ct^siii  atheistically. 
oM^6vfjL(thv^  with  one  accord. 
xpv^^r^v,  secretly. 
uvktTTi^  unexpectedly. 
And  sometimes  in  |  ;  A«|,  with  kicks  ;  u^Pt^,  tenaciously, 

V.  Adverbs  denoting  the  manner  of  action  ;  as, 

1.  To  exhort,  as.Hure,  confirm  ;  to  show,  to  desire;  tS'Hy 
to  behold,  ^j,  ajr©/,  yf,  (J»j,  indeed,  assuredly,  undoubtedly, 
e* ,  £i6e  would  God,  that — . 

2.  To  swear,  fc*,  v^,  y««/,  verily,  certainly. 

3.  To  deny,  j^,  a^i,  no,  no  really  ;  from  which  come  ar/, 
ah,  neither,  and  H^uf^ag,  by  no  means. 

4.  To  forbid,  ftj?,  no,  not  5  whence  come  f^^h  and  /*»;- 
^xf^aq,  not  at  all. 

5.  To  grant,    f/ev,  na  J'jj,  well,  be  it  so  ;  supposing  it  is  so. 

6.  To  interrogate,  either  in  respect  to  place ^  Tto^i,  5ro/, 
Tra,  '«,  where  ?  7ro6ev,  idiv,  whence  ?  wocrs,  whither  ?  ^r^?,  which 
way  ? — time,  ttots  or  '^tpuKoc,  when  ? — quantity^  ttotov^  how 
much  ?  Troo-xKoii ,  how  often  ? — quality,  :r^$,  how  ?  Trcrtpai^  io 
what  manner  ? 

7.  To  doubt.  TVfjLQctv,  rux,»,  rvxov.,  rvy^ivoi^,  perhaps. 

VI.  Adverbs  which  denote  Relations. 

1 .  Comparison.     /w^AAav,  more,     -j^rre^,  less. 

2.  Resemblance.     <i$, as,  as   if.  a^Trtp^  in  the  same  manner 


m 

^1 

in  /, 

in 

ti. 

in 

U 

in 

h^. 

in 

cri. 

Adverbs, 


147 


ag  5    KUiSec,  Koc&ccTTepj  c'^<w$5  just  as  ;  'ara^  and  '«r«/,  just  so.    a»JVj 
80,  thus. 

3.  Order,  ftrctf,  afterwards,  next ;  5|>:5,  £<pf|j;$,  from  hence- 
forth. 

4.  Assemblage.  <ift«,  together  ;  of^Hy  jointly,  along  with, 
rv?\X^Q^v,v^  in  a  word,  in  short. 

6.   Separation,     ccvgv,  without ;  ^Pk>;»,  except. 

To  these  may  be  added,  those  of  correcting  ;  «;iA«^3j,  ^jlccK- 
Aov  (^jj,  ^fvyy,  7fi«^y,  but  rather,  &c. — those  expressing  the  cause  ; 
hiKoL^  because. 

Many  adverbs  belong  to  more  than  one  of  the  classes  above 
mentioned. 

Some  adverbs  have  such  an  affinity,  that,  beginning  with  a 
-vowel,  they  are  Indefinites  ;  with  w,  Interhogatives  ; 
with  r,  Redditives. 

hidefinite.  |         Interrogative.  Redditive. 


i  which    way 

(     means, 
i  how  far, 
V>  WO**  "^hai  rea 
\      son, 

oTCy  OTTOTgy  ^ 

o^fv,  oTTo^sv,  whence, 
0^1,  where, 
oo-dv,  how  much, 
•lov,  after  what 

manner, 
^o-uKfg,  how  often. 


when. 


which  way  . 
by  what 
means  ? 


L  how  far  i 
«/,  If  or  what 
(      son  ? 


or 

Tat,vrY^ 
Tat, 


V       ^  this  way. 

\  by  that 
ir>),   )       means, 
so  far, 

for   that   reo^ 
son. 


when  ? 


TTOTS^ 

TToSev,  whence  ? 
^oOt,  where  ? 
TTOTof,  how  much  ? 
TTotoVy  after  what 
manner  ? 


TToTacJct^y  how  often  ?  \To<rx>ci? ,  so  often. 


then. 


\rore, 
ry}vix.cc , 
To^fv,  thence, 
ro6i,  there, 
rocrov,  SO  much, 
TotoVy  after  that 
manner. 


INTERJECTIONS. 
The  Greeks  include  Interjections  among  Adverbs. 
1.  Of  Joy.     ttu,  m,  /^. 


2.  Grief. 


01,  of^t,  af^i,  Oil,  ctt,  as. 


3.  Threatening,     nut, 

4.  Anger  and  Disgust.     <w,  a  ;  /y,  <«  ;  <pev,  tiwotys. 
h.  Admiration.     <«,  a;  ;/3«^«/,Vfi49r«e/,  «j6. 

6.  Approbation  and  Exhortation,     ua^ivyt. 

Derivation, 
Most  adverbs  are  derivatives.     A  {q\w  primitives,  h«w  ever, 


148  Adverbs. 

may  be  found  ^  as,  wv,  now  ;  x^f^^h  on  tbe  ground  ;  x&e^,  yes- 
terday. 

The  derivatives  are  taken  from  most  of  the  parts  of 
speech. 

The  accusative  singular  and  plural  of  adjectives,  in  the 
neuter,  and  the  genitive,  dative  and  accusative  of  some  nouns 
and  pronouns,  are  used  as  adverbs. 

1.  Accusative  of  neuter  adjectives.  Trpofrev,  ro  TreioTov^ 
'TTp&fToc  first  ;  Tit  f^oiXiQ-rx^  chiefly  -,  o|i;,  sharply. 

2.  The  oblique  cases  of  nouns  and  pronouns.  Gen.  ^(A^Hy 
together,  from  o,m,o$  ;  a^uf^Hy  never,  from  a^cct^o^,  no  one.  Dut. 
Kvz^iO),  around,  from  KVKXoq,  a  circle  ;  rocz^h  swiftly,  from  r^;^o$, 
swiftness.  Accus.  ccp^fj^^  ^/»Ai<<5j  from  the  beginning  ;  ^nc^jv^ 
as,  like,  from  J'/^jj,  manner. 

Verbs  are  sometimes  used  as  Adverbs. 

1.  The  imperative,     uye^  iQi^t^'e-,  &c. 

2.  The  second  aorist  active.     d^fAov,  <y<^£Aov,  from  t(pgiX(a. 

3.  The  present  optative  of  the  verb  him^  et^v. 
To  these  may  be  added, 

1.  Nouns  compounded  with  Prepositions.     e;c^o«^<yv. 

2.  Prepositions  united  together.     TrapsK,  abroad. 
3.^  Prepositions  joined  with  Adverds.     eyreirocy  then . 
Difference  of  place  is  denoted  by  difference  of  termina- 
tion. 

6^/,  0/,  ov,  sig'  ohv^  the  place  h  or  cc,  the 
nify  the  place  froin  whence  one  place  whither 
where  one  is,  sets  out.  one  goes. 

As  from 
McVa^eft,  a  city    Msyxpcdt,  or  fA.-'  Msyapt^Ssv^  to     Meyxpse^Sy  to  g9 
of  Greece.         yccpol,  to  be  at    come    from     to  Megara. 

Megara.  Megara. 

Ovpayois     coe-     ovpoivodt,    to  be      copxvodsv,   to     oup^^ovissy   or  x- 
Itim,  heaven,     in  heaven.  come   from     pxvaj-e,  to  go  to 

heaven.  heaven. 

Tbe  proper  names  of  towns,  that  follow  the  feminine  ar- 
ticle, form  their  adverbs  in  titi  or  a^-/,  (which  are  properly 
datives,)  with  the  point  under,  or  without  it,  in  r.etjv  or  t/Mvy 
and  in  u^e  ;  as, 

A0rjmi,  A^/.no'i,  A&tjva^iV,  Ah^cc^e^ 

Athenas,  to  be  at  A-     from  Athens.      to  go  to  Athens. 

Athens.  thens. 


Prepositions .  1 4^ 

QXvf^TTicc,  O^^vf-tTrtu^t,        0?ivft7nct6ev,  O^VfcTiriet^s, 

Olympia.  to   be  at  O-     from    0\ym-      to  go  to   Olym- 

lympia.  pia.  pia. 

Those  derived  from  appellative  nouns  are  formed  some- 
times  in  the  same  manner  ;   as, 

Svpsc,  6vpei$ev,  forin-         &vp6th  or  u^e, 

fores,  the  door.  secus,  foris.  for  arhy  foras, 

without,  from        to  go  abroad, 
without. 
In  like  manner,  the  article 
'o,  or  flJV,  hie  ;     o$t,  '«,  ubi,       <>^£»,  unde.  oih,  hue,  hie. 

where,  from  whence,    here,  hither. 

^  ,  qui.  cl,  quo,  ubi. 

Sometimes  the  adverbs  form  these  derivations  from  them- 
selves : 

X^^f^'^iy  ;^ciMf»,  x^f^^y 

on  the  ground,    from  the  ground,  to  the  ground. 

Comparison  of  Adverbs, 

1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  compared,  by  rf^asand 
ToiToi,  are  compared  by  changing  the  o$  into  <y$.  r©^^?,  co^af 
Tfpuq^  ToipofreiTaiy  from  co^a^,  a-o<PMripoi  <ro<pafrocro^, 

2.  If  the  accusative  of  a  neuter  adjective  is  used  for  an 
adverb,  its  comparative  and  superlative  are  used  likewise  ; 
as,  Txxv,  rtcxtoVf  ra^x^^epoVi  ^xttov  ;  rccxt^^'lov,  tuxvtoctov,  ruxi^loti 
rxxvioclcc, 

3.  Adverbs  not  derived  from  adjectives  are  usually  com- 
pared by  repca  and  tx]u>  ;  as,  fyyf$  ,  eyyvrspof,  eyyvrcclof  ;  uyx*^ 
uyx^i  «ty;^oTfPA»,  cc'/x^'^^^^' 

When  the  superlative  of  an  adjective  is  used  adverbially, 
the  article  is  usually  prefixed,     to  7r^ei<rlov. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

There  are  eighteen  Prepositions,  viz. 
I.   Six  Monosyllables, 
f»,  (before  a  vowel,  f|.)        ^po, 

fv,  5r^6?, 

14* 


i  o  u  rrep  ositt  on  b- . 

II.  Twelve  Dissyllables. 

aVflC,  fTT/,  '^ipii 

Prepositions  refer  originally  to  space  ;  some  signifying  rest ; 
and  others,  motion.  Eight  denote  motion  ;  six  to  a  place, 
viz.  cev<?6,  ^loc^  eis,  y.y-Tot,\  TrupUi  Trp^?  ;  «ind  two  from  a  place,  viz. 
ecTTo,  fji.  The  remaining  ten  denote  rest  in  a  place.  Their 
signification  may,  however,  be  changed  by  the  verb  with 
which  they  are  joined,  Ctto  denotes  under,  in  a  state  of  rest. 
H  (j-^xtpj,  KVAvy^cjut  vTTo  Tyjv  rpiCTTs^otv,  the  ball  rolls  under  the 
table,  expresses  motion  ;  but  this  arises  entirely  from  the 
verb,     for  the  original  meaning  of  the  prepositions,   see 

SlNTAX. 

On  the  force  of  Prepositions  in  Compos  itio7i. 

1.  These  five,  £/$,  crw,  ^rspt,  ac,  and  uT^ep^  augment  the  sig- 
nification of  the  simple. 

tii .       ei(ru)c^a',  to  hear  plainly. 

£x,  e-^QotiVo),  to  go  out. 

'y^epi.     7repi^cctX>^Yi(iy  extremely  handsome. 

cvv.       crv)i£Kr£\a>,  to  finish  entirely. 

uTFip.     uxipiA.jihoy.xt,  to  be  stark  mad. 

2.  These  five,  >ccctx,  mtto,  Mvrt,  hci,  Tretpu,  either  augment  or 
'hange  the  signification. 

cifTi,     c6vr«|/of,  preferable.  avT/ve^/tft,  breach  of  law. 

uTfa,      uTToretva,  to  stretch.  uTTojititv^itvaj  to  unlearn. 

hoi,       <5^{6fcyfAa',  to  laugh  at.  hccTTiCra,  to  disbelieve. 

y^iiiTM,    Kxre^Gtoj,  to  devour.  Kxrot^povscj,  to  despise. 

T^xpa,  TToLpoi^ccivu,  to  go  bej^ond.  'procpxvof^og,  a  law  breaker. 

3.  Upci  sometimes  augments,  and  sometimes  diminishes. 
■Trpocrn-iicTx^^i  to  sufler  greatly  ;  Trpoc-uTrTtv  to  touch  slightly. 

4,'Meroer  changes   and   diminishes.  /ttfT«c^«Afjc<v,  to  change 
design  ;  f/^eTccTret^eiv,  to  dissuade. 
'6.  'iTfo  diminishes.  uTroSet^o)  to  be  a  little  afraid. 

1st.  Those  prepositions,  which  have  a  double  effect  in 
composition,  do  not  change  their  original  signification. 
^ictyiXco  means,  to  laugh  at  or  against ;  hu^TFurra^  to  believe 
againstj  i.  e.  disbelieve. 


Prepositions,  lot 

2d.  Two  or  three  prepositions  are  often  found  in  the  same 

word.      lTir,f4.ty  ecvtcli^f^ct,  eTruvia-itjfzt,  t6v]i7rpaKxlxAocit^ccva. 

Inseparable   Prepositions. 
There   are  certain  particles   used   in  the   composition  of 
words,  which  are  commonly  ranged  with  the  prepositions  : 
these  are,  cc,  ui>i,  spi,  j2pi,  ^a,  ^cc^  ^f$,  a^,  xi,  vf,  y^j,  and  ^^6  used 
for  ha, 

1 .  The  following  prepositions  augment. 

ecpi  ;  as,  apiTTtJcpo^ ,  very  bitter  ;  ctpi^rM^^  most  illustrious.  It 
is  commonly  derived  from  upM^  to  lit,  to  be  convenient  ;  or 
from  Apy^,  Mars,  the  god  of  war. 

spi,  ept^popcoq,  to  roar  excessively  ;  from  epcco),  to  love  3  or 
from  Ti-epiy  towards. 

/3».  (^aP^if^isca,  to  be  very  hungry  ;  from  j3«5,  an  ox,  because 
of  its  bigness.  And  for  the  same  reason  we  make  use  also  of 
iTrTrai  j  as,  i7r;royv6>^6;v,  one  of  an  elevated  genius  ;  taken  from 
iTTTroi,  a  horse. 

^cc,     ^^:petvoi,  all  bloody  ;  from  ^etcrv,  densus,  thick. 

l^cc.     (^cidsoi,  most  divine,  admirable  ;  from  ^c6>,  to  be  hot. 

?iot.  >^c6^ec\7],  pelvis,  a  great  bason  ;  from  Xu,  valde,  great- 
ly, and  ;t5c<viy,  hisco,-  to  be  open,  because  of  its  wideness. 
Xa^po^^  a  glutton  ;  from  Xa  and  ^opos ,  devourcr.  It  comes 
from  A«<y,  to  see,  to  desire,  to  enjoy. 

A/.  Aifift^^v,  agito,  quasi,  valde  ago,  to  agitate,  to  torment  ; 
from  Mccv,  valde. 

/3^7.  ^piJ]7rvog,  an  epithet  of  Mars  ;  clamorous,  heard  from 
afar. 

2.  At'5  expresses  always  some  trouble  or  difHculty,  or  mis- 
fortune. ^utkoM^,  diflicult,  morose  j  ^vrrvyja,  to  be  unhap- 
py. ^ 

The  reverse  of  which  is  bZ  ;  as,  ^vjmAo^,  easy,  good-hu- 
moured ;  ivrv^eu,  to  be  happy  :  But  it  is  not  inseparable, 
for£«  is  also  an  adverb. 

3.  These  two  denote  privation  :  vf.  vf^o<^fi$  ei,  those  that 
have  no  feet,  or,  whose  feet  are  very  short.  But  if  it  hap- 
pens to  precede  an  <*,  or  an  f,  it  requires  to  be  contracted 
into?;;  as,  vr,pi<r]o^^  for  vs  epiTJc?^  unquestionable.  v>?vf^o5  for 
vs  ccHfJLQ^,  unshaken  by  the  wind,  tranquil,  vm/^tcc,  calmness, 
serenity.  vii//.£prr,i ,  eo$,true,  sincere,  blameless,  for  V5  ftiisprr^Sy 
from  otf^upram,  to  err,  to  sin. 


152  Conjunctions, 

vij,  vijTFtdif  infaas,  aa  much  as  to  say  nan  fans,  an  infant^ 
one  that  cannot  speak,     vj^tto/vos,  impunis,  unpunished. 

4.  N»i  also  augments  ;  as,  vi};)^vro?,    flowing  of  all  sides. 

5.  A,  signifying  privation,  comes  from  ocnv,  or  ccrep,  sine, 
without  ;  as,  aopxrcg,  invisible. 

And  sometimes  it  takes  av  after  it,  to  avoid  the  concourse 
of  vowels  ;  as,  ccv^t^/tcfltxro^,  incruentus,  unbloody  ;  ;«y<*v^/sfl5,  ef- 
feminate. 

Signifying  increase  of  force,  it  comes  from  uyuv,  valde, 
Bimis,  vastly,  excessively  j  as,  ccrevTjq,  intentus,  very  much 
bent ;  <»|t;Ao5,   lignosus,  very  woody. 

Implying  union  and  collection,  it  comes  from  umm,  togeth- 
er ;  as  u^expsq,  brother,  from  JV A<pt/5,  vog.  uterus,  the  womb,  be- 
cause brothers  come  from  the  same  womb.  ctKoXv^oq^  a  fol- 
lower, or  companion,  from  y.zXiv6og^  the  road. 

But  sooietiines  it  m  ikes  no  alteration  at  all  in  the  singnifi- 
cation  ;  as,  «5*7:*;^v$,  the  same  with  o-7«;^y$,  spica,  an  ear   of 
corn. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

Are  : — 1.  Copulative.  xj«<,rf,  Poet,  nh^  sometimes  ^fv,  h, 

2.  Disjunctive,   «},  >?ra^,    either,    or  ;  u^ts,  ocvre,  whether, 
whether. 

3.  Conditional,     a,  «v,  ?;v,  easy,  if;  sacv  ft^,  unless. 

4.  Adversative.     ctAAse,  but  ;  <5V,  but ;  o^*'?,  yet. 

3.  Concessive,  ei  xxt^  tcxtrot,  jcximv,  kxv^  although  ;  ^»,  yt, 
indeed. 

6.  Casual,     yap,  for  ;  ert,  because  ;  an,  if  indeed  ;  tTst^ 
sTTii^iji  eTTsi^'n'Trep,  since. 

7.  Final,  or  Perfective,     hoc,  iui.  acr]s,  on-oq,  o^pot^  that. 

8.  Conclusive,  «v,  rotvw,  upx,  <^»?,  therefore,  then. 

9.  Dubitative.     ei,  c&p:t,  f^yi,  whether. 

10.  Potential,     ctv,  and,  by  the  Poets,   ksv,  ks  :  in  render- 
ing which,  the  words  can,  will,  may,  must,  are  used. 

On  the  Order  of    Collocation, 
1.  The  following  are   postpositive  ;  yap,  (w-fv,  i't,  f£,  rotwv, 


On 


2,  Prepositive  and  postpositive  :  av,  upot,  hoti  and,  among 
the  Poets,  ^u. 

3,  The  remainder  are  prepositive. 


Syntax.  163 

To  Conjunctions  are  commoply  added  what  are  called  Ex- 
pletives. These  are,  J*?,  ^>}rct,  uv,  y£,  ft^y,  av,  ttso,  t^s,  tth},  rot^ 
yv,  v^v,  poL,  ecp^  ks,  xfv,  ^yjv.  Hoogevcn  has  showH  that  thei^e 
particles  have  always  their  proper  force. 


SYNTxYX. 

Syntax  includes  Agreement  and  Government. 

General  Principles  of  Syntax. 

1.  Every  nominative  agrees  with  some  verb  expressed    or 
understood. 
2.  Every  adjective  has  a  substantive  expressed    or   under- 
stood. 

3.  A  noun  denoting  the  source,  origin^  cause,  or  the  class, 
to  which  any  thing  belongs,  is  put  in  the  genitive,  with  or 
without  a  preposition. 

4.  A  noun  denoting  that  to  which  an  action  tends,  or  from  a 
regard  to  which  it  is  commenced,  or  the  means  by  which  it 
is  effected,  is  put  in  the  dative. 

5.  A  noun  expressing  the  object  on  which  any  action  ter- 
minates, is  put  in  the  accusative. 

6.  The  vocative  stands  by  itself,  or  has  an  interjection 
joined  with  it. 

7.  The  infinitive  is  governed  by  some  verb  or   adjective. 


AGREEMENT. 

Rule  L  Two  or  more  Substantives,  signifying 
the  same  thing,  agree  in  case  ;  as,  IlavXog  aTtoa- 
7p?^g,  Paul  an  apostle.  Qeq  xpttr^^  to  God  the 
Judge. 

1.  One  of  the  substantives  is  sometimes  understood  ;  as, 
Kvx^s&piji/o  Tn  Arivttya  (sup.  oj«3$,)  Cyaxares,  the  son  of  Asty- 
ages. 


154  Syntax, 

2.  An  infinitive,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  may  supply  the 
place   of  one  of  trte  substantives. 

3.  Sometimes  the  latter  substantive  is  put  in  the  genitive. 
5rpA/5  A^jjva^v,  for  TfoXt^  A6}jy»t,  the  cilv  Athens. 

Rule  II.  An  article,  adjective,  or  participle? 
agrees  with  its  substantive  in  number,  gender 
and  case  ;  as,  to  ''ayiov  IIv£V[.ta^  the  holy  Spirit! 
ev  exsLvatg  rate,  rifiy^paig^  in  those  days. 

1.  Substantives  are  often  used  adjectively  3*  as,  'EM«5 
PmTf^  the  Greek  language. 

2.  Several  adjectives  may  agree  with  the  same  substan- 
tive ;  as,  ;roA/v  oiKHf^svTjv^  ev^oitf^evct,  Kctt  /M-eyctA^y,  a  citj,  popu- 
lous, flourishing,  and  large. 

3.  The  substantive  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  and  the  adjec- 
tive then  takes  the  gender,  number  and  case  of  the  substan- 
tive understood  ;  as,  'o  ^e  ^iKctioi  ck  ^r/c/cag  ^r^cejat,  (supp.  «»>?^,) 
the  just  shall  live  by  faith.     Rom.  i.  17. 

The  adjective  thus  taken  is  said  to  be  used  substantively ; 
and  has  all  the  relations  of  agreement  and  government,  which 
the  substantive  would  have  in  its  place. 

4.  The  adjective  is  often  put  in  the  neuter,  xp*}i^»  being  un- 
derstood ;  as,  57  'Tct'lpig  (ptxlulov  ^poloi^,  to  men,  their  country  is 
most  dear. 

5.  An  infinitive,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  often  supplies  the 
place  of  the  substantive,  and  then  the  adjective  is  put  in  the 
neuter  gender  ;  as,  ^itfAesroy  to  f^r  <pi?iy}<reti,  it  is  hard  not  to 
love.     Anacr. 

6.  The  adjective  sometimes  agrees,  not  with  the  substan- 
tive expressed,  but  with  another  implied  in  that  one,  and  un- 
derstood ;  as,  Td  Seiov  ocvjov^^  the  Gods  themselves.  (ipe<pQ? 
(pspovlct  To|o»,  a  boy  carrying  a  bow.  Anac.  /jyeof^oti  ro  Tr^edoi 
itvoti  ctvovlm ,  I  think  the  multitude  foolish,  (pev  o>  a.y&'M  Kctt 
TTio-lyj  ^^t;;>;^,  oi^eTcci  ct^xroXi-^srav  rjf^oii,  Alas  !  brave  and  faithful 
soul,  he  has  left  us,  and  departed.     Xen.  Cyro. 

7.  Participles  and  adjectives  are  often  put  in  the  same  case 
with  the  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  they  refer  ;  as,  otof^eva/v 
etyeit  iro(paPcclm  uft'&P^'^^*:  for  oiof^svm  uvut  o-o^Mlecloiran  uv^p^^afv, 
thinking  themselves  to  be  the  wisest  of  men* 

♦  This  is  very  common  in  English;  as,  gold-watch,  sea-water.  The 
only  difference  is,  tke  words  are  connected  by  a  hyphen  in  English,  but 
not  in  Greek. 


Syntax,  155 

8.  An  adjective,  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  plural, 
sometimes  has  its  proper  substantive  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  ci 
^(cvxot  Tobi  uvOpwTrm^  for  ^ocv^ot  etvGoMTrai,  wicked  men. 

9.  The  personal  pronouns  in  the  genitive  are,  commonly, 
used  instead  of  poj>sessives  ;  as,  o  ^xrr}p  un,  my  father,  for 
tfMi.  0  ec^eX(poi  (rH,  thy  brother,  for  ro^,  rj  ei^e^H  eJftA'v,  youF 
sister,  for  u^cshpt}, 

10.  Mfcra$,  like  medins,  in  Latin,  usually  signifies  the  mid' 
die  of ;  as,  Trot^rov  tv  AtyociM  f^ev-u  fA.e\m,  Make  it  remain  in  the 
middle  of  the  iEgaean.     Lucian. 

11.  A  word  in  the  dual  may  agree  with  another  in  the 
plural,  signifying  two  ;  as,  (ptXets  yntu  x^ip'  fiu?u»f^^v,  let  us  af- 
fectionately embrace. 

12.  Adverbs  are  frequently  used  as  adjectives  ;  as,  ev  roi^ 
role  oty$pa7ro'i,  among  the  men  at  that  time  ;   Pelceph. 

13.  Instead  of  an  adjective,  a  noun  with  a  preposition  is 
often  used  ;  as,  rjoon)  i^elot  ^o^y^,  i.  e.  fv<^«|o$,  exalted  pleasure. 
0  fur'  ft;xAf/flt4  ^ocvxjo^^  i.  e.  evK?^ir^,  a  glorious  death. 

14.  When  females  are  the  subject  of  discourse,  but  the  at- 
tention is  not  directed  to  the  se^r,  a  masculine  adjective  is 
sometimes  joined  to  the  name  of  a  female  ;  as,  T<y  ywoctKs, 
Xen.     Eurip.  speakingof  a  worn  m. 

€)uz!rl€iv  riv*  ev  rij  ^*  rjiupu  f^XXcfv  NEKPON. 

Being  about  to  bury  a  dead  person  on  that  day — 

Aristoph.  of  a  woman,     trepa  J*£.* 

15.  Such  instances  as  <pt?^^  <y  Mt^tXxs^  Iliad,  A,  189,  and 
f$(piMyeperu.  Ziv^  Iliad,  A.  560,  are  not  exceptions  to  this  rule  ; 
fi>u>i  is  the  Attic  vocative,  SLn^n<pe>^/eperec  the  ^olic  nomina- 
tive 

Rule  III.  A  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  in 
number  and  person  ;  as,  eyo  ypa^,  I  write  ;  'vfxst^ 
T^yere^  ye  say, 

1.  The  nominatives  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are 
»arely    expressed,   except  for  the  sake  of  emphasis. 

2.  The  intinitive,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  frequently  sup- 
plies the  place  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  ry  ^/Aoo-6^f/»  to  ^Tjletv, 
(supp.  io-lh)  to  inquire  is  the  province  of  philosophy. 

T«  %-oc9-tf  xpeo-K€if  ^v<r^sp€a-jocTov  ecrltv,  to  pJease  all  is  very  diffi- 
cult. 


♦  So  Plautufl.    Quifi  e«t  ea  ?  Sed  quis  est  mulier  ? 


156  Syntax, 

3.  In  >ity>itn^  they  say,  eta^oth,  they  are  accustomed,  &c. 
avepavci  is  understood.  In  /:.<?ov7oi,  it  thunders  ;  v/^g;,  it  snows; 
ppiX^'i  Jt  rains  ;  ^et/$  or  ai:p  is  understood  ;  arid  is  some- 
times expressed  ;  as,  ^svc  (Bpo^ly,<re.  Horn.  Gd.l^su^un.  The- 
oerit. 

'  4.  The  Attics  often  use  the  nominative  for  the  vocative  ; 
as,  ^  TTcetq,  eyeipa,  Maid,  arise  I  Luke  viii.  54.  x^tps,  (ix(ri>ievg. 
Hail,  Kinp* !  John  xix.  4. 

Thou  Suii,  v»boseestand  hearest  all  things. — Iliad,  r. 

4.  The  nominative  is  sometimes  used  without  a  verb  ;  a«, 

'O  yap  M.cucry,q  cvjrj^ — i-iic  oti'a.fx.ev^ri  yevovev  uvjajy 

But  this  Moses — We  know  not  what  is  become  of  him. 

Acts  vii.  40. 

He  thai;  overcometh— I  will  make  him  a  pillar.  Rev.  iii.  12. 

And  the  shore — all  were  full  of  bodies  newly  slain.     Heliod. 

Excepiwu  1.  Nominatives  plural  of  the  neuter 
gentler  have  commonly  a  singular  verb  ;  as,  ^cja 
Tpe%/^6,  animals  run. 

2.  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  masculines  and 
feminines  plural  take  a  verb  singular;  as,  ayj^OoLi 
ou(pai  ^isXecdv^  the  noise  of  songs  resounds. 

Pindar. 

3.  A  nominative  dual  sometimes  takes  a  verb 
plural ;  as,  au(pcd  s^eyov,  both  said.  A  plural  noun 
denoting  hro^  may  take  a  verb  in  the  dual  ;  as, 
yjiuab'^oi  Ttoraw^t  cvSa?.?.yjrov  'vr^op,  two  wintery 
torrents  unite  their  streams.     Iliad.  A.  453. 

4.  Nouns  of  multitude  in  the  singular  take  a 
verb  in  the  plural,  when  the  affirmation  contain- 
ed in  the  verb  applies  to  the  individuals  which 
compose  the  noun  ;  as,  YipcdT/iadv  avtov  ^aTtav  ro 
TrPc/j^Oo:,  all  the  multitude  asked  him.  But  if  the 
affirmation  relates  to  the  noun  considered  as  one 


nJiole^  the  verb  is  in  the  singular  ;  as,  arcb^  e^eto 
hxjoc,  with  haste  the  people  sat  down. 

Iliad,  B.  99. 

Rule  IV.  Two  or  more  substantives  singular, 
coupled  by  the  conjunctions  ;^a(,&c.  have  averb, 
adjective,  participle,  or  relative  plural ;  as,  CTtf p/L^oc 
Tcai  xapnog  Sta^Epovacy  the  fruit  and  seed  differ. 

1.  If  the  substantives  arc  of  different  persons,  the  verb, 
he.  agrees  with  the  lirst  person  in  preference  to  the  second^ 
and  with  the  second  in  preference  to  the  third  ;  as,  £y<w  kxi  cu 
Tct  ^Dcoctec  7roi>jTof4,efy  I  and  thou  will  do  right. 

2.  If  the  substantives  are  of  different  genders,  the  adjec- 
tive or  relative  plural  takes  the  termination  of  the  leading 
gender,  i.  e.  the  masculine  ;  as,  Uotyrec  {Trotuyiec)  KurtKetro  fjcytle 

$iloui,  TToQavJx.  All  the  flocks  lay  down,  neither  feeding  nQr 
bleating,  but  longing  for  Daphnis  and  Chloe,  who  had  disap- 
peared. 

Though  in  the  human  kind  the  masculine  is  the  leading 
gewder,  yet  in  other  kinds,  such  as  the  camel,  the  ox,  and  the 
dog,  the  female,  being  considered  more  valuable  than  the 
male,  the  feminine  takes  the  lead  ;  as, 

Ov  yecp  TTat^ole  if/.ui  /3li«  ^Xx^m  doe  f^ev  Izrvai, 

They  never  drove  away  at  any  time  my  cattle  or  my  hors- 
es.    Iliad,  A.  154. 

3.  When  the  substantives  signify  things  without  life,  the 
adjective  and  relative  are  put  in  the  neuter,  xP^'f^*^^^  being 
understood  ;  as. 

Power  and  riches  are  desirable  for  the  sake  of  honor. 

4.  The  adjective  or  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the  near- 
est substantive,  and  is  understood  of  the  rest ;  as, 

Atit  yup  rot  epeii  <Pt^Vy  Tro^ijuai  t€  ixotxa^i  re, 
Contention  is  always  delightful,  and  wars  and  battles. 

Iliad,  A.  177. 

5.  Sometimes  the  conjunctions  are  omitted  by  the  figure 
Asyndeton. 

15 


158  Syntax, 

Rule  V,  The  relative  6g  agrees  with  its  ante- 
cedent in  gender,  number,  and  person. 

When  no  nominative  conies  between  the  rela- 
tive and  the  verb,  the  relative  is  the  nominative 
to  the  verb  ;  as,  Ai'dpo^  oc  euaovrat^  the  men  who 
shall  know. 

But  when  a  nominative  comes  between  the  rel- 
ative and  the  verb,  the  relative  is  governed  by 
some  word  in  the  sentence  :  as,  6  ?voyog  6v  eiTte^ 
the  word  which  he  spoke. 

1.  When  the  relative  follows  two  words,  of  different  per- 
sons, it  agrees  with  the  first  ratber  than  the  second,  and  with 
the  second  rather  than  the  third. 

2.  The  relative  often  agrees  with  an  antecedent  under- 
stood, or  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun  ;  as, 

c(,  ^i  €>cuo-l7i  ^PuKtoi   7rpccrrcTocyJ]eiCt   ^tr.yv^cjt^.cti ,    (supp.  TTpccyf^toijct^) 

1  will  nfiention  those  things  which  are  appointed  for   each 
age.     Xenop.  Cyro. 

3.  When  the  antecedent  is  not  expressed  in  the  prece- 
ding member,  it  is  commonly  repeated,  to  prevent  ambiguity, 
in  the  same  clause  with  the  relative  ;  and  is  understood  in  the 
succeeding  clause  ;  as,  oco'tKn  Xtkfy.puji}^,  'ag  i^tv  ^  ttoXi^  ufjut^et 
€>fot;f,  6v  vof^tl^av,  verbatim,  Socrates  acts  unlawfully,  whom 
the  State  acknowledges  ae  Gods,  not  regan^ng  ;  i.  e.  not  re- 
garding those  whom  the  State  acknowledges  tis  Gods. — Xen. 
Because  in  this  instance  no  noun  is  previously  expressed,  to 
which  cv^  can  refer,  it  was  necessary  to  annex  Beovi  in  the 
same  member,  and  understand  it  after  vof^i^ofv. 

The  antecedent  may  sometimes  be  omitted  without  obscu- 
rity;, as,  ovg  Jf  ccv  yvw^t  rii]eav  ri  cchK6Vvitx,q,  rifAopavTcAiy 
whom  they  discover  transgressing  any  of  these  things, 
they  punish. — Xen.  Here  uvSp^Tm^  is  so  readily  understood, 
as  to  render  its  insertion  unnecessary. 

Exception  I.  The  relative  is  often  put  in  the 
same  case  with  the  antecedent;  especially  among 
the  Attics  ;  as,  (^cSXaigj  otg  e;j^o,  for  ovg  e^'^'^i  ^^e 
books  which  I  have*     Ttpog  r^toigy  otg  /ieyecy  for  ovg 


Syntax,  159 

Xe/ysi^  to  the  things  which  he  says.  This  is  some- 
times done  vvben  the  antecedent  is  not  express- 
ed ;  as  a'^ta  6v  '■npa^^oLiicV,  i.  e.  ^xHvc^Vy  a  ;  worthy 
of  the  things  which  we  have  done.  Luke  xxiii. 
41. 

2.  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  used  in  the 
same  case,  and  in  the  same  clause  w^ith  the  rela- 
tive :  as  bvroc,  eali^  6v  V.eyeig  avOpcdTtov^  for  ovrogealt 
arf)pu:tog,  ov  ?^8y8ig,  this  is  the  man  that  you  say. 

3.  The  relative  sometimes  agrees  in  gender 
with  the  noun  following  ;  as,  etg  hp8g  a^iKmvrat 
roTtovg^  at  xa/isvraL  awaycyyai^  they  arrive  at  the 
holy  places,  which  are  called  synagogues.  Philo. 

Rule  VI.  Any  verb  may  have  the  same  case 
after  it  as  before  it,  when  both  words  refer  to  the 
same  thing;  B.s,£yu  eifiikSaGxaTiogjl^m  a  teacher. 

1.  The  verbs,  which  have  most  commonly  the  same  case 
after  them  as  before  them,  are  substantive  and  neuter  verbs, 
with  verbs  passive  of  ?iaining^  gesfure^  &.C. 

2.  The  nominative  after  a  verb  substantive  is  sometimes 
f^hanged  into  the  genitive  plural ;  as,  Kpoiyog  erji  rm  rrxanw^, 
for  Tfxnym* 


ARTICLE. 

L  The  article  is  sometimes  used  as  a  demon^ 
stroiive pronoun,  especially  by  the  early  Poets  ;  as, 
rriv  Sseyoax  Xi^crco,  but  I  will  not  release  her.  II. 
A.  29. 

To  this  head  may  be  referred  the  use  of  the  Article  with 
u!v  and  JV,  to  express  contra-distinction  o  m-sv,  the  one  ;  b  c*£, 
the  other. 

II.  The  article  is  sometimes  used  as  a  rela- 
ffve  pronoun ;  as,  n   &  (pevyei^    rexvov  ;  \^i.  rca^ 


16©  l^yntaoo. 

A'x^i^'kea^  tov  iMv  atax^vo/iai ;  what,  do  you  flee 
from  my  child  ?  Iph.  Achilles,  whom  I  am  asham- 
ed to  see.  Eurip.  Iph.  A.  1351. 

When  the  Article  is  thus  used  as  a  relative,  the  verb  to 
which  it  belongs  is  frequently  changed  into  a  participle  ;  as, 
(ic-iv  61  y^iyovTiq,  for  Qi  ?\£yov<ri^  there  are  those  who  say. 

III.  The  article  is  frequently  used  as  a  posses- 
sive pronoun  ;  as,  «;k6  to  Ttarpi,  zai  r^  fiyjrpt  jiovov^ 
yeyevriadai,  aXXa  ^^at  rri  7tarpi&,  that  he  was  born 
not  for  his  father  or  his  mother  only,  but  for  his 
country.    Demos,  de  cor.  §  59. 

IV.  The  article  is  prefixed  to  nouns  which 
express,  not  generally  «wy  one  of  a  class,  but 
dejinitely  some  one  which  is  known.  A  noun 
may  be  rendered  thus   definite  in  various  ways. 

1.  KctT*  f|d;^»jv,  by  distinction^  or  general  notoriety  ;  as,  '* 
■Xotttrtji,  the  Poet  ;  i.  e.  Homer  ;  ^  v<»o*o?  eczrsKeiro  uf^ec  koh  *a  sra* 
AtfA,c<;.  at  the  same  time  were  impending  the  well  known  plague, 
aad  the  Pc/oponwesian  war.     Theoc.  H.  69. 

The  article  is  thus  used,  *at'  i^o^nv,  before  the  names  of  the  Deity, 
and  of  the  great  objects  of  nature,  the  sun,  moon,  stars,  sea,  earth, 
heaven  ;  and  generally  before  any  object  which  is  greatly  distinguish- 
ed or  well  known. 

2.  By  a  previous  mention,  either  of  the  same  or  a  synony- 
mous word  ;  as,  eTxruthvet}  ye  ftjjv  ev  Uepc-ojv  yo/^is  ^urot  oe  ^o>cii(^i* 
01  vcuat  ct^x^<^^^ty  he  was  educated  according  to  the  Persian  laws 
— and  those  laws  seem  to  begin,  &c.   Xen-  Cyrop.    aoXetc-ocnoi 

Tfvoi  tfrxvpa^  ux^XaSov,  VipsTo  rt  ;^;fl6A5?areft/»a/  T<3t;  ^e^«^ovr/ ,  and  SOme 
one  beating  his  a^^enc?ant  severely,  he  enquired  the  reason  of 
abusing  the  servant, 

3.  By  implication  in  the  context ;  as,  ''ovra  srpd^^i  rot^  wc- 
y.il^ioii  Nvf4,^ocioif  ^vyug  eyeuro,  rr,y  xpio-iv  HZ*  v^of/,£iYUi,  he  having 
treacherously  surrendered  Nymphceum  to  the  enemy,  became 
a  fugitive,  not  waiting  the  trial  ;  i.  e.  the  trial  implied  as  the 
natural  consequence  of  his  treachery. 

4.  By  ?i  description  in  the  context  which  limits  the  noun  to 
a  single  object  ;  as,  ^  h(x,6niLiiir,c^  Xpia-ra^  the  covenaBt  of  Je- 
sus Christ. 


syntax,  161 

5.  B}  ^eing  monadic  in  its  nature  ;  i.  c.  representing  per- 
sons or  things  which  exist  singly ;  or  of  which  only  one  can 
possibly  be  the  subject  of  discourse  ;  as,  sxx«4'«$  rot<;  ^opai  n- 
o-^x&iv  sit;  Tfiv  yvvxiKOfvijiv.  having  knocked  at  the  gate,  he  entered 
the    women's  apartment. 

6.  Aitar  an  object  has  been  mentioned,  it  is  sometimes 
made  definite  by  a  subsequent  description^  to  which  the  article 
is  preiixed  ;  as,l^«yy>j$  o  zrpo0y^;r,(;y  John  th;i  prophet  ;  jj  Jet/vo7'/?$j 
a  £v  roiq  ^yoti,  vehemence  of  language. 

This  is  likewise  the  case  after  verbs  of  calling  ;  as,  rov  f^o- 
vov  ot^(>)(>o^oKnloi  o)iof><.x^ov]£i,  calHug  him  the  only  incorruptible 
man. 

When  the  second  noun  is  merely  in  apposition,  without  de- 
fining the  former,  it  is  frequently  without  the  article. 

V.  The  article  is  prefixed  to  nouns,  when  they 
denote  a  class  of  objects  taken  as  a  fvhole  ;  as,  6 
ardpcMog  eotl  Qvyirog^  man  is  mortal  ;  X€yousvov 
rovg  $83g  fpp^pciVj  uanep  6l  xvvcq^  rag  aruGpoTtag,  say- 
ing that  the  Gods  guard  men  as  dogs  do. 

VI.  The  article  is  prefixed  to   abstract  Nouns, 

1.  When  used  in  their  most  abstract  sense  ; 
as,  ri  (xSixtaxat  ri  axoT^acia  ueyiarov  rcw  oituvxaxov 
cariy  injustice,*  and  intemperance  are  the  greatest 
of  evils. 

2.  When  the  attribute  is  personified  ;  as,  yj  xa- 
KirjLy  'vnohx^Hda^  ecTZtv  and,  malice,  interrupting, 
said. 

3.  The  article,  prefixed  to  a  neuter  adjective, 

is  used  for  an  abstract  noun ;  as,  to  xaKTiog  beauty  ; 

ro  OCT  [oz/,  justice. 

In  these  cases  the  abstract  noun  represents  a  class  of  ob* 
jects. 

VII.  Infinitives,  adjectives,  participles,  adverbs, 
and  members  of  sentences  are  frequently  used  as 
nouns,  and  in  such  cases  the  article  is  generally 
prefixed  to  them  ;  as,  ra  ^i^oaopsLV  ro  ^yjrecv.  in- 

15^ 


qiiiry  is  the  business  of  philosophy;  6l  dvv^roi^  mor- 
tals ;  ra  6^(j,  external  things  ;  o^v^  etg  ro  nmd^  opav, 
quick  at  discovering  all  things  ;  6c  a/i^t  7t?.aruva^ 
the  followers  of  Flato;  and  sometimes  Plato 
himself. 

In  such  instances  the  noun  to  which  the  article  belongs 
expresses  a  class  of  objects. 

VIIL  The  noun  to  which  the  article  be- 
longs is  frequently  understood  ;  as,  ra  fi/irpog 
fsil.  ^Yi^ana)  the  things  of  hismother;  to  avOpjTtoc, 
(sil.  ^Yiiia)  this  word  avdfXdTZog. 

IX.  In  a  proposition,  the  subject  has  generally 
the  article,  and  tlie  predicate  has  not ;  as,  nvev^ia^ 
6  Qeog^  God  is -a  spirit. 

X.  Proper  names  are  not  always  subject  to 
these  rules. 

Xf .  When  the  noun  in  the  genitive  has  the  arti- 
cle, by  any  of  the  preceding  rules,  the  noun  which 
governs  it  has  commonly  the  article  likewise.* 


GOVERNMENT. 

Government  of  Substantives. 

I.  One  substantive  governs  another,  signifying 
a  different  thing,  in  the  genitive;  as,  to  Qe8  [laxpo- 
dvi^ta^  the  long  suffering  of  God  ;  (Byjfia  Tads,  a  seat 
of  stone. 

1.  The  latter  substantive  generally  expresses  the  class  or 
kind  to  which  the  former  belongs  ;  or  some  relation  of  origin, 
cause,  possession  or  property. 

2.  This  rule  extends  to  pronouns  and  to  tlie  article  used 
as  a  pronoun  ;  as,  jcpiOm  tjjv  rif  tTrTm,   the  barley  of  his  horse. 

♦  It  has  been  designed  only  to  give  the  general  principles  respecting^ 
the  article  without  descending  to  minnte  particulars,  which  weak!  only 
perplex  the  younger  student.  For  Middleton's  Theory  of  the  artiek;, 
«ee  Appendix. 


Syntax.  16^ 

3.  When  the  noun  in  the  genitive  signifies  a  person,  it  maj 
be  taken  in  an  active  or  passive  sense  ;  aa,  ij  yv^o-ij  m  SiH 
may  denote,  our  knowledge  of  God,  or  his  knowledge  of  us. 

4.  The  governing  noun  is  often  understood  ;  as,  OAr;^7r/«5 
4  AAfJ«vj))y  (supp.  utiTtip,)  Olympia  the  mother  of  Alexander. 
ui  «d^i<,  (supp.  hiJLov,)  to  Hades  ;    ev  oc^a  (supp.  ^of^^)  Hades. 

5.  A  substantive  in  the  genitive  is  oflen  put  for  an  adjective, 
to  express  quality  more  strongly  ;  as,  ^u^oiyKg^  depth  of  earth, 
for  fioihtac  yv  ;  '/?  Trspicra-sioc  tr,^  '/^ccptroq^  abundant  grace  ;  iy 
tco-Toiriu  ra  7r?iiirii,  inconstant  riches. 

6.  The  Attics  use  a  noun  in  the  genitive,  preceded  by  a 
neuter  article,  for  the  noun  itself ;  as,  ro  ttj^  '^^x^^t  for  97  rv^^^ 
fortune  ;  ro  Tut  ypu^f^Lxrut^  for  t«  y^fA.u.ocTu^  letters  ;  rot  ruf 
^eep'^u^^v  ecTTiTja  s^jt^  for  ot  fixp^etpot,  barbarians  are  faithless, 
Demosth. 

7.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  a  noun  with  a  preposition  is 
often  found  j  as,  ctrv^icc  ly  Trspi  m  fiiHy  the  evils  of  life,  for 

8.  The  dative  is  often  used  for  the  genitive  ;  as,  •yx  Arpsi^fj 
Ayctt^f^vcyi  tjv^acie  ^y.u^,  U  did  not  please  the  mind  of  Agamem- 
non, the  son  of  Atreus.     Horn. 

9.  The  noun  tliat  should  be  in  the  genitive  is  often,  espe- 
cially by  the  Poets,  put  in  the  accusative,  governed  by  a  pre- 
position implied  ;  as,  n  trg  (pptvoe^  njctra  vev&oi,  for  crii(pptiui^  what 
grief  has  invaded  your  mind  ? 

10.  The  dative  is  frequently  used  for  the  genitive  5  as, 
Tectpt  Ttftufov  ^evHy  the  avengcF  of  your  father's  blood. 

11.  An  adjective  or  article  in  the  neuter  gen- 
der, without  a  substantive,  governs  the  genitive  ; 
as,  ro  xpyi<y^ov  to  Geov^  the  kindness  of  God;  ra  ty^g 
'^^jt^c,  the  gifts  of  fortune. 

1.  In  these  cases  a  noun  is  understood,  which  is  really  the 
governing  word.  « 

2.  Sometimes  a  preposition  precedes  the  noun  ;  as,  ru  Trupcc 
Tt^  rvyjt.^^  the  things  of  fortune. 

3.  The  adjective,  thus  used  in  the  abstract,  is  often  with- 
out a  genitive,  and  then  it  has  an  adverbial  sense  ;  as,  rt 
^tTToi,  finally. 

111.  If  the  latter  substantive  has  an  adjective  of 
praise  or  dispraise  joined  with  it,  it  is  often  put 


164  Sj/ntccx; 

in  the  genitive ;  as,  avrjp  ^eyakyjg  apstyjg,  a  man  of 
great  virtue  ;  av9iJLhyig  <ppsvidv,  daring  of  soul  ;  TtpQ- 
i^evHv^  ryjg  apyjtyjg^  to  be  first  in  virtue. 

The  latter  sttbstantive  is  more  commonly  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive, by  synecdoche,  kutu^  hec.  &c  being  understood  ;  as, 
TTrov^ecieg  roi  rpo-sj-^v,  (supp.  kcctcc^)  of  ingenuous  disposition. 

Government  of  Adjectives, 

I.  Adjectives  signifying  any  affection  of  the 
mind,  (as  knowledge,  ignorance,  &c.)  plenty, 
want,  power,  participation,  diversity,  and  separa- 
tion, govern  a  genitive. 

The  genitive  generally  denotes  the  origin  or  cause  of  the 
qualit  es  expressed  by  the  adjective;  as,  'Et^^ap^i  r^^urlvxa^^ 
experienced  from  (in)  misfortunes — misfortunes  being  a 
source  of  his  experience. 

*\is-jroi  ezs-t(r>ctf>Levo(  ^re^toio,  horses  acquainted  from  (with)  the 
plain — the  plain  being  a  subject  of  their  acquaintance. 

Aoocr^f/joie^  l^dx^^^  ignorant  from  (in)  war — war  being  the 
source  of  their  ignorance — a  subject  whence  they  derived  no 
knowledge. 

K5«)6A>»  ocyevTlo^^  untasted  from  (of)  evils — evils  being  the 
source  whence  he  derived  no  taste. 

'hMov  &eocf^ocroq  u&eoiTQ<;^  unperceptive  from  (of)  the  most 
pleasant  sight — the  most  pleasant  sight  being  a  source  whence 
he  derived  no  perception. 

T5W  .M-f  AAavro^  cc-srpaoo'Aroq.  vioi  foreseeing  what  is  future — what 
is  future  is  not  to  him  a  source  of  foresight. 

Ovhv  £&)iog  oc-^^vTJoi  r,v  ttj^  ABmcticov  ^vr^vxia-i .  no  nation  has  not 
heard  of  the  misfortune  of  the  Athenians — the  misfortune  of 
the  Athenians  was  the  cause  of  fame  to  every  nation. 

TA>y  ^>cAf3r6>v  ocTxreio.q^  unexperienced  from  (in)  hardships- 
hardships  not  beins;  a  source  of  experience. 

Merhv  omv^  full  from  (of)  wine — from  wine  being  poured 
into  it — wine  being  the  matter  which  occasioned  its  fulness. 

A'^v£/<35  (BioToto,  affluent  from  (in)  wealth — wealth  being  the 
source  of  his  affluence. 


'TTj-nrvjiy  is  the  same  with  'rpoam  mat. 


Sfntffx.  165 

HMVG-idi  icuxeoh  nch  from  (in)  evils — evils  being  the  source 
•f  his  richness. 

^Vf4,f4,ctx"'*  ^^^^^  ^*'?^'>  ^  spear  empty  of  assistants — assistants, 
■ot  present,  being  the  cause  of  its  emptiness. 

E/>»j^$  «vJ>6;»,  deprived  of  men — men  removed  being  the 
cause  of  its  deprivation. 

Arc<i  voXtfiLoio,  hungry  from  (for)  war — war,  to  which  he  had 
been  addicted,  being  the  cause  and  the  object  of  his  hunger. 

'lf;tg»»/,  (T/)a»£$)  tc-oAfo5,  desirous  from  (of)  the  city — \he 
city  being  the  cause  of  their  desires — desirous  of  returning 
to  it,  to  shelter  themselves  from  the  enemy. 

Tm  Mzretrrji  Koree^v,  angry  from  (on  account  of)  the  deception 
— the  deception  being  the  cause  of  his  anger. 

Xtfi  Bvyotrepoi  6vfJUiVfjLiioi ,  angry  with  thee  from  his  daughter — 
his  daughter  being  the  cause  of  his  rage  with  thee. 

Mf  Afo«  H-nrpoq^  miserable  from  his  mother — his  mother  being 
the  origin  of  his  misery. 

Etjxott  hifjLAToiv  >.vTr}pi6t,  prayers  releasing  from  terrors. 

'Ev^cnfM'n^6^ri<i  Tt  ran  Xoym  t^  J'w»<«/M.f«wj,  proclaiming  thee 
blessed  from  (because  of)  the  power  of  thy  words. 

BoTTpvx^iv  TTim^eg  tcxpoc^  thy  head  filthy  from  tangled  locks— 
the  hair  tangled  or  clotted  is  the  cause  of  thy  head  appear- 
ing filthy. 

Kana^oq  u^Qpoifrim  <pvTea^^  partaking  from  (of)  human  nature. 

Eyicpacrtii  civa,  not  partaking  from  (of)  wine,  i.  c,  temper- 
ate. 

AAAo7f»<«v  TIJ5  ietvla  <t|/oc$,  fiir  from  his  dignity. 
'^Xvlffos  ovhioq  uPilvi^  removed  from  none  in  virtue,  t*.  e,  inferi- 
or to  none  in  virtue. 

It  is  desirable  that  the  student  should  make  himself  famil- 
iar with  this  mode  of  solution,  and  apply  it  in  his  reading. 

II.  Adjectives  denoting  dignity  and  worth,  and 
those  which  refer  to  crime,  innocence,  or  price, 
govern  the  genitive  ;  as,  a^co;  |Utcrl9tf,  worthy  of  a 
reward. 

-sreifTec  mioi  2TA«rif,  all  things  may  be  bought  for  money. 
eyo^oi  ^axsicti^  in  danger  from  (of)  slavery. 
cdv«(T/«/  ru)t  rs-cTs-pxyfLceyafi  unblameablc  from  (for)  the  things 
wjiich  were  done. 


166  Syntax. 

III.  Compounds  of  a  privative,  and  verbals 
which  denote  action  or  capacity,  especially  those 
in  T0C5  LXOiy  and  J7ptog,  govern  the  genitive  ;  as, 

xOeuroi  xoit  uveKooq  u^ocvrm,  without  sight  OF  hearing  from 
any.  i,  e.  without  seeing  or  hearin«^  any. 

<^v?ixrtico^  ra  (ratf/^ccrog,  guarding  the  hody. 

-zs-etpsicr^y^g  rm  ccyu&m,  imparting  from  good  things,  bestow- 
ing benefits. 

?^vTiptcq  hijUL'^rm^  freeing  from  terrors. 

1.  Verbals  govern  the  genitive,  from  the  siajnification  of 
their  verbs  ;  and  compounds  of  ot  privative,  by  the  force  of 
ctnv^  from  which  the  ct  is  derived. 

2.  To  the  adjectives  which  hav2  been  enumerated,  may 
be  added  many  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the  cause  ; 
as,  ci$Xtoq  Tr,g  rv%»:$,  unhappy  from  fortune. 

iV.  Partitives  and  vi^ords  placed  partitively, 
comparatives,  superlatives,  interrogatiyes,  indef- 
inites, and  some  numerals,  govern  the  genitive 
plural ;  as,  nporog  AdyjvaiQv^  the  first  of  the  Athe- 
nians ;  iv  Tidv  7t?.otQVj  one  of  the  ships  ;  'Ot  na7jaiOL 
tiw  TtoiYjtidv^  the  ancient  Poets ;  6l  nepc^y^^ovreg 
tuv  Ttoiyftuvj  the  most  illustrious  Poets. 

1.  The  genitive  expresses,  in  this  case,  the  class  to  which 
the  preceding  word  belongs,  w/xw^c?  Atljjp<54«5yv  denotes,  the 
first  from  among  the  Athetiians.  01  7srtp'.6X6vre^  rm  -zs-oiifievv, 
the  most  excellent  from  among  the  Poets. 

2  Sometimes,  instead  of  the  genitive,  some  other  case 
with  a  preposition  is  used  ;  as,  f|  wstcctaiv  yj  xoLXXiorJyi^  most 
beautiful  of  all  j  ^walMTxhei  t>j  'EA^sseJ"/,  the  most  powerful  in 
Greece  ;  zs-pathg  ev  toi^  Ts-ar^ruig,  first  among  Poets. 

3.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  case  of  the  partitive  is  some- 
times used  ;  as,  ts^^^/A."^,  th^  f^evu-zs-eiclsive^riig^!  Ts-^vnl^i  e7s-ctr,T£, 
for  rav  ^;A^»,  some  of  his  friends  he  killed,  soou  he  impov- 
erished. 

4.  The  partitives  7/«  and  g/$  are  sometimes  omitted  as,  (pepa 
eroi  t]9>jjv  r<uv  Kx\xt(ri&;v,{sc.  uiuv,)  I  bring  you  a  very  excel- 
lent robe.  Xen.  ;  ocvlog  Tjk^^e  r^y  itfvoyr&'v  eivcct,  (sc.  et^,)  he  desi- 
red to  be  one  of  those  who  remained.  Thucyd.  j  n  ^^y  <pi>^7. 
(sc,  T<?  or  ni)  you  are  one  of  my  fi'iends. 


Syntax.  167 

5.  Partitives,  &;c.  agree  in  gender  with  the  Fiibstantives 
which  follow  in  the  genitive.  When  the  substantives  are  of 
different  genders,  the  partitives,  &c.  commonly  agree  with 
the  former,  sometimes  the  latter. 

6.  Collective  nouns  in  the  genitive  singular  are  governed 
by  partitives,  &c. 

7.  Adjectives  in  the  positive  form,  when  they  express,  in 
a  superlative  sense,  the  quality  of  the  subject,  govern  the 
genitive  plural  ;  as,  f|o;}i«$  Trayim^   the  most  excellent  of  all; 

Aloe  Gecc&fv,  the  most  divine  of  the  Goddesses. 

8.  The  Article  is  sometimes  used  as  a  partitive,  as  Bir^a^ 
«v  ratv  ^fAa;y,  in  whichever  of  the  tribes. 

Dative. 

V.  Adjectives  govern  the  dative  of  the  obf'ect  or 
end  to  vvliich  they  relate  ;  as,  lxc?jog  Aa,  like  to 
Jove,  t.  e.  Jove  being  the  object  to  whom  he  is 
like.  0(p£?u^Log  tYi  TtoXa,  proiitable  to  the  State, 
i.  e.  the  State  being  the  object  to  which  he  is  pro- 
fitable, nfotg  yevvaLocg  ro  aLO^^pog  ex^^ov^  to  the  gen- 
erous, baseness  is  odious,  epoxog  ryj  xptatt,  obiiox- 
ious  to  the  judgment.  e/xoL  mxoog  TaOvy;xevy  exeipoig 
iy?.vxvgy  avru  8c  repTXrog,  he  clied,  bitter  to  me, 
sweet  to  them,  welcome  to  himself. 

'O  ecvTo^^  the  same,  governs  the  dative  as  adjectives  of  like- 
ness ;  as,  T«y  ctuiMv  spai  cot,  I  love  the  same  things  with  you. 
Luc.  vo.t^/^e  rr^i  ccvrm  tivcci  ^T^/Lcixg  et^tov^  m^  c-vyKpvTs-Tcvrui  roti 
elctf,iscp]x^»v(ri.  Consider  those  who  conceal,  equally  worthy  of 
punishment  with  those  who  sin.     Isoc. 

VI.  Compounds  of  avv^  bfxog^  b^oiogy  and  verbals 
in  rog  used  passively,  govern  the  dative  ;  as, 
avyy-j^ig  tu  narpc^  related  to  my  father,    ofioovatog 

\  tidOeg,  of  the  same  nature  with  God  ofxoioyTjjrlr.g 
^fXLV,  of  the  same  language  with  us.  r.ai^la  Bvvala 
6fJ;,  ail  thiogs  are  possible  to  God.  ouyvualop 
roig  7to?yXofQ,  unknown  to  the  vulgar. 


^68  Syntax. 

VII.  Verbals  in  teov  govern  the  case  of  their 
primitives,  with  a  dative  of  the  doer  ;  as,  Cl^ov  euocj 
I  must  go,  i.  e.  there  must  be  going,  as  to  me. 
V€oi^  ^'yj?Ui>l£Ov  ryg  yspovloig^  the  young  should  imitate 
the  old,  i.  e.  there  should  be  an  imitation  of  the 
old  to  the  young.  Simon,  roig  ^v  ''vnapx'^vaL  vofwig 
;^p>7(T7for,  xawuc,  be  slky}  (lyj  Osleov^  we  should  use  the 
present  laws,  and  not  rashly  enact  new  ones. 
Demosth. 

1 .  Verbals  in  redv  express  necessity,  and  answer  to  gerunds 
in  the  nominative  case.  The  Verb  e^lt  is  generally  under- 
stood after  them,  but  is  sometimes  introduced  ;  as,  ypc^^ltov 
c<r]i.  The  Attics  use  them  in  the  plural  ;  as,  ypocTsrlsx  e^iot 
£zs-t<rj6?^7iv,  1  must  write  a  letter. 

2.  The  verbal  is  sometimes  joined  with  a  substantive, 
like  other  adjectives  ;  as,  ypuT^rJeoc  f^i  i7ri(r]o>,9}^  I  must  write  a 
letter. 

3.  Theverbal  sometimes  governs  an  accusative  of  the  doer, 
especially  when  its  verb  governs  the  dative  ;  as,ot;  ^'uMltcf . 
rovi  }fovv  £%ov?c4^  roti  tcoctupi  (ppovova-i^  the  prudent  ought  not  to 
obey  the  unwise.  Isoc.  tuta-Kt-zs-leo^  th  f^ev  ccvIov,  r<«  /ttfv  yvvuixcc, 
for  uv]u,,  yvyxKt,  some  things  are  to  be  looked  to  by  him,  some 
by  his  wife. 

4.  Substantives  and  verbals  often  govern  the  dative  by  the 
force  of  the  words  from  which  they  are  derived  ;  as,  rctt; 
wuBiTii  uKexovhliKoi  o  veoi ,  youth  follows  pleasure. 

5.  Substantives  compounded  with  cryy  and  of^g  govern  the 
dative  ;  ?LS,G-v(rjpocriulr,g  avlon;^  a  fellow  soldier. 

6  There  are  many  adjectives  which  govern  either  the 
genitive  or  dative  ;  as,  r'/xo/o?,  like ;  oi^mvf^o^^  of  the  same 
name  ;  cfM-^etlpioc^  of  the  same  father;  01^1^,93]  ptcs,  of  the  same 
mother  5  Grvvipo<poi^  educated  together  ;  (^^y^;^^?$,  fami  iar  ;  io-oi- 
pvvc^i  of  the  same  force  ;  xo/v^?,  common  ;  ^rAowc-zog,  «^v5/«5, 
rich  J  «t/9ro^o$,  abundant  ;  t^hr,^^  poor  ;  fvo%<j$,  tlzro^/jco^,  ysrft/- 
^ytofi,  exposed,  obnoxious  ;  «<«£(«$,  familiar  ;  mm  to  be  sold  ; 
hu>^iy  a  slave  ;  tXtvhpa^  free  ;  as,  'O/Mtcg  m  rcclpo^,  or  rw 
urotlpt^  like  his  father.  oi^wfAoi  th  zretlpog,  or  tm  Tratjpt,  of  the 
same  aanue  with  his  father. 


Syntax. 


im 


Government  of  Verbs. 
Genitive. 
I.  EifiL  and  ytvouaij  signifying  possession,  proper- 
ty or  duly  govern  the  genitive ;  as,  rov  xvpLOv 
eaiisv,  we  belong  to  the  master,  ruv  apx^^'^^^  ^^^' 
rox}g  apxouEvovg  noidv  evSacuovag^  it  is  the  duty  of 
rulers  to  make  their  subjects  happy. 

1.  The  genitive  is  governed  by  some  noun  understood  ; 
as,  xP*^H^i  "^pxyfcct^  he. 

2.  To  eif^t,  signifying  office  or  convenience,  the  prepo- 
sition TTpoi  with  the  genitive  is  joined  ;  as,  8  cr^o*  ixjpa  ^•<pH 
fc-//,  it  does  not  belong  to  a  skilful  physician,  hk  e(r]t  Trpo^  rv^ 
^oAfiw^,  it  is  not  proper  for  the  State. 

3.*  The  verbs  ^x^t  o'taxttfJuiLi^  hatn^yif^xt^  Tottu,  r^Kw,  ^ccc-^Af^ 
joined  with  adverbs  of  quality,  often  govern  the  genitive  ; 
as,  'sTofiex^i  '»"'?5  y*»i^'?5)  this  is  nny  opinion.  Plut.  ev  tkh^  ^P^' 
f^ujav^  to  arrive  at  great  possessions.  Ilerodot.  r?;$  7rdAv/tt«- 
Gsiot^  tv  rjK.eiv,  to  arrive  at  great  love  of  learning.  In  these 
cases  a  preposition  is  understood. 

For  the  genitive  an  accusative  is  sometimes  found  ;  as, 
vsKfiKco^  Tjjy  ;^^o/o4v  i^u,  he  has  the  colour  of  death.     Lucian. 

II.  Verbs  often  govern  the  genitive  by  the 
force  of  some  noun  implied  in  them  ;  as,  (Saat?.- 
evaveOvLdv,  i.  e.  [3aai?^m  eivat  edpuv^  to  be  king  of 
the  Gentiles,  emdv^tv  rtvog,  i.  e.  ertidvinav  tivog 
ex^f-v,  to  have  a  desire  for  something ;  sTuarlo  ce 
TO  iraip8j  i.  e.  vo^l^lj  ae  e?jirlcd  ru  trappy,  I  think 
you  inferior  to  your  companion. 

III.  When  the  action  of  a  verb  refers  not  to 
the  whole  of  a  thing,  but  to  a  part,  that  part  is 
often  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  xparstvT^vxov  ruvorovj 
to  take  a  wolf  by  the  ears.  expaJyjGB  rrjg  xsipog 
av\  he  took  his  hand.  BTtte  r«  'vhalog^  he  drank 
of  the  water. 


See  Adverbs. 


*  '^^  Syntax. 

IV.  A  noun  denoting  the  matter  of  which  any 
thing  is  made,  is  commonly  put  in  the  genitive ; 
as,  avh^navla  eTtoiYiaav  fiapfmpiiy  tiiey  made  a  statue 
of  fiiarble  ;  oiSyip^  TtsnotyjuEvov,  made  of  iron. 

The  noun  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative. 

A  large  class  of  verbs  take  after  them  a  genitive  express- 
ing the  origin  or  cause  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  verb. 
These  will  now  be  enumerated. 

V.  Verbs  of  sense  govern  the  genitive,  except 
those  of  5/^H  which  govern  the  accusative. 

u(T6ccvof^at>  to  perceive  ;  ukuco,  eAKPoc&o,M.xt,  utc^  ycXva^  to  hear  ; 
cO-^pstivQttcct,  to  smell  ;  yevofuct^  to  taste  ;  (c-srlo^.oci^  e-mrt^ocvai^iycif^ 
hyyocva^  to  touch  ;  fsriXGc^Qatvof^oct.  to  take  hold  of,  he, 

AurSuvelut  ryig  yjjs,  he  perceives  the  ground — the  ground 
beins:  the  cause  of  his  perception.  ijicii(rcc  m  uvdpa^a,  f  heard 
the  man — the  man  being  the  cause  of  hearing.  KXv6t  ^w-fv,  hear 
from  me — I  being  the  cause  of  the  hearing,  o^f/  f^pa,  he  smells 
of  myrrh — myrrh  being  the  cause  of  his  smell.  f«?  f^ta  oczrja, 
touch  me  not — derive  not  from  me  the  feeling  of  touch. 

1.  These  verbs  govern  the  accusative,  among  the  Attics. 
'iptjXccpu&f,  to  handle,  has  always  an  accusative. 

2.  Mciv6xva<f  to  learn  ;  o-wti^i^t,  to  perceive  ;  TrwdavofM^t^  to 
inquire  ;  ^cizs-lo^  to  tinge,  and  some  others,  often  govern  the 
genitive,  from  a  similarity  in  signification  to  the  verbs  of 
sense. 

VI.  Verbs  govern  the  genitive,  which  signify 
any  affection  of  the  mind  ;  as,  desire,  disgust,  re- 
gard, neglect,  admiration,  contempt,  memory,  for- 
getfulness,  &c. 

£7ri$vf^f6>^  opeyoi^xi,  yXi^o^cut,  e<ptsu(^t^  to  desire  ;  epetc^,  to  love, 
{'iiJLaoa)  >^iXu.iof^i^  to  desire,  Poet.)  ;  /M,ae<,  it  is  the  care  of  ; 
(pp^vlt^u^  iTTifjLiXQfjux.i  i  Kvcouoctf  sv] psTTof^oit^  to  take  Care  of  J  oXiyso- 
tfcft>,  to  undervalue  ;  aXeycj,  to  neglect  ;  icxrcc^ppoveea,  C'^-ep^pxa^ 
tJTTepippovsa,  to  despise  ;  /icy;je/.<.Vu-fA),  f^£f4.vt)pte>it,  to  remember  ; 
[7ri?iUy9oi]ioux(,  eK>icev$ccvof^Qit,  ccyLyr^f^cveVfu^  tO  forget,  &C. 

K-Khro  Aocvccm,  she  felt  concern  for  the  Greeks — the  Greeks 
being  the  source  of  her  concern,  upxa-^n  r^q  euvla  ywcciKoq^  he 
!ored  his  wife — he  derived  from  his  wife  the  affection  of  love. 


Syntax. 


171 


o9mm  (ppcvlit^eiv,  to  take  care  of  strangers— strangers  being  the 
cans  *  of  the  care.  uf^eMig  rav  (ptXc^jv,  you  feel  no  concern 
from  (for)  your  friends,  eavf^^ca  c-a,  I  admire  you — you  being 
the  cause  of  my  admiration.  ftJ?  oxr/upu  ^uihiu^,  despise  not 
chastening — let  not  chastening  be  the  cause  of  contenipt 
e(p0ov7jT£  ry.iyulnec^iOf'i,  he  envied  him  on  account  of  the  neigh- 
borhood— the  neighborhood  being  the  cause  of  his  envy,  rot 
h  iXu-re  xv]ii  ^ofoi^svov  ev^e^'voto  yv^aiKoq,  she  left  him  there,  griev. 
ed  on  account  of  the  well-girt  woman.     Hom. 

1.  7!ro9£6f  and  trnzroBtM  govern  the  accusative  ;  and  some- 
times ilS't&VfA.BOQ^  y^'X'^l^^'^   ftvrjiC0V£V(V,   ZZT'XoCvQcc'fOfA.U.i. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  to  love,  (except  spot^a^)  admire,  regard, 
neglect,  often  govern  an  accusative. 

VII.  Verbs  signifying  to  partake,  to  obtain,  to 
enjoy,  to  aim  at,  to  communicate,  to  aid,  govern 
the  genitive. 

Tyy^awfij,  iiz-irvyx^^(^i  f^ipofjLott^  Aseyp^sdVA;,  XotfJoooioi^  s'Ss'tXotfd.koiva^ 
xf  P  <y,  to  obtain  ;  KXy,po^)o^€co^  to  obtain  an  inheritance  ;  xoivatvecjy 
usixy^AM-^ccvafy  H-eUxoy  to  partake  ;  f^iJxMcofjn^  to  communicate  ; 
<«23"dA«t/ft;,  ov>]fAXi,  to  enjoy,  &c. 

Tii^i  Kxi  KXKCs  ^yv  £>^oc^e,  though  wicked,  he  gained  honor — 
honor  being  (hat /ro/^i  which  he  partook,  exv  ^x^um-sv  (r^oX^.i  ^ 
if  we  may  take  of  leisure — if  we  may  get  leisure.  x,xkixs  fuov 
ftf/^Ace^f/v,  3j  M,pi]7}(i  u£]xh^oyxi.  it  is  easier  to  partake  from  (of) 
pleasure,  than  to  impart  (from)  virtue,  xsro^^xvcatuv  rm 
•vim  xyxSav,  we  sliall  receive  enjoyment  from  present  good. 
£yaf  <rov  ovxtf^ijv^  I  shall  gain  advantage  from  you. 

1.  >Mpt^xvoixxt,  H-el^X^i  y'>o>sp&)iQfjt.£ei .  Xocyx^t^'^i  rvyxocyuy  some- 
times govern  the  accusative  ;  Kxp-^oofjuti  always. 

2.  Verbs  of  communicating .^  aiding ^  partakings  often  gov- 
ern the  dative  of  the  person,  xctvma  tm  ce^fA^aj  rr^  Ts-xihxg., 
I  have  a  share  in  common  with  my  brother,  from  (of)  the 
instruction. 

VIII.  Verbs  of  plenty  or  w^ant,  filling  or  depriv- 
ing, govern  the  genitive. 

zrA)j^<»,  zryii}pcA>,  yff^it^co^  f^iTloa^  zrif^iFXiiyj,  yefJLa^  to  iill  ;  ft;;s-«- 
.pta,  Trspura-sva,  to  abound  ;  irxiilsa,  to  be  rich  ;  x<^P^cA^^i  to  sa- 
tiate ;  uT]£p£afs  Mtpt^eny  to  be  inferior,  to  want ;  Q-zTx^iL^a^hw^ 
XP>}^^9  X^pe^<^9  »-a-opsaiy  to  want  5  eXxrloof^^t,  to  be  iiJerior  ; 
^lepeeifj  yvpevoa^  etP«ctpeofuti,io  deprive,  &C. 


17!2  Syntax. 

Mmo?  (ppem  sTz/^.-srAsftv^o,  his  soul  was  full  of  rage — rage  being 
the  cause  of  its  fulness.  ysfLtei  Kuxav,  is  full  from  (of )  evil. 
svsOopiiv'lo  TijsrjiovT^i,  they  Satiated  themselves  from  (with)  pleas- 
ure, xp^^^  yt)i}<rx(rd6)  yy,u,  let  him  fill  his  ship  from  (with)  gold. 
s'ss-£T']e'(^ctvlo  73-oloio,  tYiej  ciowued  from  (with)  wine,  iv-zropst  or 
'arepKro-svit  xp^f^^^l '"^ i  l^G  abounds  from  (in)  riches.  sfAJzs-Xiav 
evippocuns  rui  y^ctp^ioi^  rifA,m^  filling  our  hearts  from  (with)  glad- 
ness. issMpawlo  xapa,<i^  they  were  full  from  (of)  joy.  (i-^w 
hilot.1,  he  wants  from  meat — meat  being  the  cause  or  object  of 
his  want.  zroe,vro<;  hod^  I  want  from  all,  i.  e.  I  am  altogether 
destitute,  cjeptja-ejctt  ry,g  7io>^aiy  he  has  stripped  (from)  the 
State.  ci,7F0  7(puXiii  <pp£vm^  deprived  from  (of)  his  mind,  o 
5r«Af^5  uTTccvlav  etyoc^av  ra^  ttoXiIu^  eK,'reo-']ep^c-e,  the  war  deprived 
the  citizens  from  (of)  all  their  goods.  u<po(.tpiic$oii  rivu  ry,i 
cipZ^i »  ^^  cut, any  one  off  from  his  government. 

Aeoutzf,  to  entreat,  which  properly  denotes,  to  want,  governs 
the  genitive  ;  as,  hof^ut  e-a,  I  entreat  (from)  you. 

nv£«y,  to  breathe,  as  it  denotes  fulness,  governs  the  genitive  ; 
as,  TTve'i  KdKiui ,  to  breathe  hatred.  A^ccipsofA^ut  sometimes  gov- 
erns the  accusative  for  the  genitive  ;  as,  u<pciip£i<r(\£>tt  nvcc  rtjv 
upx'K^,  to  deprive  any  one  of  his  government  :  here- Kctrx  is 
understood.  Sometimes  the  noun  denoting  the  person,  is  put 
in  the  dative  ;  as,  tA<P(&ipHa-6u,i  rm  rr,v  <*/>;^jjy. 

IX.  Verbs  which  signify  to  rule,  to  excel,  to  be- 
gin, and  end,  govern  the  genitive. 

upx^  ^eo-TTo^&f,  ^vvxTTcvci),  e^ovcTtct^of,  uvSevrea,  y,otToty.vpisva,  to 
rule  ;  rtpuvnya,  ^a,(rtXiva),  avotcrarof ,  to  reign  ;  Tjyeof^c^i,  r^yij^vsvii), 
to  lead  ;  B7n(r'lu]£Ut  to  preside  ;  Trepnifjn,  TreptyDiof^.oct,  to  be  over  ; 
<^fl;^ow-«< ,  to  begin  ;  'x-xvofJLut,  Xr^ya,  to  cease,  &c. 

K?iictpx^^  /ttfvra  ^e^ia  Kspat;  riyeio-Ooit,  MfVavat  h  rov  ©£t7<«A«v  m 
6vavvf4.ii,  Clearchus  should  lead  (be  the  leader  of)  the  right 
wing,  and  Menon  the  Thessalian,  the  left.  'TFoXXm  (6vm  fucc 
vc>ui  icpulei,  one  city  rules  many  nations.  ycoCjupx^^^o^t  t«  A«y«, 
to  begin  (from)  the  discourse.  A??ye  Tro^m,  cease  from  labour. 
uTTeTretvretvlo  rH  (ita,  they  departed  from  life.  TtreTrccv^tevot  opy>}^, 
who  have  ceased  from  anger. 

1.  Kpscjea,  rvpdmva,  and  eTrilPoTTtua,  sometimes  govem  the 
accusative ;  apx^,  ^otrtXsa)  and  uiccoTa,  the  dative,  nuvu  some- 
times governs  an  accusative. 

?.,  The  genitiv^o,  after  most  verbs  ofr^lin^,  is  governed  by 


syntax,  173 

a  fiouu  implied   in  the   verb.     ^unXevcOf    i.  e.  jlctciXev^  etf^t* 
avocv-jra^  i.  e.  uvcc^eiM-i.      e^Hc-tec^M,  i.  e.  t'^Sriuv  e^^,  &-€. 

X.  Verbs  of  accusing,  speaking  falsely  of, 
acquitting,  and  o  enerally  those  which  pertain  to 
judicial  proceedings,  govern  the  genitive  of  the 
person  or  t/tin(/y  and  sometimes  both  of  the  person 
and  thing. 

x.£6li)yopeCify  ociliuofictt,  iyv,u>^o)^  ^icoKO)^  '/poc(po,ttui,  "rpoTKU^^^Letty 
to  accuse  ;   u7ro?^va,  uipiriin^    u'^o'^vi^Ptl^of^octy  to  acquit  ;   a-vyyiva- 

O-KCJ^    to    pardon    ;    KUlW/t^COtrKOu^lCOplUOtXCC^a,    KulcifCplVOf,   JCCtlw^il^l^O' 

f<ctty  to  condemn,  ituTcf^ev^o!^oi>i^  io  speak  falsely  of. 

Atay.a  a-e  (povn,  ypsc<poy,ut  c-e  (poya^  1  accuse  you  of  murder— 
the  murder  being  the  cause  of  the  accusation,  afpnif^t  or 
cc7ro?iVcu  a-e  syK>^y:f^uloi^  1  free  vou  from  the  charge.  syxscxS  g-h 
TTpo^bc-iuy,  I  accuse  you  of  treachery  Kxhyopaa't  a-a  (rjua-iv^ 
they  accuse  you  of  seditioji.  KulaytvAfc-KCj  ct^  ^ccvxla^  or  <r« 
^xvxjev,  I  condemn  you  to  death. 

XI.  Verbs  govern  the  genitive,  which  denote 
difference  or  separation  ;  and  among  the  last  may 
be  included  those  of  prohibiting,  abstaining,  spar- 
ing, relieving,  preventing,  erring,  &c. 

^iu.xXat,r}cj,  ^ia.(^ep6},  to  differ  ;  h'ir!r,fjLt^  to  be  distant  ;  o'^'C**'* 
X«>pi^<^i  to  separate  ;  npyco^  to  prohibit  ;  x7.-iXoiuun^  to  abstain  ; 
ATtoLXXcffioi^  £>^sv$sfc6o,  ^'jotLtci.  to  frce  ^  ?.va/,  to  loosc  ;  xn^t^ci)  to 
relieve  ;  (pn^oci'^n,  to  spare  ;  CTroTr/^xvaeucct,  ct'Pi'ervyX'^youet:, 
otf^capluva,  to  err  ;  -^f-iV^oi^cui,  7r/as/<y,  e-^««A-?u?.ct«;/,  to  deceive,  to 
frustrate,  &,c.- 

Ov^sv  hu/pipu  ecpx^^  ocysi-^i ,  uya&cv  Txjpo^,  a  good  ruler  does 
not  differ  from  a  good  father,  rj  ufA.ctpliu,  hicircriv  r^fA^^  m  e^b', 
our  sins  separate  us  from  God.  upyu  <re  Tivpe^  r.ott  C^ccloc,  I  in- 
terdict you  from  fire  and  water,  a'et  cc7r3ye(r$ut  rm  HJLKm,  we 
ought  to  restrain  ourselves  from  evil.  o^svBepcocn  rjjy  Trohtv 
(poQov^  he  delivered  the  city  from  fear.  e&epu7rsv0>^  rev  vog-cv^ 
he  wa^  healed  from  disease,  -srxt^ov  ^uh^6ut  -srsclptKoq  vof^^, 
it  is  the  law  of  the  country  to  spare  children,  r.ysipev  ecv'Jev  7cy 
uTs-yov,  he  awoke  him  from  sleep.  o/axA)  Tt  rr^^  p/x;«$,  I  drive 
you  from  the  house. 

Some  verbs  of  differing  govern  the  dative  ;  as,  hu^spa^  cro;, 
I  differ  from  you.  ^  ,,^ 

lb* 


174  Syntax, 

XII.  Verbs  of  buying,  selling,  estimating,  &c, 
govern  the  genitive  of  the  price. 

atnovLcct^  etyopu^a^  yrptotf^sti  tO  buy  ;  7rt7rpoco-x6j^  ttuXsu^  to  sell  5 
o^f^et^a,  to  exchange  ;  <«|/o&>,  to  estimate,  &c. 

rm  TTovm  TTaXst  9jiica)v  7rav]ec  roc  aycxJ^oc  0  Qsoi,  the  Deity  sells  US 
all  things  for  toils.  ano-xf^Tiv  rcvro  Tnvre  ^pocxy^o^v^  I  bought  this 
for  five  drach mag.  uhovlon  hTtrXvi^  r/^jj5,  is  esteemed  worth 
double.     Jo$T<9VTd  ^pc^xy^r^,  give  this  for  a  drachma. 

The  price  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative,  with  the  prepo- 
sition £7n  expressed  or  understood  ;  as,  eTft  fjuc-do)  fA.tyu>^ai 
u7rx^?^etrlci)  a-i  rui  ^itvaVy  for  a  great  reward  I  release  you  from 
evil.  Sometimes  in  the  accusative,  after  rrpoq ;  as,  TriTrpufrKt 
o  XMK6§  TFdilcc  7rpo§  ocpyvpov,  the  wicked  sells  all  things  for  gold. 

XIII.  Incentivfs^  govern  genitives,  when  the 
included  verb  governs  the  genitive. 

yevay  to  cause  to  taste  ;  wAcc^^;,  to  make  to  wander  ;  ^jy^nT- 
K6f,  ecvufttfA.vtj'TKM,  uTFofAiiMTio-jcuy  to  causc  oue  to  remember,  &c. 
Ey£t;c-^5  f^e  ev^ccitAcviccg^  you  have  made  me  taste  happiness. 

XIV.  Most  of  the  active  verbs  already  men- 
tioned, may  take  an  accusative  of  the  object^  with 
the  genitive,  especially  those  of  accusing,  con- 
demning, acquitting,  warning,  fillinsf,  emptying, 
delivering,  separating,  disappointing,  repeUing, 
forbidding,  restraining,  changing,  valuing,  buy- 
ing, selling,  esteeming. 

Dative. 

XV.  Etot,  taken  for  ex^^j  to  have,  governs  the 
dative  ;  as,  soIl  (iol  ;^p>7/ua7a,  I  have  possessions. 

XVI.  Verbs  compounded  with  ev^  ent^  Ttopa, 
Tt^og^  crvv,  ^vno^  avlc^  ofiov,  govern  the  dative  ;  as, 
efi^ivoL  rotg  xadsalcdatf  to  adhere  to  institutions  ; 
efiSaTi^^LV  or  entdetvai  ttvi  rag  X^^^^j  to  lay  hands 
on  any  one ;  7tpoa<pspeLV  iavlo  rag  j^^^pag,  to   lay 


*  Verbs  signifyiog  (0  cause  one  io  do  any  things  are  called  Xncenfives 


Syntax,  175 

hands  on  himself;  Ttapaysveadat  rvi  sxxTiyiaiqy  to  be 
present  at  the  meeting. 

XVII.  Any  verb  may  govern  the  dative,  that 
has  the  sign  to  ox  for  after  it  in  English  ;  as,  etxetv 
xoucotg,  to  yield  to  misfortune  ;  nag  avr^p  avlo  Ttovet, 
every  man  labours  for  himself. 

The  meaning  of  the  rule  is,  that  the  word  to  which  the 
action  of  the  verb  tends,  or  is  acquired,  is  put  in  the  dative  ; 
and  this  is  the  case,  even  though  the  relation  is  not  express- 
ed in  English  by  the  preposition  to  or  for ;  as,  ^QfiQeiv  rvt  Trccjpt' 
i't,  to  aid  one's  country. 

XVIII.  Verbs  signifying  to  profit  or  hurt ;  to 
favor  and  assist;  to  command  and  obey,  meet, 
follow  or  acquiesce ;  to  serve  and  resist ;  to  re- 
proach, threaten,  and  be  angry  ;  to  believe  or 
trust ;  govern  the  dative ;  as,  (Soyjdetv  rip  TtarptSt^ 
to  aid  his  country.  fuaxsoOaL  roiq  Tto^f/toig,  to  fight 
the  enemy,  arey^i^^  '^^^^  Ttapovac^  to  acquiesce, 
or  be  content  with  what  we  have,  avaaetv  Ttaai^ 
o  rule  all.  ovetSt^eiv  rtviy  to  reproach  any  one. 
no'kTuoL  avlo  ve^adcfi,  many  are  angry  with  him. 
roig  Sixatoig  ;^a;U7tatvf6i;  a  defiigy  to  injure  the  just  is 
wrong.  neidsGdai  roig  vouoig^  to  obey  the  laws. 
7tX«76)  xvhog  ouYihi^  glory  follows  or  attends  riches. 

Some  verbs  of  admonishing  and  exhorting,  take  an  accu- 
sative for  the  dative  ;  as,  orpwaf  srctpc^wa,  i-sreyetpMy  rarpo^ 
rpe-zTOf^  v^6eltoo^  and  'ZS-upoCKuXsAt »    Turocpccr^otXu  (r£  rocvjet^  I  exhort  you 

to  these  things  :  here  ess-i  or  -zs-po^  is  understood. 

XIX.  Verbs  govern  the  dative,  which  signify 
Lo  have  intercourse,  to  worship,  to  pray,  to  use, 
to  fawn. 

t     XocXea^  hiiXsycfjMi^  to   converse  ;  hoclpiQa^    opLtXs6f,   evrvyx^v^j 
10  have  intercourse  ;  evxofM.ty  to  pray  ;  srpQtrKvuof^  Xecjpsvat,  to 
vorship  i  xp^f'^*9  to  use,  he, 
'o  'STpoTsv)^of4,sV6s  Xx^u   OT  S'tuXsyeloci  roj  efw,   he  who  prays, 


iia  Syntax, 

speaks  to  Go«3.  coipoii  ofXtXm  k  uvjo^  efcSfjo-*}  0-6$^^  he  that  has 
intercourse  with  the  Avise  shall  be  wise.  Meiiand.  xp^^'^ott 
Tin  4><Aflt),  to  use  some  friend. 

1.  TipoTicvvia,  sometimes  governs   the   accusative  ;    as    do 

?^iT(rof4,xt,  M]otvevCi),  iKelsve^,  ttiltQaXaoi  ;  as,  sXifrj-sJoy  Or,  sXiietvevs 
©sovrv^eiv  oty<«^6;v,  he  prayed  for  good. 

2.  Many  others  of  the  verbs  which  have  been  enumerated, 
under  this  head,  sometimes  govern  the  accusative. 

3.  Two  datives  coupled  by  xa/.  having  the  verb  stf^t  ex- 
pressed or  understood,  have  the  sense  of  community  ;  as,  rt 
if^ot  Ksci  <roi,  what  have  I  to  do  with  thee  ?  John  ii.  4.  rif4.:txeiii 
KUjiLoi,  what  have  1  to  do  with  battles  ?     Anac. 

4.  The  datives  of  the  pronouns,  especially /ito<  and  «r«;,  like 
mihi  in  Latin,  are  often  little  else  than  elegant  expletives  • 
as,  Ts-a  G-ai  ym  oczreXk^  where  has  he  gone  ?  oiei  <roi — fA^ocxsl^dcii 
Tdv  «JVA^»v  ;  do  you  think  your  brother  will  fight  ?  Xenoph. 
Anaba. 

XX.  The  dative  of  participles  and  of  some 
nouns,  is  often  joined  to  the  third  person  of  ft^a  or 
fyivofjtai^  for  the  verb  itself:  These  are,  (3ti/iofi£vog 
riSou8Vog^  ay(,0o[i€vog9  7H^ochsj(p(iBVoq^  axidVy  aa[iEvog  : 
as,  et  GOi  (337j)U£vo>  eali,  for  ei  /Sou/l^t,  if  you  will, 
^lian.  SL  cot  y^^ofievo  ealh  if  you  please.  I^lato.  otQ 
\)fiLdv  (irj  ax^avoiievid  eiyj^  to  whom  of  you  wouhl  it 
not  be  grievous  ?  Xen.  «&  navv  tovlo  Tt^oahxaiie- 
vQig  avloig  riv,  this  they  little  expected.  Arrian. 
vSsavlo  axovlir^v^  nor  was  he  unwilUng.  Idem,  ro 
h^  a/yfievQ  yivelac  arSpag  ayaOovg  Siaac^at^  he  wil- 
lingly saved  good  men.  Idem,  rarov  [lev  xat 
neTibLpaizsroig  av  rt  yevoilo  ^vucv,  this  you  may  expe- 
rience.    Thucyd. 

XXI.  Any  active  verb  may  govern  the  accusa- 
tive and  dative,  when^  together  with  the  object  of 
the  action,  it  expresses  the  person  or  thing  in  re- 
lation to  which  it  is  exerted  ;  as^  '"vmaxveoiiai  aoi 
hexa  ra?javray  I  promise  you  ten  talents. 


Syntax,  177 

•The  noun  in  the  dative  is  sometimes  put  in  the  accusative  ; 

as,  ■ssrot.piKux^ca,   (re  tolvtol  for  ralct^i  I  exhorted   you  to  these 
fhings. 

Accusative. 

XXII.  Verbs  signifying  actively,  govern  an  ac- 
cusative of  the  object ;  as,  yvaOi  GsavroVf  know 
thyself. 

1.  Neuter  verbs  govern  the  accusative  of  a  noun,  whose 
signification  is  similar  to  their  own ;  as,  sroXefioi  ■ss-oXsfA.it^tiv^  to 
make  war.  The  Poets  often  use  neuter  verbs  in  an  active 
sense  ;  as,  o-vpi^m  ^ovov,  hissing  slaughter. 

2.  The  Attics  delight  in  the  accusative,  and  often  use  it 
after  verbs  which  govern  the  genitive  or  dative  ;  especially 
after  verbs  of  sense  ;  as,  xkHoj  rxv^Xy  I  hear  these  things. 

3.  A  clause  or  a  sentence  often  expresses  the  object  of  a 
transitive  verb  ;  as,  (7n0uf4.ovbi€^  xkh^cci  n  'role  e(r]i  o  h-v6os,  we 
wish  to  know  what  the  fable  is.  Here  n  ^srojt  e<r]i  o  f^v^o^  is 
the  object  of  the  verb  uKUToct. 

Two  Accusatives. 

XXIII.  Verbs  of  asking  and  teaching,  clothing 
and  conceaHng,  speaking  or  doing  well  or  ill, 
govern  two  accusatives,  the  one  of  the  person,  the 
other  of  the  thing  ;  as, 

Xp^  <*'7f<v  rovs  ©£^5  ctyot^u.^  we  ought  to  ask  good  from  the 
Gods,  ^^sch  ;  'uTcu^lx  Tg  ^i^ec^of^xt,  I  will  teach  you  all 
things  ;  e^eovo-c&v  ecvlov  rip  ■sr6p(pvpccv,  Kat  eve^vcrecv  ocvjcv  roc  {f^xlt» 
rx  i^fuy  they  took  off  from  him  the  purple  robe,  and  put  on 
his  own  garments.  Mark  xvi.  20  ;  r?}V  6vyciltp<x,  e^pvyrle  rov 
Botvctlov  ra  uv^po^i  he  concealed  from  his  daughter  the  death  of 
her  husband.  Lysias  ;  f^s^ev  tizs-yi^  (pxxvoov  ccv^pxg  ^s^tov^jy  you 
should  speak  no  ill  of  worthy  men.  Aristoph.  ;  Aecjce^ccif^ouov?. 
"TTaXXet  Ti^v  -sToXiv  vi^ticvjx/flcc^^  KOLi  f/^syuXa,  the  Lacedemonians,  wh^^t 
have  done  the  city  many  and  great  injuries.     Demosth. 

XXIV.  Incentives  govern  two  accusatives, 
when  the  included  verb  governs  an  accusative  • 
as,  ya2xx  enoltaa  \uagy  I  have  fed  you  with  milk. 
3  Cor.  iii.  2.     ^Opxi^u  Vua^  tor  Kvpcoj'^  1  bind  you 


178  Syntax, 

by  an  oath  before  the  Lord,     ra  asfiv^  enyj  xoT^a^e 
x6LV8q^  Reprove  them  with  chaste  words.     Soph. 

XXV.  Verbs  governing  the  accasative,  with  a 
genitive,  sometimes  change  the  genitive  into  the 
accusative,  and  thus  govern  tw^o  accusatives  ;  as, 
xary^yopc)  as  ^'SvSog^  I  accuse  you  of  falsehood. 

XXVI.  Verbs  governing  an  accusative  of  the 
object,  may  hkewise  take  an  accusative  of  a 
noun  similar  in  signification  to  their  ow  n  ;  as, 
^L?u7t7t0(;  VLXYjaobg  tsg  Adyivatsg  tyjv  sv  Xaipcjveia  ua- 
Xyjv.  Philip  having  conquered  the  Athenians  in  the 
battle  of  Choeronium.  Polyb.  ^oplt^elf.  r^g  ai^Opo- 
Ttsg  ^plta  SvaSaxlaxlay  ye  load  men  with  burdens 
difficult  to  be  borne.     Luke  ii.  46. 

Passive  Voice. 

XXVII.  The  agent  or  doer  is  put  in  the  geni- 
tive, after  passive  verbs  and  those  of  a  passive 
signification,  with  the  prepositions  'imo,  exj  nupa^ 
Ttpog  :  as,  fiyj  VLXQ  'vno  ra  xax8,  be  not  overcome 
of  evil.  Rom.  xii  21.  Ttpog  Q^sxai  avOpuTtov  re- 
liuyilaiy  he  was  honored  by  God  and  man. 

1.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  <piXm  vtx.Svlu^ 
<pt>^t,  friends  are  influenced  by  each  other.     Soph. 

2.  The  noun  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative  instead  of  the 
genitive  ;  as,  'Wo  o-ocj pxTrcct^  hoiKet'r^cit ,  to  be  governed  by  vice- 
roys.    Herodian.    ^f:rd/;j7a/ /«,<»/,  it  has  been  done  by  me. 

XXVIII.  When  a  verb  in  the  active  voice 
governs  two  causes,  in  the  passive  it  retains  the 
latter  case  ;  as,  xalyjyopsoiiat  x^J^Ttrjg,  I  am  accused 
of  theft.  Svva'jQs  ro  paTtlta^a,  6  syo  (Sanli^ouaCf 
^anliqQyivaiy^  Can  ye  be  baptized  with   the  bap- 

♦  &dL7rlt^oi>^  is  an  incentive  governing  two  accusatives,  because  the  in 
eluded  verb  f^ATrloa  governs  one.     Se«  Rule  XXIV. 


Syntax*  179 

tism  with  which  I  am  baptized  ?  Matth.  xx.  22. 
'06  TtOA^o^evot  royaXaj  who  are  fed  with  milk. 
Kacv  Ttotpa  ra  5ta^o/ly  rov  <p6ovov  xat  cpovov  sStSaxOyjf 
Cain  was  taught  envy  and  murder  by  the  devil. 
Nazian.  evhehv^svot  ;^J(ji't(Txtfg,  clothed  in  little 
tunics. 

1.  Sometimes  ihe^  former  case  is  retained  after  the  passive, 
and  the  latter  made  its  nominative  ;  as,  Aj?/t4dwy<t|  e-rnrjeo^v  tj?v 
^PX^^i  ^^r  ^rH'<!ovotKJt  eTriTlsv^r  ^  jcpx^^  Demonax  was  entrusted 
with  the  government.  Lucian.  ttjv  ^e  ck  x^t^m  acpTru^oi^coct, 
which  is  snatched  from  my  hands,  ficcmlov  KctiocKpifim ,  con- 
demned to  death. 

2.  Passive  verbs  are  often  followed  by  the  accusative,  a 
preposition  being  understood,  npof^r.devi  vtto  et£]s  siC{ips]o  to 
gjwoe/),  Prometheus  was  torn  by  an  eagle  as  to  his  liver.  Lu- 
cian. 

3.  Passive,  like  neuter  verbs,  take  a  noun  in  the  accusa- 
tive, of  a  similar  signification  to  their  own.  jj%««;r««»  x^P^* 
ficvyeeM^v,  they  were  rejoiced  with  great  joy.  Matth.  ii.  10. 
^Ajjv<«5  €)ccc%v  tjj  fA.oL'r'iotyi  TV7rje(r$af,  Let  him  be  beaten  a  hundred 
stripes  with  the  whip.     Plat. 

IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 

I.  Impersonal  verbs  govern  the  dative  ;  as, 
[isycalov  aSo^€v  airro,  it  seemed  to  him  a  very  great 
thing. 

Xp^  more  commonly  governs  the  accusative. 

II.  %p>7,  Tipenet  and  Sa,  it  hehovethy  govern  the 
accusative,  with  the  infinitive  ;  as,  ;^p>7  ralo  TtoieiVf 
this  must  be  done. 

III.  &t,  sTCkeiTteij  Sta^epsij  (leteali,  fjte?yeLj  evSex^^oLt 
and  TtpoarjxsL,  with  their  compounds,  frequently 
govern  the  dative  of  the  person,  and  the  genitive 
of  the  thing  ;  as,  Sei  noX^v  cot,  you  have  need  of 
much,  fxerealt  fiot  r«7«,  I  have  a  share  of  this. 
tuv  rexvcdv  ro  Ttalpi  ^6/Ut,  children  are  the  care  of 
parents. 


180  Syntax, 

The  nominative  is  often  used  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the 
thing  ;  as,  ^tes^tpst  n  o-qi  rajo  or  T«7a,  how  does  this  concern 
you? 

Af/  sometimes  takes  an  accusative  of  the  person  with  a 
genitive  of  the  thins;. 


THE  INFINITIVE. 

I.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  an  article,  is 
used  as  a  noun  in  any  case  ;  and  the  subject  or 
agent  of  the  verb  is  in  the  accusative  ;  as, 

Nom.  ;tflc>i£5rov  r©  f^jj  (pt?it]Tcci,  (supp.  fW/,)  it  is  difficult  not 
to  love.     Anac. 

Gen.    TToAAflCx/s    doicsi  re  <pu>\,ot^oti  r*  ccyu&oe.   "^ov  KJviO-cc!rdoct  y^ct-Xf 

77a!]£pov  etvuii  to  preserve  good,  seems  often  more  difficult  than 
to  gain  it.  Flut.  (piXo<ro(po(;  uvev  m  Trpscrlsw,  a  philosopher 
without  action  ;  m-sxP*  "^^  ><e'/uv.  at  the  word. 

Dat.  Tfl  ^mJ»  ecKcctp^fi  tcTov  £0*7;  ro)  f4.i<reiy,  to  love  out  of  reason 
is  the  same  as  to  hate. 

Ace.  rv(pXoii  cT«Mo/$  tycocpio-xlo  to  /SAe^fiv,  he  gave  sight  to 
many. 

Sometimes  the  infinitive  is  preceded  by  its  subject  or  agenty 
and  the  clause  used  as  a  noun  5  as>  Trps  ra  0/A<7r7r<Jv  (p6>n^ett, 
before  Philip  called  you.  x^og  ro  ccyecBo?  (pctmG'&cii,  to  appear 
good. 

Here  OMt^^rov  (pmyifrai^  and  uyoc&o<i  <p(ctve<r9oct,  are  taken  as 
nouns,  and  governed  by  the  preceding  preposition. 

II.  One  verb  governs  another  in  the  infinitive, 
(rvhen  the  second  denotes  the  object  to  n-hich  the 
action  of  the  Jirst  is  directed  ;)  as,  yjp^alo  TieyecVf 
he  began  to  say. 

Many  adjectives^  especially  those  which  denote  will  or 
power,  govern  the  infinitive  ;  as,  ccptclo^  «s»ov7«^e/y,  excellent 
in  darting.     o|t^5  o^Sv,  sharp-sighted. 

III.  When  the  conjunctions  tug,  ort,  Ira,  &c.  are 
omitted,  the  Greeks,  like  the  Latins,  use  the  ac- 


Syntax.  1 9 1 

eusniive  with  the  infinitive  ;  as,  Ttapa  Ttaaw  ai^po- 
Ttoic  bm^ycOai^  Stxaiov  SLvat^  ixaolsg  ra  tavluv  6%ctv, 
among  all  men  it  is  acknowledged  to  be  just, 
that  each  should  have  his  own. 

IV.  The  infinitive  mood  has  the  accusative 
before  it,  (n/ien  its  subject  or  agent  is  dijjerent 

from  that  of  the  preceding  verb  ;)  as,  rt  (ipolovg 
<pporsiv  ?i6yti<yc ;  why  do  they  say  that  mortals  are 
wise  ? 

V.  The  infinitive  mood  has  the  nominative 
before  it,  when  its  subject  or  agent  is  the  same 
with  that  of  the  preceding  verb  ;  as,  ^yjotvovlog 
afj£tvuv  Ysyev^cQai  ol^lyjyog  f<f«,  he  says,  he  was  a 
better  general  than  1.  oio^iat  eivaL  fpiTuog  ruv  evae- 
Sciv^  1  think  myself  a  friend  of  the  pious,  uz  e^ 
avlog  a'?iX  trepov  alpalrjyeiv^  he  said  that  not  he, 
but  another  commanded. 

1.  If  all  things  in  the  sentence  refer  to  the  same  person, 
«^$  OTao'ls,  or  a  preposition  may  be  joined,  even  with  a  nomi- 
native, to  the  infinitive  ;  as,  «/  Uepo-tct  evof^iTxv,  et  TreAfioty^uXUfJu- 
M/,  t^a-]e  rcc  o/ic^tec  ^oiovvjti  ratv  uvjdfv  rvy^u¥it¥,  the  Persians  sup- 
posed that,  if  called,  they  should  obtain  the  same  reward, 
doing  the  same  things,  ^toc  ro  f^  ro^ei  eivxi,  because  they  are 
not  wise.     ^fo$  to  etyu$oi  <pxivifr6ect ,  to  appear  good. 

2.  A  few*  instances  may  be  found,  in  which  the  accusative 
precedes  the  infinitive,  though  both  verbs  refer  to  the  same 
person  ;  as,  Xiyet  tecvjci  trepov  yeyevefeci,  he  said  that  he  was  be- 
come another. 

VI.  The  infinitive  is  often  used  forthe  impera- 
tive, Set,  3^p>75  fo^,  &c.  being  understood  ;  as, 
Xaipsiviiela  xoi^povlov,  xT^lhv  [iBla  K?jaLOvluv,  rejoice 
with  them  that  do  rejoice,  and  weep  with  those 
that  weep,  gv  ^e  at^eiv  rag  Mecayivatngj  acdi^etv  8e 
xat  OFavlov,  save  the  Messenians  and  yourself. 

VII.  The  infinitive,  with  an  accusative,  is  often 

17 


182  Syntax. 

put  for  other  moods,  with  og,  uale^  trts,  sq>  octij 
Ttptr,  Ttapog^  eTtei^y/,  (isxpi^  orusxp^g^  ^^d  oiog  preced- 
ing it ;  as,  cjg  iSetv  avdpcdnov^  for  c5g  tSev  avd^xMog^ 
when  the  man  saw ;  npo  aTusxlo^  ^cdvyjaaL^  before 
the  cock  crow  ;  6l  Qsot  etCt  olol  [lyj  [lelaSaXXeiVf  the 
Gods  are  such  as  cannot  change. 

VIII.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  instead 
of  ^the  impersonal  participle  ;  as,  efiOL  hoTcsvv  for 
spioi  hoKHv^  as  it  appeared  to  me  ;  heiv  for  heov, 
when  it  ought. 

IX.  The  future  of  the  infinitive  is  often  ex- 
pressed by  the  aorist  or  present  of  the  same  mood 
with  the  particle  av  ;*  as,  ni  Ttotriaai  av^  or  Ttoteiv 
av  Tov  Ttalepa  [13  otec ;  what  do  you  think  my  fath- 
er will  do  ? 

X.  The  infinitive  supplies  the  place  of  8:erunds 
and  supines,  which  are  only  verbal  nouns ;  as, 
xaxcdg  emalafisvog  InTtevsiv^  minus  peritus  equitandi. 
HxyjTJdop  ^a%dv  ei^rjvr^v,  non  veni  missum  pacem. 


PARTICIPLES. 

I.  Participles  govern  the  case  of  their  own 
verbs  ;  as,  tovg  VccSlspovg  rotavla  yjdn  TtaiSevovleg, 
instructing  the  younger  men  in  such  manners. 

II.  Participles   are   often  used   as  nouns  ;   as, 

6t  ypa'i'OixEvot  Xoxparriv^  the  accusers  of  Socrates  ; 
6  epyj)iisvog^  he  who  cometh. 

There  is  this  difference  between  the  participle  and  the 
corresponding  noun.  The  former  expresses  the  person  des- 
cribed, in  action  ;  the  latter  does  not.  a  ^ovM^  is  a  man  in 
the  rank  or  condition  of  a  slave  :  o  hvXivco't  is  one,  at  the  time 
referred  to,  fulfilling  the  office  of  a  slave. 

♦  See  under  Conjunctions,  the  particle  av. 


>yyniax.  loo 

III.  Participles  are  used  for  the  infinitive,  after 
verbs,  of  persevering^  desisting,  knowimjj  remem- 
hering^  esteeming^  showing,  discovering,  and  such 
as  signify  Gfw  affection  of  the  mind  ;  as,  ov  navao- 
uai  ypa^cdv,  1  will  not  cease  to  write,  fie^ivruat 
Ttotyioag,  I  remember  to  have  done  it.  ^atverat 
rovro  Ttenoiyjxcdg^  he  appears  to  have  done  it.  ovx 
otSoi  eycyye  xa/Oiuj  TtatSa  ifor,  I  know  not  that  I  have 
seen  a  more  beautiful  girK  Ssi^o  TtsnoLyixog,  I  will 
show  myself  to  have  done  it.  ue^v/jao  avdpQTtog 
uvj  remember  that  you  are  a  man.  r^aOovto  Se  oi 
noX?\joi  7te<p8vyorog  Avrcdvt^f  the  people  perceived 
that  Antony  was  fled,  o^omi  at,  ^sr  oXiyov  lax- 
pviiaav^  I  shall  see  you.  after  a  little  time,  w  eep- 
ing. 

1.  The  participle  commonly  agrees  in  case  with  the  noun 
to  which  it  refers.  But  verbs  of  knowing  may  be  followed 
by  a  participle  in  the  dative  or  accusative,  referring  to  the 
nominative  ;  as,  <rvvot^oc  tf^xvlu^  uuocplocvm,  (^cif.tuplccvovjt)  (^u/iucplcc- 
yov7<«,)  TTipt   oifucpltai,  (aiM.ecp'^/ficv,)  1  am  conscious  of  a  crime. 

2.  Adjectives  denoting  clearness  are  followed  by  partici- 
ples ;  as,  ^>jAo5  et  G-vicu^civlm,  you  are  plainly  a  sycophant. 
so-Jt  Jf  nx,  ec^yjXoi  ffl^v,  he  is  clearly  about  to  say. 

3.  A  participle,  with  the  verbs  sif^i^  C'^ap-yc^y  yivof^ut,  ez^, 
3jx4>,  is  often  put  for  its  own  verb  ;  as.  TrpoQsQr/Koles  jjr«v,  for 
'7rpo£oe^r,)cei(rccv,  otTriKJocKUi  trji  rov  uv&pi^fTroy,  he  has  killed  the  man, 
for  ocyrcKjetKB,      6^(7$  rapu^x^,  for  e'lccpoc^uq,  ycu  have  disturbed. 

4.  When  the  participle  is  joined  with  AavfJ^^va;,  (pBocvof,  rvy- 
X^^^,  ^tciloc>,sa),  in  any  tense,  it  is  rendered  by  that  tense,  and 
the  verb  by  an  adverb  ;  as,  eXxOs  fioTy^m,  he  secretly  fed. 
s>^6ov  ^ivsiTccvls^  ri^5  «jyyfA«$,  entertained  angels  unawares,  ^ik 
if6t  £?i&iuv  x,xi  Tijv  <piXoli^ixv  avochi£,eilo,  he  no  sooner  Ct.nie  than 
he  showed  his  ambition,  ot  elvy^xvov  eovl eg,  who  were  there 
by  chance,  elv/x^^^^f^^^  Ti-eptTrccTHyle^,  we  happened  to  be  walk- 
ing. 

5.  In  some  instances,  the  participle  has  a  real  and  perti- 
nent signification,  though  apparently  redundant  ;  Rs,<pxvepoq  v» 
^9ii  ^tjuoleixcq  y.oci  et?ixy$pw7rog  m,  he  being  sympathetic  and  hu- 


1S4  Syntax. 

mane,was  manifest — being  really  humane,  he, in  consequence, 
so  manifested  himself.  etynTxrviTeti  uv^i  ?%&>,  having  loved  him, 
I  so  have  him — having  loved  him,  I  still  hold  him  dear. 
'PFpocyoq  uTKOTvm  £%ii  Ts-spotvQi,  he  has  an  unaccountable  deed,  hav- 
ing done  it—  i.  e.  he  is  involved  in  the  consequence  of  a  deed, 
Tvhicb,  in  an  unaccountable  manner,  he  has  perpetrated. 

6.  Participles  are  often  used  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  ; 
as,  t^'av  /J«v,  seeing  I  have  seen. 

Sometimes  the  participle  of  a  preceding  verb  is  prefixed 
to  the  clause  which  follows  ;  as,  «*AAcft  tv  Tpoo-eMe,  icut  TrpoT- 
f?i6av  unXii,  ttoci  unXofuvo<;  $cg,  but  do  you  go  to  it,  and  having 
gone  to  it,   take  it  up,  and  having  taken  it  up,  give  it.       eya 

Pi  xfv  uuioi  tXeo^oii,  fi  Tcoy  jy  Afccvlo^,  tav  yepetS-,  ^  O^vrxm^  etl^a  eA»y, 
I  myself  coming,  will  take  away  thy  reward,  or  (that)  of 
Ajax  or  Ulysses,  having  taken,  will  lead  it  away. 

7.  Participles  have  sometimes  the  adverb  f^rot^u  before 
them,  in  whatever  case  the  construction  requires,  and  thus 
used  have  the  sense  of  the  Latin  gerund  in  dum. 

Construction  of  Circumstances. 

I.  The  causcj  source^  origin^  and  part  affected^ 

are  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  ^axaptog  ryjg  rv- 
Xyig,  happy  from  his  fortune  ;  or  fortunate. — 
<pL?iei  avrov  ry^g  apsryjgj  he  loves  him  for  his  vir- 
tue. /{vKov  zparsLv  cdrijv,  to  take  a  wolf  by  the 
ears. 

The  cause,  source,  origin,  and  part  affected,  are  very  fre- 
quently put  in  the  accusative  by  synecdoche,  >c»rcc,  ^lu,  &;c. 
being  understood. 

II.  The  manner,  instrument,  means,  and  end, 
are  put  in  the  dative  ;  as,  xparsc  fzyjx,civatgj  he  con- 
quers by  stratagems  ;  apyvptaic;  Jj^yxaai  [io.yfi^  xat 
navra  %par>?attc,  fight  with  silver  weapons,  and 
you  will  conquer  all  things.  Ttapauvdyjrixov  6  ^L?^g 
xat  "tYi  oi^ci  ;fat  rca  Xoyc3,  a  friend  gives  consolation 
by  his  looks  and  words.     Arist. 


Syntax.  185 

The  manner,  instrument,  means  and  end,  are  often  put  in 
the  accusative  by  synecdoche  ;  as,  Trurtjp  c-ot  ttjv  vXtKtuv^  fju^x- 
A/>r  h  rr.i  ewotuv,  a  father  to  you  in  respect  of  years,  more  so 
in  respect  of  kindness.  Heliod.  ^iccv  J^accr? /t<,»7^c»',  you  should 
do  nothing  with  violence. 

III.  The  genitive  is  often  used  for  the  dative, 
or  the  dative  for  the  genitive,  as  th^  writer  is  de- 
sirous of  fixing  the  attention  of  his  reader  upon 
the  source^  or  upon  the  instrument  or  end  of  the 
specified  action. 

.  Thus,  when  Homer  says  of  Hector,  II.  viii.  235,  he  would 
burn  the  ships  rcith  flaming  fire,  N^jcc^  e/icTrpyjTet  wvpi  Ki:?iia>,  he 
fixes  the  mind  upon  tire,  as  the  instrument  by  which  this  is 
done  :  but  when  in  another  place,  11.  ix.  242,  he  writes,  Av](n 
n  epcsrpijG-etf  {JLotXipov  zrvpoi;,  that  he  would  burn  themy?'o?n  fire, 
he  directs  the  attention  backward  to  fire,  as  the  cause  from 
which  their  being  burnt  proceeded. 

The  same  observation  applies  to  the  following  examples. 
E^£t  rupzT7iTc&v  e^uh.i ,  After  they  enjoyed  themselves  from 
food,  \uipi  <J'  AhvotiTi  zs-izs-vvpcevo}  ctv^pi  ^ty-uto)^  Minerva  delight- 
ed in  the  man  wise  and  just.  Avno^  7}X6'  A^i^Mh  be  went 
against  Achilles.  II.  xx.  422.  Avr;a  nsjAf/A/vos /<yv,xx.  113,  going 
against  the  son  of  Peleus. 

Otvcf)  ^i^ccprjOTei,  laden  with  wine.  Xtf^uto  (iupeietg  Zt'pi^i 
his  hands  heavy  from  pestilence — i.  e.  with  pestilence. 

np£-z!rcv  yi  t'  i;v  cev  ^'xi/Liovoi  Tev  * fAou  ro^e,  this  would  have  been 
suitable  from  my  evil  genius,  for  ^uif^yt  iw  £f^^  to  my  evil 
genius.  Aixg  AStjvu^ — ocvrt^toni  ^mov  sTrci,  A.  M,  6o4,  he  gave 
the  divine  Minerva  a  terrible  answer,  for  A/«  A$>}vu. 

IV.  Nouns  which  denote  that  with  regard  to 
which  any  thing  is  done,  are  commonly  put  in 
the  genitive  ;  as,  ev  ex^cv  <pp6vuP9  to  be  favourable 
in  mind. 

V.  The  price  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  genitive  ; 
and  sometimes  in  the  dative  ;  as,  ovrioauy^p  Tiei^rs 
^pa2f^'->^'5  1  bought  it  for  five  drachmae ;  ^ptcrjo  ifyjv 
vLXYiv  QiT^aarOf  he  bought  the  victory  with  Lold. 

17* 


186  Syntax. 

In  purchasing  or  exchanging  goods,  the  thing  received  is 
the  cause  of  giving  away  the  thing  exchanged,  and  must 
therefore  be  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  ocit^siQe  xpvTiu,  xa>^tm^ 
he  exchanged  golden  for  brazen  arms — his  receiving  brazen 
arms  being  the  cause  of  giving  away  the  golden.  When  the 
dative  is  used,  it  expresses  the  means  or  instrument  of  pro- 
curing the  exchange  ;  as,  xp^^froj  rtjv  viktiv  huvtitccU,  he  bought  the 
victory  with  gold.  The  dative  seems  to  be  used  when  a  re- 
ference is  made  to  the  person  who  wishes  to  procure  the 
exchange  ;  the  genitive,  when  the  reference  is  to  the  person 
from  whom  it  is  procured. 

VI.  The  question,  whither?  is  commonly  an- 
swered hjetq  orTtpog  with  the  accusative  :  where  P 
by  ev  with  the  dative  ;  as,  ev  'Pof^>7,  at  Rome. 
eig  ry}v  Avnoxsiav^  at  Antioch. 

Vil.  The  question,  whence  ?  is  ansveered  by  ex 
or  ano  with  the  genitive  ;  by  or  throuyh  what 
place  ?  by  hia  with  the  genitive  ;  as  ex  or  aitx)  tyjg 
TtoXsug,  from  the  city.     Sea  yyjg^  by  land. 

The  prepositions  are  sometimes  omitted,  especially  by  the 
Poets. 

VIII.  The  terminations  dc  and  en,  added  to  a 
noun,  denote  at  a  place  ;  Se,  ^c,  or  ae  to  a  place  ; 
Qbv  and  0c,  from  a  place :  as,  KopivdoQc  oixia  vaudv^ 
inhabiting  houses  at  Corinth.  etfiL  ^dcyivSej  I  go 
to  Phthia.  x?^taiYi6ev  aveiT^to  ;^aJl;ceoi/  eyx^^*  ^^ 
took  the  brazen  spear  from  the  tent. 

IX.  The  measure  of  maynilude  is  put  in  the 
genitive  or  nominative  ;  as,  avh^iag  SvuSexa  nex^- 
QVf  a  statue  of  twelve  cubits.  Ev^parrjg  eon  to 
Evpog  rerlapovaraSiov^  the  Euphrates  is  fonr  stadia 
wide.  TO  MaiavSpti  ro  evpog  Svo  TtXf 0pa,  the  Mae- 
ander  is  two  plethera  wide. 

X.  The  distance  from  one  place  to  another 
is  put  in  the  accusative  ;  as,  E(|)f(7og  anex^h  '^p'"^ 


Syntax.  187 

riu^fx^  oSov^  Ephesus  is  distant  three  days'  jour- 
ney. SsxaTtevre  Ttex^f^^  sTtarcd  opov  'xr^udyj  ro  ^vScdp, 
the  water  rose  twenty-five  cubits  above  the 
mountains.  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  in  the 
dative ;  as,  Tlevra7to?.Eug  TpcTtoTug  ^tsj^et  oSo  etxoatv 
ev^cyvo  a^5pt,  Tripoli  is  distant  from  Pentapolis 
twenty  days'  journey,  for  an  active  man. 

X.  The  time  rvhen  is  commonly  put  in  the  gen- 
itive, sometimes  Jn  the  dative  ;  time  how  Icmgj 
in  the  accusative  ;  as,  Yifiepag  ocai  wxrtog^  by  day 
and  night,  ri/ufpa  /u/a,  on  one  day.  opyyi  ipL?Mvrcw 
oT^iyov  Laj(vei  xpovov^  the  anger  of  those  who  love 
prevails  but  a  short  time. 

The  time  when  is  sometimes   put  in   the   accusative  ;  as, 

jjy  ^i^eccxofi  t<c5  rjf^pu,^^  ru/^  h  vvxlec^  nvM^tla  et^  To  opog^  he  taught 

by  day,  and  by  night  tarried  in  the  mountain.  Luke  xxi.  37' 
Here  some  preposition,  as  ^/«,  is  understood.  The  time 
how  long  is  sometimes  put  in  the  genitive  or  dative  ;  as,  toXXh 
etvjiii  Hx,  *  iMpxKct  xP^^^i  ^  have  not  seen  them  for  a  long  time. 
a  7ro?^ect9  rfMpatii  6<rJepov,  not  many  days  after. 

Case  of  the  Synedoche. 

XI.  Substantives  are  very  often  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative by  synecdoche^  xara,  hia,  &c.  being  un- 
derstood ;  as,  Ttarj^p  aot  ryjv  yiXixiav^  ^ia?i?jop  Se 
em'ouxv,  a  father  to  you  in  respect  of  years,  more 
so  in  respect  of  kindness.  OTCsSaiog  rov  rpoTtai^,  of 
ingenuous  disposition. 

Nouns  signifying  the  form,  majinevy  distinction,  object, 
measure^  number,  or  part  affected,  after  substantives  and  ad- 
jectives ;  and  those  denoting  the  cause,  instrument,  or  manner, 
after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  commonly  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive by  synecdoche. 


188  Syntax, 

Case  Absolute. 

XII.  A  substantive  and  participle  are  put  in 
the  genitive,  when  their  case  depends  on  no  other 
Avord ;  as,  0f«  8i8ovrog,  bSev  ia^vei  (pdoivgj  vvlifen 
God  gives,  envy  avails  nothing. 

1.  The  genitive  is  not,  in  such  c;i&es,  really  absolute  or 
independent :  it  expresses  the  cause  or  origin  of  soaie  circum- 
stance mentioned  in  the  preceding  or  subsequent  clause  ;  as, 
^sctyni  £<r]i  icut  cai^e^ui,  Geav  Ge^^oviav,  Theagnes  exists  and  is 
preserved  from  the  Gods  willing  it — Theagnes  is  preserved, 
the  Gods  willing  it  being  the  cause  of  his  preservation. 

2.  The  participles  of  5/jm-<  and  yivof^ccci,  and  some  others,  are 
often  omitted  ;  as,  e|£^/<  (pmslv,  &»$  efcn  f*.oni^  (sc.  H'Ttj^)  1  may 
speak  when  alone. 

The  genitive,  especially  of  pronouns,  is  sometimes  omit- 
ted ;  as,    K?^ijp^^i>afv,  (sc.  av/^'v,)  they  choosing  by  lot. 

3.  The  intinitive,  or  pai:t  of  a  sentence,  seems  sometimes 
to  supply  the  place  of  the  noun  ;  as, 

TTvp  TTveiv  rag  Tuvpii<i  jit'j^oAoyjj^ev/es,  thiit  bulls  breathe  fire,  be- 
ing circulated  as  a  story. 

4.  The  accusative  and  sometimes  the  nominative,  are 
used  absolutely  by  the  Attics  ;  as,  >tc«/  rctv]ec  rec  yevoi^eac  cv-roe- 
TTcog,  eTJi-jcxv  01  'Upeti  Kut  Aevi]ut,  and  these  things  being  proper- 
ly performed,  the  Priests  and  Levites  stood.  ctvei^uvleg  m 
G-ufjut.rc<i  TTopas,  'TTaT^i't  ytvelcct  ro  Trvp,  when  they  have  opened  the 
pores  of  the  body,  there  is  again  fire. 

The  dative  is  used,  though  rarely  ;  as,  ««^ey  cf^oiw-fv^;,  both 
sitting.  These  instances  arise  from  the  omission  of  some 
words:  thus,  ufoi^uiji^  ra  o-ofuiajog  Trooai^^i.  e.  ai  ocvoi^uvjii  ao-tf 
when  they  have  opened,  &c.  uf4,0u>  e^o/xsvco,  (supp.  n-elx.) 

5.  Certain  participles  are  often  used  instead  of  the  case 
absolute  ;  as,  J'wv,  it  being  necessary  ;  hccpepov,  there  being 
a  difference,  &.c. 

Case  of  the  Comparative. 

XIII.  The  comparative  degree  governs  the 
genitive,  when  the  conjunction  >;,  than,  is  omit- 
ted ;   as,  ufXtTog  j/Xi;xi6)?',  sweeter  than  honey  ; 


Tiarpo^  afULVQv,  better  than  his  father  ;   xpscraofp 
OLxryjpfHiv  ^dovog^  hatred  is  better  than  pity. 

1.  The  noun  in  the  genitive  denotes  the  cause  or  origin 
of  the  augmentation  or  diminution  ;  as,  ><iVKOTipoi  ^tovoi,  whi- 
ter than  snow — i.  e.  from  comparing  them  with  snow,  they 
appear  white — the  snow  being  the  cause  of  their  appearing 
whiter.  x^^^^  h^"^  u'r?ui]epct,  lips  more  soft  from  the  rose — 
or  soft  from  comparing  them  witli  the  rose. 

2.  The  excess  of  one  thing  ovor  another  is  put  in  the  da- 
tive ;  as,  f^t^4tv  m  JWit/t/Ao;,  greater  by  a  finger. 

3.  The  infinitive,  or  part  of  a  sentence,  is  sometimes 
governed  by  the  comparative  ;  as,  wsAArtJc/s  ^oxet  ro<pvXec^c6i  r' 
tcyecSec  Ts  KTviTXTOcct  ;t^Af ?ra;/ffl«y  eifeci,  to  preserve  good  seems 
often  more  difficult  than  to  gain  it. 

4.  Multiplicative  numbers,  like  comparatives,  govern  the 
genitive  ;  as,  i'7r>uto-io¥  ^u  ockhu^  th  Myuvy  one  should  hear 
twice  as  much  as  he  speaks. 


ADVERBS. 

I.  Adverbs  are  often  used  as  substantives  or 
adjectives  ;  as,arto  rore^  from  that  time  ;  an  apti 
from  this  time  ;  aog  aprt,  till  now  ;  to  Ttepav  ryjg 
6a?.aaoyjg,  the  farther  part  of  the  sea  ;  6  e^o  av- 
dpcjTtog,  the  outward  man. 

II.  Derivative  adverbs  govern  the  case  of  their 
primitives  ;  as,  a^iGyg  m  7.ayb^  agreeable  to  reason* 
To  aidf.ia  ouoicdg  rotg  eaptvoig  avOeOi  ^lapatveraij  tlie 
body,  like  vernal  flowers,  decays.  a^i-axorDg  [mi^ 
pleasing  to  me  ;  because  (xpsaxcj  governs  the  da- 
tive. ara$pL(rcx  ro  rexvo  7t?.yj(yiov^  standing  near  the 
child  ;  because  TtXyjfrmg  governs  the  dative,  Ttepc^ 
to  'teixogj  around  the  wall  ;  because  TUft  governs 
the  accusHtive.  7ta()cx  vyjaj  without  the  sljip  ;  be- 
cause Ttapa  governs  the  accusative,  eyyvg  to 
rsLx^i^  near  the  wall. 


Eyyv^f  T^iiTicfi  ^spi'^  and  yretpeK^  govern  the  genitive  like- 
wise. 

III.  Adverbs  of  place,  time,  cause,  order,  quan- 
tity, concealment,  separation,  number,  exception, 
exclamation,  and  some  others,  with  adverbial 
nouns,  have  a  genitive  after  them,  governed  by  a 
preposition  understood. 

ttvev,  etrep,  ^t^^^  X^p'^3  without. 

eivrticpv,  uvriKpvg,  uTTctvrixpv^  against,  opposite. 

ecxpt^^  H-^XPh^  to,  even  to. 

IvsKcc,  cvfxfy,  on  account  of. 

iyyvg,  TTXiiO'iov,  ccy^t,  eto-rov^  near. 

SKTog.  e^a,  eKTco-dev,  without. 

fvr<9§,  ea-a,  eico)-  ivroa-0£v^  within. 

ttAjuv,  TTcipcKros,   except,  but. 

/kera|t;.  among.      oTnca,  cTnc-^ev,  behind, 

;rpao-^£v,  before,     srspuv,  £73-£iceivoc^  beyond,  &Lt. 
A^pt  rrq  (r]r,f4.£po^  ^f^pets,  to  this  day, 
Me^pt  S^ya»y,  as  far  as  Susa. 

'Evey^cc  ra  ^(Xrio-r^,  for  the  best. 

In  these  examples,  £23-/  is  understood. 
Ex^it^svat  ralav,  after  those  things. 
AotOpee.  -srurpog^      without  his  father's  knowledge. 
Av£v  ic»iicecrii,        without  labor. 
Toturaiv  cc^tjv,         abundance  of  such. 

«t7iro  is  understood. 
A^et|  TKi  r^pL^pu^^  once  a  day. 
X<y^/$  rav  eiprptevm^  beside  what  has  been  said. 

tzirt  is  understood. 
n  m  uhfcrjpLure^,  Oh,  the  injustice  ! 

Qptoi  rm  KTTjf^xrAfv,  alas  !  my  possessions  ! 

T>;$  rv^y^i,  for  6;  rjj5  rvy^t)^,  what  an  incident  1 

^lu  is  understood. 
T<Vd5;|/o4^/y,  for  whose  sake. 

AtK*iv  ■sroToti/^av,       like  rivers. 
EyeoTTiov  riiOf«,       before  God. 

Kctrcc  or  TTupoe,  is  understood. 


*  *>:^'^»  f^^XM^i  before  a  vov/eL 


StijnUx,  191 

The  adverbs  enumerated  above,  and  many  others,  have 
very  much  the  nature  of  prepositions 

Adverbs  of  the  final  cause  are  sometimes  omitted  5  as,  sypet- 
-^XjTH  f*.7j  ruaq  ^fiko-ut  zs-ohy  (supp.  gyfXflt,)  I  have  written  for 
this  reason,  lest  any  should  happen  to  enquire.     Thucyd. 

IV.  Adverbs  of  accompanying  are  followed 
by  the  dative,  a  preposition  being  understood ; 
as,  ""a^a  r'^  riiJ^^poL^  at  day-break.  6^8  roig  a^Xo^g, 
together  with  the  rest.  In  these  instances  aw  is 
understood. 

V.  Adverbs  of  swearing  are  followed  by  the 
accusative,  a  preposition  being  understood  ;  as, 
vyj  A^a,  by  Jupiter ;  vyj  UXtrtuva^  by  Pluto ;  fia 
roSe  axyjTVtpov,  by  this  sceptre.  Here  Ttpog  is  un- 
derstood. 

VI  Adverbs  of  showing  govern  the  nomina- 
t  ve  ;  as,  lSh  6  'vcog  era,  behold  thy  son  !  t&  o  avOpu- 
Ttog,  behold  the  man  ! 

Vll.  Two  or  more  negatives  strengthen  the 
negation,  if  they  belong  to  the  same  verb  ;  as, 
sxen  y  firj  tpayo  e^  ai^ra,  1  will  by  no  means  eat  of 
it  any  more.  Luke  xxn.  16.  6v  ax  yjv  bSsTtu)  aSeig 
xeifiEvogy  in  which  no  one  had  ever  been  placed. 

Luke  xxiii.  63. 

1.  The  several  adverbs  deny  of  different  things.  Thus, 
in  the  second  instance,  «>c  denies  of  the  fact  ;  »^f  wa^,  of  time  ; 
^^etf,  of  person. 

2.  When  the  negatives  belong  to  different  verbs,  each 
qualifies  its  own  verb  j  and  they  generally  affirm  ;  as,  «  ^wx- 
fAMt  fMi  fjuf^irtcr^on  ctvla,  I  cannot  avoid  remembering  him. 
Xenoph. 

3.  Ov  and  f^^  are  often  placed,  not  before  the  verb  which 
they  quaUfy,  but  before  some  other  one  in  the  sentence  ;  as, 
Hk  e^Tj  et.7rex6eWi  he  said  he  would  not  depart. 


i92  :^ntax. 

Various  Cases  after  Adverbs  of  Place. 

Genitive  or  Dative, 
ei^L^tyet,   etftf4.iy^7}y ^    eyyv^y  eyyvdev,   ^u^eyyvg^   rvnyyv^,    f|j:5., 

Often er  a  Genitive, 

Oftener  a  Dative. 

Genitive  or  Accusative. 

siTCif,  nceT^ec,  TTupsx.  or  w«tf5|,  "^tptj^. 

Dative  or  Accusative. 

hvpo. 

Genitive,  Dative,  or  Accusative. 

*Ai,^^  «;fc/'^5»  f*'ix9^'>  M-fxP'^' 

Various  Cases  after  Adverbs  of  Exclamation. 

N.    G.    D.    A.    V. 


w^etyf 
or 
evyi 


G.     —     A.     — 


or        >     —    ^'     —    —     — 

TFC&tf        S 

N.     G.     ~    —     V. 


tOf^ 


6ty 


N.   g:  -  -   V.         also  \  g;-^  g; 


N.     —     D.     A.     —  also     D.  and 


N.     G.    —    A.     —  , 

N.     G,     D.     A.     V.         also    <   G.  and         A 


N.  and    <    jy' 

A. 
and         G. 


/  N.  J 

5  G.. 
(   D.  2 


Syntax. 


193 


Moods. 

1.  Adverbs  of  likeness,  manner  and  interrogation,  have 
commonly  an  indicative  ;  of  doubting,  an  indicative  or  op- 
tative ;  of  exhorting  or  encouraging,  an  imperative,  and 
sometimes  a  subjunctive  or  indicative.  Other  adverbs  hav^ 
various  moods. 

2.  Ai,tct$i,sif  et§e,  »$,  joined  to  the  imperfect  bXpuXcv  or 
d^fiAdV,  or  the  second  aorist  4>^fA«v  or  o^t>^cv,  are  placed  before 
an  infinitive,  in  the  sense  of  the  optative  ;  as,  tt$^  o<PiXoi  uyu' 
fM^rt  /iceistf,  uyove^  re  yivgr^cti,  I  wish  I  had  remained  unmarri- 
ed or  been  childless. 

3.  n^fAev  or  d^fAor,  without  the  preceding  particle,  is  plac- 
ed before  other  moods  ;  as,  «^«Aiv  -^vx^o^  £<>?$,  I  would  thou 
Tfert  cold.  ^ 

4.  E<^f  precedes  an  optative  in  the  present  and  future 
tenses  ;  an  indicative,  in  the  perfect,  and  sometimes  an  in- 
finitive ;  as,  u6{  ypu/pcif-u^  I  wish  I  wrote,  nh  ytyptLtpu,  I 
wish  I  had  written,      n^en  f^tj  6v9)roto-t  yevecBut    'rr.fA.ok    7ro$et¥av,  I 

wish  thou  wert  not  a  desirable  evil  to  mankind. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 
Conjunctions  couple  together  the  same  cases^ 
moods  and  tenses  ;  as,  yif>^aro  6  Irjasg  xyjpwoeLV  xac 
/i€'yetVj  Jesus  began  to  preach  and  to  say. 

Moods, 
The  following  conjunctions  govern  an 
Indicative  and 

Optative. 
f/,  if. 
cTe,  that. 

.         '  >  when. 


Indicative  and 
Subjunctive. 

r^      I  when. 
ivei^uf,  after. 


Indicative    aad 
Infinitive.* 

(■srei^      }  after. 

ffWf/Jjy,  s  since. 


',       )  aft 
^Vj  i  sir 
rtr«-7f,  that. 


Indicative,.  Optative,  and 
Subjunctive. 

fe^v^     ^       '  tPpoc,   >  that. 

Kuyy     although.  osra>$, 
oTflcy,  when. 


Indicat.  Opt. 
Sub.  and  Infin. 

««,  that. 
iotf,  until. 


♦  Whenever  a  conjanction  or  adverb  goes  before  an  infinitive,  there  is 
an  ellipsis  of  some  verb,  such  as  «-wv«C»,  Sec. 

18 


104  Syntax. 

On  the  Particle  Av^  (Poet,  xs  k  xev.) 

1.  Ay  indefinite.  Av  joined  to  verbs,  adverbs  and  pronoun^, 
makes  them  indefinite  :  connected  with  pronouns,  its  force  is 
that  ofcunque  in  Latin.  The  subjunctive,  and  sometimes  the 
indicative,  follows  it  ;  and  if  a  past  action  is  narrated,  the 
optative  ;  as,  f^slotf^^s^st  av  uv  ev  -srcniTac-t^  they  repent  of  what- 
soever they  have  well  done.  ^Otstco-oi  ctv  f<J<9)c«v  «w7a; — ^tu/itccp' 
Iccvsiv,  whosoever  seemed  to  him  to  sin.  Aac'^e  rov  uv  Muv^ocvn 
slsKe^  take  whatever  Mandane  may  have  produced. 

2.  A*  conditional,  in  the  sense  of  jjv  or  eocv  ;  as,  «y  ©fo5  ^Mj:, 
if  God  will. 

3.  Av  potential.  This  is  commonly  followed  by  the  opta- 
tive ;  more  rarely  by  the  subjunctive,  and  sometimes  by  the 
indicative,  infinitive,  or  a  participle  ;  as,  ei^orcc  ort  hk  uv  ttoIs 
ru  rerjccpx  zrevle  yevoHo^  knowing  that  four  never  can  become 
five.  Lucian?  uu(pol£pii?  uv  ^f^pe^^Tue,  he  can  aid  both.  Isoc. 
ra/o  ^£  oif^utt  a^*  uv  Tov  (puvXojulcy  sruhtv  C"jyypu(pgu,  but  this  I 
tbink  even  the  worst  writer  cannot  suffer. 

When  the  indicative  follows,  it  commonly  denotes  the  sup- 
position of  something  probable  ;  as,  uv  Tirr^ce,  he  asked  it 
perhaps,  eih  ksv  f^a  ^uco^iv — -o  h  y^ev  KiXo^^^'o-elut,  ov  xev  mufjiui, 
and  if  they  will  not  give — he  may  perhaps  be  angry,  to  whom 
1  shall  go. 

4.  Av  willing.  Av  is  used  to  denote  will  or  desire.  In  this 
sense  it  precedes  the  optative  ;  sometimes  the  imperative 
and  the  indicative  ;  as,  u  ksv  ^uvulov  ye  (pvyotf^sv,  if  we  wish  to 
escape  death.  (piX^Tulov  ue — uv,  I  wish  you  would  kiss  me. 
Aristoph.  e^Pv  c  Aojtcfv/05  TroXx^iuv  ralo  7rpiu(r6ut,  the  Armenian 
said  that  he  wished  to  buy  it  even  at  a  great  price.     Xen. 

5.  Av  signifying  ought.  In  this  sense  it  precedes  the  opta- 
tive, and  sometimes  the  infinitive  ;  as,  u$uvulcv  '^vx'*i  ot-v  azf 
the  soul  ought  to  be  immortal.  Plato,  zrptv  uv  uf^oiv  f^vBov 
uKbfTiji,  ii>i'  ctv  hy>u(r:ti ,  you  ought  not  to  judge  before  you  hear 
both  sides.     Aristoph. 

6.  Av  future,  which  is  generally  uncertain,  nnd  dependent 
on  a  condition.  In  this  sense  it  is  followed  by  all  the  moods 
but  the  imperative  ;  as,  ei  Gio^  zrurj^o  Cf^av  y,v,  uyuzrure  uv  /iu, 
if  God  were  your  father,  you  woidd  love  me. 

Sometimes,  though  rarely,  a  definite  future  is  intended  ; 
a$,  el  /K.JJ  ^aofrtff  eya  k;v  IXafJ^cci,  if  they  will  not  give,  I  will  seize 
it.     Horn. 


Syntax, 


19: 


Av  has  sometimes  two  or  more  of  the  senses  above  men- 
tioned at  the  same  time  ;  as,  otf^oti  h,  ^oc^lui  av  ifM^^oyr.c-xi^  i 
think  that  all  ca?i,  ought,  and  will  assent  to  this.     Isoc. 


Corresponding 

E-is-etcuv,  when  ; 
KcA'^asrsp,  as  ; 
Mfv,  indeed  ; 
Mev,  both  ; 
'Of4.oiai,  like  ; 
'035-fly,  where  ; 
'O-sr&v,  where  ; 
OyTftjg,  so  ; 
n;4^5dX5'A>?<r/«y,  SO  ; 
nptv,  before  ; 
n^<y,  before  ; 
T«7e,  then  ; 
To75,  then  j 
To?f,  then  ; 
T«7f  J  then  ; 

12$,  as  ; 
"C9,  as  ; 

'Qo-f/,  as  ; 

'Q.TzTep,  as  ; 
'f2cw£^,  as  ; 

'fltrzrtpi  as  ; 


Particles, 

flf7<jy,  so. 
^f,  but. 
^£,and. 
a)(rss-sp^  as. 
fxeT,  there. 

(vlctZ!^ci,  there. 
ft/5,  as. 
UTTtrep,   as. 
»;,  that. 

srp/v,  that. 

oTf,  when. 

bretv,  when. 

623-fi^fitv,  when. 

irv»)Cfi«,  when. 

ai;?^;,  so. 
ao-xvrui,  thus. 

CVTA',   so. 
ot;T6>,  SO. 
Xfit/,  SO. 
^rccvrcD^,  thus,"^ 


PREPOSITIONS. 

I.  ATtt),  ai^t,  ex  (e^)  and  Ttpo,  govern  the  geni- 
tive only. 

Ev  and  avv^  the  dative. 

Erg  {eg)  the  accusative. 

Ata,  the  genitive  and  accusative. 

A^cpiy  araj  em^  xara,  f^era,  Ttfp^,  Ttapa,  f^fog,  ( Att. 
(og,)  "i/Ttfp,  '"i^Tto,  govern  the  genitive,  dative,  or  ac- 
cusative. 


♦  One  of  the  corresponding  particles  is  frequently  omitted  ; 

Tw  /?/;  T3t;^/!r7:t  yn^x7ii.U  ^g  ';>  X*?'''      SOC fates. 


as  5u/sy  *-; 


196.  Syntax. 

11.  Prepositions  in  composition  often  govern 
the  same  case,  as  when  they  stand  by  them- 
selves ;  as,  e^'i^Xde  ryjg  otxiagj  he  went  out  from 
the  house. 

The  principal  relations  of  things  to  each  other  are  ex- 
pressed in  Greek  by  three  cases  ;  origin  and  possession,  by 
the  genitive  ;  acquisition  and  communication^  by  the  dative  ; 
and  action^  by  the  accusative.  But  these  cases  being  alto- 
gether insufficient  to  express  all  the  varieties  of  these  rela- 
tions, prepositions  are  used  to  denote  many  relations  of  place, 
time,  cause,  and  eff'ect ;  motion  and  rest  ;  connexion  and  oppo^ 
sition.  Every  preposition  has  one  primary  meaning,  to 
which  all  the  other  significations,  arising  from  figurative  or 
analogical  relations,  may  be  referred.  The  meaning  of  the 
preposition  is  generally  adapted  to  the  use  of  the  case.  The 
primary  signification  ofuzs-e,  is  under.  The  genitive,  when 
joined  with  it,  expresses  influence  or  origin ;  as,  uw«  xetvuctroi, 
under  the  influence  of  heat :  the  dative  expresses  the  instru- 
ment  or  manner ;  as,  x^^pTnt  6<p*  ^f^cerepyjO-if  uXHtu^  taken  under, 
hij  our  hands  :  the  accusative,  motion  ;  as,  utto  iXiov  jfA^f,  he 
came  under  the  walls  of  Troy. 

The  primary  sense  of  the  several  prepositions  will  be  first 
given  J  and  under  each,  the  more  distant  and  figurative  sig- 
nifications will  be  ranged  in  perpendicular  columns. 

I.  Four  Prepositions  govern  the  genitive,   efcvri,  catxtq,   cx, 

If  09. 

ANTl 
Denotes  originally, yaaVi^,  fronting,  set  over  against,  an' 
swering  to.     Hence  its  common  signification  is  jugainst,  in' 
stead  of 

For.         (i(p6 oi>.fj(,iit  ecvTH  c^6otXfJiov,  an  eye  for  an  eye. 
Before.     <«vt/  x^vj^wt    tXB(rdct,i   rtjv  i'o^otv  ^019,  we  ought  to 

choose  glory  before  (instead  of)  wealth. 
Against,  avrt  ecvh^q  ijui  go  against  the  man. 

By  a  slight   change  of  signification,  u^n  some- 
times denotes  in  addition  to,  or  upon. 
Upon,     ojv/fifc?  av7<  «cy<a^v,  sorrows  (corresponding  to,  in  addi- 
tion to.)  upon  sorrows. 


Syntax.  19^ 

AUO 

Denotes/rom,  and  expresses  separation  or  distance  from, 
beginnings  cause,  or  motive.     Its  signification  is  often  expres- 
sed by  the  word  ofy  which  is  derived  from  «^'  or  etTs-a. 
From.     upf>tuTo  «2x<»  lldp^eui,  he  marched  from  Sardis. 
About,     azs-o  TpHiji  apcci,  about  (i.  e.  from)  the  third  hour. 
After,      x-aro  ^'etza-you,   from  (the  time  of )    supper,  i.e.   after 

supper. 
Against,  eczr^yvai^i,  aside  from  (i.  e.  against)  his  opinion. 
For.         ctTs-iTlgv9iluM  ecvla>¥  efxo  rm  x<*pi*ii  ^  they  disbelieved 

from  (for)  joy. 
Of.  e&zs-o  Ta>v  o-af  ccXi(nte>f,  I  Spend  from  (of)  thine. 

Of.  ot  ocvro  Tfii  /26t;A«,  persons  of  the  council,   counsel- 

lors. 
Of.  oi  ctzTo  r)>§  (piXta-opioi4 ,  persons  of  (belonging  to)  phi- 

losophy, i.  e.  philosophers. 
With.       4  mif6  r»v  \«poZ^  f^ocx^y  the  battle  (commencing)  from 

swords,  i.  e.  a  battle,  with  sword  in  hand. 
Without.       rj  oLTc'  uv^poq  atrxy  she  without  (separated  from)  a 
husband. 

EK,  or  EE,  « 

Denotes  out  of.     It  is  used  to  express  a  change  from  one 
state,  place^  or  time,  to  another,  and  the  cause  or  m<iteriah  of 
any  thing* 
Out  of.     i%  Aiyv-srrki  iKuXiTct  tov  ui6v  ^^,  out  of  Egypt   I  havc 

called  my  son. 
From.       f|  £tpi)yH  ^oAf^r<v,  out   of  (from)   peace   to  make 

war. 
Of.  7rcr7}pto¥  iic^^Tov,  a  cup  (made  out)  of  gold. 

From .       yvvn  f|  uy^poi,  the  woman  out  of  (from)  the  man . 
By.  V  hfccttei  (K  ^ts-eai  ^ija-troit,  the  just  shall  live  by  faith, 

(as  the  cause  or  source.) 
After.       cJsrvo?  £K  ^f/9rva,  after  (the  time  of)  supper. 
With.       £K^xTi!ie7rif^^jixi^  (out  of)  with  all  care. 

npo 
Denotes  priority  either  in  place,  time,  or  estimation. 
Place,  ^srpo  ^vptin,  before  the  door. 
J.  r        ^  Time,  -zs-pa  rov  TFoXipuv  before  the  war. 

*    I  Preference.   'SfX€f4^y  zrp^  eiptj^u,  war  in  preference 
to  (before)  peace. 

18* 


^f^  Syntax. 

We  generally   defend  what  we  stand  before  ; 

hence, 

^  In  defence  of.      fjtccx^'^^cci  'Z!rpo  rav  Ts-xt^m  Koti  Tsrpo  yv 

^or.  V     1  ^ctiytm  to  fight  (before,  in   defence    of)  for 

i  wives  and  children. 

\  Instead  of     ts-po  zrut^og  Octvstv,  to  die   for  his  child. 

II.  Two  prepositions  govern  the  dative   only,  ev  and    cw, 

EN 
Denotes  in,  contained  within,  either  in  time  or  place. 

In.  ev  Xi!4.evi  Ts-p^ih^  to  sail  in  harbour. 

>Vithin.  ev  Izslee  rji^spccti  cc7xro$vr,<r)i,ii!rtv , they  die  within  seven  days. 

After.      £v  -zsraXXcji  xod^co,  (within)  after  a  long  time. 

Against,  a  ej^oi  epeccvq,  bold  (in  the  case  of)  against  me. 

Among,  ovoi  £v  fA^iXirlotti^  the  ass  among  (within)  the  bees. 

At.  fv  Mfltvr/vf/a  rjr]t}it4.evoi,  conquered  (in)  at  Mantinea. 

Belore.  £v  y^y,prvTi  rav  "EAAJiv^v  ^Afov  3j  rpicf^vpiot^,  before  (in 
the  midst  of)  more  than  three  thousand  witness- 
es of  the  Greeks. 

Sometimes  it  denotes  within  one^s  power,  or 
sphere  of  operation  ;  as,  vjyilo  sf  Trveuf^ocjt,  was  led 
in  the  operation  of  the  Spirit ;  by  the  Spirit. 

By.  ev  raroti  roig  vof^odsroii?  it4jj  0rJT6e  vofMV  ftr.hvu^    make  n6 

law  by  (the  operation  of)  these  lawgivers. 

For.  fv  rats  ^V6  oQo?^i9  e0£6>p:iv  uv,     et    jlu)  ryr'  eypst<ps,    they 

might  have  seen  for  the  price  of  two  oboli,   had 
not  this  been  decreed. 

Into.         iUui  ev  ^EAAscJ";,  to  come  into  (within)  Greece. 

Upon.  xctt  fv  iXioiG-iv  e&r,Ke,  and  he  put  the  roasted  pieces 
(within)  upon  the  tables. 

With.  «v  5rfAro«/f  x«/ «xflw<o/5,  (in  the  way  of )  with  shields 
and  darts. 

2YN 

Denotes  with,  junction  with. 
With*       t^)}7ids  ho-i^g  a-vv  rctgf^x&Tfjatg,  Jesus  Went  out  with  his 

disciples. 
At.  ci/v  TO)  hiTrvm,  at  supper. 

Beside.    G-vv  5r'rt<ri  Tiir«i$,   (together  with)  besides   all   these 

things. 


Syntax. 


m 


IW 


/?> 


With.       o-w  Be»  TrapctG-a,  with  God  (wrfitheaid  of  Gold)   I 

will  attempt  it.  f  ^ 

During,    o-w  rcf)  Tneif,  at  the  same  time  with,  dyring  the  drink- 

To.  TTopeuTo/^oct  <ruv  ccyofvt^  I  will  go    into  junction  with 

(to)  the  contest. 

III.  One  preposition  governs  the  accusative. 

EIS 

Denotes  a^ ;  and  motion,  tendency  ov  direction  at  or  to- 
wards^ and  then  it  is  rendered  by  into. 

At.  £c-7>jxf  ii<i  rn^t  6vpecv^  he  stood  at  the  door. 

Into.  £x  7rvpo5  eis  y»Ayu.^  out  of  the  frying-pan   into    the 

fire. 

About.         e/5  ''^o-zrepotv,  at,  about  evening. 

Against.  m  lepov  9rAe^/t<.£Af7>,  to  offend  against  (the  offence 
being  directed  at)  the  temple. 

Among.  sn  rm  ripcjoc^  KccreMyf;,  he  was  reckoned  (at  the 
place  of)  among  the  heroes. 

Because  )  c^^roiivtircci  et^  TO  Kot^?^cq,  he  is  praised  because  of  his 
of.         y    beauty — the  praise  being  directed  to  his  beauty. 

For.  tti  iXotxf^lov  fo-//y,  it  is  reckoned  (at)  for   a  very 

small  thing. 

In.  f/$  iKKXrjricti  Kud£^o/n.xty  I  sit  (at  the  place  of)  in  the 

assembly. 

Of.  i/$  XptT^ov  Myco^  I  speak  of  Christ. 

To.  05  ^.iiTUf^evi)  £19  x.vX((rfA^  Qso^opn,  the  SOW  that  was 

washed  to  her  wallowing  in  the  mire. 

Toward.       «/$  £/ue  ivvotcc^  good  will  toward  me. 

Until.  f/5  f^e^iov  Kocrcc^vjec  ^xivwloct,  they  feast  (till  they  ar- 

rive at)  until  sun-set. 

IV.  One  preposition  governs  the  genitive  or  accusative. 

AIA,  Through, 

Denotes  the  medium^  instrument,  or  agent  ;  the  materials 
f>£  which  any  thing  is  made  ;  the  distance  measured  by  any 
thing  in  motion,  and  governs  the  genitive. 


200  Syntax, 

/'etrpi'sre  icoti  ha  ts-ccvraff^  he  excelled  (throughout) 

1      among  them  all. 
Among.  <  evr*  ccy  Trparx  (pvytjq  oXoxi  h<t  snTpee^,  as  SOOn  as  thoU 

I      hast  passed  secure  (through  the  place  of)  among 

V     the  tremendous  rocks. 
Into.       hn  ft«%»j$  levcct,  to  go  (through)  into  the  battle. 

Of.  ^pafAMJoc  hec  yeOiUiclci  fcett  ftcA/7a$  y/v9jitfy«,  food  made  of 

milk  and  honey. 
Through,  ^tct  ^vevf^^xks^  through  the  Spirit. 
To.         xuTt^vcrs  ^tec  rpizre^ay,  he  descended  (among)  to  the 

tripods. 
Until,      ^lec  nA4?5«  until  the  end. 

With.        a  ^iXea    ^let  ^A«yo$  kxi    tcuXetpt,^  (rol  ypof*f/cn ,    I  will    not 

write  with  pen  and  ink  unto  thee. 
At.  K4»,tt«/  ^e6  %-oX>^,  (supp,  x^P^i)  villages  at  a  great  dis- 

tance. 
After,      ^ix  ^'Jttv  rftepatv^  after  two  days — two  days  being  the 
distance. 

Atx  has  that,  on  which  it  terminates,  i.  e. 
the  end  ot final  cause ^  in  the  accusative. 
For.         TO  9rx^€xlov  hoL  Tflv  ctidpcjuTov  eyevijo,  the  sabbath  was 
made  for  man. 

Sometimes,  though  rarely,  the  means. 
Through.   tviict}erxv  xvrav  hu  to  ecifJLH,  r^  ufvm,  they  conquered 
him  through  the  blood  of  the  Lamb. 

V.  Ten  prepositions  govern  three  cases. 

AM<I)I 
Denotes  round  about^  in  all  directions^  near  ahout^  or  beside, 
about,  Concerning, 

/  ufA^t  -sroXtoi  6tK€HTi,  they  dwell  about  the  city. 
1  xfjupt  ^'  et^  afMiTtv  ^xXeU  ^i<Poi,  and  he  hung  the  sword 
About.  <       about  his  shoulders. 

/  etyp»f*.ev9t  Un^e^iH  xf^i  pit^pot,    Collected   about   the 
V     streams  of  Jordan. 
After.      (tfjupt  y  x^  ecvjat  tcXMi  ewflv?*,  others    followed  (near 

about)  after  him. 
Among.    «/M.^<  TipiTt  zrevSci  opc^ps,  sorrow  arose  (round  about) 

among  them. 
Beside,    ij^^a-g  ^  ctfJLp'*  «cvl(^,  he  fell  beside  him. 
Near.       u/*^t  JV  x,ocv}i§f  <puo-yxnf  ippxtG-^n,  the  sword  was  broken 
near  the  hilt. 


:Syntax.  201 

Upon.  Ku€€u>^£V  wii'pu  xxjec  x^ovoi,  etju/pt  ^  u^  uvju  f^f?*?  he 
threw  the  man  upon  the  ground,  and  sat  down  up- 
on him. 

Concerning,  fuix^^^*  -a-t^xjui  ttf^jp^  txtytisy  they  fight  about  a 
small  fountain. 

Of.  ttfx/pt  cto-JpMv  ype^ij,  a  description  of  the  stars  ;  liter- 

ally, a  writing  about  the  stars. 

ANA 

Denotes  to  move  up  or  hack,  and  refers  to  the  line  of  direc- 
tion traced  backwards.  Hence  it  denotes  back  along,  against, 
"up,  upon,  up  and  down,  or  among. 

Against,  ccfet  ^oluf^^v  ^utcof^io-cci,  they  bore  them  back  along 

the  river,  i.  e.  against  the  stream. 
About.     «y<»  ^'    'Opv^etoiot  hov,  ttm  Kpolcc^oto  Tvxn^tci,  he  took 

the  noble  Orythaon  about  the  temple. 
.  Cctvx   r6v  uv'Jov  Myov,  according  to  the  same  word, 

ccor-   1      ^   J   tracing  the  same  course   of  speech  back 
^     *  (      again. 
Over.         uvdt  rec  opt^,  up  or  over  the  mountains. 
Through.  tKe^<ico-6i¥  tt^ot  rjpulcv,  were  scattered  up  and  down, 

or  through  the  army. 
Among,  ^m  rtc  opex  n-?^ccvctr0cci,  to  wander  up  and  down   (a*- 

mong)  the  mountain!. 
A-piece.  x^P^^^*    «"«  f^/^pnluq  Iv  tj  rpei^,  containing  two  or 
three  firkins  a-piece,  (i.  e.  up  to  two  or  three  fir- 
kins, no  farther.) 

By  the   Poets. 
Upon.       tvS'e  sTetivp  «<v«  Tafiyxp^  uKp^,  the  father  slept  up  upoa 

the  top  of  mount  Gargarus. 
In.  ctfce,  x'P^iv  'iXovtrot,  taking  it  up  in  her  hands. 

With.        xf^^"^^  <*"*  fncfiTlpcft,  with  a  golden  sceptre. 

Eni 
Signifies  upon,  in  different  modes.     With  the  genitive  it 
denotes  action  or  situation  upon. 

Upon.  ^7  ^(pxipct  %v}^iihlut  ezrt  rr,^  rp^fre^tji,  the  ball  rolls  up- 
on the  table. 

Through.  sTn  Q>pei.x,%  ex^p^t,  he  marched  through  (upon) 
Thrace. 

Of.  esri  TTtcth^  My^y,   speaking  upon  (of)  the  child. 


202 


Syntax, 


At.  sTTt  TaoTTH  Td^evtiv,  to  shoot  at  the  mark. 

Within,     far/  vvG-Ttii  e?-otv  etcx^oi,  they  each  stood  (close  upon) 

within  the  goal. 
Beside,      e^uvspao-ev  eccvlov  izri  r?}$  ^uXeiO-trr,^  rrjs  Ti^eptu^o^^  show- 
ed himself  just  upon  (i.  e.  at,  beside)  the  sea  of 
Tiberias. 
After.         rifg  v'ruo-7r;^(x,g  otec^cctvstv  etcsXivcre^  y.ui  e^n  ralm  ru^  rcc^elg 
TAJv   Ma»£(^flv^y,   he  ordered  the  shield-men  to  de- 
scent!, and  after  (close  upon)  them  the  Macedo- 
nian ranks. 
During.       eTrt  Kpovov,  during  the  life  of  Saturn, 

With  the  dative,  tar/   generally  denotes  junc- 
tion  of  one  thing  upon  another. 
C  izs-i  T0/5  <piXoi<;^  joined  with,  or  among,  his  friends. 
Among.  <  7rpo<pr]ev£ii  tisri  Xctotq  xcct   sdvtscri,  to  prophecy  among 
(      people  and  nations. 

Following  upon,  in  the  way  of  dependence, 
addition  to,  or  in  pursuit  of. 
With.       iTTi  rovloii,  in  addition  to  (with)  these  things. 
From.       ezs-t  Tjj  -srirel,  in  consequence  of  (from)  faith. 
For.  £33-/  r>^  y.sp^et,   in  pursuit  of,  fooc  the  sake  of  gain. 

Above.     nKpot  rptcuKoa-tot  i-srt    ;ti/A/o/$,   three    hundred    upon 
(above)  a  thousand  dead. 

With  the  accusative,  it  denotes  an  action 
directed   upon. 
Upon.      >u&os  mTrlii  s-zs-i  rtiif  ym,  a stone  falls  upon,  or  towards, 

the  ground. 
At.  Kot6i)i^voi  eTFt  TO  riXmiov,  sitting  upon  the  business  of 

(at)  the  receipt  of  custom. 
To.  xv<vy  szs-iTH'^cti  i^i  ro  thov  td^tpufjLoe,,  the  dog  returned 

to  his  vomit. 
Toward,  f^r' «tv7oA?jv,  toward  the  east. 

Against.    ^cca-tXuot  ep^  euvjr^v  hct^JLtpiThura,   a  kingdom  divided 
against  itself.    • 


KATA 


Denotes  along,  against,  according  to,  down,  and  refers  to 
the  line  of  direction  along  which  a  thing  tends,   or  is  situated^ 
Along.        x«*7«  rt;v  o^ov,  or  x/clctr}}^  ohv,  along  the  road. 
Through.  ku$*  oX:,^ri)i  iH^otta^,  through  allJewrv. 
In.  k««t' o»^/>,  in  adream. 


Syntas:.  203 

To.  t}iC6vlc  Kulec  Tpetlof,  they  came  to  the  army. 

Toward,     aujcc  fiopsuv  l^f^Kot^ ,  standing  toward  the  north* 
Against,      kujcc  Xpitrla,  against  Christ. 
Over.         uo-i  KuT^  >ipeo<i,  goes  against  (over)  the  mountain. 
Under.       €^v  koiJcc  yutri,  he  went  against  (under)  the  earth. 
Upon.         Kulec  yrji  TTizrliiv,  to  fall  against  (upon)  the  ground. 
At.  y^sclu  ricosra  rc^eveiv,  to  shoot  against  (or  at)  a  mark. 

About.         icxr'  c(p&oL><u.m  )ce;^t;T'  <e;^^At/5,  a  mist  was  Spread  a- 

bout  his  eyes. 
Of.  oT<   £uccprvpf]f!-ocf/,£v  Kocju  T«  Gen,  because  we    have 

testified  in  regard  (of)  God. 
Down.  Ajp.u.y.cc  Koclet  ra  Kp^uvH  f/$  tjjv  ^uXecTcxv^vwshed  down 

the  precipice  into  the  sea. 
Among.        icxjec  <rv^i6t(riv  stcyw,  she  confined   them  along  the 

line  of  (i.  e.  among)  the  sties. 
From.  Koclot  h    o-^iTi    KsXccivov   cLiuu     u'STiXei^sr'*    (pcc^e,    the 

black  blood  flowed    along  (from)  tViem  to    the 

ground. 
According  to.  kuIu  Mxr^xtov,  according  to  Matthew. 
By.  Kujcc  ^Xac  Kut  Kxjoc  (ppvflpai,  according  to   (i.  e.  by) 

tribes  and  wards. 
So  far  as.     xetra  i^vvxfA.iv,  according  to  his  strength,  so  far  as  he 

could. 
After.  xar'  eiKovoc  m  xliTxylo^ ,  according  to,  or  after,  the 

image  of  him  who  created. 
Before.     x«t'  o<pdx>^uii^  cot  Xtyn,  he  speaks  to  thee  before  thy 

face. 
Kear.        Kopiv$ioi  ycocrx  rag  A&rvxdig  »aw$  ^^;^«v,  the  Corinthians 
had  their  ships  near  the  Athenians. 

META 

Denotes    connexion  or  concomitancy ^  and  is  rendered  by 
inntli^  among ^  between^  after. 
With.        ivpov  TO  TTxi^tov  (jLtrx  Tfji  fufrpoi  xvTev,  they  found  the 

young  child  with  his  mother. 
Among.     M-iJoc  ray  vfxf  dwv,  in  the  same   place  with  (or   among) 

the  dead. 
With.        oBbo<;  e7roii}T£  fAsT^vlofv^God  wrought  with  them. 
By.  ^xi]xtj  eofaovlo  fjuilx  Trvotrs,  their  manes   were  blown 

with  (by  I  the  wind. 
With*        ficslx  rev  ccpvtov  '7ro>is/Ar,(r.iV(riy  they  shall    fight   with    the 

Lamb. 


204 


Syntax. 


On.  0  votfiTa?  TO  eXeai  uer*  uvr^v,  he  that  showed  mercy 

on  him,  i.  e.  with  him  as  the  object  of  it. 

In.  /M,f7«  ;kifc/)o-/v  tx^^i  having  between  (in)  his  bands. 

Among.    fJLi'Ju.  ^pAflci<^i  vntlo<  he  was  busy  among  the  foremost. 

To.  f/^elu,  ^{JLUYtTtv  eetviVt  he  spoke  among  (to)  the  female 

attendants. 

Within.  f4>ela  T^to-i  ^t)uoc  rtSevlf^y  placing  their  destruction 
among  (within)  them. 

After.  .u/ju  riivexf^tv  rm  if^sp^f  rcvltav^  after  the  tribulation 
of  these  days. 

By.  vvx^lcap  re  xui  fcf^'  rjf^epxv,  by  night  and  by  day. 

Into.  /3i^A«y  fierce  x^^P^  «A>»^6?5,  having  taken  the  book  be- 
tween (into)  his  hands. 

Among.  t6i  vvj>  fA.srtt  ^asov,  go  now  among  the  people. 


nAPA 

Signifies  at^  beside,  or  near.  With  the  genitive, /rom  at^  or 
from  beside,  from,* 

From.       TTupuKvpiov^  (io9}6etx  ft«t/,   (from  beside)  from   the 
Lord  is  my  help. 

With.       ijjTovi  Ktti  ol  TTxp'  uvrav,  Jesus,  and  those  who   were 
from  beside  (with)  him. 

Of.  eTrvvOuviTo  Trup^  ecvrav,  he  inquired  from  (of)  them. 

Above,     tx^t  fiv^  oytcov  Apyci  *EaAjjva>v  Wflc^cc,  Argos  has  some- 
thing to  boast  from  among  (above)  the  Grecians. 

After.        5r<e^'  ij<J«v3j5  Aw^jj,  from  (after)  pleasure,  pain. 

Near.        ^ccp<t  Kporajpui  re  TTecpeieti,  the  cheekt  from  beside 
(near)  the  temples. 
With  the  dative  closebeside,   i.  e.  at  or  with. 

With.        i^terSov  ovx  exe^e  ^ecpec  r^  vc$rpt,  ye  have   not   a  re- 
ward (laid  up)  beside,  or  with,  your  father. 

Among.     ^ifAoyi^ovTo  Trup^  euvron,  they  reasoned  (aside)  among 
themselves. 

With.         ^ccpei  ry  Kv/)/^  eMo^  (beside)  with  the  Lord  is  mer- 
cy. 

To.  Uicci  voLpet  rat  TicarcA^epve't,  to  go  to  Tissaphemes. 

With  the  Accusative  beside,  for  the  sake  of  com- 
parison,  or  contrast  or  as  a  reason. 


♦The  Genitive  in  Greek  has  frequently  the  force  of  tendency  from. 


kjuiiiajb  , 


»  C  apctlc^  TTe&peA    rag  vliig  t<wv    ecvSe6)'r6)v^    thou   art    fair. 

In  com-     1       when  set  beside  or  compared  w  itb  the  sons  of 

parison.      ^      ^^^  .  -^  ^^  fcdrer  than  the  sons  of  men. 

Beneath.  i:?^.e6rrfiJTsig  stvrov  (spotx^  '^t  ^oi^'  ccvyeAif^^  thou  hast 
lowered  him  a  little,  when  set  beside  or  com- 
pared with  the  angels  ;  i.  e.  hast  lowered  him 
beneath  the  angels. 

For.  TTxPot  raro  hk  es-iv  ey,  m  c-c^uxroi ,  (for  this  reason)  it 

is  not  out  of  thehody. 

For.  ©5CS  ehxav  Trccpxro  y.^ysBoirm  TreTrpx'yy.cva}^,  1  seemed 

a  god  by  reason  of  (for)  the  greatness  of  my  ac- 
tions. 

From.  rycviLCfici  vfctfiet  ruro  CMTy.piccv  sivxi,  1  think  that  safety 
is  from  this. 

Save.  TiTTxpxKovTec  TTxPx  f^txv^  forty  save  one. 

Beyond.  Trxpx  rov  ttotx^uov  t<pvyof,  they  fled  to  the  farther 
side  of  (i.  e.  over,  beyond)  the  river. 

Against,      -sirxpx  rov  vd.«.ojr,  beyond,  against  the  law. 


About 


For. 


,|i 


Against. 


HEPI 
Signifies  ahoiit^  round  about,  concerning, 

TTept  (i6f,uoi^,  round,  or  about  the  altar. 
(^a)*i)v  zrepi  r>j»  oc-^w,  a  girdle  about  his  loins. 
^ept  jicecTijiu.tptx)',  about  noon 
Concerning,  cyoyyv^ov  oila^xtot  ^rept  uv]ovy  the  Jews  murniui.- 
ed  concerning  him. 
Trept  Trace?!  TvtXu  h^itvxi,  to  be  in  fear  concerning 
(for)  the  whole  city. 
h^<wq  jMj  rt  Kxt  Trept  xvra  vearsptG-ste,    fearing  lest  he 

should  make  a  new  attempt  against  him. 
TTspi  Ti'.(i  ©£ii5  x<ri^YtfA.xlxy  impieties  against  the  gods. 
Towards,  yripi   rm    cc^iKHuevm,  concerning   (towards)   those 
who  are  injured. 
TTepi  rsg    ydve/s    roiaroi  y/vy,    be    SUch  in  respect  fo 
(toward)  thy  parents. 

It  sometimes    denotes   superiority  :    what   is 
round  another   is  of  course  greater. 
tlHTixv  £^£1  TTEpt  Tn  i^tn  $£Xijf4,xTeg^   has  powcT  over 

his  own  will. 
TTipt   TxifTa/v  £i^f^vxt  ccAA&T,  to  be  aboVe  all  others. 
TTept  voov  QpoTm,  above  the  comprehension  of  mor- 
tals. 


In  re 
spect  to 

Over. 

Above. 


1 


19 


206 


Syntax* 


With. 

About. 
Between. 

By. 

Near. 
Of. 

Through. 

For, 
Towards. 


npos 
Signifies  before^  towards  facing  for  the  purpose  of  actings 
0r  being  acted  upon. 

Before.       o  ^e  iJsrpoi  uThKu  Trpo^  rri  Qvpu^  but  Peter  stood  be- 
fore the  door. 
0  Xayoi  >}v  ^rpoi  rov  0f«v,  the  Word  was  with  (before 
the  presence  of  God. 
TTpsqrcf}  nXi'i  Ts  (iiHf  about  the  end  of  life. 
7!rp6g  la-ss-epect  ((r]t,  it  is  about  evening. 
rex.f*.y,ptov  rtj^  -sroGqrjfJLuq^fXiocq,  a  proof  of  the  friend- 
ship that  is  between  us. 
srpoi  m  At.'ii  iKiTtva  uf^cai^,  1  beseech  you  (in  pres- 
ence of)  by  Jupiter. 
Tsrpoq  fisv  «Ai$  K3tflf5,  the  Carians  near  the  sea. 
Xpyi^l^  ^fo$  fltvc^as  iit^J'ev  utfovosi  kcdcov,  suspect  no  evil 

of  a  good  man. 
(puTuv  Tsroaq  piyccg  uifjuty  blowing  out  the  blood  thro' 
the  nostrils. 

It  often  denotes  tendency  towards  or  against. 

rovT6  yx^  zrpo^  ufterepoci;  (rarviptct^  u^ccp^et,  for  this 

is  tending  to  (for)  your  health. 

u73-t)X66v  sTfio^  eoiVjjig,  they  went  away  towards 

their  own  homes. 

wpoi  ctv^po^  iXfpov  s-ss-Kpepav  tov  '^>}<pcv,  giving  his   vote 

against  an  enemy. 
vj?«5  TToog  T-sriXuhc-Tiy  eet^ccv^  dashed  the  ships  against 

the  rocks. 
yrpog  xtvrpu  A«xt/^£/i>,  to  kick  against  the  pricks. 
Txrpog  roti  upfifx^ioiq^  in  addition  to  the   things  that 
have  been  said. 
With  the  Accusative  only,  according  to  ;  i.  e. 
so  fir  in  the  presence,   or  under  the  inspec- 
tion of;  as, 
fjLTjh  'TTOiviO-ccq  -sTPoi  TO  0£^f^u,  ueithcr  did  according  to 
his  will. 
On  account  of,  pointed  towards,  as  a  cause. 
On  ac-  (  7i:po(;  TTjV   a-KP^tjOoKOtp^av   vf^av    typct^ev^    On  account   of  i 
count  of.  (      your  hardness  of  heart,  he  wrote. 

For  the  ^  ^oU  t>;»  eXevf^ocwuv  Koth^tm,  sitting  for  the  sake  of 
sake  of.    (      alms. 

i}znrlt>X7}  efcetyyj,  et    xat  'rrooq  ^Oetv^    iXvsrvifrev    uuoct ,  that? 

epistle  made  you  sad,  though  but  for  a  season. 
etzs-ocr.?)xu(rMei  "srpog  Kutpov  apug,  separated  during  ant 

hour. 


Against. 

In  addi- 
tion. 


During. 


Syntax.  ^0^ 

YHEP 
Siccnifies  over,  in  defence  of.     Over,  in  respect  of  place  or 
position. 

Above.     <r;>  J"  usrs^  K£0cc?i7!q,  he  stood  over  (above)  his  head. 
Over.      ozTf^  ccpyvpCi  d;^^v/«/,   they  make  their  progress  over 

the  silver  ocean. 
Upon.      yepuio-^refi  Ke0otXr,(i.  old  agc  upon  the  head. 

With  the  Genitive,  it  denotes  beyond;  what  is 
over  another,  is  beyond  it. 
Beyond.  f|  Ai6to:sria.q  ry$  vTz-e^  AiyvTflov,  out  of  Ethiopia,  which 
is  beyond  Esiypt. 

In  defence  of ;  what  w^  would  defend,  we  stand 
over  ;  on  the  part,  or  behalf,  or  for  the  sake  of 
ftt    0  0f(9$  vTTe^  rif^aiv^    riq  ku6^  r^u.^,  if  God  be    foF    US, 
p  1      (on  our  part,)  who  cari  be  against  us  ? 

J  f^</flf^£T«6/  a-oi  uzTte  ^itvTH  A£7£/v,  it  is  permitted  to 
\      thee  to  speak  in  defence  of  thyself. 
By.  ^uTc-of^'  uTe^  /M^x«ep<wv,  I  pray  by  (for  the  sake  of)  the 

gods. 

In  the  room  of  ;   as, 
Instead.     Xpta-l^g  Csre^  rif^ecv  tf^i^tt^it^  Christ  died  in  our  stead. 
Of,   or    concerning ,  as  it  were  to  go  over 
in  tliou^ht. 
Concerning.^  tAsr/g  ij^a»v  ^t^xiot  o^e^  v(4,m,  our  hope  is  sted- 
fast  concerning  you. 

With  the  Accusative  only,  above  ,  in  any 
way  ;  as. 
Above.         ret  vsr^o  ^f,^^  ^j^,  ^p^  r/^g,  what  is  above  is  noth- 
ing to  us. 
More  than,    o  (pix^v  Trxnpcc  t^  f^7}repcc  ^zre^  efts,   he  who  loves 
father  or  mother  above  (more  than)  me. 

Tno,  by,  under, 
I.  With  the  Genitive,   Dative,  and  Accusative,  indiscrimi- 
nately. 
bolder  ;  whether  in  place,  time,  power,  or  any  other  mode 
©f  being  under  5  as, 

vsro  x^oveq^  under  the  earth. 
After.       i)ar'  etvToj  z-mm  KccTeK^itvero,  Zeno  sat  under  Rafter) 
him.  ^         ^ 

At.  vTro  vvKTi^  under  (at)  night. 

Aboqt.      uTxr^  revopBpoi^  under  (or  about)  day -break. 


208  Prosody. 

Under,     p^eyof  &f$  Cts-o  Qsoj,  I  speak  as   under  (the  directiou 

of)  God. 
Behind,     y.on  ^;v  xxraKfivsrlei  vsto  rm  ^vpetv,  and  he  conceals 
him  behind  the  door. 
C  yVd  T/jo/*?  ryof^ev,  we  led  (under)  to  Troy. 
To.        <  xicr^iT'oi  dvtj^  OTTO  ixioi  jjA^e,  he   was  the  most  abject 

\      wretch  that  came  to  Troy. 
With.       icuTccQocivavri  v^o  PiUf^-sree^av,  coming  down  (under  the 
guidance  of)  with  torches. 

2.  With  the  genitive,  by,  as  a  cause  or  an  in- 
strument. 
By.  To  pi]$iv  uT^ro  Tcv  Kveiov,  what  was  spoken  by  the  Lord. 

Of.  ivi7rotix6v)  uT^c  t4>v  y.uym^    was  mocked  by  (or  of) 

the  wise  men. 
For.  h(p'  r^cviji  ^oKpvstv,    to  weep  for  joy. 


PROSODY. 

SYLLABLES,  in  respect  to  their  quantitj, 
are  either  long*  or  short. 

A  long  syllable  requires,  in  pronouncing,  dou- 

ble  the  time  of  a  short  one ;   as,   rvnrere. 

Some  syllables  are  common^  i.  e.  long  or  short 
at  the  will  of  the  writer  ;  as,  the  first  syllable  in 
the  word  Apyjg. 

H  and  g)  are  long  vow  els ;  g  and  o,  short ;  a,  i,  Vy 
doubtful. 

LoTiff  Syllables. 

L  All  circumflexed  and  contracted  syllables  ; 
the  letters  >7  and  co,  and  all  diphthongs,  are  long 
bv  nature. 

Exceptmi,     A  long  vowel  or  diphthong,  be- 


Prosody^  209 

fore  another  vowel  or  diphthong,  is  sometimes 
shortened ;  as,  ^  .. 

ZrjvogelTtt  fieyalpoLaiv  o\2.vfi7tni\a6pooi\yj(yav. 

OvSe  yapl^Se  Apvlavrog  'vilog  xpare\pog  Avxolepyog. 

1.  This  happens  most  frequently  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
when  the  next  word  begins  with  a  vowel  ;  in  the  beginning 
of  a  word  rarely  ;  and  still  more  rarely  in  the  middle. 

2.  The  particles  h,  n,  koci,  xf,  are  not  considered  as  sep- 
arating the  long  vowel  from  the  following  vowel  or  diph- 
thongs ;  as, 

Asvrepctj  \  ^'  ecv  /3«y  |  6r])cs  f^s  |  yacv,  x.ott  \  zriact  |  Srf^, 

3.  A  long  vowel  or  diphthong  is  sometimes,  though  rare- 
ly, shortened  before  a  consonant^  especially  a  liquid  ;    as, 

II.  A  short  or  doubtful  vowel  before  two  sin- 
gle consonants,  or  a  double  consonant,  is  general- 
ly long  by  ^ost/ion  ;  as,  p^a^,   larovy  nokTjcL^    xa- 

The  vowel  often  continues  long,  though  one  of  the  conso- 
nants has  been  dropped  3  as,  y^vo^csti  which  is  for  yiyvofcoct  ; 
ylva^TKay  which  is  for  yiyturKoo  \  ru^^cc^,  for  Tv^^y^  •  fjucpru^^  for 
IzetpTvpq  ;   A/«;5,  for  Atccvr^. 

So  where  the  Digamma^  has  been  omitted  ;  as,  f^Xccio?  oivn^ 
for  fA.iXa,to^  Ffl/ja. 

Exception  1.  A  short  vowel  before  a  mute 
and  a  liquid,  or  tit,  xr^  fiVj  is  common ;  as, 

MetpaSelTevxe  Oe\oL<ycy  ro\yap  (i6tpop\6atLV  a\pLarov. 

A  short  vowel  before  a  smooth  or  rough  mute  followed  by 
a  liquid,  and  before  a  middle  mute  followed  by  f ,  is  short  in 
Comedy.  But  a  short  vowel  before  a  middle  mute  followed 
by  A,  ft,  y,  is  long  in  the  Dramatic  writers. 

2.  The  vowel  is  not  always  long  before  a  and 
a  consonant,  or/iJl;  as,^eraXAag, 

w 

np/3|i-(J7tep6||:  xp(j\^H7to'A,v\^vvog  xolporj^* 
^  See  Appendix  No.  I.  19* 


^10  Frosodjj, 

III.  A  short  or  doubtful  vowel  is  sometimes 
made  long  before  a  single  consonant,  particu- 
larly before  a  liquid  ;  as,  rcapa  ^■^/lyiavL. 

87t£ihs.      Ttpiv  eTSeiv.    6  rav6\       ocptv. 
A  vowel  is  sometimes  made  long  before  the  digamma  ;  as, 
^h  'Hg,  for  Fni . 

IV.  When  three  short  vowels  come  together, 
one  must  be  made  long  in  heroic  verse,  for  the 
sake  of  measure  ;  as, 

ddavarog  ;  Hpiaui^y^g  ;    Sia  fisv.    - 

V.  A  short  vowel,  standing  between  two  long 
ones,  is  sometimes  made  long  by  the  Poets ;  as, 
Tto/Qn  ?.iaaou8[iYj9  &c. 

This  most  commonly  happens  in  words  ending  in  im,  m  -, 

c/w;   as,    Af^km,    ^iXriuv^     a^tv)},    i^pvce, 

VL  When  the  article  takes  the  apostrophe,  or 
occasions  it  in  the  bes^inning  of  the  succeeding 
w^ord,  the  remaining  vowel  is  considered  as  hav- 
ing absorbed*  the  other,  and  is  therefore  made 
long;  as, 

uq  re  hia  ^hHqv  r^  ayad^  avdpuTtsg  ex^iv.     Eurip. 

dg  av  ro  7jrn7iov  rd*  \ji!  avaxrop  evasSetv.       Ibid. 

VH.  A  doubtful  vowel,  when  it  supplies  the 
place  of  the  augment,  is  long  ;  as, 

a^;OV  for  yj^ov  ;    ixa^ov  ;    'v^psvov, 
'    VHI.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse  is  com- 
mon. 

Doubtful  Vowels. 
I.    Words  compounded  and  derived  follow  the 

quaatity  of  their  primitives  ;  as,  atuwg   from  n- 


♦  By  some  grammarians  it  is  even  called  a  contraction. 


Prosody.  211 

iiYi :  from  kolvu^  are  formed  expivovy  xpivofxevogj  &c, 

«/  C  Ll 

from  xpivo^  xexptxa^    expcdyiv. 

a  privative  is  short ;  as,  at^ioq. 
apt,  fp6,  /3pt,  hvg^  ^a,  are  short ;    as,  <fafeog. 
II.     A  loubtful  vowel  before  another  vowel, 
or  a  diphthong,  is  usually  short : 

Exceptions, — a  and  6  Long, 
a  Long. 

1.  a  Doric  used  for  >? ;  as,  y.av  for  |[^>7l;  ;  'aSi) 
for  /i^i;. 

2.  a  .Eolic  in  the  genitive  singular  and  plural ; 
as,  Airpt&o  ;  fiaaacdv. 

3.  a  in  the  second  and  third  persons  sins^ular 
present  indicative  of  verbs  in  oio,  and  third  per- 
son plural  Ionic  of  verbs  in  ul  ;  as.  rtfiag^  SiSoaaL. 

4.  In  the  present  and  imperfect  of,  verbs  in  ouo 
whpnthe  Digamma  is  supposed  to  be  inserted. 

5.  Most  nouns  in  ouovy  whether  they  increase 
long  or  short  ;^  as,  onduv. 

6.  Most  feminine  proper  names  in  dig. 

7.  In  dissyllables  inog  pure  ;  as, /laog,  vaog. 

8.  In  verbs  in  ao,  preceded  by  p  or  a  vowel ; 
as,  opdo,  fcto). 

L  Long  in 

1.  udv^  the  termination  of  nouns  increasing 
short ;  as,  (i^y^a^v-ovog, 

2.  udv^  the  termination  of  comparatives,  but 
in  the  Attic  dialect  only  ;  as,  I3e?i/Ti.)v. 

3.  First  future  middle  Attic  of  verbs  in  io)  ;  as, 
xoiuS[xat. 

*  ?ajt>j  >'*Cc«:a>?,  and  a  few  more  fol'ow  the  general  rule. 


2  IS  Prosody. 

a  and  t  Common. 
a  and  i. 
In  the  first  syllable  of  words  exceeding  thre^ 
syllables,  with  the  second  and  third  short ;  ag 

1.  In  nouns  in  ux  and  lyj  ;  as,  ^iTaa. 

2.  In  verbs  in  to  ;  except  eaduj. 

3.  In  the  improper  redupUcation  of  verbs  in  ^t  ; 
as,  ^LyifiL, 

III.  The  doubtful  vowels  before  a  single  con- 
sonant are  short. 

Exceptions, — a,  t,  u,  Long. 
a  in 

1.  a/[ia,  the  termination  of  verbals. 

2.  avog^  amg,  atYjg^  arig^  terminations  of  proper 
names,  gentiles,  and  precious  stones.* 

3.  avyjp  in  its  oblique  cases  and  compounds. t 

4.  Oblique  cases  of  pa^,  Oupa^^  tpa^,  xvQSa^, 
xopSa^^  oia^y  4^ta$,  ^sva^,  Xa^pa^,  xepcug^  '^lap. 

5.  axiov^  the  termination  of  diminutives  whose 
primitives  increase  long. 

6.  axooiog,  the  termination  of  numerals ;  as, 
rpiaxo(yiog  ;  also  avpaKoacog. 

7.  Perfect  middle  of  many  verbs ;  as,  TteTtpdya, 

8.  Subjunctive  active  of  the  first  conjugation 
of  verbs  in  fit  ;  as,  larag,  terra. 

9.  ag,  in  nouns  of  the  first  declension ;  as, 
ragtag,  ^t^tdg  :J  and  in  those  of  the  third,  which 
increase  in  avrog  ;  as,  Atog,  Atavtog, 

♦  AvrtTTctrni.  AatfcTaty/?,  and  a  few  others,  are  short, 
t  In  the  nominative  singular  it  is  common. 

:J:  By  the  Ionic  and  Doric  dialects,  «?  ie  shortened  in  th«  participle*, 
and  in  the  accusative  plural  of  the  first  declension. 


Prosody.  213 

10.  ag,  masculine  of  participles  ;  as,  ru4<^$. 
otcra,  feminine  of  participles. 
aOiy  third  person  plural  of  verbs. 
acTco,  first  future|^f  ^^^^^  j^^  ^^^ 

(Kyuj  first  aorist  V      ,  ^ 

axa,  perfect       )      ^ 
aaig,  derivatives  from  the  same  verb. 

t  Long  in 

1.  Oblique  cases  of  monosyllables  in  tg,*  and 
trisyllables  having  the  two  former  short  ;  and  of 
words  of  double  endings  in  ig  or  iv  ;  also  of  words 
in  in  tg-tdog. 

2.  Oblique  cases  of  nouns  in  t^-tyog,  or  ixog^ 
and  L^'LTtog  ;  also,  a  few  in  t$-tSo$,  viz.  'a\^6$,  /^a^- 
6tg^  xapigj  xrikig^  /l>7t$,  xvyj[iig^  x^nig^  veS^ig,  vyjatgy 
ctppa/ytg. 

3.  Perfect  middle  of  any  verb ;  as,  zexfiya, 
(Sedpidaf 

4    t^a,  termination  of  verbals. 

6.  ivogj  LVOV,  fi'»75  terminations  of  nouns.f 

6.  (Co,  laa,  first  future  and  aorist  of  verbs  in  uo. 

7.  tryjgy  LTLg^X  terminations  of  nouns. 

8.  iScjy  cyu,  idcdj  t^xj,  terminations  of  verbs. 

9.  L^LOVy  termination  of  diminutives  making 
two  iotas  coalesce  :  as,  from  Ifmtt-ov^  limtL-Ldiov, 
lliarlSiov. 

V  Long  in 
1.  i^fza,  vi.iogy  vvog^  vpog,   inrop,  vtog^  i^'^'y^g,   vtcg^ 
terminations  of  nouns.§ 

♦  Tk,  Az?,  f^pt^.frt^^  are  short  in  the  oblique  cases. 

i  Kat/ixlvo?,  xoTi'va?,  ^vpTtvog^  KCKptvog^  and  possessive  adjectives  in  /vc?— 
iv»,  respecting  time,  matter,  &c.  also  uKctTrm^  are  short. 
X  Verbals  in  tn;  are  short. 

*  Verbals  iq  «t3?,  wt«?,  ut/?,  are  short ;  as  is  ^o-t^m^.,  and  some  others 
in  WTJ^'. 


214  Prosody^ 

2.  Oblique  cases  of  nouns  of  double  endings 
in  vg  or  vv  ;  as,  fpopxvg  or  cpopKvv. 

S.  Oblique  cases  of  SouSv^^  Soibv^,  ^yipv^y  ^n- 
v^y  xoxxv^^  Sayvg^  xouvg^  ypv4^,  yv4^. 

4.  VVU9  vpcj^  v^o^  terminations  of  verbs. 

5.  ixtg),  vaa^  future  and  aorist  from  uj. 

6.  Perfect  middle  of  many  verbs  ;  B.s^^fwxa. 

7.  Before  a  in  the  penult  of  nouns  ;  as,  ;^pvTo^, 
^vaog'j  except  those  derived  from  the  second  |)er. 
son  of  the  perfect  passive  :  as,  (pvatg^  Xvatg. 

8.  Before  a  in  the  antepenult ;  as,  ^rcroco. 

It  would  only  embarrass  the  learner,  to  extend  the  rules 
for  the  first  and  middle  syllables  any  farther  Those  which 
do  not  fall  under  any  of  the  foregoing  rules  are  said  to  be 
long  or  short  by  authority  ;  that  is,  we  have  the  authority  of 
the  Poets  (the  best  of  all  evidence)  for  the  quantity  of  the 
word. 

IV.    THE  LAST  SYLLABLES. 

I.  Terminations  in  a,  t,  i^,  are  short. 

Exceptions, 
a  Long. 

1.  Nouns  in  a  pure,*  5a,  0a,  and  also  pa,t  un- 
less a  diphthong  precede  ;f  as,  dsa. 

2.  In  the  vocative  of  nouns  of  the  first  and 
third  declension ;  as,  Acvaia^  from  Aivaiag-a  ; 
UoXvSaua^  from  Uo^vhafio/g-avrog. 

3.  In  the  accusative  singular  of  nouns  in  evg  ; 
as,  UyjXed,  from  Ilyj2£vg. 

4.  Feminines  from  adjectives  in  o$  ;  as,  Sax,  so 
{ltd, 

♦  Dissyllables  in  ettet^  Verbals  in  T/xat,  Feminines  in  s^*  frono  mascu- 
lines in  «y?  and  &>?,  Derivatives  from  adjectives  in  «f,  Cities  named  from 
illustrious  men,  and  xWiiat,  vclttua^  Ksthctvptetf  follow  the  general  rnie. 

t  The  first  aorist  and  perfect  middle  of  verbs  in  pa,  also  etywjfa^  >2<?t/»«, 
cxw^a,  KopKv^aij  (TK'jKoTre^/J'fiA^  ^ruvstypu^  follow  the  general  rule. 

j  hctv^A^  a-Auptt^  ctvfety  are  long;. 


Prosody.  215 

6.  Duals  of  the  first  and  second  declension  ; 
as,  rayTifia. 

6.  The  Doric  a  used  for  >;  or  y  ;  as,  re^^ova  for 
tsTujvs  ;  apfra  for  aperrj. 

I  Long. 

1.  Adverbs  or  pronouns  augmented  by  para- 
goge  ;  as  ovrom  for  ovrog. 

2.  The  Attic  ij  as  in  bevpt,  tautu 

3.  Kfi^  and  the  names  of  letters. 

i;  Long. 

1.  Third  person  singular  imperfect  of  the 
fourth  conjugation  in  ui ;  as,  f^v. 

2.  Certain  adverbs  in  d,  and  the  names  of  let- 
ters. 

11.  Terminations  in  ar,  op,  lv^  t$,  Wy  rg,  are 
short. 

Exceptions  Long. 

L  Nominative  and  vocative  of  masculines  in 
av  ;  as,  Ttrav  ;  and  the  neuter  Txav^  whose  com- 
pounds are  short. 

2.  Accusatives  of  the  first  and  second  declen- 
sion, whose  nominatives  are  long  in  the  ultima  ; 
as,  Aivafav,  ao^iav. 

3.  Adverbs  in  av  ;  except  orav,  which  is  short. 

4.  Monosyllables  in  ap  ;  as,  xap  ;  but  yap  is 
common. 

6.  Nouns  in  LV-tvog. 

6.  Nouns  of  two  endings  in  iv  and  ^,  whick 
make  both  long 

7.  Monosyllables  in  ig  ;  except  rtg,  which  is 
short. 

8.  Dissyllables  in  tg-ihg  and  lOog. 

9.  Trisyllables  in  t$,  having  the  two  former 
short. 


I  UOK/X*tJ» 


10.  Nouns  in  Di'-Pvog. 

11.  Accusatives  in  w,  when  the  nominative  is 
long. 

12.  i>v^  the  first  person  of  verbs  in  ^t,  and  the 
adverb  vvv. 

13.  Words  of  a  double  termination  in  vv  and 
vgy  which  make  both  long. 

14.  Words  declfned  in  vg  pure  ;  as,  tx^i/g. 
16    Monosyllables  in  vg  ;  as,  (ivg. 

16.  Participles  of  the  fourth  conjugation  in  fit ; 
as,  ^tvyvvg. 

HI.  Terminations  in  a$  and  vp  are  long. 

Exceptions  Short. 

1.  Nouns  which  increase  in  the  genitive,  ex- 
cept those  in  avrog. 

2.  Accusatives  plural  of  the  third  declension. 

3.  Adverbs  in  ag, 

4.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  first 
aorist  active,  and  of  the  perfect  active  and  mid- 
dle. 

SCANNING. 
The  feet  and  verse  in  Greek  are  the  same  as 
in  Latin. 

Feet  of  Two  Syllables. 
Spondee  consists  of  two  long  ;  as,  dii^o. 
Pynhic  two  short ;  as,  rote. 

Iambus  a  short  and  a  long  ;  as,  0eXo. 

Trochee  a  long  and  a  short ;  as,  ;teipa. 

Feet  of  Three  Syllables. 
Dactyle,  a  long  and  two  short ;  as,  aoiiarog. 
Anapest,  a  short  and  two  long :  as,  Adyjvau 
Amphimacer,  a  long,  short,  and  a  long  ;  as,  eyx^^- 


Prosody.  217 

Tribrachys,  three  short  ;  as,  aOeog* 

DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  VERSE. 
Hexameter. 

The  hexameter,  or  heroic  verse,  consists  of  six 
feet.     Of  these,  the  fifth   is  a  dactyle,  and  the 
sixth  a  spondee  :  all  the  rest  may  be  either  dac- 
tyies  or  spondees  ;  as, 
A.vao^e\voi;  re  6v\yarpa  ^e^ov   r  a7t£\p8i(ri^  a|7to£ra. 

A  spondee  is  frequently  found  in  the  fifth  place  ; 
whence  the  verse  is  called  spondaic  ;  as, 

The  spondaic  is  used  when  any  thing  grave, 
slow,  large,  or  sad,  is  expressed.  It  has  com- 
monly, though  not  always,  a  dactyle  in  the  fourth 
place,  and  a  word  of  four  syllables  at  the  end. 

What  deserves  particular  attention  in  scanning, 
is  the  Ccesura. 

When,  after  a  foot  is  completed,  there  remains 
a  syllable  in  the  word  to  begin  the  next  foot,  that 
syllable  is  called  the  Ccesura  ;  as, 
Tov  8'  a7ia\(i6t(3oi.i£\vog  npog  e\^  xpetliw  Aya\fi£^vov. 

Here  there  is  a  caesura  in  every  foot. 

When  the  Ca3sura  falls  on  a  syllable  naturally 
short,  it  is  frequently  made  long  ;  as, 

Avrap  elTtetr  avlrotat  (SelTtog  ex^lTtev^eg  sl^mg. 

Here  og,  in  the  word  /3fAog,  is  made  long  by 
ccBsura. 

Pentameter. 
This  verse  consists  of  five  feet  divided  into  two 
halves  ;  the  former  consisting  of  two  feet,  either 
spondees  or  dactyles,  and  a  caesura ;  the  latter, 

I*  The  more  uncommon  feet  are  not  here  enumerated, 
90 


218  Dialects. 

always  of  two  dactjles  and  another  ca-sura  ;  as, 

Anacreont'C. 
,  The  Anacreontic,  or  Iambic  dimeter  with  a 
CBBSura,  consists  of  three  Iambuses  and  a  caesura  ; 
aSj  Qe^j\?^yeiv\Arp8i\^ag. 

The  first  foot  may  be  a  spondee  instead  of  an 
Iambus;  as,     Qcdpy^xloTtoglAxt^y^i^vg. 

Of  this  measure  are  the  1st,  2d,  6th,  7th,  8th, 
lOth,  12th,  15th  odes  of  Anacreon,  in  the  Collec- 
tanea Grseca  Minora. 

There  is  another  measure,  which  is  often  used 
by  Anacreon,  consisting  of  a  pyrrhic,  two  tro- 
chees, and  a  spondee  ;  as, 

M£Go\wxrL\oLg  TtoO^opatg. 
Of  this  measure    are  the  3d,  4th,   9th,   11th, 
13th,  14th  odes  of  Anacreon. 

Two  vowels  are  often  contracted  in  scanning 
into  one  ;*  as, 

MsvLV  aletSs  d8\a  nrjlTiyjialSeid  Axt\h^og.'t 


DIALECTS. 

Ancient  Greece,  with  its  dependencies,  comprehended, 
besides  the  different  districts  in  Europe,  part  of  Asia  and  sev- 
eral islands  in  the  Mediterranean.  In  these  several  coun- 
tries, the  inhabitants,  besides  the  common  language,  had  dif- 
ferent Dialects,  of  which  four  were  principal,  y'iz.  the  Attic, 
Ionic,  Doric,  and  Molic  ;  the  last  comprehending  the  Bcectic. 
The  Poetic  style  admitted  all  the  Dialects,  and  had  certain 
peculiarities  of  its  own. 


*  This  is  called  Synecphontsii, 

1  For  a  fuller  account  of  Metre,  see  Wjlsoo  or  Harmann. 


Dialects,     Attic. 


219 


ATTIC. 
The  Attic  Dialect  was  the  most  refined,   and  peculiar  to 
Athens  and  its  neighborhood.     It  is  admitted  by  the  Poets  and 
writers  in  the  Ionic  and  Doric  Dialects. 


I.  Contraction 


Properties. 


1.  Of  syllables  in  the  same  word  ;  as, 


CM, 

ete 

sut 

ecu 

uo 

a 

£0 


V 


into     «.     See  Obs.  19.   page  224 


a. 
a. 


10. 

9. 
11. 
19. 

4,     6. 

6,  20. 

6,  20. 

11. 


—     5. 


To  this  Dialect  properly  belong  all  contract  nouns  and 
verbs. 

2.  Of  Syllables  in  different  words  by  Synaloepha,  of 
which  there  are  six  species  ;  viz. 


'^Apocope,  as 


>> 

Xi 


Aphaeresis,  as 


To  upyvpoiv 
Ta  rfjLsnpH 
Toe,  Bpycc 

To  If^OtTtoV 
as  Bf^l    C'^O^VVSt 


^Attic<{ 


Synaeresis,  as 
Crasis,  as 
Apocope  k  ) 
Synaeresis,  J 
Apocope  &,  >  i  ct  efJLOt 

^Crasis,        ^        ^th  uxyeos 


T    xpyvpioy. 
t'  ecvi^poq. 

OKfceTepa. 
Bjit^ijpec. 

r'  etpyct. 
*r'  avTpo), 

OVVBKX. 
^Otf^^CCTiOV, 

raXuxi^loy- 
ef^HTro^vvii, 


J: 


ovi^t, 
Tet^iyecg. 


Contractions  of  the  Article,  the  Pronoun  tyu^  the  Conjunc- 
tiouKut,  and  the  Preposition  TFpo. 


u 


^,f»« 


ilr, 


^^ 


apve^, 

OVfJLOl, 

euytorpfip. 


tyu  otf*>xt 


Eyof, 


Attic 


iya}ax . 


Before 


01 


>  into  HOC 


itU 


Keti, 

KCCt  UV 
KOCt  etTU 

KUi  iy<» 
Kctt  ev 
KUt  evov 
xui  oivov 

KOtt  tJf^V 


►  Attic  \ 


KOCV, 


Kcci  ri 

KXt  r  uy^a^ot 


Before  an  aspirate,  leis  chansjcd  into;^^  jj  as, 
xcei  0  )  ^  ;^6>. 

Attic  <  )CV' 

♦  0  before  i  makes  sometimes  ^l']-  ZT^%^21%. 
i  See  Article  in  the  Ionic  Dialect. 
I  See  Rule  111.  page  6. 


Dialects.     Attic, 

c 

UPo, 

Before 

Uy        H,         7rpoa)(Pet?^egy 

'rpii<p£t>iei* 

XV,      cov,       zrpoxv^uVy 

TTpuV^XV, 

II.  Change  of  Letter  or  Syllable  ;  as, 

V 

into 

^. 

as       y^^vX^v, 

^Xnxa))t. 

W, 

—      ftoA'j, 

^yii» 

A  . 

^. 

-—      K^^tQxvog^ 

KptQxvei. 

O" 

—  7re<pxf>t^xi, 

TTveVf^OfV, 

7re(px'rfi^.xi 

^Aft/iM^V. 

V 

^9 

f' 

—      a-Viy 

6vi, 

\^ 

—      <rvv, 

!«». 

«• 

\'' 

—      Gxpa-ilv* 

0xppth, 

/r 

—  i  crtjiiiepovy 

f  TTpXOVMj 

-rnfMpcf. 

K' 

-TFpxrreo, 

C  tXxx 

2  0b8 

CK, 

f) 

2. 

«   ( 

—~  I  Ti*     ppm    Art 

ru.] 

•    \ 

a;, 

2.5. 

£ 

«> 

7!ri'X£f*/pX^ 

TFtZrcfAJ^X. 

15. 

u, 

—      tv^vriy 

tv<pvx. 

4. 

i; 

h'. 

-^        ZS-lfiTOfJUtty 

^StTOfACtl.* 

5 

U 

—     n-eynjBXf 

^izrovS^, 

16. 

1 

' 

•»» 

—     etKXy 

Diphthong. 

tCtJXX, 

17. 

OLi 

««> 

—    l6A«<f/^ 

K}iMHf, 

St 

?>» 

—     itAf^M, 

KXrjS'ui, 

6. 

01 

I 

«^> 

S  xAo'«5, 

^patv*]. 

2. 

an 

\ 

it 

Af, 

—      A«», 

Syllable. 

>^a* 

2. 

,  —      Tv^xra>'rx^y 

TV^J/XVTtDV, 

22 

TC^Tcqv 

24! 
27. 

fiLt 

IjTct 

f  1 

yvot(y» 

III.  Insertion  of, »,  o,  *«,  in  Perfect  Tenses. 

Observation  16, 

IG,  17. 

*  Rijsby,  after  Job.  Gramraaticus,  reverses  this   instance,    making 
9fit/)Tf/v  for  BoLPpuv  i  but  greater  authorities  are  against  them. 


+  See  Article. 

4  In  common  with  the  Boeotic. 


20* 


i^''^'^  IJtatects,     Mtic. 

IV.  Syncope, 

^   c-  in  first  future  active  and  middle.     12  Obs. 

Antepenultima  of  the  Istaorist.  14. 

«  in  the  perfect,  sometimes  with  the  vowel  or  diphthong 

following.  19  Obs. 

I  in  the  third  plural  pluperfect.  20. 

9?  in  the  aorists  optative,  and  verbs  in  i^t,  27. 

Toi  III  (r$a>Txv,  imperative  passive  and  middle.  23. 

V.  Paragoge, 

y£  in  pronouns  primitive  ;  as,  eyaye,  o-vye. 

«y  in  pronouns  and  adverbs  ;  as,  orinv,  hkHv.  yasvyv. 

t  and  vin  pronouns  demonstrative  ;*  as,  'uroTt,  uvTi)t,  nfleiy 
ralm,  Tstvhri^  r8]m,  ralovt,  roivloit,  rotvjov^  for  to  uv]o^  n/Jov  for 
ra^.     There  is  sometimes  an   elision  of  o  and  a  ;    as,  mlt^ 

TXVTt, 

/in  adverbs*  conjunctions,  and  prepositions  j  as,  alajTi, 
vjy/,  ovp^i,  .M»fv/,  evi. 

Bot  in  the  second  person  singular  of  verbs  ;  as,  xpV^^^' 
ii  in  the  conjunction  er/j;. 

VI.  Apocope, 

6t  in  the  imperative  active  of  verbs  in  /it/ ;  as,  ItJcc  and  /V7»?, 
lor  itJu&i,  ij-]))$i. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  It  makes  the  vocative  like  the  nominative  in  all  declen- 
sions. 

Declensions. 

2.  In  the  2d,  the  vowel  or  diphthong  in  every  termination 
is  changed  into  a  ;  and  the  penuUima  of  nouns  in  ««$,  iflongy 
is  changed  into  « ;  as,  Xc&oi ,  AeA>5,  N,  plur,  \\^j,u,,  Me^,  not  other- 
wise  ;  as,  t«<5$,  7ete>f<;,     See  Clarke's  Horn.  ct,.  265. 

3.  Some  words  of  the  3d  in  >j5,  -»;ro5,  it  declines  after  the 
1st ;  and  ^yg,  -oroq ,  m  -0^05,  after  the  2d. 

Contracts. 

4.  In  the  1st  form  of  contracts,  the  accusative  smgular 
of  adjectives  in  3}$  pure  is  contracted  into  ot ;  as,  ahto^iahci. 
Pa<j:e  20. 


*  See  Obervation  2d,  page  47. 


Dialects.     Attic.  223" 

Proper  names  of  this  declension  it  forms  after  the  1st  de- 
clension ;  and  one  appellative  dKi^a^Km,     Pige  20. 

6.  In  the  2d  and  3d,  it  makes  the  genitive  singular  in  a'c, 
contracting  that  from  iv^  pure  ;  as,  ;t»f6^5  p^fl*'?-     P'^^ge  22. 

6.  In  the  3d,  it  contracts  the  accusative  singular  into  jy, 
and  the  N.  A.  V.  plural  into  j;?  ;  but  ei^s  pure  has  both  accu- 
satives in  u,  ;  as,  ;^of(«,  x,^oi  j  x*oso(.(i,  ;^oi««.     rf)o(poi^  also  occurs. 

Adjectives. 

7.  It  forms  comparisons  by  -lo-lepc^^  -lo-'iccloi  ;  -«//e^05,  -^/7«* 
7««  ;  and,  in  common  with  the  Ionic ;  'srjepo^ ,  -srixio^. 

Pronouns. 

8.  See  Rule  V.  preceding  page. 

It  uses  exvlo)  in  the  2d  person,  and  euvtui  for  <«AAeA2^$ . 
Verbs. 

9.  It  contracts  ^««,  S'l'^aay  Trsimcj,  7rept'4^ouif,  and  xP<*o!^^h 
by  »i  after  the  Doric  manner. 

10.  It  contracts  ««!,  foc/, »?««/,  made  by  the  Ionic  syncope, 
into  v\  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indicative 
passive  and  middle  of  verbs  in  f>Lt  ;  as,  tTlus-cct,  Tidto-xt^  x,uh^ot.iy 
io-7>i,  T/^^  Koi^vi,  And  sometimes  in  that  of  the  perfect  passive 
of  Barytons  ;  ^s,  f^einvr.a-xi^  iLC£f4.yy\,     Page  74. 

11.  It  contracts  the  Ionic  xa>  into  a  ;  fo,  jj«,  ©<,,  into  «,  in 
the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperfect  indicative ;  and 
of  the  present  and  second  aorist  imperative  passive  and  mid- 
dle of  verbs  in  ft/  ;  as,  ttrla)^  en&a^iKot&tfi  ehhi, 

12.  In  the  first  future  of  polysyllables  in  t^a,  it  drops  t  ; 
as,  e?^-aria  ;  middle,  iXsn^fJLxi.  It  does  the  same  by  those  in 
cto-uy  giT-o),  e<ra)f  which  are  afterward  contracted  ;  as,  ^i^a.  But 
tK^sof  uncontracted  occurs,  Joel  ii.  28.     Page  69. 

13.  It  affects  the  augment  6  ditlerent  ways.     Page  66-7. 

14.  It  syncopates  the  1st  aorist  ;  as,  eCpxl^  for  evPr^o-xio  ; 
tyccf^x  for  iyuf^r.'Tx.  By  the  Ionic,  it  is  made  syr.fM,  which  is 
most  in  use.     Page  71. 

15.  In  dissyllable  perfects  in  (pa,  x^,  it  changes  e  intoo. 
Page  71. 

16.  It  changes  j?  into  o,  according  to  some  grammarians, 
in  the  perfect  active  of  obsolete  verbs  ;  as,  P^ijza,  ^eXoy^u^ 
5r;j^A>,  7s-e^ov6x,  inserting  v.  But  they  are  better  derived  as 
in  the  table  of  Anomals. 

17.  In  the  perfects  active  and  passive  uvsttcx,  uvetf4,xt  ' 
ci<p£iKx,  cc(peif*^^^  and  the  middle  et^ct,  it  changes  i  into  to  ^  as, 


224  Dialects.     Attie, 

ttOiuYM^  ee^eaf^ott,  eaSsi,  in  which  the  /  is  often  retained  ;  as,  . 
€ta>$x.     According  to  some,  this   is  not  a   change,  hut  an  in- 
sertion ofcf ;  an  opinion  which  ef<i<>6<x,  seems  to  sanction. 

18.  In  the  reduplicated  perfect  ccytix^  ffom  ecya>,  it  inserts 
•  ;  as,  uymfcet. 

19.  It  syncopates  »  in  the  perfect  and  pluperfect  active, 
and  contracts  the  vowels  ;  as,  ea-lctKctfri,  lo-^mKevon,  ea-;ecx,&>i  ; 
iirluTi,  IWav<«<,  eT]coi  ;  and  in  some  persons  the  following 
vowel  is  also  syncopated  ;  as, 

i  li^lcCfcecJoTf,         etrjctxetle,       iTJctjcsiTotv. 
(  'itrlu — /ov,        e(r]ec — 7f,       Ifriu — cruv. 

20.  The  Ionic  iu,  «$,*  «  for  e/v,  g/?,  t/,  1st,  2d,  and  3d  Sing, 
of  the  pluperfect  active  and  middle,  it  contracts  into  a?,  «;$,??  ; 

as,  tf/Ajj^-;?,  -rfi.  -fj. 

It  syncopates  t  in  the  3d  plural  of  the  same  tense  ;  as, 
ijo'etroty  for  vhiJ-xv. 

21.  From  the  2d  person  imperative  active  of  verbs  in  |tt/, 
it   rejects  the  last  syllable,  i<r/<»^/,  icr7«,  iW*?  ;t  rtSslijl    net}; 

22.  It  changes  tutccv  into  v7«v  in  the  3d  person  plural  of 
the  imperative  active,  retaining  the  preceding  vowel  in  the 
1st  aorist  only  of  Barytons,  and  in  both  the  tenses  peculiar 
to  verbs  in  ft*  :  in  the  rest,  e  is  changed  into  o,  except  in  the 
contracts,  where  a  is  changed  into  cj,  ei  into  a,  and  a  of  the 
third  remains  ;ias,  ^ 

Barytons. 
IstAor.   rv^J/  'otjaTuVy — ccvlav. 

Pres.       rv-zsr]  \ 

Perf.        r£%(p  \  -elMtrotv,  — ovjav, 
2d  Aor.  rvsr    J 

Contracts. 
1st  Conj.  |3«       J  -ely  -uilm. 

Xpv?      )  -«,  -»y/<yv. 


♦  The  contraction  is  used  in  the  2d  person,  though  usually  limited  bj 
grammarians  to  the  1st  and  3d  only. 

t  In  this  case  the  long  vowel  is  restored,  but  it  is  not  always  in  verbs 
from  ««. 

if  Q  m  this  place  becomes  t  by  reason  of  the  preceding  9,  Rule  11, 
page  5. 


C  Wloc  ' 

Pres.    Iri6ii 
{Mo 

U  A.     <  6s 


Dialects.     Attic.  225 

Verbs  in  f^i. 


>'TUfrxVy  v7<vv. 


! 


23.  In  the  3d  plural  of  the  imperative  passive  and  middle, 
it  syncopates  «r«e  ;  as, 

PASSIVE. 
Pres.  rv-srlto-Qco 
Perf.  ri1v(p6a        ^-o-^v, 

MIDDLE. 

1st  A.   rt^ccT^if 

24.  In  the  optative  active  of  Barytons  and  Contracts,  fit 
is  changed  into  jjv  ;  as, 

rvzrjoi 

/3oa»  )  'f4.t,  jjf. 

•    The  persons  are  varied  in  all  the  tenses,  as  in  the   aorists 
passive  of  this  mood  : 

rvTurJot^  -9jy,      •  ?j$,      V. 

j3«ft'        \  •       Zlcv,  ljl73V. 

^oio7*  J  -»;i6fv, tile,    jj^atv 

25  It  uses  the  2d  and  3d  singular,  and  the  3d  plural  of  the 
iEolic  aorists.     Page  60. 

26.  It  changes  oi,  the  penultima  of  the  optative  active  of 
verbs  in  ft/,  from  etv  into  v  >  ^s,  h^otTjv,  h^<u9]v, 

27.  It  syncopates  tj  in  eiJjjttfv,  sivlci  of  the  aorists  passive 
optative  of  Barytons,  and  peculiar  tenses  of  verbs  in  ftt  of 
the  same  mood  ;  also  in  onj^uev,  otn/^ev^  of  the  latter  ;  and,  in 
both,  changes  j?<r*  in  the  3d  plural  into  s  ;  as, 

1st  Aor.  Tu(pht  "] 
2d  Aor.   rv-zs-ei 


Pres.       ri6ei 
2d  Aor.    6ei 

Pres.         Irjett 
2d  Aor.    (rjeil 

Pres.       Mot 
2d  Aor.  Jo< 


-VM^Vj   -Tjle,  'tio-uv,   AttiCj  'usv,  -Tf,  -fj 


♦  The  Doric  moreover  changes  oi  of  the  penultima  into  «  i  as,  <?>/>.• 


^  CVHIi\y%^bift 


Writers. 
Thucydides,  Lysias,  Plato,  Xenophon,  Isceus,  Jsocrates,  De- 
mosthenes^ JEschmes^  Lucian. — JEschylus,  Sophocles,  Euripi- 
des, Aristophanes,  This  Dialect  was  divided  into  ancient 
and  more  recent.  Thucydides,  Plato,  and  Aristophanes \x%e^i 
the  former. 

IONIC. 

The  Ionic  Dialect  was  peculiar  to  the  colonies  of  the 
Athenians  and  Achaians  in  Asia  Minor,  and  the  adjacent 
islands,  the  principal  of  which  were  Smyrna,  Ephesus  Mile- 
tus, Teos,  nndSamos .  It  is  admitted  hy  writers  of  the  Attic 
Dialect,  often  by  those  of  the  Doric,  but  most  frequently  by 
the  Poets. 


Pivperties. 

It  delights  in  a  confluence  of  vowels  ;  hence  it  is  distin- 
guished from  the  common  Dialect  by 

I.  The  i?c5oZwtton  of  Diphthongs  and  Contractions. 

srervipee 

Xpfil^^,63. 

rvzrjfjott, 

rob.  Matt.  P.  103.  B. 

uyecCospytct. 

Xoyoio,  Toio*  o. 

Ai^eeo-i  Tea,  4,  5> 

TTulpaiog. 

II.  Syncope  of 
^  and  T  in  oblique   cases. 


Dialects,     Ionic, 


227 


5  in  many  words  ;  particularly  those  in  nu  ;  as,  <9«f ,  upxt- 
I  in  many  words  ;  as,  nAfay,  zs-Xem,  jus^av,  tm  for  f/<i;v,  imperf. 

of  feeo;. 

ff-  in  second  persons  of  verbs. 
X  in  the  perfect  active. 

III.  Ejpenthesis  of 

u  before  terminations  of  verbs. 
e  before  terminations   of  nouns  and  verbs,    of  some  in  all 
cases  ;   as,  ot^tXpeoi,  xevsoq,  Kcttvioq.  1.   4. 

I  in  dual  case*  and  many  nouns  ;  as,  cleivoi,  ttoiij  for  ^o«,  5, 

i;  ;  as,  7rov>iVi. 

ai  before  a.  and  ??  ;  as,  e-eMvutu,  A^j^vjc/^,  xvotyxMtt}. 

IV.  Prosthesis  of 

e  before  many  words  ;  as,  «£/$,  £<yy. 

Reduplication  in  many  tenses.       »  12. 

V.  Aphceresis  of 
f  ;  as,  o^?»j,  xf/vo5. 

r  ;  as,  Ke^x^ofy  f^Xct^. 

r  ;  as,  ryetyoy. 

Augment.  12. 

VI.  Parago^e  of 

£6  in  the  perfect  middle  ;  as,  y<»<v,  yr/;?**,  P.  M.  ytycc,     I. 
yeyctcc, 

ert  in  the  third  persons  of  verbs. 

VII.  Change  of  Letter  or  Syllable  : 


y 


into 


C  ^C6ptt$pOV 

i  vof^y 


r     e'  are  so  g 
TT     ettpiKouev 


*  Change  of  vowel  and  consonant. 
j  Tlie  rough  into  the  smooth. 


'  ^epe^pov,"^ 
7re(pv^cti, 
^opKCchi. 
l2v<r(roi . 
>coeiv» 

^  Ionic  {  H^Kolt, 

r*  arepoq. 

See  onward. 


228 


Dialects,     Ionic. 


The  smooth  and  aspirate  mute  reciprocally  ;  as, 


t 


CCKCCv6tOV 

e 
toe. 


Ionic 


1 


'  uxotvhov, 

i^CC$pCtX.O^m 

xvfipij. 


0 

u 
tcv 

St 

tcv 

€19 


>    Ionic 


VIII. 

Oil 


(ioepx&pey 
tulpoi 

e'srepo]eoy]o5 

Oivpo 

rpotvfJLU 
itp'vsoi 

L  Apta-Jecyopuv 

(  £lilv(Pity 

Contraction  in  a  few  instances 

into  S      .  0   'iltpoq  'ovlspo^,'^ 

uvoyjCricc  ctvcjTtx, 

oy^uxov]x. 


V 
u 

n 


'  ^ipe&fiov, 

lijipoi. 

XPsia. 
e'^TlpoJioyjoq, 

oivpu, 

^09). 

rpain^ot, 
ijptveo^, 

ApiTJctyoptec. 


mio  s     .  0    elepog 
>      — —   a     /  uvoy,<rict 


8. 

4. 

4. 

16. 

3. 


OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  It  inserts  e  in  all  genitives  plural. 

2.  It  annexes  i   to  the    dative  plural  of  all   parisyllabic 
aouns. 

3.  In  the  article,  o  or  to  before  e  is  contracted  into  «  ;  as, 
0  erepog,  ovripo?. 

Declensions. 

4.  In  the  1st  it  changes  the  ct  of  all  terminations  (the  Du- 
al and  N.   A.  V,  plural  excepted)  into  Vy   subscribing  the 


♦  See  Article  in  the  ^  Itic  Dialect. 


Dialecis.     Ionic.  i'29 

subjimctive  vowel ;  «  of  the  genitive  into  eu,  uv  and  ?;v  of  the 
accusative  sing,  into  ea,  and  os.$  of  the  phiral  into  £«§ — 
N.  G.  D.  A.  G.    D. 

1 .  Sing,  ^ops  J)$,  -f«;,*  -Jj.  -jjv  or  -e«.  PI.  -f a'v,  -jj$  or  ->^c-<  or  -tft<~/. 
A.  N.      G.  D.  A.  G.   D; 

sx^.     2.  Sing.    /3/  ?;,   ->j5»  -Ji,  iiv.     PI-  -f*'s   -?J«  oi*  ■?i'^'  or  ■«^^^- 

5.  In  the  2d,  it  changes  s  of  the  genitive  sing,  into  do, 
(and  in  the  article,  which  is  of  this  declension,  into  sa,  whose 
dative  also  is  in  eco,)  and  ot  of  the  dual  into  oi'i ; 

G.  G.  D.  G.     D.  G.  D. 

Sing,  ^^ay-oio.     Du.  -o/iv.    PI.  -iov,  -oiTi.  Sing.  roii(i  and  reM^reeo. 

6.  In  the  3d,  by  syncopating  ^  and  r  it  makes  -<$,  -<Jo5,  -ct5, 
-^7«$j  of  the  2d  and  5th  of  the  contracts.     Gsr-t^og,  -;»5. 

Contracts. 
7-  In  the   1st    and  2d  form  of  contracts,  the  genitive  and 
dative  sing,  in  the  3d,  all  cases  have  t  of  the  penultima  chau- 

G.       D.  G.     D. 

ged   into    ??.        1.     Sing.   Ap-Kog,    -th,    2.  ^aA-y^^, -j}<.     In  the 

G.     D.     A.  N.A. 

3d  form  of  contracts  :  Sing.    /S^^c/A-jjo?,    -jj/,     -jj;*.    Dual,    -rr, 
G.  D.  N.  V.G.  D.     A. 

-r.oiv,       Plur.  -Tii   -TjOfv,  -art,  -^•»$. 

8.  In  the  4th,  it  makes  the  accusative  in  «v  ;  as,  Aiirav. 

G. 

9.  In  the  5th,  it  changes  tc  of  the  penultima  into  r.  xsp-sog. 
D. 

-f/,   &c. 

Adjectives. 

10.  In  the  feminine  etx  from   fj,  i  is  syncopated  in  every 

N.  G. 

case  ;  as,  o|-e*  or  -fij,  -sus  or  -f3j$. 

Pronouns. 

11.  It  inserts  e  before  every  termination  of  horeg  and  ecvre^ 
with  its  compounds  ;  G.  raTea^  D.  c^vnaf,  Seldomer  when 
uv  is  changed  into  au  ;t  N.  aurc^,  A.  ajwVov,  particularly  in  the 
compounds  ;  D.  (rsaOraj,  eauroj  ;  but  eaiursn,  and  its  contracted 
form  Aiureki  for  avm^  also  occur. 

12.  It  removes    the    augment  syllabic    and   temporal. — 

*  /iof'SO)  in  Hesiod,  by  Syncope,  for  l^ocneoo. 
+  See  Rule  I,  Example  1st. 

21 


>  -xdv,!  'Hei,  'Ke. xdv. 


530  Dialects,     Ionic, 

€e^P6fKst,  ukuo-s,  iAf^cc*  Herodot,  Sometimes  the  reduplica- 
tion only  ;  as,  acrr.fjictt ;  sometimes  both  ;  as,  Tsxvearut  for 
rerexmrut,  and  from  the  pluperf.  both  augments  ;  as,  >,vra 
for  eXeXvTo.  On  the  contrary,  it  reduplicates  the  pres.  imperf. 
and  both  the  futures  and  aorists  -,  >ctK^<ry.6>,  enviTrs,  TrsTner.a-a, 
xey^uiAa,,  KeKpocr^picrcCju^)).,  fjLSfJiu.pzso^.']      Page  67. 

13.  It  forms  the  1st,  2d,  and  3d  Sing,  and  the  3d  Plur.  of 
the  imperfect,  and  both  aorists  active,  by  annexing %«v,  xe$,  xr, 
to  their  2d  persons  singular  respectively,  dropping  the  sub- 
junctive vowel  in  contracts,  and  shortening  the  long  vowel  in 
Terbs  in  fja. 

Common.  Ionic. 

Imperf.     ervirre^,  srvTirr-str']^ 

eXPvTsiy  exp^i'O^ 

1st.  Aor.  srvyf/ui,  ew^'CCT 

2d.    Aor.  ervTTSiy  erv-^r-ec 

s(rjt)i,  eo-1'Ctcr 

Hence   in  the  passive  and  middle  ro-srrgTMfjmv,   -so,  -ero, 

'OVTo, 

14.  In  the  first  future  indicative  active  of  liquid  verbs,  and 
the  2d  future  of  all  verbs,  it  inserts  e  before  the  three 
terminations  Sing,  and  3d  Plur  ;  also  in  the  infinitive  and 
participle,  resolving  et  into  ee  and  a  into  eo  in  the  dual  and 
Plur.  except  in  the  3d  Plur.  and  the  participle  feminine  ; 
'^uX'ta,  -ff/5,  -££/  ;  -f£7dV,  -eilcv  ;  -fojttfv,  -eele,  -e^o-i.  Inf.  -^ctXtfiv, 
Part.  -(^^A-fffl^y,  -faraft,  -fov.  In  the  middle  voice,  it  onhj  re- 
solves a  and  u  ;  the  latter  in  the  2d  Sing  indicative  into  eAty 
subjunctive  into  v^on  ;*as,  rvTr-eof^^t,  -son,  -eerott  ;  -eof^edov,  -eso-^ov, 
-££0-6ov  ;  -feftf^*,  '£eO'h,  -eovrui  ;  rvTr-ay^^'^  -»j«e<,  -Tjrect, 

15.  In  the  perfect  active,  it  syncopates  x,  and  shortens  the 
penultima  ;  la-lrjKCCre,  etrjeoiTe  ;  Te&v»y.ag,  re^yra>i  , 

16.  In  the  pluperfect  active  and  middle,  it  changes,  e»,  g/5, 
fi,  into  f«,  £f$,  §  ££, 


*  On  the  supposition  that « is  an  insertion,  and  not  a  change  of/.  The 
aua:ment()f  this  verb  is  /. 

t  a.vc^<rcti  retains  the  augment  in  the  infinitive.     Herodot. 

^  This  form  is  more  frequent))?  found  without  the  augment ;   as,  tvtt- 

fi  See  .^ftic  Dialect,  p.  254,  Note  to  Obf:ervation  -^O. 


Dialects,     Ionic, 


^31 


17.  It  resolves  >?  and  a  in  the  2d  persons  of  passive  and 
middle  tenses  into  e«e/,  eo  ;  in  the  subjunctive,  r,cci.     Page  74. 

18.  To  the  3d  Sing,  of  all  tenses  active,  of  the  perfect 
middle,  and  the  aorists  passive,  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  it 
annexes  c,  ;  as, 


Active. 
Pres.  rvsrrviTt. 

Perf.  TeTvc>7i't. 

1st  A  or.         TV^r^ari, 
2d    Aor.         rvTrnrjci, 


Passive. 
1st  Aor.  7v<p9viTt. 

2d  Aor.    rvTTrjS't,'^ 

Middle.  ' 

Perf.      TiTVTTVjTt, 


19.1n  the  2d  Sing,  of  the  1st  aorist  middle,  it   resolves  a» 
into  xo  ;  as,  erv4"^,  -«««• 

20.  In  all  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  optative,  whose  3d 
Sing,  ends  in  rcti  or  to,  it  forms  the  3d  Plur.  by  inserting  ct 
before  those  terminations  respectively,  and,  of  the  next 
preceding  letters,  shortening  the  long  vowel,  dropping  the 
subjunctive  of  the  diphthong,  (except  in  the  optative,)  chang- 
ing the  smooth  mute  into  the  rough,  and  c-  into  the  charac- 
teristic of  the  2d  aorists  J^  or  ^  ;  as, 
Pres.  &  Perf.  Sing.  Plur. 


Kit 

KeycoXH 

TtrVTF 

'XgTrXviO' 


K£ 
K£KOXo 

T£Tv<P 

tfsttXxQ 


Imp.  & 

STVTrre 
£7r£<piX£ 

£K£XP^^O 

£K£ 

€iC£'sCoXo 

£-^ce.?\, 
tTgrv(p 

s7re<ppx$' 
e^e7rXcc6 


Plup.  Pluf. 


C  'CCTO . 


When  cc  precedes  those  terminations,  instead   of  inserting 
another  ct  after  it,  this  dialect  inserts  an  g  before  it ;  as, 

3  Sing.     3    Plur.  3  Sing.     3  Plur. 

u,t}X<*^        >  -«r«/,     £xrxt       Sf^vX'^^  /  -»re,     -exro, 

uvxTTevl  J  xv£7r£7rr  ) 

21.   In  common  with  the    Doric,  it  contracts  verbs  in  <«« 
into  -»;  ;  as,  o/s'^?,  o/jJ,  etfjv. 


♦  Also  Ty?9j«(7-/,  ^vTrnJo-i,     See  Observation  21. 


232  Dialects.     Doric. 

22.  In  the  contract  tenses  of  verbs  in  «<y,  it  inserts  e  after 
contraction  ;  as  xP^^f^'*^^  ef^tjxavsAJ/^yjV  ;  Imperat.  xp^'^  ;  * 
but  oftener  changes  a  into  e  ;  as,  ;^/jfOft«*/,  opeof^uti.  Some- 
times in  the  present  subjunctive  passive  of  Barjtons  ;  as, 
KTetyimlcct  :  always  in  the  aorists  ;  as,  rvi^dsu/,  rvTriot.  Al- 
so in  the  3d  plural  of  the  present  indicative  of  verbs  in  fju 
from  oc<»,  and  the  present  and  2d  aorists  subjunctive  of  those 
from  oca  and  bu  in  the  active  voice  ;  as,  It'isu'ti^  L-iiv^i^  neeS- 
*-/,    crjeao-t^  6eco(rt.     Sometimes  in  the  2d  person  middlevoice  \ 

as,  hrjTxi . 

23.  It  syncopates  a-  in  the  2d  persons  passive  and  middle 
of  verbs  in  jtc/.     Page  106. 

24.  In  the  3d  plural  of  the  present  active  of  verbs  in  /tt/ 
from  €6)^  oa>^  vuf,  it  inserts  «,  syncopating  the  subjunctive  vow- 
el of  diphthongs  ;  as,  Tt^etci^  riSeuTi  ;  J<<hi^/,  h^cocTi  ;  ^evyvt^c-/, 

25.  It  contracts  ty.  from  ©<«*>,  oeu.  into  a  \  as,   ^ovio-a,  ^atroo  j 

Instead  of  the  regular  tenses  o{  xstf^^cn  and  uvsif^xi,  it  uses 
those  of  their   primitives  xia,  and  avf^;  3  as,  xeovjeti,  uvecvlui, 

'ri'Savlcct,   &C. 

It  makes  A^/ito^vfi;  borrow  its  tenses  as  if  from  Ace^g<y  and 
?\xfJLQa,  Kccrcc>ie?i6C9eKe,  Xctf^-^^f^ai,  >^»f^<p^£iv,  &c.  occur  in  Hero- 
dotus. 

Writers. 
Herodotus,  Hippocrates,   Arrian^  Lncian,  Aretwus,  Homei\ 
Hesiod,  Theognis,  Jlnacreon. 

DORIC. 

This  Dialect  was  first  used  in  Lacedemon  and  Argos ;  af- 
terwards in  Epirus,  Magna  Gra^cia,  Sicily,  Crete,  Rhodes,  and 
Lyhia.  It  was  seldom  used  by  Attic,  but  often  by  Ionic 
writers  and  the  Poets. 

Properties* 

1.  Contraction  ofo  and  xcn,  when  prefixed  to  vowels  and 
diphthongs. 

*  x^-^  occurs  in  Hippocrates,  ih^  Ionic  of  pcf^,  imperative  of  XS^-^y-^* 
for  ;tf«*^A**'' 


\ 


Dialects,     Doric, 


TSZ 


CoQimon. 

ret  ocyKicrJec, 
Toe  oo-lett, 

y.cx.1  stTTe, 

y-cct  a  BK, 

Other  Contractions  ; 

CCS     into    7}         6l/f4.i}<;. 

^        Kpf}<;^  <Pp7Ui, 

tv       hvq^  Apsvi, 

— —   ^        (ioffcec^. 


sot 
so 
cog. 


Doric. 

rotf^otjcc, 
c^hoc<poq, 

raXysci, 

rav^^},oto, 

f^yxttrlu, 

y.  'y]^ac'rtvr,g. 


^etTiXiviy  Gen, 


C 


II.     C^aJio^e  of  Letter  or  Syllable  ;  as, 
into       J^      «J^,  ^^y.* 

•^vh(i^^  S7n,ui]$y>g,  6<icro^ , 

6s^lcg,  Aplsf^ffci, 

yvfMct^o^  psi&f,  by  Metathesis,  soS'a'. 

f^x^^Xy  zf^^^^y  al^o  JEolic. 

opilav, 

trvptrja,  (ppccrjof,  ^pif^arldj. 
/"^         etv^tjpX,  Avf^piq, 
\  ?        ^Vf^^pcctog, 

i  r        et'JtiJov,  xXocicrlpov.'^ 

^ySVog^   S0iyf4.iV  for   SOlXUf^£¥. 

<Ptvlii,  7}vdovj  Ksvlo  for  y,s^;lo.'i 

<PuVpoq, 


4. 


V     9. 


=1. 


♦  Words  to  which  the  asterism  is  affixed,  undergo  some  chan 
other  letter. 


i^e  oi  ail- 


t  When  T  or  6  follows, 
t  See  yiV'To  in  the  JEolic, 


21* 


234  Dialects,     Doric, 


V 

into     j3 

rvzs-'jou.si,  Kec>,eigy^  ^et^y  also  JEolii\ 

TC 

—  ^ 

e/tcoo^V,  ccin.^^etKtx, 

9 

rl 

ftiKKoi  for  f^txpog. 

TTB^pOt^f^CCt. 

c- 

It 

23. 
17. 

(i 

cnt^i^ay  "TrXet^u^  tpn%. 

11. 

—  5  '^ 

TToKUy  TCKCC,^ 

r 

^oppfg. 

ie 

Kpsjcg,  also  Io7nc^ 

u 

i^ 

'Tirop^oLXii, 

uysL^t^^  cDpKrJeg,  eap^opitn. 

rpsc^Afi  rpatxco. 

£ 

i: 

16. 

V) 

1  £ 

2,  13, 

19. 

0 

1  CO 
\  Cll 

' 

1  ^^ 

rv-^evfjug**  ) 

TV^iif4.£g  *  ^ 

16, 

17. 

Trpoirog,  0vpZi^  eTva^a,  Vf  A^v. 

o 

22, 

ft> 

!  viyec^evvy  yeXsvfrx, 

alt 

ysct,  netv» 

/-« 

K?^oc^otgj  >tA<«|aj,*"  yetf4.uv. 

24. 

U' 

KXti^et^  9CXUt0']p0Vy  i]6cClOV. 

it 

"1- 

xPo^f^cc,     Gen. 

14. 

Aoye^'      ACCUS. 

Aoy&>5.      Acc.     upoMog,  piyav.  3,  24. 

TVis-loitri^rvzs-lotTci^  u-<i/oig'^     }  12     18 


*  See  first  Note,  preceding  page. 

f  Plato  says  .that  i^ai  was  used  for  the  ancient  and  Ailic  opsu^Jix  tc 

J  This  seems  to  come  from  verbs  in  ct«e>  made  toe  by  the  ^'J/Zte  and 
/<?»«;  Dialect, 


Dialects,     Doric,  ^35 

,'j         into      £{         tXstGvtet. 
U)  ot  T^pOlVi, 

III.     Syncope  of 

0  eT>iog^  fjLaet^  Tract, 

1  TV7rIe<s,  TVTrJeVi  rihvlt,'^  15,  17. 
V  hMi.""  17. 
a         TTpuv  for  7rpa>r,v,'^ 

\y ,     Epenthesis  of 

^  yocvulett, 

t  Tv'^e'i'Tov,  -Tf  ;  rv^et-rect  ;J  rv^otii.  IG. 

T         rvz/jofcea-ex,  20. 

V.     Aphceresis  of 

tff  in  A»,  A%,  A^. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

M.  F. 

1.  It  makes  the  nominative  plural  of  the  article     t«/,  mt. 

Declensions. 

2.  In  the  Ist,  it  changes  a  of  the  Gen.  singular  a  of  the 
Gen.  plural,  and  j?  of  every  termination,  into  ec.  Sometimes 
also  the  Gen.  plural  of  the  2d  and  3d  ;  as, 

N.    G.    D.    A.    V.  G. 


AftW-flc$   -ec,  } 

>    -^,  -ctv,    u,- 


-Plur. 

tcper 


3.  Proper  names  in    ccog  have  o  syncopated,  and  are  de- 

N. 
clined  after  the    1st  j    as,  fjr   M««A-flCfl5,  -a,  &c.     MfV5A-<e$, 
G.      D.      A.      V. 
-jc,       -«c,    •«{»,     -ec- 

In  this  declension,  it  changes  a  into  a;  ;  that  of  the  accusa- 
tive plural  sometimes  into  o,  and  rejects  the  t  subscript  of 
the  dative  ;  as, 

C.  D.  G.       A. 

Sing.  Aay-ft',  -6/ Plur.  -«y,]|  -*;$  or  -c$. 


+  By  another  Syncope  for  Biu,a-As-S6. 
*  See   first  Note,  page  233 
I  Third  singalar,  1st  future  middle. 
U  This  iiilretiuent. 


236  Dialects,     Doric, 

It  also  changes  a  into  a  in  the  Norn,  and  Ace.  Sing,  and 
Nom.  Ace.  Voc.  Plur.  contracted  of  the  3d  j  as,  N.  /S^?,  Ace. 
jim,     Plur.  N.  A  .V.  (iag, 

4.  It  changes  i"  into  r  in  nouns  in  tg,  -t^oi  i  as, 

Gen.  $eiLLt]os>  f^ipfloq^  AprsiLLile^, 

Contracts. 

5.  It   changes  t}  and  iv  of  the  Nom.  and  Voc.  of  the  1st 

N.        V.  N.         V. 

and  3d  form  reciprocally  ;  as,  Apsv^y  -ev  ;  ^cta-ix-r.^ ,  -?;.  to 
or  «  of  all  genitives  in  cos  into  ew  ;  as,  ;<$e<A£y$,  TroAewg,  ohjcrevqj^ 
H  into  6;  in  the  Gen.  Sing,  of  the  4th  ;  as,  G.  A;^^5.  eig  of  the 
Nom.  Plur.  into  zg  without  the  subscript,  icj  of  all  geni- 
tives into  a. :  This  last  but  seldom. 

Pronouns. 

6.  To  eya  in  the  Nom.  Sing,  it  annexes  y,  v?^,  yet,  vyu.  In 
the  penultima  of  the  dual  and  plural,  it  changes  97  into  u,  and 
often  uses  the  Sing.  Ace.  for  the  dual  and  plural.  See  Table 
at  the  end  of  Dialects. 

7.  In  the  pronoun  of  the  second  person,  it  changes  c-  into 
r,  and  annexes  ya,  vj?.     See  Table. 

8.  In  the  3d  personal  pronoun  for  the  accusative  s,  it  uses 
the  accusative  of*,  G.  io$  obsolete,  with  fc  or  y  prefixed  ;  as,  J 
M./y,v/y,  which  often  stand  not  only  for  I,  but  for  uvr-ov,  ->jy,  -0,^ 
and  also  for  the  plural  avr-ii^,  -^$,  -ec.     For  the  plural  dative 
G-(p{(rt,  it  uses  the  dual  (r(piv,  which  by  Aphasresis  becomes  0iv. 
For  the  plural  accusative  «^^«5,  it  uses  the  dual  G-<pe.  by  Me-^ 
tathesis  (po-e  ;  hence -^f.     As  the  relative  avrog  is  often  used  3 
for  the  reciprocals  'a  and  uvra,  (contracted  from  lavm,)  so  1 
^iv  and  i^s  ^re  used  respectively  for  uvt-oi?,  -atg  ;  uvr-a^  -ccq, 
-c6,  in  all  genders  :    -^pe  sometimes  for  the  Ace.  Sing,  ccvt-ovj 

-rjv,  -0. 

In  the  possessives,  it  changes 

e-<j5  into  recs . 

e$  «)$. 

rjfJLiltpoi  ccf^q, 

vf^ilspo? tJfttf?. 

G-^slepo? 5*^$. 


♦  Odyss. «.  3&7. 


Dialects,     Doric,  237 

Verbs. 

9.  It  changes^,  the  characteristic  of  the  present,  into  c-J^, 

J^,  ^^,  T,  and  TT  ;  as,  trv^iT^u^  yvi^tvcc^a^  yFolt^^u^'cpilu^  ^pxrl^f,  cv* 
pirlA), 

10.  It  makes  new  present  tenses  from  perfects,  by  chang- 
ing ot    into  cj  ;    as,  W5?;\a»,  zn-zsroidtu,  h^oiKa^  9ce)t?^9}y^,  7re<PpiKv^* 

n.  It  changes  <r,  the  future  characteristic  of  verbs  in  ^, 
and  of  some  in  6f  pure,  into  |  ;  as,  «5t»7/«|tt>,  ys^^ot^ai, 

12.  It  changes  «  in  the  penultimaof  the  1st  future  and  1st 
aorist  of  verbs  in  6>  pure,  into  ei  ;  as,  ety^tc-cj,  axoi<rov. 

13.  It  changes  rj  in  the  penultima  of  the  1st  future  and  1st 
aorist  perfect  and   pluperfect   into  cc  ;   as,  <pi?[xc6j,  sltf^oicct^ 

14.  It  changes  n  the  augment,  formed  by  annexing  <,  into 
97  without  a  subscript  ;  as.  j?;^ev,  i;Ay.«». 

15.  It  syncopates  1  in  the  2d  and  3d  persons  singular  of  the 
present  indicative  active,  and  in  every  tense  of  the  infinitive 
ending  in  nv  ;    as,  rv-nrl-e^,  -g,  rvTrJiv,  Tv^£f^  rvTev, 

16.  It  circumflexes  the  1st  future  active  and  middle,  and 
forms  it  like  the  2d  ;  as, 

Act.  rv-^a,  -f??,    -ei,    -giroy^  -iiroi,  '       >  /u^v,|    -£/7f,    -ii  \    v]i. 

Mid.  rv^J/'a/itetty  -rj,  -etjut.      'iif4.£$ov,  -n5-^«v,  -£i^^a\^,  kc, 

17.  It  changes  v  into  o-  in  the  1st  person  plural  of  all  tenses 
indicative  and  subjunctive  active,  and  of  the  2d  aorists  sub- 
junctive passive  :  also  c-into  vrin  the  3d  plural,  dropping  the 
subjunctive  vowel  of  the  preceding  diphthong,  except  in  the 

^  2d    future  ;    as,     Tt;sr7»/M.f$,   ervTrJof^gi,    iv^ofA^a^    irv^ufj^^    &:c. 
\rv7r1oilt,^  rv^o)i]i^^   ri'jv^otvlt,^  Tvzs-iivli,^  ti6sv]i,^  ^iMh^  tvzsltay 
7«,  rv-^mlt^  Pass,  rv^p^avli,  rvTrmlt, 

18.  It  changes  01  into  a  in  the  penultima  of  Barytons  and 
contracts  of  the  optative  active,  whose  termination  /w,;,  the 
Attic  had  before  changed  into  jjv  ;  as,  Attic,  rv7r]otr,v,  yroiomy 
Xpv^^tuv  ;   Doric,  rvzrjuyrtv,  7rotai'0,  ;kj^t/o-^>jv, 

*  From  ri<pptKA  for  'Ttiippi^A. 
t  See  Obs.  18,  and  Note  to  the  same. 
X  See  Obs.  18. 

i  This  person  is  like  the  dative  plural  of  the  participle  of  the  same 
ton.se  ;  but  the  Doric  Dialect  makes  it  like  the  dative  sin:rular. 


238 


Dialects,     Doric, 


It  also  often  changes  «  of  the  penultima  both  of  contracts 
and  Barytons  into  ev,  sometimes  into  a/ ;  as  Active,  (ptX-eZimeq, 
'Evvlt,  Imp.  ((piXtuv,  rv^^eviiteg,  -£ov]t,  rvTr-evf^-e^,  av/<*  or  -iuvli 
or  -ovlt.     Part.  TV7r']edcrx,(pi?isvv.     Pass,  and  Mid.  (piXiZfJLon,   1st 

Fut-  oLXiZtA.Ai,     Imperat.    <piXv), Also    ru7r]oia'i^    1st   Fut. 

Tu^^otG-t,  Particip.  rv7rloi<rx.  c  is  sometimes  inserted  in  the 
subjunctive  ;  as,  tTopfosr-aTi,  -sav]!  ;  G-vylt6  art,  -eavli,  Archi- 
medes. 

19.  It  changes  t)  into  ct  in  most  tenses  of  the  indicative  and 
optative  passive  and  middle  :  also  of  verbs  in  f^t  ending  in  jjv  ; 
as,    eTvzs-]ofAecv,    erv-^etfjLocv,    £TV(p0ocvy    erv(p6t]] ecv ,    rvzs-lotfcotv,    sG-iccVy 

20.  It  inserts  o*  in  the  1st  person  plural  passive  ;    as,  rvTr- 

lo,U£G-dcd, 

21.  In  the  perfect  passive  of  verbs  in  ^<jy,  makings  in  the 
future,  it  changes  o-into  ^;   as,  7re(ppet^/^oct,  KeKcc^f^sci. 

22.  It  contracts  verbs  in  ua  into  ^,  in  common  with  the 
Ionic;  as, r;jit-;;$,  -'^,  -Jv  :  and  changes  the  a  contracted  into 
a  ;  as,  ^u?iu<rt^  particularly  in  participles  ;  as,  Trawli, 

23.  In  verbs  in  fjn^  it  changes  c-  of  the  3d  person  singular 
present  indicative  active  into  r  ;  as,  kt'iaI^  ri6?)](,  &c. 

24.  In  the  infinitive,  it  sometimes  changes  n  into  u,  and  a 
into  6» ;  as,  ev^eitf4.ov»v,  piyctiv, 

25.  It  also  changes  v  and  vxi  into  i^ev,  dropping  the  subjunc- 
five  of  the  preceding  diphthong  ;  as, 


TVTrJet 

TtfMJ 

yJvTH 

rslv<pe 

t^evyvu 


V 


^pvo-o 
relvpe 
rv<p6vi 

^Bvyyv 
is 


'f^V, 


26.  To  this  form  it  frequently  annexes  ut ;  as,  rvsrltf^i' 


♦  The  2d   future  commonly  retains  the  «^,  if  the  penultima  be  not 
changed  into  iv  or  o/,  but  not  always, 
t  aEolic  for  4)/X£.v. 


Dialects.     JEoUc.  £39 

« 
vflc/,  rif^^ififximi^  <ptX7i(^miy  ;^p5-o/^fva/,*  &c..    These  often  occur 
in  Ionic  writers. 

Participles. 

27.  It  inserts  /  after  u  in  the  masculine  and  feminine  of 
participles  ;  as,  rv^-wi^  -xKrce,, 

28.  It  changes  w«e,  the  feminine  termination,  into  ijo-«,  ac- 
cording to  some  grammarians  ;  as,  f^sit/,Bm}ciicru^  ocnr,uichTcty 
eofpccKHo-x  ;  but  they  rather  belong  to  present  teuics  formed 
from  perfects.     See  Obs.  10. 

Writers. 
Archimedes^  Timceus,  Pythagoras,  Pindar^  Theocritus,  Bion, 
Moschus,  Callimachus,  and  the  Tragedians  in  the  Choruses. 

iEOLIC. 
This   Dialect  was  used   in  Bceotia^  Lesbos,  and  JEolia  in 
Asia  Minor,     It  is    a  branch  of  the   Doric,   and  has    some 
changes  in  common  with  it. 

Proj)e7'lies. 

I.  Change  of  the  rough  into  the  smooth  breathing  ;  as. 

To  compensate  the  loss  of  the  aspirate,  it  sometimes  pre- 
fixes /3  to  ^  when  the  next  syllable  begins  with  ^,  x,  J",  or  t  ; 
as,  /3p<(^(«,  l^pcty^i,  /S/jfl^ov,  fioifiA-^*  It  sometimes  prefixes  y  to  a 
vowel  ;  as,  yevlo  for  evlo,  Doric  for  £?C]o,  by  Syncope  for  sxejo, 
which  is  by  the  Ionic  Dialect  for  eiAe7o, 

II.  Change  of  Letter  or  Syllable  : 

/SA;y^,t  ^eX^PUg,  ^tX^mq. 

^XiQa. 

TTspfo^oi  for  ^epto^og. 

♦  Sometimes  ^pvirofAfxivcit.  after  the  -^olic  manner  of  compensating  the 
loss  of  the  subjunctive  vowel  of  the  diphthong.     See  ,/Eolic  Dialect, 
t  For  ^iXioL^. 

ii      is    S^T    )  f  crcT 

:j:  An  ^ollc  resolution  of<  ^  —  itr  \  by  Metathesis  <  <rK 


fi 

into  \  ^ 

(f^ 

^ 

/3 

K 

—  c-n 

e 

—  (p 

t 

—  p 

n 


240  Dialects,     Molic, 

fC  into  W  TTsltty  O-STTTctju,   CtXtZTZTCX'  foT  UXilfAM.  ScC 

Rule  IV. 

djo^,  izs-zTo^,  Trico^^"^  TTo^y  c-/6^,  '-^  for 

T       '  TT        cz7oXy,v^  cr^TocAe/^,  cTf^^f. 

►^      . ,       o"5r|    czTfAA/a;,  (!'-sruX>^i^oc, 

^  e  >ieyof^£$£9i  (pe'pof^e^ev,  v  added. 

f^€fcop&cci,  e<p0op6ut, 
(rvptcct^, 
fA.iXcAi<;^  rccXcili  ;  hence  y.e>Mtvcc^  Tcc?Mt))a. 

c  U,  O'STlC&Ot. 

^  (^u         Arpiit^, 

i  a        ^biycilij^,  Myapoiv,  «^<w^,  r^Hf^a^  ^aa-cc, 
V  ' I  f}  v;;«$. 

I  0  effi5,  O,  a,  vfA«>5,   Acc.  ov, 

u.     .   Oil       (^oui^,   ys^ioci, 

St  <   5:§        'J^OV. 

(  ot       fMts-x,  Kpsaxrui  Me^oio-cc,  opdotg,'^ 

III.  Prosthesis  of 
/3  before  ^,  instead  of  the  aspirate  ;  as,  ^pvl^^. 


*  Words  that  undergo  a  complicated  change. 

t  See  third  Note,  preceding:  pae;e. 

:j:  >yv«  and  i»!^iV'Xiog  are  of  ^olic  extraction,  from  ^sv^  and  o^Mcvssi 

h  In  the  augment,  according  to  Priscian, 


Dialects.     JEolic.  '  241 

y  tor  the  same  purpose  ;  as,  ysvlo.  Also  in  other  words  ; 
as,  yvoe/Vj  yyo<p6i,  yvoiy  y^ovzrov,  whence  epiy^ovyrov^       II.  tj.  411. 

IV.  Epenthesis,  It  transposes  the  letters  in  the  sylla- 
ble pi,  changing/  into  e,  and  doubling  ^  ;  as,  zc-zs-ptu,  M'slpicc, 
ctX^olp(o$  ;  JEolic,  KOTTep^oc,  f^elepposi  et.?\.Xo]eppo^, 

Epenthesis  of 
(t  in  the  genitive  plural.     {/.HTccm. 

I  in  fjLiXAi^y  ru>^oiti  ;  participles  in  «5  ;  also  of  the  i  sub- 
script. 

V  after    «  ;     as,    uvulecv,     uvu^,    ctv^s^,    ctvlu^,   d'ecvM^,    iuvKSv^ 

V  after  o  ;    as,  Ovhro-iot, 

A  consonant  to  compensate  the  loss  of  the  aspirate  ;  as, 

A  consonant  when  the  vowel  or  diphthong  preceding  is 
shortened  j  as,  KJeWAf,  ^Ssppa,  tf^^uc^  'l^l^i,  Trsv^rry^gy  rthi^fA,ty 
etXtzs-zs-ct,. 

a-  in  futures  in Tuw,  pa, 

j8  in  ec?itS^vetv,  cAdeCov. 

V.  Syncope  of 

y  in  oAi«5,  7v|,  <popfA.i^. 

t    — uxtcc^i  '^otXccct;  ;  also  <  subscript  ;  as,  rvufr^q, 

:;    —  Opuvoi,  ^vpetKctro-at , 

VI.  Par ag age  of 

V  to  the  accusative   singular  of  the  4th  of  the  contracts  ; 

as,  Aijlav, 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  It  changes  jj?  in  the  nominative  of  the  1st  declension 
into  ec  ;  as,  Totr/ju,  Koftnloi  ;  and  a  of  the  genitive  singular  into 
«o  ;  as,  Hpf^eieco.  It  inserts  u  in  the  genitive  plural  of  the  first 
declension  ;  as,  fA.ao'scm,  uixf^ifl^uv  j  and  i  in  the  accusative  of 
those  ending  in  oc  and  s?. 

2.  In  the  dative  singular  of  the  2d,  it  omits  the  subscript ; 
as,  Aoy<w  ;  and  changes  m  of  the  accusative  plural  into  0/5. 

3.  In  the  1st  form  of  contracts,  it  rejects  5  from  the  voca- 
tive singular  in  ts  ;  as,  l>a>icp<cT£^  AefioT$iV£, 

22 


242  Dialects,     JEolic. 

4.  In  the  4tb,  it  makes  the  genitive  singular  in  <&;$  ;  and 
the  accusative  in  &'v  ;  as,  G.  oc:^-6>^,  A,  -av. 

It  makes  of  genitive  cases  a  new  nominative  of  another 
declension,  from  which  it  forms  its  cases  ;  as,  ofyepovlog^  the 
genitive,  it  makes  a  nominative,  from  which  yepovloiq  is  the 
dative  plural.  So  fAi\x\^  from  fA^^Xxu^^  and  T/e$,  G.  r/«,  D. 
Tio)^  &.C.  from  the  genitive  t/vo$,  which  has  sometimes  the  y 
[j^'ncopated. 

It  changes  <r  into  f  in  the  Gen.  Sing,  and  Ace.  of  nouns  in 
avr>  of  the  1st  declension,  the  Nom.  Sing,  of  the  2d,  the  Nom. 
and  Gen.  Sing,  of  the  3d,  the  Gen.  and  Ace  Sing,  of  the  1st, 
the  Gen.  of  the  2d  form  of  contracts,  and  the  Ace.  Plur.  of  all 

five  3    as,  2d,   G.    ccperuP,    A.    ukox^,      3d,    N.    T'.f^eso^,        fryt^Xvr 

foTYio^  G.  xpufA.ot.To^  ;    Plur.  A,   wh^oc^.      1st  of  contracts,  G. 

^S>.SO^y    A.  kMo^.         2d,   G.  TToMo^. 

Verbs. 

5.  It  changes  the  si  of  the  2d  and  3d  Sing  of  the  present 
indicative   active,   and    of  the    infinitive,  into  73  ;  as,  rt^W>i5, 

-?5,     ->5V. 

6.  It  annexes  ^^  to  the   2d  persons  in  y^? ;  as,  j^s-^ct,   rv^]- 

7.  It  inserts  cin  futures  of  the  4th  conjugation  in  Aa;,  p&)  ; 
as,  reXcrca^  opcta 

8.  It  changes  <t  of  the  penultima  of  the  perfect  passive  into 
0  in  the  infinitive  ;  as,  f^ef>cop6oci,  e<p6opeccu 

9.  It  changes  Zv  andav  in  tlie  infinitive  of  contracts  into  ctti; 
anil  0/5  ;  as,  /ioua  ,  xp^^o^^  • 

10.  It  gives  many  contracts  the  form  of  verbs  in  ]«,»,  both 
with  and  without  a  redupHcation  ;  as,  <pi?^iii^(,  vix.rjf^i,  aAotAj?^^, 
icKocx^i^i  ;  hence  the  3d  plurals  otKevlt,  (ptXevli,  Imperf.  e<^'t>im  ; 
and  participles  present,  vo£/$,  -roisi^^  &cc. 

1 1 .  It  changes  ??,  in  the  present  of  verbs  in  f^.i  from  «iy,  into 
cci  ;  from  sa  into  £,  doubling  ;«. ;   as,  ysXatf^t,  yeXxtg^  ys^^xi,    &c. 

12.  It  often  changes  the  short  into  the  long  vowel  in  these 
rerbs  ;  as,  rt^-ijlov^  'r,usv,  riSrPj^  crjy.Ot^  h^a^i,  erLOr^:A.y^^. 

13.  In  (py.fJLi  it  makes  the  3d  singular  (potli^  and  the  3d  plu- 
ral (f'attrt, 

Writers. 
JilccevSy  Sappho. 


j; 


Dialects.     Bbeotic.  243 

BCEOTIC. 
Under  the  JEolic  is    comprehended    the  Ba:otic   Dialect, 
which  has  the  following  distinct  peculiarities  t 
It  changes 

/3         into     ^         ohxoii. 

y        j3  ^oci*^  for  y^v'/?. 

y^      I         i;«v,  ii|'>6^/ ,t  Perf.  Active. 

€         A£vo/t<.c<J£v,  y  added. 
g        ^  ia)v. 

^v      cta-t      eilotTi,]    1st  Aor.  Act. 

OBSERVATIONS. 

1.  It  inserts  tru  in  the  3d  plural  of  the  imperfect  and  both 
aorists  indicative  active. 

Common.  Boeotic. 

And  in  the  imperfect  of  contracts  ;  as, 
Common.  Boeotic. 

e(pi>^H     \  -V,  ■ . (Txv, 

2.  It  sometimes  makes  the  3d  plural  of  the   1st  aorist  in 

U,Tl     ;    as,    STV^CCTt, 

3.  It  sometimes  makes  the  3d  plural  of  the  perfect  in  «y ; 

as*  relv^ccv^  7!r£(pptKocv. 

4.  It  makes  the  2d  aorist  imperative  active  in  op  like  the 

1st  ;   as,  TVSS--OV,  'ulo. 


♦  The  »  which  the  Doric  chans^es  into  st,  the  Bmolic  does  not  charge 
into  ii'-i  and,  on  the  contrary,  what  the  ^Bteoiic  ctianges  into  «i,  the  Dor- 
ic does  not  change  into  a  \  as,  '^tTy,  Doric  aS^u^  never  ««^y,  Boeotic  ;  'y:fcoiCy 
Bcp.ofic  iif>a:i?,  but  not  apang^  Doric.  So  Hort.  Adonidis,  Aldus.  1496. 
P.  209.     But  a/iaiA  occurs  in  Pindar,  Ode  3,  Strophe  1. 

■f  i^cme  ^ranamarians  make  this  the  perfect  by  changing  »  into  f  ; 
others,  the  1st  aorist,  by  changing  av  inio  3t^/, 


»•« 


roettc  Dialect. 
5.  In  the  optative  active,  it  changes  e  of  the  3d  plural  int« 


Common.  Boeotic. 

TV 


e.  In  the  3d  plural  of  both  the  aorists  passive,  and  of  the 
imperfect  and  2d  aorist  active  df  verbs  in  |t^/,  it  syncopates 
cTflf,  shortening  the  preceding  long  vowel  ;  as, 

Boeotic. 

-fV. 

-ev. 
-ov. 

7.  It  changes  t)  in  the  penultima  of  verbs  in  ft/,  from  ta 
into  n  ;  and  uses  the  Ionic  reduplication  ;  as,  n&eif^i,  '2irs(pt^ei- 

No  writers  extant  ;  nor  would  this  Dialect  have  been 
known,  nor  the  Cretan,  Spartan,  Macedonian,  Tarentine, 
PamphyHan,  and  others,  had  not  writers  occasionally  intro- 
duced them  ;  as,  in  Aristophanes,  we  fmd  a  Boeotian  woman 
speaking  in  her  own  Dialect. 

POETIC  DIALECT. 

1.  The  Poets  often  double  a  vowel  or  diphthong;  as, 
(iovtho<i  for  ^dTihq  ;  (poa<;  for  ^a(;  ;  Uer^aro  for  Ilereaf,  from  Usreag  ; 
;|f^««tv^5v  for  £^s<pxv6£Vj  from  £)c<pcctv&t  ;  yvaact  for  yva)(rt  ;  ye^^oaV' 
7f5  for  yeAA;v7f5,  from  ysXota  ;  xpottuivof  for  xpccivu  ;  o8  for  '«  ; 
o,««iio$  for  o]tteio$ ;  ff<^f  for  eizre,  Ei  is  sometimes  repeated  for 
?}  or  >i  ;  and  f  for  /  ;  as,  e^sm  for  «|!j$  ;  ^juJ'f/  for  t^JV/  ;  r/jj  for 

T/. 

2.  I  is  often  inserted  to  form  a  diphthong  ;   as,  utehg  for 

y.clog ;  ««t  for  ass  ;  9rot/jfit<  for  Trccpec  ;  f/itf/o  for  f^tteo,  Ionic,  for 

3.  A  short  vowel  is  often  put  for  its  corresponding  long 
vowel  or  diphthong  ;  as,  ^epo^  for  ^tjpoi  \lLponoui  for  Kpavtuve^ ; 
arpizros  for  Arpi'sra^, 

4.  A  consonant  is  sometimes  doubled  ;  as,  yroXetcKvi  for  | 
7s-o>iSKVi  5  i^it^o-oi;  for  fcfer«5 ;  and  on  the  contrary,  when  a  con-j 
sonant  is  doubled,  one  of  them  is  often  removed  :  as,  oh^ev^ 
for  oi'vcTevg  ;  A^^P^w^  for  AA^/Mft^s, 


Dialects  of  the  Pronouns, 


245 


5.  The  last  syllable  of  some  words  is  removed  by  Apo- 
cope, Nouns  in  the  neuter  ;  as,  (^a;  for  ^a^f^ot  ;  aXipi  for  ucA- 
<pi%y  ;  icp(  for  xptfA^vov^  and  ^jA  for  jjAos.  «^«<  from  the  second 
person  of  verbs  ;  as,  '^iretv  for  Trotvo-oci  ;  S'wcc  for  ^vvoltui.  h 
from  datives  in  /J'^  ;  as,  Qeri  for  ^fr^J"/ ;  rpoTrt  for  rpozrth. 

6.  They  make  nouns  indeclinable  by  adding  pi  to  the 
nominative  of  parisyllabic  nouns,  and  to  the  genitive  of  im- 
parisyllabics,   rejecting  v  and  a-  from  the  terminations  j  as, 

Neuters  of  the  1st  of  the  contracts  reject  o  only  from  the 
genitive;  as,  o/>fo?,  spi(r0i.  To  the  Attic  genitive  in  a;  they 
add  0  ;   as.  Gen.    Evyeaa  for  Evyseo, 

7.  They  form  the  dative  plural  from  the  singular,  by 
changing  t  into  eo-t  or  eo-a-t  ;  as,  t;pai,  rpaeci,  or  r^pa/eo-o-t^  and 
change  oiv  into  oiiv  in  the  dative  dual. 

8.  The  termination  of  the  2d  declension  is  often  given 
to  nouns  in  the  3d  ;  and  that  of  the  3d  to  nouns  of  the  1st 
and  2d,  especially  in  the  dative  ;  as,  yepovron  for  ye pHO't  ;  '^xp. 
Bfif^ocToi^  for  '7rt»p$7}f/.ocTt  j  aAx/  for  x^tcv]  j  Ocf^tyt  for  uT/ntivi  3  "ZTxpBevi 
foT  7rup$£vaj  ;    KXetho-i  for  K^u^cig. 

9.  They  change  Barytons  into  verbs  in  ft/  ;  as,  s^zf^t,  fipi- 
&7)fA.i,  from  €x<»^  ^ptdof, 

10.  From  regular  verbs  in  at  are  formed,  by  the  Poets, 
verbs  defective  in  u6ea,  e6u,  na^  virTu^  v^a>^  <><«*',  aa*^  I*/,  ryu^ 
T&cOy  «•»«,  c-23-«y,  c-A»,  v6a,  vTCAf^  6f(raf,  uttm^  uQu^  cooo.  These  are 
often  formed  from  the  future  ;  as,  <p/o-frf,  Imper.  from  atroi^ 
Fut.  of  (Piou. 

11.  The  termination  /r^c•«MS  changed  into  r^on  ;  as,  /itf^ 
cTAi  for  f^e^tccTu  I J  from  fJLthocu. 

DIALECTS  OF  THE  PRONOUNS, 

Sino;ular. 


N. 

Ionic. 

Doric. 
{ eyavi] 
1  cyeov 
J  eyavyoc 
\  iyaya. 

iEolic. 
Bceotic, 
eyav         la 

ic<}yct 

iavya 

Poetic, 

G. 
D. 

5  ^i^^ 

ifuv 

(  €f4,£(C. 

A. 

.  5  ^'^^       1 

' 

246 


N.  A. 
G.  D. 


Dialects  of  the  Pronouns. 


Ionic. 


-\ 


CO  10 

creo 


vuse<; 


Dual. 


Doric. 


^olic. 


Plural. 

UfliV 


-\ 


■! 


Singular. 

TV 

rvyci 

[  Teoto 

roi,riv,Teiif 

re 

ru 


Dual. 


Uflf^i 


Plural. 


UfJLfA.1 
UfA,f4.0tg 


^   UfA.lA.eCSV 
I  Uf4.iV 
<    UfAfJUV 
(uf4.f^l 
i  OtfA.fA.US 
I  Uf4.£ 
(^UfAfAe 


VfAfJLg 


vfAfAeg 


•i 
■\ 


VfA.fA.m 

vfA.fA.eav 

VfA.fA.(V 
VfA.fU 

UfA.fA.Ui 
VfA.fA.i 


Poetic. 

voi, 
va'iv. 


r.fA.el6)V, 


■I 
■I 


ir£io6e^. 

<r£o6£v. 

crekv. 

rtv 


vfiem. 
vfietm. 


Dialects  of  the  Pronouns. 


247 


G. 

D. 
A. 


N.A.    I 

N. 
G. 

D. 

A. 


N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 

N.A. 
G.D. 

N. 
G. 

D. 

A. 


Ionic. 


is 


OJ. 
Singular. 
Doric.  -^olic. 


Dual. 
-    I 

Plural. 


Article.! 


Tea) 

TO), 

reci 

Teat 

ru, 

ret 

recv 

ret^ 


Dual. 


reofv 

TeOtG-t^TTlO'l 


Plural. 


rejt; 


Tft;^,  id^ 


G-^iS, 

\  GiptV, 


T«/<V, 


The  Dialects,  which  by  some  are  annexed  to  the  relative 
;$,  by  others  to  the  relative  oo-7/5  belong  properly  to  Ho?,  used 

for  oC/;$. 


♦/M/y  and  v/v  are  both  singular  and  plural,  and  of  all  genders. — See  Do- 
ric Dialect,  Obs.  8. 

t  To  every  case  of  the  article,  the  Attics  add  the  particles  cTg  and  yih 
also  >6  to  the  pronouns  «^a>,  c-y,  ^c,  &c. 


248 


Dialects  of  the  Verb  Substantive  eif^i. 


From  oTog  comes  regularly  the  genitive  ©ry,  I.  orecj,  D. 
oTev,  orleo,  F,cr}ev  •  Dat.  orat,  I.  orsojy  P.  or]ecf} -,  Piur.  Gen. 
tf'r^yy,  I.  orgav  ;  Dat.  orotic  I.  orsotiy  oTsotTi.  k^trcb  and  k^la,  are 
used  by  the  Attics  for  kmu,, 

DIALECTS  OF  THE  VERB  SUBSTANTIVE  «.u/. 

Indicative  Mood. 

Present  Tense* 


D. 
P. 

A. 
I. 

D. 
P. 

A. 
I. 

D. 


1 


tfJLfJLt 


n 


1 


2 


-\ 


3 


su<r(ri. 


Imperfect  Tense. 


^5 

^56  fJjC"^^    fJJV 


ectis 


m* 


eo-u-av. 


Futh 


io-ei 


iG'TOf/.Xl 


c  so-a-vj  eFO-elut 


(  iTCtOH 


Imperative  Mood. 
Present  Tense, 


D. 
P. 


A. 
P. 


iotq 

eot 

Optative  Mood. 
Present  Tense, 


etptsv    tilt         tin.] 


♦  See  «-*  syncopated  in  the  Attic  Dialect.     Obs, 27. 
t  See*  syncopated  in  the  Aiiic  Dialect. 


Dialects  of  the  Verb  Substantive  etf>n,  249 

Subjunctive  Mood. 
Present  Tense, 


I 

1 

2         3 

2         3             1 

2 

'■?/ 

s  ^ 

D. 

^H'i<i 

P. 

1 

Infinitive   Mood. 
Present  Tense, 

I. 

efA^evett,  ifA^^io^t, 

D. 

Future, 

TjfAe^^  ilfliV 

D. 

iVfitriui^  es^eto'&ut. 

P. 

Participle. 

Present  Tense.       I.     euy. 

Future. 

P.      €T9'0l4.tHCj, 

eaxTi^ 


^PPEJVDI^— No.  I. 


(From  Valpy's  Grammar.) 

DIGAMMA. 

THE  original  Pelasgic,   and  the  old  Dialects    of  Greece, 

admitted    few,   or   no  Aspirates.     The   Diguunma  was  early 

adopted  to   prevent   the   hiatus,  which   the   concurrence  of 

Towels  would  produce.*     Aspirates  were   afterwards  inlro- 


*  It  cannot  be  ascertained  with  precision,  what  was  the  proBuncia- 
tion  of  the  Digamma,  which  in  its  orii^in  had  something  of  the  ^u-tural. 
The  general  opinion  is,  that  it  resembled  our  VV. — But  the  frequent 
recurrence  of  this  sound  must  have  produced  an  effect  so  harsh  and  in- 
elegant, that  our  V  appears  a  more  natural  pronunciation  of  the  ialter 
DigLimma.  This  is  more  congenial  to  the  sound  of  re  fi2;ure  F,  which  it 
assumed.  It  was  expressed  in  Latin  by  V  ;  and  the  Italian^,  with  the 
other  nations,  whose  language  is  derived  from  the  Latin,  pronouhce 
that  letter  in  rmo,  vento,  Sec.  like  our  V.  It  must  have  been  nearly 
similar  to  the  sound  of  B,  which  was  frequently  substituted  to  it,  as  ia 
ftrveo,  ferbuij  as  it  is  still  in  the  Southern  Provinces  of  France.  1  he 
Latin  V  was  frequently  expressed  in  Greek  by  B,  as,  Batppw  for 
P^arro  ;  and  the  Greek  B  was  changed  in  Latin  into  V,  as  f6x<fckK  vado, 
V  was  mdeed  sometimes  changed  into  ow  as,  OutxiA  for  Vdia.  Vini^il- 
ius  was  written  in  Greek  ^ipyixioi  and  OuipyihioQ  JSfervii  NipCios  and 
Nspcwo/;  but  the  B  was  not  pronounced  like  W,  but  Ijke  V;  and 
Vossius  and  other  eminent  Critics  have  given  the  preference  to  B 
in  those  words.  To  this  it  should  be  added,  that  ov  was  often  pronounc- 
ed V,  and  some  modern  Greeks  pronounce  ofA'^^ev^v,  Vhcjuivuv.  '/'he 
Lacedemonian  Dialect,  a  branch  of  the^Eolic,  always  pronounced,  ond 
generally  wrote,  the  Digamma  like  B.  As  this  letter  i?  so  nearly  al- 
lied to  V  in  sound,  and  so  remote  from  W,  it  may  be  considered  as  some 
argument  in  favor  of  the  former. 

According  to  these  principles,  it  is  probable  that  the  Digamma  final 
or  betbre  a  consonant  was  pronounced  like  our  F,  and  before  a  vowel 
Kke  our  V.  It  has  been  observed  that  /iAo-ihivs  h  pronounced  vasilefs. 
The  analogy  subsists  in  French,  neuf^  ncuce  ;  and  in  English, /^.a//*,  halves^ 
But  our  pronunciation  of  the  Greek  and  Latin  languaires  is  so  dififerent 
from  what  it  was  in  Greece  or  Rome,  that  it  is  perhaps  as  unnecessary, 
as  it  is  diificult,  to  fix  the  genuine  sound  of  the  Digamma,  which  proba- 
bly underwent  some  changes. 

The  form  of  it  was  at  first  that  of  a  Gamma  rererged,  then   of 


Appendix — No.  I. — Digamma,  251 

duced  into  all  the  Dialects,  except  the  ^^olic,  which  adhered 
to  the  Digamma.  Hence  it  has  preserved  the  name  of  the 
iEolic.  It  has  also  with  great  propriety  been  called  the 
Homeric  Digamma.  That  great  Poet  adopted  the  original 
forms  of  the.^olic  and  Ionic  Dialects,*  which  threw  a  ma- 
jestic air  of  antiquity  on  his  poetry.  This  ancient  form  Ho- 
mer dignifies  by  the  appclhition  of  the  language  of  the  Gods. 
Virgil,  and  among  the  moderns  Tasso  and  Milton,  successful- 
ly imitated  that  practice  by  the  introduction  of  antiquated  ex- 
pressions, which  removed  their  language  from  the  common 
idiom,  and  cast  a  venerable  gloom  of  solemnity  on  their  style. 
To  that  principle  may  in  a  great  measure,  be  attributed  the 
frequent  use  of  the  Digamma  by  Homer. 

The  use  of  the  Digamma  having  been  insensibly  abolish- 
ed by  the  introduction  of  Aspirates,  the  transcribers  of  the 
works  of  Homer  neglected  to  mark  it,  and  at  length  the  vesti- 
ges of  its  existence  were  confined  to  a  few  ancient  Inscrip- 
tions. The  harmonious  ear  of  the  Poet  had  led  him  sedu- 
lously to  avoid  every  hiatus  of  vowels  ;  but  the  absence  of 


a  Gamma  :  afterwards  it  asfoimed  the  ?hape  of  a  double  Garomn,  F, 
whence  it  derives  its  name.  Henre  it  has  pomeTimfe«>  b<jen  wrilten  r^ 
asratC/oifor  YoiCioi  ;  nS-sv  for  Ft-S^tv ;  rtvTo  for  Fivtc,  iEoI.  for  svts.  Dor. 
for  CATS,  from  sac  ;  r^ttTja,  gaudeo^  for  I  a^cTa),  ^c.  It  Iihs  frequently  been 
cxprefr.«ed  by  B  ;  and  sometirrie."  too  by  M,  II,  *.  K,  X. 

Used  for  the  original  Digamma,  T  had  not  the  sound  of  our  G,  but  a 
Eoft  guttural  sound,  like  tlie  German  g  final  ifi  Jf  emg.  Indeed  the  an- 
cient form  of  r  ua*^  a  curve  thus,  (  ,  wiiicb  became  afterwards  a  mark 
of  the  rough  aspirate. 

Tiie  German  i^,  commonly  expressed  by  gh  in  the  English  language, 
has  shared,  m  South  Britain,  the  fate  M'hich  the  Digarjima  experienced 
in  many  parts  of  Greece,  and  has  been  disuf-ed.  The  lew  instances,  in 
which  it  is  sounded,  follow  the  principle  of  the  Digamma  F,  as  cough^ 
enoughs  roughs  tough. 

It  is  not  improbable  that  this  guttural  sound  of  r,  softened  by  common 
use,  may  have  given  rise  to  the  opinion  that  the  Digamma  was  pro- 
nounced like  our  W.  The  difference  <jf  the  two  sounds  may  be  exf  ra- 
plififid  in  the  modf-rn  word  ctvyov^  an  egg,  which  the  Greeks  pronounce 
of  one ^  gutturalizing  one. 

*  It  is  not  to  be  imasfined  that  Homer  adopted  arbitrarily  the  differ- 
ent Dialects.  His  was  the  pure,  apjTopriate  diction  of  Verse,  the  clas- 
sical language  of  ancient  Greece,  the  soun-e  of  all  that  was  sublime  an<l 
beautiful  in  Poetry,  and  the  model  of  all  succeeding  Poets. 


252  Jlppendix — No.  I. — Digamma. 

the  Digamma  made  him  inharmonious  and  defective.  To 
remove  in  some  degree  this  difficulty,  his  Commentators  in- 
terposed the  tinal  v,*"  or  the  Particles  y\  ^\  r*  ;  but  these 
could  only  be  partially  adopted,  and  were  far  from  display- 
ing the  poet  in  all  the  charms  of  his  original  style.  Num- 
berless passages  remained  in  their  naked  deformity,  and  ex- 
ercised the  conjectural  sagacity  of  Grammarians  and  Com- 
mentators. Thus  in  the  verse,  in  the  opening  of  the  Iliad, 
'Hpuav^  ccvTovg  ^i  iXapioc  revxs  x-evveo-o-iv,  aware  of  the  inharmo- 
nious effect  of  the  concurrence  of  the  two  f ,  they  cut  off  the 
former.  The  quantity  of  the  latter  created  another  difficulty. 
Some  doubled  a,  and  others  assert  that  e  was  lengthened  be- 
fore the  liquid.  But  there  were  passages,  to  which  even 
these,  and  similar  expedients  were  inapplicable.  A  suc- 
cessful effort  was  made  by  the  great  Bentley  to  remove 
these  embarrassments — The  restoration  of  the  Digamma  has 
at  length  vindicated  the  Poet,  and  displayed  the  harmonious 
beauties  of  his  original  versification.  To  give  the  learner 
some  clue  to  guide  him  through  these  intricacies,  an  alpha- 
betical table  is  added  of  the  words  in  Homer,  which  either 
constantly,  or  generally,  admit  the  Digamma  in  the  initial 
Vowel. 


A. 

«fi;, 

£iKe)^i^ 

fxjjAcs, 

uy6f, 

}      to 

«ct;5"itAf«$. 

ei?Mpj 

fX3?T/, 

uywfA.ty 

^  break. 

n^e^^ 

sxvpog, 

a^ejy 

E. 

etXvu, 

e>cav, 

OtM^iy 

K 

£iXv<Paa)y 

eAfog, 

«A'$, 

ectp. 

f<A», 

€?H(r(!-CJ, 

U>^af4.t, 

*^v«v. 

Uf^, 

£>^7riiy 

ecvu^i 

i^Eifid^ 

etpya, 

fA^tfj, 

ecv^o&va, 

e^ef, 

eiPa, 

eA<y, 

MpOClOiy 

e^voq. 

eiCTKOf, 

eXap^ 

etp^ay 

iiha^ 

txoiS-ev^ 

eA<tf,tf/dy, 

ctpvii 

n^o», 

etcug, 

fVfTOi, 

ccpi^ofi 
etpveg, 

£tKOO-t^ 

exM^ex;, 

fWV^/, 

eiK6),  to  be  like,  Ikxto^j 

♦  They  have  even,  by  the  addition  of  v,  altered  the  Case,  and  conse- 
quently the  sense,  of  some  words.  An  instance  of  tb's  appears  in  the 
last  Book  of  the  Odyssey,  312,   where   vJjv  ia>\^ii  has  been  put  for  ^'^t 


Appendix — No  I. — Bigammeb, 


253 


spa'a}f 
iipeo, 
spr/jpr^.y 
(ppcjy 
ipva,  to 

t7'7rspc<3 , 

The 
which  i 


e^y,  to  put  on.  i^^/5, 

H.  fx,e?^rj^^ 

^«£e,  adv.  /ov^ci?, 

draw,  yjp,  tq, 

iJX,^,  lO-KUy 

I.  i^^p'> 


oivoq, 
cvpov. 


a 


yA|. 


Latin  Dialect  naturally  adopted  the  iEolic  Digamma, 
it  expressed  generally  by  V,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  fol- 
lowing list : 


ccyof^oct^  vagor  ; 
utMv,  eevum  ; 
<tA«;r-/;|,  vulpes  ; 
«o^vd5,  a'i'ernus  ; 
cc;^xioi,  achivus  ; 
«<y,  vapor  ; 
fitoat,  vivo  ; 
/3d£5,  boves  ; 
^0$,  divinus  ; 
ei^eof^  video  ; 
ttKxlty  viginti ; 


f  A(W,  volvo  ; 
£f4.af,  vomo  ; 
ev^iKoi,  vindico  ; 
evelot,  veneti  ; 
tvlepeg,  venter  ; 
spx,^,  vergo  ; 
ipoi,  servus ; 
spa),  verto  ; 
£<^dr,q,  veslis  ; 
io-Trepe^y  vespera; 
£5-/tfc,  Vesta  ; 


f7«$,  vetus  ; 
^f,  ver  ; 
^|«$,  viscus  ; 
idv,  viola  ; 
is ,  vis  ; 
ta)i  ivi  ; 
xxa,  cavo  J 
KEpuo^y  cervus  ; 
xAf/$,  clavis  ; 
ycopoq,  corvus  ; 
Afltiog,  laevus  ; 


i 


♦  Aiijrments  often  retain  the  Digamma  of  the  verbs,  as  soxrrat  from 
thTTuo,  aiTToi  from  ^^a,  &:('.  Many  words  take  a  double  Digamma,  one 
before  ihe    augment,  the  other  before  the   verb,    2iS  vujCJi  [i^ciKcg^  iTntla,^ 

In  m-^ny  comp'^unded  words  the  Digamma  is  placed  in  the  middle,  as 
^pc(iiSa).  ct(&:K)ig.  KAKoif^ycs^  Sec.  Ii  is  mserted  in  several  simple  words,  as 
otic    vAlV),  &;c.  * 

It  has  been  before  obf-ervrd,  that  /  and  u  were  substifued  to  the  Di- 
gamma. Henec  to  Ar^sfJw?  succeeded  A-rfnihc ;  *oA^A[csy  Ay^aicc.  Thus 
^4,-,  afo)  made  fitfao)  in  the  future,  changed  into  ciiwa);  4^a^  4*l'«  into 


254 


Appendix — No.  I. — Digamma, 


.^xpT!,  larva ; 
?ieif>i ,  levis  ; 
^va,  lavo  ; 
>it/A»,  solvo  ; 
f^uAj,  moveo  ; 
^«A3j,  malva  ; 
fAuoooi  Mavors  ; 
vctiog,  naevias  ; 
yavi,  na\is  ;* 


viog,  novus  ; 
y/x«,  vinco  ; 
olKog,  vie  US  ; 
ohog,  vinum  ; 
e/$,  OVl?  ; 
eA<y,  VolvO  ; 
o;^A6$.   VulgUS  ; 

ow,  voveo  ; 
TTuvpoi,  parvus  j 


crptof^  pnvo  ; 
^'/<i>,  rivus  ; 
cKcttog^  saevus  ; 
rci6fg,  pavo  ; 
eJAjj,  sjlva  ; 
v&f^  uvesco  ; 

a)oy,  ovum,  &C. 


Sometimes  by  other  letters,  among  which  are  B  ;  as,  ^vu, 
dubium  ;  f^oo^^  morbus  ;  paij,  robur  ;  Ccj^  uber. 

C  ;  as,  erepcc^  cetera. 

F;  as,  uyopx,  forum;  of^tP^o^,  famulus;  «t/Ao5,  felis  j  /vfs, 
funes  5  pi'y€g.  frigus  ;   Ca,  fluo. 

R  ;  as,  /3o>5,  Boreas  ;  >tAe/<y,  celebro  ;  Ja^jjo?,  hilaris  ;  f^x^, 
murex  ;  /ttovcatyv,  musarum  ;  wo^   nurus,  &c.t 

In  English  the  Digamma  h,u  become  W  ;  as,  vfos-  new  ; 
iiinum,  wine  ;  vicus,  wick  ;  Jiistula,  whistle  ;  vespa^  wasp  ; 
via,  way.  It  is  pronounced,  without  being  written,  in  the 
word  one, 

V  ;  as,  Kotos,  navey  kc. 


*  Notuf  was  probably  pronounced  nafs ;  hence  navis.  Thus  riau^oc; 
pafros^  was  transposed  into  parvus. 

+  The  Di£:amma  waR  a  principal  agent  in  the  formation  of  tenses  in 
Latin  :  thus,  from  amo^  aniai,  wa?  formed  amai'i ;  from  deleo,,  delei,  de- 
levi;  (rom  cup  10,  cupii,  cu'piri;  frotts  audio,  audiu  audivi.  Frofu  amo, 
amavo^  we  have  amabOy  from  mnneo^  moneho.  Perhaps  this  analoo^y  may 
be  carried  to  plural  cases  in  bus.  This  termination  was  formerly  more 
extensire  ;  hence  we  find  in  Plautus,  audibu^  hibusj  kc. 


APPFXBTX—No.  II. 

THE  SUBSCRIPT  i 

IS  found  among  JVouns,  in 

I.  The  Dative  Singular  of  the  1st  and  2d  Declension. 

II.  The  Dative  Sin.(ular,  and  Genitive  and  Dative  Dual  of 
the  oth  of  the  Contracts. 

III.  Adjectives  contracted  from  r.sn  ;  as,  ri^si<i,  '"'^Ji?. 

Amoni]^  Verbs  in 

IV.  The  2d  and  3d  Singular  Subjunctive  Active  ;  as,  rt^^r?- 
-»K»i  :*  retained  after  Contraction  by  Verb?  in  a«  and  eof  ;  as, 
rifA.'''AYi<i'Ui .  rifjL-uvi-^  ;  (piX-tr^  rjq,  iptX-iTi-v]  :  consequently  fouiid 
in  tiiose  tenses  (4' the  subjuu.  tiv^  active  of  verbs  in  f^i^  which 
have  the  samej  formation  with  that  of  the  contracted  form  of 
verbs  in  oca.,  eat,  ind  oa. 

V.  Other  contracted  Terminations  of  V^erbs  in  ua>  without 
distinction    of  Voices  where  <  occurred  before  contraction  ; 

as,  ^a-6tf;g-^i, /3o-(JM'5-y<. 

VI.  The  2d  Singular  of  Tenses  of  the  Indicative  Mood 
in  oA<^<,  and  of  the  Subjunctive  in  (^fJLUt^  Passive  and  Middle 
Voices  ;  as,  rvzsP-ofjLott-yi^  rvTsr'l'UfA.tt  >j  :  retainer!  after  Contrac- 
tion by  Verbs  in  oia  and  iu  ;  as,  T'l^-ccri-u,^  ^/A-i^  ^. 

VII.  The  2d  Sing,  of  Tenses  in  the  Subjunctive  Passive 
and  Aliddle  of  Verbs  in  jm./  ;  as, 

Present.  2d  Aorist. 

Ua>  -cc  fS  -« 

^(^a  -9  ^6)  -(^ 

The  Subjunctive  in  the  three  Voices  corresponding  with 
that  of  the  contracted  form  of  Verbs  in  uu,  ««,  and  eat,  under 
the  exceptions  already  noticed. 


♦  All  ihe  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  active  derive  their  terhiin- 
ations  from  tho5e  of  the  present  indicative,  chanj^ino:  the  phort  into 
their  respective  long  vowels,  dropping  v  and  subscribing  t  v.hcn  they 
•ccur  i  e.  g. 

Indie.     tuTrl-ct,  nc  u  ;     jtsv,  «tov  ;     c//..n',  sts,  «o-/. 
Subj.      TVTrl-oot   >?c   »)  ;      «T6y,  «tov  ;     cu^iv,  «t2,  ce7t, 

t  Except  that  verbs  in  oefxt  make  Ihe  2d  and  3d  persons  sins^uiar  in 
»?,  w  ;  which  is  indeed  a  more  natural  contrsLCtion  of  owe,  cw,  than  ok,  c7, 
nsed  by  verbs  in  aco  ;  and  that  the  2d  aorist  varies  from  the  present,  ^nd 
eons^equently  from  the  contracted  foroQ  in  verbs  derived  from  «t*j  by 
assuming  w  instead  of  ct. 


JPPEJVDJX-No.  III. 

ARTICLE. 

The  article  was  originally  a  relative  pronoun,  and  as  swcli 
was  used  by  Humer  and  others  in  the  sense  ofuvloq  or  eKeivoq. 
O  yot'P  ^ocTi^^yji  ^oXcoQiiq  vUG-ov  ccvQC  c-jpurov  apfTe  TfLot,yj-/t^ .  ^  he  being 
enraged  with  the  king,  raised  a  destructive  pestilence  among 
the  people.  Iliad,  A.  9.  'o  yup  7}X9e,  for  he  came.  11. 
THN  d^£  iyca  sk  Xvxea^  but  I  will  not  release  her.     29. 

When  the  antecedent  is  so  situated,  that  the  relation  of  the 
pronoun  to  it  is  obscure,  the  antecedent  is  repeated  after  the 
pronoun,  to  remove  the  obscurity  :  in  this  case  the  pronoun 
takes  the  name  of  the  article.  Thus,  Iliad,  A.  33,  ai  e<potr\ 
s^hitrsv  'o— Here  it  would  be  doubtful  whether  the  pronoun 
*0  referred  to  the  person  who  spake,  or  to  some  one  men- 
tioned before.  To  remove  this  ambiguity,  the  Poet  goes  on, 
i^hi^^ey  'o  yeoaiv,  the  old  man  feared,  viz.  Chryses,  who  had 
been  before  introduced  :  line   11. 

The  article  o  differs  from  the  relative  oq  in  two  respects 
only. 

1.  It  has  so  obscure  a  reference  to  its  antecedent,  as  to  re- 
quire the  repetition  of  it,  to  remove  the  obscurity. 

2.  Its  antecedent  is  more  extensive  ;  and  from  this  cir- 
cumstance, in  part,  arises  the  obscurity  of  its  reference. 

The  antecedent  to  an  article  may  be  any  thing  which  has 
become  familiar  to  the  mind,  either  by  being  mentioned  be- 
fore, or  implied  in  what  has  been  said,  or  from  its  importance 
or  notoriety.  In  the  case  of  the  article,  as  of  the  relative  oc^ 
the  antecedent  does  not  always  precede  the  pronoun,  but 
often  follows  it. 

Between  the  article  and  its  noun,  there  is  always  under- 
stood the  participle  of  existence,  6fv,  ii(rx,  ov.  'o  ^cca-ixgy^,  is 
the  same  with  'o  ^v  (ioccrtXEvg,  he  that  is  kmg. 

The  participle  is  sometimes  expressed  ;  as  oi  luLciXio-lcc  ulioi 
ONTES,  y~icic-]sc7rXiiTii(ri,  the  most  worthy  are  commonly  the 
least  wealthy. 

A  participle  differs  from  a  verb  by  assuming  what 
verb    asserfs.       In    the   proposition    'o  ocyoi$ei  ^afKparv^ 


Appendix — No.  III. — Article,  25^ 

^t>idcrc^eti  the  good  Socrates  philosophizes  ;  o  uyotSo?  is 
equivalent  to  'o  &>v  ccyoiO^g,  he  being  good,  viz.  Socra- 
tes, philosophizes.  Here  it  is  tirst  assumed  that  Socrates 
is  good,  and  then  an  assertion  is  made  concerning  him.  But 
XaxpxTfii  eo-it  ccyoc^oq  asserts  that  Socrates,  is  a  good  man  ;  the 
thing  assumed  Avhen  the  article  was  used. 

The  article  then,  taken  with  the  word  which  follows  it, 
always  contains  an  assumptive  proposition.  To  determine, 
therefore,  when  the  article  may  be  used,  it  is  necessary  only 
to  determine  when  we  are  authorized  to  make  this  assumptive 
proposition.  May  we  always  assume  that  the  thing  which  we 
are  speaking  of,  is  known  to  the  hearer  ?  Certainly  not  ; 
for  then  the  article  might  be  used  without  necessity  or 
meaning.  But  when  may  this  assumption  be  made  ?  When- 
ever that,  which  we  are  about  to  mention,  has  been  before 
presented  to  the  mind  ;  for  we  are  authorized  to  assume  the 
existence  of  that  to  be  known,  which  has  already  been  before 
the  mitid.  If  in  discourse  I  have  mentioned  a  horse,  and 
there  is  occasion  to  mention  him  again,  1  may  assume  that  his 
existence  is  known,  and  shall  therefore  say  'o  Itttto^^  which 
is  equivalent  to  '^o  d»v  iTr-Toi ,  a  horse  before  mentioned,  and 
therefore  assumed  to  be  known  It  is  equally  plain  that  I 
could  not  say  'o  l-zs-zro^  on  the  first  mention  of  the  horse,  for 
this  would  be  to  assume  that  which  is  not  known,  and  there- 
fore not  conceded. 

It  remains  only  to  point  out  in  what  cases  the  assumption 
may  be  made. 

I.   Rcnezvcd  Mention, 

1.  When  a  person  or  thing  recently  mentioned,  is  spoken 
of  again,  the  article  is  inserted,  whether  the  saine  word  is 
used,  or  a  synonymous  one,  Xen.  Cyrop.  iTrott^iv^y}  yef^^jv  £v 
U£pa-a;v  vof^ti — ov7oi  ^e  ^okHti  'oI  NOMOI  ccP^i^ecdoct-,  he  was  edu- 
cated according  to  the  Persian  laws — and  those  laws  seem  to 
begin,  &c.  Xen.  Mem.  III.  13.  xoAao-<«vTo$  nm  ta-xopojg 
AKO AOJQO'H.  r.psro  ri  x^?.£7rctivoi  T<2t  SipccTrovn^  and  some  one 
beating  his  attendant  severely,  he  enquired  the  reason  of 
abusing  the  servant. 

2.  The  article  is  inserted  before  a  word  specifying  the 
known  state  or  qualities  of  some  thing  just  mentioned  3  as, 
1>ci)Kpo6rr,s  'o  Ahvotio^^  Socrates  the  Athenian  ;  fy<w  'o  af^apr^- 
^05,  I  confessedly  a  sinner. 

It  is  not  always  supposed,  that  the  state  or  qualities  {described  ar© 


258  Appendtx^Jso,  III. — Jlrticte, 

known  to  the  person  addressed,  but  only  that  they  may  be  generallr 
known. 

3.  The  article  is  inserted  before  a  noun,  when  the  exis- 
tence of  that,  which  the  noun  denotes,  has  been  implied  in 
the  i^receding  part  of  the  sentence,  though  not  expressed  in 
form. 

iEschin.  cont.  Ctes.  §  5Q,  ovrog  nPOAOYS  roi?  TroXtfJuot^ 
Kvu/^aiov  (pvyxi  eymro^  THN  x,p{(!''v  ^^'  *v7rof^£(vui ,  he  having 
treacherously  surrendered  Nymphaium  to  the  enemy,  be- 
caiie  a  fugitive,  not  waiting  the  trial.  Here  r>jv  jcpta-i^  is  the 
trial,  implied  as  the  necessary   consequence  of  the  treache- 

ry-  .  ^ 

Ibid.  §  34.  oTecy  rt  ■^'EYAQNTAI,  otoPi^lu.  y-at  olo-u(Pyi  TrstpuvTcci 
Pisystv  0o^ii,u.syoi  TO  fAey;^^^^,  when  thej  lie,  they  seek  indefinite 
and  obscure  expressions  to  avoid  the  reproach.  TO  e>i£7;^ov 
refers  here  to  the  reproach  implied  as  the  necessary  conse- 
quence of  their  falsehood. 

The  clearness  of  Die  iriiplication  will  be  very  different  in  different  cases. 
In  many  instances  it  exists  only  in  the  mind  of  the  speaker  :  and  is  au- 
thorized, only  because  it  will  appear  just,  when  the  sentence  is  conclud- 
ed. 

II.  KAT'  EHOXHN.  For  Distinction, 
There  is  a  multitude  of  ideas  dormant  in  the  mind,  which 
are  perfectly  familiar  to  it,  though  not  constantly  the  subjects 
of  its  contemplation.  A  reference  may  be  made  to  these, 
with  the  same  certainty  that  the  relation  will  be  perceived, 
as  if  it  were  to  something  recently  mentioned,  or  actually 
present  to  the  mind. 

1.  The  article  is  used,  kut*  e^ox^iv^for  distinction,  when  it 
refers  to  some  object,  of  which  there  are  many,  but  none  is 
so  well  known  as  the  one  referred  to. 

Thucyd.  II.  69.  'H  vor«<  i-zs-eiceiro  otf^a.  y,m  *0  TroAf^es,  i.  e. 
the  celebi^ated  plagve,  and  the  Peloponnesianwar. 

"O  TVat^rrA,  f  f omer  ;  *b  (icitriXevf,  the  king  ;  gj  ^0^/5,  the  state. 

2.  The  article  is  used  tcur*  ^l^^^jv, /or  distinction,  before 
the  names  of  the  Deity  j  and  of  the  great  objects  of  nature, 
as  the  Sun,  Moon,  Sea,  Earth*  Heaven,  &c. 

Demos,  de  f  .Isis  Leg.  are  TON  ^A/ov  y.o-^wovrd  ot  TocvTx  TroiavTf^i 

UTi  THN  y^jv.     They  who  do  these  things,  regard  neither  the 
sun  nor  the  earth. 

3  To  this  head  may  be  referred  the  case  of  Monadic 
XovMs^  i.  e.  those  which  represent  persons  or  things  wbicll' 


Appendix — No.  Ill — Article.  26d 

exist  singly  ;  or  of  which,  if  there  be  several,  only  one,  from 
the  nature  of  the  case,  can  be  the  subject  of  discourse. 

Lys.  Orat.  Gr.  vol.  v.  139.  Ekko-^u^  TAS  evfiu^  EiTy^xOcy  et? 
THN  yuvoctKmtrivy  having  knocked  at  the  gate,  he  entered  the 
women's  apartment. 

Demos,  de  Cor  §  53.-  "o*  f^zvUpvrstvstqTVlN  ^ii?i>:v  etcccP^av 
f/$  TO  liaXsvTr^piov.  rifjciiq  ^*  eis  THN  £)cK}i/,<nacv  sTrofisina-ds.  The 
rulers  called  tlie  council  to  tiie  council  chamber  ;  we  went 
to  the  assembly. 

Before  we  can  know  a  noun  to  be  monadic^  we  must  know  to  what  it 
belongs,  or  with  what  it  is  connected.  A  lock,  or  latch,  considered  by 
itself,  is  not  monadic  ;  but  when  a  door  is  mentioned,  these  nouns  are 
recognized  as  monadic,  because  only  one  lock  and  one  lat(  h  is  found  up- 
on it.  When  a  noun  is  thus  determined  to  be  monadic,  there  is  no  diffi- 
culty in  admiiting  the  assumpti'  not  its  existence. 

4,JLInder  tiie  same  division  may  be  classed  those  numerous 
instances,  in  which  the  article  has  the  sense  of  the  possessive 
pronoun. 

Demos,  de  Cor.  §  59.  a^t  raj  zrurpi  Kut  rri  uijrpt  IU.OVOV 
y£y£V7Ji7-6ut^  a.>^7\A  ycxt  r>j  'rccrpth,  that  he  is  born,  not  for  his  fath- 
er or  his  mother  only,  but  for  his  country.  uP^ysa  rxv  Kc(px?^xv, 
my  head  aches. 

5.  The  article  is  frequently  prefixed  to  adjectives  of  the 
neuter  gender,  when  they  are  used  to  indicate  some  attribute 
or  quaUty  in  its  general  abstract  idea. 

Plato,  vol.  1,  p.  11.  Af7f  (Jjj  rt  (pr^q  £ivxt  TO  cV/dv  kui  TO 
uvcTtov,  Tell  me,  what  do  you  say  to  be  justice  and  injus- 
tice. 

No  ideas  are  more  familiar  to  the  mi.nd  than  these. 

In  cases  where  the  article  is  used  ^*t'  sj'>;t«v,  its  reference  is  some- 
times more  obscure  than  in  instances  of  renewed  mention  ;  yet  its  inser- 
tion is  explicable  on  the  same  principles. 

III.  Correlatives. 

Correlatives  are  words  between  which  there  exists  a  mu* 
tual  relation. 

1.  When  words  are  in  regimen,  if  the  governing  noun  has 
the  article,  the  one  governed  has  it  likewise 

Plat.  Thrast.  p.  71.  ^7  THN  o-af^cc-rm  llt^,  the  state  of  bo- 
dies. 

To  this  rule  there  are  sgme  exceptions,  but  these  are  chiefly  cases 
where  the  article  is  omitted,  according  to  the  rules  for  omission  to  be 
givpn  aftrrwards. 

2.  When  partitives  govera  a  gefiitivej  the  article  is  pre- 
ixed  to  that  genitive. 


26©  .%?enJ/x— No.    lU'-^Article, 

Ts-oXXoi  TQN  c-o^<wv,  many  of  the  wise. 

The  genitive  following  the  partitive,  denotes  the  class  to  which  the 
partitive  helongs. 

The  rule  is  sometinies  violated,  especially  in  the  case  of  avbpocTrm 
Some  partitives,  as  t;?,  oo-o?,  cannot  fr  m  their  nature  admit  the  article  ; 
and  some  only  in  particular  cases,  a^  ttokkoi^  hg,  Thcj  will  be  noticed 
hereafter. 

3.  The  article  is  used  with  /ttfv  and  Jf ,  when  things  are  op-^ 
posed  to  each  other,  so  as  to  have  a  mutual  relation. 

0  |ttev,  the  one  3  0  <Je,  the  other. 

ro  |it£v  ccvor,rov,  re  JV  (^uvikov  •  the  one  foolish,  the  other 
ma  i. 

f  n  the  same  manner,  c/c  and  Inpos, 
s  Us,  the  one  ;  0  irepo^^  the  other. 

Hypothesis.  ^ 

In  the  preceding  cases,  the  article  with  its  predicate  re- 
calls some  familiar  idea.  In  this,  it  is  used  for  no  such  pur- 
pose, but  merely  for  the  sake  of  assumption.  The  article 
used  hijpothetkally,  denotes  that  every  individual  is  intended, 
to  whom  the  predicate  can  be  applied. 

Demosth.  de  Cor.  §71.  Trovi^poi  O  (rt^5c««p«vr;$  aj<f/,  the  syco- 
phant is  always  evil.  This  is  equivalent  to  'o  ^v  (rvKo(Pxv7i,g^ 
whoever  is  a  sycophant. 

Xen.  Mem.  .3.  1.  <i  ^n  tov  ev  cr] pccrT^yrjO-avrcc  e^uv^  which  it 
become?  a  good  general  to  have,  i.  e.  every  good  general. 

Had  cru«.oe*vT«c,  in  the  first  instance,  been  recently  mentioned,  we 
should  inlier  ihat  'O  a-vncx^ctvrnq  was  the  renewed  mention  ;  but  a??  the 
context  stands,  we  clearly  perceive  (hat'O  vvkcipclvthq  must  mean  every 
person,  of  whom  o-jKop^xv^tas  can   be  predicated* 

In  the  same  manner,  the  article  is  used  with  the  plural, 
to  denote  whole  classes  of  beings. 

Plat,  de  Isid.  p.  264.  ;ifyd/t<,£vov  TOYS  ©fof^  (ppapslv,  ao-yrep 
'01  Ht;v:$  TOTS  ccvdpcoTrni^  saying  that  the  Gods  guard  men  as 
dogs  do. 

The  article,  then,  is  subservient  to  two  purposes,  re- 
newed mention^  and  hypothesis. 

Renewed  mention,  when  the  predicate  is  familiar  to  the 
mind  from  having  been  mentioned  before,  or  from  its  im- 
portance or  relations,  and  the  article  is  inserted  on  its  repe- 
tition. 

Hypothesis,  when  the  noun  to  which  the  article  is  prefix- 
ed is  intended  to  embrace  all  of  the  class  to  which  it  belongs. 

To  some  one  of  the  heads  above  mentioned,  it  is  thought 
every  insertion  of  the  article  may  be  referred. 


Appendix — No.  III. — Ai^cler       or  tl'e  ^^^ 

Omissions  of  the  Article.      ^  ^\^  -  - 

From  the  most  remarkable  msertwns\^^^ipfi& 
be  right  to  proceed  to  its  most  remarkablewitt$5^>;  ^liM  to 
show  that  they  too  may  be  accounted  for  on  the  principles 
laid  down.  It  has  been  shown,  that  in  all  cases  the  parti* 
eiple  of  existence,  m^  ova-ot,^  ov,  is  understood  between  the  arti- 
cle and  its  predicate  :  whence  it  will  follow,  that  the  exis- 
t€7ice  of  the  person  or  thing,  to  which  the  article  is  prefixed^ 
is  alwa}?s  supposed. 

1.  In  propositions  which  merely  affirm  or  deny  existence^ 
the  name  of  the  person  or  thing  of  which  existence  is  affirm- 
ed or  denied   is  without  the  article. 

iTioci  fA,£v  EIPHNH,  there  shall  be  peace. 
Psalm    liii.  1.     ax,  eel t  e£02,  there  is  no  God.* 
In  such  instances,  to  insert  the  article  would  be   to  assume  the  exis- 
tence before  ii  is  asserted^  and  thus  render  the  proposition  useless. 

2.  The  article  is  omitted  before  nouns  preceded  by  parti- 
ciples and  verbs  substantive,  and  those  of  naming. 

Demosth.  de  Cor.  §  23.  AITIOS  EIMI  tov  ^oXsm^ov,  I  am 
guilty  of  the  war. 

iEsch.  cont.  Ctes.  §  62.  nPOAOTAS  ra;v  'E>^^y,ym  n^i  (iota- 
rotpxoti  ey-'CcXsire,  he  called  the  leaders  of  the  Boeotians  the  be- 
trayers of  Greece. 

Ibid.  43.  0  rc^.ft»)v  ev  rcct^  tTritrJcXut^  ypot0iiy  cri  AESHOTHS 
E2T1N  TA»v  c&v&oco^uv,  who  dared  to  write  in  his  letters  that  he 
is  king  of  men. 

In  these  inptnnces>  the  words  in  capitals  would  have  the  article  kut* 
«^o;:^«v,  were  it  not  forbidden  by  the  verb,  whicli  is  used  to  indicate,  as 
hitherto  unknown,  the  very  truth,  which  tlie  presence  of  the!  article 
would  imply  as  known  or  supposed  already.  Hence,  in  the  passaa^e 
from  ^schines,  had  the  Persian  monarch  written  oTt  'O  J^ia-Trcrnc  f<r7/, 
the  sense  would  have  been,  that  he  was  the  person  recognized,  (for  here 
hypothesis  has  no  place,)  to  be  the  lord  of  mankind.  But  he  knew  that 
the  Greeks  had  not  thus  recognized  him. 

3.  After  verbs  of  appointing,  creating,  choosing,  &c.  the 
noun  expressive  of  the  appointment,  choice,  ^c.  is  without 
the  article. 

Demosth.  de  Cor.  §  59.  'HFEMON  kcai  KYriOS  'Hpege 
<I)/A/zr?D-fl$  u-zTcivraiv^  Philip  was  chosen  ruler  and  governor  of 
all. 


*  This  is  a  different  case  from  EN  20I  iyli  o  e^o?,  for  here  the  existence 
&f  God  is  assumed. 


2G£  Appendix — No.  III. — Article, 

Isai.  V.  20,  oi  TieEiNTES  ro  <r/-or«4  <I)i2E,  Koti  to  (^o'sSKOTOS, 
who  put  darkness  tor  ii^^ht,  and  light  for  darkness. 

The  article  could  not  be  prefixed  to  any  of  these  uouns,  bec:«upe  the 
existence  ot  the  appointment^  Sec.  i?  not  of  a  nature  to  be  reco^nized^ 
being  now  first  declared  i  and  hypothesis,  as  before,  being  oui  ol  the 
quesli:>n, 

4.  Nouns  in  apposition^  not  explanatory  of  the  essence  of 
the  preceding  noun,  but  of  the  end  to  which  the  person  or 
thing  intended  is  affirmed  to  be  subservient,  are  without 
the  article. 

Demos,  de  Cor.  §  15.  rcf)  is-po^orri  STMBOTAa^  ;^f>j-a:{,  he 
uses  the  traitor  as  a  counsellor. 

In  such  ca^^.s.  iivctt  or  av  may  be  supplied. 

5.  in  exclusive  propositions^  where  it  is  intended  to  ex-j 
elude  universally  every  individual,  the  artirle  is  omitted 

Demosth.  de  Cor.  §  28.  a  NATS,  a  TEIaH  tjjs  -srcXia^  xfj^-j 
t>;jm.£V775,  the  city  possessing  no  ships,  no  walls. 

If  Ihi'  article  had  been  inserted,  it  would  hnve  implied  that  the  exiai 
fence  of  ships  and  walls  was  either  recogniz>^d  or  c''>n  iiiio;rdlly  admit- 
ted ;  both  oi  vvhich  are  inconsistent  with  the  nature  of   (  he  proposi'ion. 

6.  When  nouns  are  in  regimen,  if  the  second  cannot  take 
the  article,  the  first  loses  it. 

Herod,  lib.  iv.  p.  153,  AEPMA  oiv&PaTrn  Kott  -z^-a^v  koh  Xu,uooVt 
the  skin  of  man  is  fat  and  shining. 

Here  cTf/i/u*  would  have  the  article,  but  it  is  omitted  because  ctvBpuiTrit 
•annot  taice  it  consistently  v/ith  (he  serjse  intended  to  be  conveyftfl. 

7.  The   same  principle  of  correlation  will  explain  wly, 
when  the  noun  governing  is  indefinite^  the  noun  governed 
without  the  article. "* 

Plato,  vol.  V.  p.  164.     ^i^ocG-KccXov  MOYSIKHS,  a  teacher 
music. 

Plut.  page  99.  -^^TXHS  yccp  ooyoivov  ro  o*<5yju,a,  for  the  body 
is  an  instrument  of  the  mind. 

In  these  instances,  /ucus-iKyt;  and  'r^X,*^?  would  have  the  article,  were  it 
not  for  the  indefinite  word  preceding. 

Insertions  and  Omissions  combined. 

Having  considered  the  principal  insertions  and  the  princi- 


I 


*  Many  examples  will  occur,  which  seem  repugnant  to  tliis  canoq 
The  principle,  however,  requires  that  the  iiovernin^  noun  should  he  ua 
merely  without  i\\e  article,  but  also  indefinite  in  sense  :  for  it  mai 
though  definite,  have  lost  the  article  in  conformity  vvith  some  rule,  v.hic1 
yet  may  not  require  that  the  o^overned  noun  sliou'd  lone  it  also.  Sff 
Thucyd.  lib.  i.$  2.  cT/;*  y^tr  upirnv  TH2,  where  tt^fT>?v  loses  its  article  fi 
accouat  of  the  preceding  preposition. 


Appendix—'No.  III.— .^Wick.  263 

pal  omissions,  it  will  be  proper  to  notice  one  or  two  cases  of 
insertion  and  omission  combined, 

1.  The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  generally  found  W^/i  the 
article,  and  the  predicate  without  it. 

Arist.  Anal.  Pas.  II  3.  ayxpeo-li  TO  t^i^e^ov  SXHMA, 
ah  TO  o-^iif^ec  ElliriEAON.  Surlace  is  not  figure,  nor  tigure 
surface. 

Plut.  de  Aud.  Poet,  p  11.  ZnrrAOIAN  i^evsivui  (p&eyyof^t- 
v«v  THN  TFoiYio-iv,  nolHSlN  h  (rr/ao-ccv  THn  t^caypctcpiu^,  that  Poet- 
ry IS  painting  which  speaks  ;  and  painting,  Poetry  which  is 
silent. 

John  i.    1.     Kui  Sgo^  f}v  'o  Aoyog,  and  the  word  was  God. 

The  chief  extepiion  to  this  ruie  i«  in  Ihf  case  oC  reciprocating  or  con- 
vertible  propositions,  i.  e.  those  in  nhich  either  word  may  be  the  subject. 
In  such  propoeitioDS,  both  the  nouns  will  have  the  article,  or  else  neith- 
er. 

Plut.  de  Plac.  Philo?,  1, 3.  «<77/  S'i  'O  eiog  'O  vey?,  God  is  the  mind,  or, 
the  mind  is  God. 

Pldto,  vol.  xi.  p.  38.  TO  ax^eA/ysv  iciKiv  'a/utv  uveu  TO  kxXov^  it  inter- 
ests us,  that  utility  should  be  the  great  ^ood,  or,  that  the  great  good 
should  be  utility. 

Arist.  de   hiter.  c.  6       KATA*A212€(77/  AUC^Al^l  tivg!: ka^a  ttvo^. 

2.*  When  two  or  more  attributives,!  joined  by  a  copula- 
tive, are  assumed  of  the  same  person  or  thing,  before  the 
first  attributive  the  article  is  inserted ;  before  the  others  it  is 
omitted, 

Plut.  Vit  Cic.  p.  68  'Veoo-Kioi  'O  vtos  KAI  xAjj/jflvo^i^g  r» 
n^yjjv^rcs  xyocvocxTBt^  Koscius,  the  son  and  heir  of  the  deceased, 
was  grieved. 

Demosth.  de  Coro.  §  27.  n^  'O  t^  xoAf<  ^eyam,  KAI  yoct' 
(pm  KAI  zirou.rroo'i  KAI  toivrcH  ^nq,  he  who  says,  and  writes,  and 
acts,  atid  gives  himself  to  the  State. 

Ibid.  §  61.  *0  crvfjL^ii\o<i  KAI  (lyirap  eyoe^  I,  the  adviser  and 
orator. 

Philo,  309.  'O  Kupiog  KAI  Qso?  ivepyerr,q  eo-]<v,the  Lord  God 
is  a  benefictor. 

The  article  'O,  which  precedes  the  first  attributive,  ia  a  representa- 
tive   of  the  person  to  whom  all  the  attributives  belong. 

♦  This  is  the  celebrated  Rule  of  Granville  Sharp,  Esq. 

t  By  attributives  are  meant  adjectives^  participles,  and  nouns  8ie:nifi- 
cant  o(  character^  relation,  or  dignity  ;  such  nouns  are  often  intf^rrhang- 
ed  nith  adjfc-ives  or  |)articipies  ;  as,  'O  (6c(jK^(m  for  'O  iStXiVTn;^  and  are 
therefore  similar  to  them  in  nature. 


264    '  Appendix — No.  III. — Article, 

Were  it  inserted  before  the  remainder,  the  persons  represented  by 
the  article  thus  inserted,  must  be  the  same  or  difi'erent.  Dilferenl  (hey 
cannot  be  by  the  supposition.  If  Uie  persons  denoted  by  the  article  be 
the  same,  we  have  the  absurdity  of  rouphng  a  being  to  himself. 

When  the  article  is  repeated  before  the  several  words,  they  denote 
difFerf'nt  persons. 

D' mopth.  de  Cor.  ^  56.  *0  crv/uCaKcg  kai  'O  c-i^x-opa^vrnc — S'tetp^^icrt^  the 
adviber  and  the  sycophant  differ. 

Exceptions, 
Three  cla«^ses  of  nouns  are  exctpiionsto  this  rule. 

1.  Names  of  substances,  considtrcd  as  substances ;  as,  'O  aiQo^  KAI 
^pi^o-of,  stone  and  gold. 

2.  Proper  names ;  as,  TON  Ahi^ctvS'pciV^  KAI  $;a/ttcv,  Alexander  and 
Philip. 

3  Abstract  nouns  ;  as,  'H  ctTruptuv  KAI  aTrettSva-ictVy  want  of  experi- 
ence and  want  of  instruction. 

The  first  sort  of  nouns  are  names  of  substances  considered  as  sub- 
stances;  for  names  of  s»ibstances  may  be  considered  otherwise;  and 
the  distinction  is  important.  They  are  otherwise  considered  when  the 
name  supposes  the  substance  and  expresses  some  attribute  :  so  Ctoz^ 
pTCD/i,  'nysfAuv,  (Toi/Acs,  are  indeed  so  far  names  of  substances,  that  they 
presuppose  a  substance  ;  but  their  immediate  use  is  to  mark  some  at* 
tribute  of  the  substance  ctvbfia>7rcg^  which  is  always  understood.  1  hey 
are  thus  adjectives  of  invariable  aitplication^  being  constantly?  used  of  av- 
Bpa/TTos  J  whereas  common  adjectives,  as  /usxat?,  etyA^og,  &c.  are  applica- 
ble to  substances  of  various  kinds.  It  was,  then,  to  be  expected  of 
attributive  substantives,  that  any  number  of  them  coupled  together 
might  be  predicated  of  an  individual  represented  by  a  pronoun.  But 
suppose  that,  instead  of  these  attributive  nouns,  we  introduce  others, 
which  express  mere  substances  ;  the  consequence  will  follow,  (if  we 
attempt  to  apply  the  rule.)  that  substances  in  tlieir  nature  distinct  and 
incompatible  will  be  predicated  of  the  same  individual,  e.  g.  a/6oc  and 
^uo-os  will  both  be  assumed  of  'O^  which  is  plainly  absurd. 

We  must  be  cautious,  however,  in  deternuning  that  any  noun  is  ex- 
pressive merely  of  substance.  The  word  Av«/),  man,  commonly  denotes 
merely  a  being  ;  yet  in  the  passage, 

Avepei  efrle,  0tXot,  (A.V7](rcc(r&e  JV  6iiP(^oq  u^y-rj^y 

Be  men.  my  friends,  and  recal  y  ur  martial  spirit,  II.  Z,  112,  avs/Jss  is 
evidently  used  not  as  significant  merely  of  substance^  but  of  characteVy 
and  is  therefore  in  this  case  an  attributive. 

The  reason  why  proper  names  are  excepted,  is  evident  at  once ;  for  it 
is  impossible  that  John  and  Thomas^  the  names  of  two  distinct  persons, 
should  be  predicated  of  an  indivicbial.  It  is  obvious,  therefore,  that  in 
the  phrase  tov  AxfJ^vcfgov  xa/  <btKi7r7rov,  n-ov  is  the  article  of  AAffav^T^cv  only^ 
and  not  of  both  names  ;  as  would  happen,  were  the  principle  of  the  rule 
intended  to  apply. 

Nouns,  which  are  the  names  of  abstract  ideas,  are  also  excluded,  and 
from  a  cause  not  wholly  dissimilar ;  for.  as  Locke  has  well  observed, 
"  Every  distinct  abstract  idea  is  a  distinct  essence  ;  and  the  names  that 


Appendix — No.  III. — Article.  266 

stand  for  such  distinct  ideas,  are  the  names  of  things  essentially  differ- 
ent."* It  would,  therejore,  be  as  contradictory  to  assume  that  any 
quality  represented  by  'H  were  at  once  ctTrufict  and  ATra^SiUirtA^  as  that 
the  same  person  were  both  Alexander  and  Fndip  :  whence  it  is  imme- 
diately evident,  thai  such  an  assumption  could  not  be  intended.  Under 
this  head  we  may  class  verbs  in  the  infinitive  mood,  which  differ  not  ia 
their  nature  from  the  names  of  thecorrespondingj  abstract  ideas.  Thus 
we  read  in  Plato,  vol.  xi.  p.  13,  ^Tfi/  i^ih  ti  KAI  <tiui(rcii :  m  the  n^\t 
pai'e  we  have  TH/ o^s^t*  KAI  (tKoif.  Tiie  two  ca^es  evidently  require 
the  same  explanation.  Infinitive  moods  so  coupled  together,  are  ex- 
tremely common. 

The  rule  likewise  is  true  conversely. 

If  two  or  more  attributives^  coupled  by  Kott^  have  the  arti- 
cle prefixed  to  the  first,  and  not  to  the  otliers,  they  all  belong 
to  the   same  subject. 

This  is  plainly  the  case  in  all  the  instances  cited  above.  The  only 
exception,  in  addition  to  those  mentioned  before,|  is  with  regard  to 
plurals. 

A  single  individual  may  stand  in  various  relations,  and  act  in  divers 
capacities  ;  and,  consequently,  if  two  such  relations  or  characters  be 
connected  by  a  copulative,  and  the  first  be  preceded  by  a  pronoun,  the 
reuder  will  reasonably  understand  them  both  of  the  j^erson  repre- 
sented by  that  pronoun  ;  because  such  is  the  general  Ui^age,  and  the 
compliance  with  it  will  not  involve  any  contradiction.  But  this  does 
not  happen  in  the  same  degree  with  respect  to  plurals.  Though  9ne 
individual  may  act,  and  frequently  does  act,  m  several  capacities,  it  ia 
not  likely  that  a  multitude  of  individuals  should  all  of  them  act  in  the 
same  several  rapacities  :  and,  by  the  extreme  improbability  that  ttiey 
should  be  represented  as  so  acting,  we  may  be  forbidden  to  undersiand 
the  second  plural  attributive  of  the  persons  designed  in  the  article  pre- 
fixed to  the  first,  however  the  usage  in  the  singular  might  seem  to  coun- 
tenance the  construction.  The  meaning  may  be  illustrated  by  a  famil- 
iar example.  An  individual  is  at  once  a  member  of  parliament  and  the 
colonel  of  a  regiment.  Speaking  of  such  an  one,  and  haviog  occasion 
to  udvert  to  these  two  characters,  we  mi^ht  say  in  Greek,  'O  f^nKiUTtii^ 
KAI  Ko'^ttyQQ ;  and  if,  by  such  a  phrase,  we  meant  to  indicate  two  differ- 
ent persons,  we  should  speak  in  a  manner  not  authorized  by  the  Greek 
idiom.  But  suppose  we  should  say,  speaking  of  several  persons,  'OI 
/^uKrjTAt  KAI  K^-)(jty^A  ;  the  inference  would  be,  either  that  the  persons 
situn^  in  parliament,  and  those  commanding  regiments,  are  usualh  (he 
same  ;  or  else,  knowing  them  not  to  be  the  same,  we  should  understand 
the  words  as  expressive  of  two  distinct  classes  :  and  wha<  is  the  alter- 
native ?  If  they  be  the  same,  the  rule  is  strictly  observed  ;  if  notori- 
ously they  are  distinct,  the  rule,  indeed,  is  viol  ted,  but  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  no  ambiguity  can  ensue  ;  for  thou2:h  *Ol  -K^yjiyot  would  nave 
been  more  accurate,  our  previous  knowledge  on  the  subject  prevents 
the  possibility  of  mistake. 


♦  Essay,  book  iii.  chap.  iii.  k  14. 
i  Page  264. 

24 


266  Jippendix—^0.  WL-^Artich, 


PROPER  NAMES  AND  ABSTRACT  NOUNS, 

The  rules  which  have  been  given  for  the  Article,  do  not 
always  apply  to  proper  names  and  abstract  nouns. 

Proper   Names. 

The  practice  of  Greek  writers,  in  the  use  of  proper 
names,  accords  generally  with  the  rules  already  laid  down. 

When  proper  names  first  occur,  they  are  commonly  with- 
out the  article,  unless  its  insertion  is  authorized  by  the  noto- 
riety of  the  person  intended.  Upon  ren^^ wed  mention,  the 
article  is  usually  inserted.  This  is  not,  however,  indispen- 
sable ;  for  when  the  name  is  repeated,  it  will  be  naturally 
referred  to  the  person  already  mentioned,  though  the  article 
should  not  be  inserted  to  mark  that  reference. 

Some  appellatives,  fnim  frequent  use,  partake  of  the  nature  of  proper 
names,  and  follow  the  same  rules  :  of  this  kind  is  X^/^ro?,  and  some- 
times ygjtr^Afus,  &;c. 

Abstract  Nouns. 

The  article  is  inserted  before  abstract  nouns, 

1.  When  the  noun  is  used  in  its  most  abstract  sense. 
Plato,  vol.  iv.  p.    68        'H  x^ikiu  x-xt    'H    oacoXxo-toc    fisyicrov 

T6>»  evT6/ir  KocKovBGrrt,  Injustice  and  intemperance  are  the  great- 
est of  evils. 

Ibid.  70.  locrpiKi}  ytynrai  Tsronptecs  ^H  hrcri^  Justice  is  the 
remedy  of  wickedness. 

There  is  a  close  analogy  between  this  use  of  the  article,  and  the  hy- 
pothetical use  already  mentioned  ;  as,  'O/  etS'itLoi  will  signify,  all  the  un- 
iust  ;  so  'H  !L6iKi!L  will  mean,  every  act  of  which  injustice  can  be  assum- 
ed. 

2.  When  the  attribute  is  personified. 

Aristoph.  Av.  1536.  ko&i  THN  (ioto-iXuav  <rot  yv^MiC  ep(^e» 
h^ifi^  And  I  give  you  the  kingdom  as  a  wife. 

Xen.  Mem.  II.  1.  'H  Kax/cc  jTroAflfc^feo-*^  e/wfv,  And  Malice, 
interrupting,  said. 

The  article  is  not  always  inserted,  as  in  the  case  of  proper  names,  to 
ivbichthis  is  analogous. 

3.  Abstract  nouns,  according  to  the  rule  already  given, 
take  the  article  when  it  has  the  sense  of  a  possessive  pro- 
noun. 


Appendix — No   III. — Article.  267 

Aris.  Ran.  45.  ^Aa'  ev)^  otoq^  t'  etf^^  uTrotro^tjrxt  TON  yeXav, 
But  I  cannot  restrain  my  laughter. 

4.  These  nouns  take  the  article  when  they  have  reference 
of  any  kind. 

Plato,  vol.  iv.  31.  eocf  M-^  ^rpon^ri  Trept  rtirm  THN  uMhiotv^ 
Unless  he  foresee  the  truth  concerning  these  things. 

Exceptions. 

It  was  not  to  be  expected,  that  the  rules  now  given  for  the 
article  should  be  entirely  without  exceptions.  The  first  are 
in  the  case  of 

PREPOSITIONS. 

Words  which  would  take  the  article  by  the  preceding 
rules,  often  lose  it  after  prepositions. 

Plato,  Kctrct  nOAIN,  the  city  (Athens.)  ycur'  AFOPAN,  the 
Forum. 

Arist.  His.  II.  2.  u  e^tjputvero  Ctto  kyna,  which  were  with- 
ered by  tiie  dog-star  -srXtja-iov  0AAA22H2,  near  the  sea. 
TTpoi    HAIOT  i'vvroq,  at  sunset. 

Hence  it  is  eviilent,  that  the  absence  of  tlie  article,  in  such  instances, 
affords  no  presumption,  that  the  nouns  are  used  indefinitely.  Their 
definiteness  or  indefiniteuess.  when  they  are  used  after  prepceitions, 
must  be  determined  on  other  grounds. 

ENUMERATION. 

When  several  nouns  are  coupled  together  by  conjunctions, 
or,  what  is  equivalent,  the  conjunctions  are  omitted  by  the 
figure  Asyndeton,  they  frequently  all  drop  the  article,  though 
each  taken  singly  would  require  it. 

-^sch.  cont.  Ctes.  §  38.  Kect  XEIPI  xut  noAI  kui  OTNH* 
wtt  TTccTt  otq  ^woti^ut^  with  my  hand  and  foot  and  voice  and  all 
that  I  can. 

This  usage  is  not  uncommon,  even  where  there  are  only 
two. 

Plato,  ii.  143.     AN©pnnoiS  kxi  ©HPIOIS,  men  and  beasts. 

ORDINALS. 

It  might  be  supposed  that  ordinals  would  uniformly  be 
preceded  by  the  article,  inasmuch  as  the  nouns  with  which 
they  are  joined  do,  from  this  circumstance,  become  monadic. 
In  a  series  of  things  of  the  same  class,  only  one  can  hejirst^ 
one  second,  one  thirds  &c. 


^68  Appendix— ^0.  \\\.— Article. 

Ordinals,  however,  for  the  raost  part,  whether  the  nouns 
with  which  they  agree  be  expressed  or  understood,  are 
without  the  article. 

iEsch.  contra  Ctes.  §  29.  ''ebAOMHN  h  iif^ipect  rijg  evyw 
r^fl5,  TfTfAfi/r^jjcyias,  his  daughter  having  died  the  seventh  day. 

Superlatives  have  so  close  an  affinity  to  the  ordinals  sig- 
nifying^ rst  and  last,  that  they  also  sometimes  reject  the  ar- 
ticle. 

Dyon.  Hal.  vol.  i.  p.  6.  rtg  ctvrm  etpxw  re  MEFISTHN  zk- 
T7}c-aToy  Some  one  of  them  gained  the  highest  command. 

Construction  of  the  Article   with   IIAS,  'OAOS,   'OTTOS  &c. 
DAS. 

1.  When  HAS  or  "ahas  in  the  singular  is  used  to  denote 
the  whole  of  any  thing,  the  article  is  prefixed  to  DAS,  or  to 
(he  substantive  with  which  it  agrees.  £/$  Trxtrctv  THN  7r«A/v,  to 
the  whole  city,  uttuv  TO  o-rpccrevi^eA)  the  whole  army.  'H 
-n-onrei  i^nirici^  the  whole  power. 

Demosth.  de  Cor.  §  59.  -sruvru  TON  xiavcc  hsreTeM}ce,  Spent 
his  whole  life. 

2.  When  riAS  or  'AIIAS  in  the  singular  is  used  to  denote 
every  individual  of  the  class,  the  article  is  omitted. 

Xenop.  Cyrop.  page  208.  m  r^ot^tret,  kiv^wov  r,x&oy,  they  en- 
countered every  danger. 

Plut.  page  84.  5rcfc(rj;$  TBxn^  »«'  ^v^eifJLtaq  uy0pa7nv7;(;,  every 
art  and  power  of  man. 

3.  When  HAS  and  'AHAS  are  used  in  the  plural,  the  ar- 
ticle is  inserted  where  there  is  reference  ;  where  there  is  not, 
the  usage  is  various. 

'OAOX. 

The  construction  ofoXo^  resembles  that  of  7r«$.  When  the 
substantive  is  without  reference,  it  wants  the  article  ;  and 
the  contrary,  gytctvrov  oA#y,  a  whole  year.  cAjjv  THN  Ts-oxtv,  the 
whole  city. 

When  oAa$  is  used  in  the  sense  of  wholly  or  altogether^  the 
article  is  omitted. 

Demosth.      7i:>^(r^ct.  'OAON  iTTi  VI  ^tet$rj)Cii. 

'OYTOS. 

A  noun,  when  joined  with  the  pronoun  ovTdgf   always   has 


Appendix^^o.  WL—Artich,  26^ 

the  article  prefixed,     ton   Tron^  mrof,  this  labor  5  uvrt)   *H 
f^etx,*],  this  battle  ;  Teivr»  TA  enpicc,  these  beasts. 

Tkis  rule  is  not  observed  by  Horoer. 

Proper  names  usually  take  the  article,  but  not  always. 

'OAE. 

What  has  been  said  of  'oTTOS,  will,  for  the  most  part,  ap- 
ply to  oh, 

T9i<r^e  THS  ij/t«P«?,  this  day.      TON  vof^^v  rov^e,  this  law. 

There  are,  however,  instances  in  which  tht  article  is  omitted,  when 
the  noun  precedes,  especially  if  it  be  a  proper  name. 

EKEINOS. 

Nouns  joined  with  this  word,  have  the  article  in  both 
numbers,  like  owro?.  eicf<v»?5  THS  rjutepeiq,  that  day.  eK£{vot(; 
TOIS  x^ovotq^  at  those  times. 

When  this  word  is  associated  with  a  proper  name,  the  article  is 
sometimes  omitted,  at  least  when  the  proper  name  precedes. 

On  the  Position  of  the  Article^  in  the  Concord  of  Svbstantives 
and  Adjectives, 

1.  When  an  adjective  is  preceded  by  the  article,  a  sub- 
stantive is  understood,  which,  together  with  the  adjective, 
is  the  predicate  to  the  article. 

'^O  hicotio^  is  equivalent  to  'o  hxMoietvtip  ;  and  the  article  *0 
belongs  not  merely  to  «»>:p,  but  to  «vj?tf  joined  with  ^Kocto^. 

2.  Whenever  the  article  belongs  to  the  adjective  and  sub- 
stantive taken  together^  so  that  the  assumption  is  of  both,  the 
article  precedes  the  adjective. 

Xenoph.  e^ii>,£VTccvTo  vept  TQN  ENESTHKOTflN  ^pttyftccroffj 
They  consulted  concerning  present  affairs. 

Isoc.  Ts-ept  THS  KoiNHS  craiT»oiy,i  oMvonvreq,  thinking  alike 
concerning  the  public  safety,  'o  fft^j  ^octtjp  r6$)»iKe,  my  father 
is  dead. 

3.  When  the  article  belongs  to  the  noun  only,  and  not  to 
the  noun  and  adjective  together,  it  precedes  the  noun. 

Isoc.  Koivfji  THS  7a-xrpih<i  ovTy.i,  the  country  being  com- 
mon. 

Xen.  THN  ^avtjv  Trooc&repoiv  -ss-oiowTccf y  they  make  the  voice 
milder. 

Ibid.  £»fAft'C-5  0uveoxv  ^ePeiv  THN  -v/^jji^oy,  he  commanded  tO 
make  the  vote  known.  5^5  'O  Trccmp,  (supp,  fo-ri,)  mine  is 
the  father. 


270  Appendix — No.  III. — Article. 

It  win  be  remarked,  from  a  comparison  of  the  two  last  rules,  that  the 
position  of  the  article  determines  the  sense,  c^o?  'O^atTw/s  is  very  differ- 
ent from  *0  if^Q^  ^ctTnf).  In  the  latter,  both  the  adjective  and  substan- 
tive are  the  predicate  of  the  artii  le>  and  they  require  some  verb  to  make 
a  proposition.  But  i/ao;  'O  Tretntp  contains  a  proposition,  «3"t/  being  un- 
derstood. 

4.  When  the  substantive  and  adjective  have  both  the  arti- 
cle, the  substantive  with  its  article  is  invariably  placed  first. 

Lys.  p.  139    eMatv  €7ct  rj;y  oiKtuv  rjjv  ef^tjv^  going  to  my  house. 

Xen.  ro/$  K),Atfl  $  roig  otp^xiois  xp^^'^'^^i  to  use  the  ancient  laws. 

Sometimes  the  substantive  drops  its  article. 

The  most  simple  and  natural  use  of  the  adjective,  is  vrithout  the  re- 
petition of  the  article  ;  and  this  is  by;  far  the  most  common  in  all  Greek 
writers.  When  the  article  is  repeated  before  the  adjective,  one 
of  these  two  things  may  generally  be  observed ;  viz.  either  that 
the  substantive  might  of  itself  be  reasonably  presumed  to  signify 
the  particular  thing  intended,  though,  by  the  addition  of  the  adjective, 
the  substantire  is  absolutely  restricted  to  the  object  meant;  in  which 
case  the  addition  is  a  kind  of  after  thought :  or  else,  that  the  adjective 
has  been  purposely  reserved  by  the  speaker  to  mark  an  emphasis  or  op- 
pusifion.  Of  fhe  first  kind,  an  instance  may  be  found  in  Eph.  i.  13, 
iv  a  KAi  7ns-<Tiva-AYri?  i(r^!>:tyt(rhhrt  TCU  7rviu/tA.ATt  ms  tTetyyihtctc  Tfli  ayiu>. 
In  whom  believing,  ye  have  been  sealed  with  the  Spirit  of  promise— Me 
Holy  One.  Here  t»  TrviufA^Ti  could  not  be  easily  misunderstood  ;  yet 
the  addition  of  t»  ayttA  absolutely  limits  the  sense.  Of  the  second  kind, 
an  mstance  may  be  taken  from  Demosth.  (de  Cor.  *  27,)  who,  exulting 
in  having  saved  the  Chersonef^us  and  Byzantium,  exclaims  emphatically, 
*' These  successes '«  ^/»o«t^/>2<?"<?  H  EMH  cT/sTr/ja^ATo ,  my  counsel,  mine^ 
has  produced." 

An  instance  where  the  article  is  repeated  before  the  adjective,  for 
the  sake  of  marking  opposition,  may  be  found,  John  x.  11,  «>»  "A^^  • 
'Troifxm  'O  KAA02,  1  am  the  good  Shepherd  ;  as  opposed  to  •/M/<r6«- 
"Ttf^f  the  hireling*  v.  12. 


'■'-■^^^^^ 


.0  a 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


comiEfiast? 


^ 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


L^    "^V 


<ort*'fMi%-;' 


